You are on page 1of 434

Users Guide

Home Design Studio Pro

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide


2010 Encore Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Punch! Software, the Punch! Software logo, NexGen, Punch! Home Design Studio, PlantFinder, PhotoView, ClearView, Cabinet Assistant, Roofing Assistant, Decorator Palette, IntelliDeck, Site Planner, Material Importer, QuickStart, LogiCursor, AutoFraming, Framing Editor, Fireplace Assistant, Precision Lighting Planner, Global Sun Positioning, Plant Importer, RealModel, Object Organizer, and 3D Custom Workshop Pro are trademarks or registered trademarks of Encore Software, Inc. ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial Inc. Portions of this software are copyrighted by Spatial Inc. and Open Design Alliance. Special credit to Jolyon Yates for icon tool design. Google SketchUp is a registered trademark of Google, Inc. Mac OS, Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. All other marks are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. RealModel technology is protected by U.S. Patent No. 6,404,424. This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under the terms of the license agreement contained herein. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document can be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Encore Software, Inc. The information in this document is furnished for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Encore Software, Inc. assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. First edition, 2010 Printed in the United States of America

Table of Contents
Part 1: Nuts & Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . Finding Answers . . . . . . Before You Draw . . . . . Viewing in 2D & 3D . . . Adding 3D Features . . Elevation Editor View . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. . . . . 3 5 11 15 23 33 47

Part 2: Menu Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51


File Menu . . . . . Edit Menu . . . . . Design Menu . . . 2D Menu . . . . . . 3D Menu . . . . . . Window Menu . . Help Menu . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 53 . 63 . 71 . 81 . 89 107 109

Part 3: From the Ground Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 119 125 147 165 173 183 191 199 215 223

113

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Contents

Part 4: Design & Drawing PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Fireplace Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

229

Part 5: Enhancement & Customization PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . .


PhotoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

267

Part 6: 3D Custom Workshop Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Before You Draw . . . . . . . . Drawing 2D Entities . . . . . Drawing 3D Entities . . . . . Convert 2D Objects to 3D Editing 2D and 3D Shapes Controlling Views . . . . . . . . ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 281 299 323 349 371 395

279

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

409

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

II

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Part 1

NUTS & BOLTS

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro uses several concepts throughout the home design program and various PowerTools. This section contains basic concepts, from saving and printing files to viewing angles, plan tab controls, and so on.

Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3: Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7:

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Finding Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Viewing in 2D & 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Adding 3D Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Elevation Editor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

CHAPTER 1

Welcome
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro is a professional-level home design system developed for anyone who needs fast, accurate home drawings and wants the flexibility to view and edit their plan in 3D. Uses for Punch! Home Design Studio Pro include: Architectural drawings Presentations Deck design 3D visualization DXF/DWG Import and Export Electrical plans Framing customization Interior design Landscaping

Its simple to get started designing the home of your dreams. Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this manual, so youll know where to quickly find the answers. Be sure to see A Quick Tour, which begins on page 5, for an overview of the screen layout and a quick tour of the program. For a basic overview of tools and techniques that youll use throughout the design process, see Menu Bars, which begins on page 51. The most important thing to do before beginning work with Punch! Home Design Studio Pro will be setting your display to Millions of colors. To do this, choose Apple > System Preferences > Displays.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3

Chapter

Welcome

Contents of Package
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro comes with everything you need to install and use the software. The package includes the following items: Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Installation DVD Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide HomePlan Idea Book

Registering Punch! Home Design Studio Pro


The first time you launch Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you will have the opportunity to register your software.

Enter your Name and Organization in the appropriate fields in the Product Registration dialog.

System Requirements
In order to run Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, your system should include the following: Mac OS: 10.5.8 or higher CPU: Intel Core Solo or higher Memory: 256MB Video Memory: 32MB Hard Drive Space: 2.86GB Optical Drive: DVD-ROM Display: Millions of colors Display Resolution: 1024x768 Peripherals: mouse Internet access required to utilize some features Multi-touch features require OS 10.6 or higher

N O T E : Your Serial Number is automatically generated. 2 Enter your registration Number and click 3 Click OK. N O T E : If your registration is unsuccessful, try entering the code again. If you continue to experience difficulties registering, contact Punch! Software. N O T E : If you have not registered Punch! Home Design Studio Pro after seven (7) days, Printing, Saving, and Exporting will be disabled until registration is completed.
Register. A dialog is appears notifying you if your registration is successful.

Installing Punch! Home Design Studio Pro


To install Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you must run the included installer application. You cant install or reconfigure Punch! Home Design Studio Pro by copying files directly from the distribution DVD to your hard drive.

To install Punch! Home Design Studio Pro


1
Insert the Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Installation DVD into your DVD-ROM drive. Applications folder.

2 Drag the Home Design Studio Pro icon to your

4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 2

A Quick Tour
To get the most benefit from Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you should take a minute to become familiar with the layout of the Punch! drawing space, plan tabs, and toolbars. In most cases, detailed information on standard Mac concepts or on specific menu items is not provided here. For information on standard Mac concepts, such as the mouse, the shortcut menu, the window border, the maximize button, dialog controls, and so on, refer to Mac online Help.
view buttons

menu bar plan tabs toolset pop-up menus working floor button inspector elevation field plan toolbar

Training Center tips & tricks history content properties

design window

preview window

status bar

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 5

Chapter

2 A Quick Tour

Menu Bar
The Menu Bar displays the name of the application and allows you to choose menu items using either the mouse or the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name; when the menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with an arrow to the right display a submenu, when you place the pointer over one of them. To use the keyboard, press the Command key and enter the underlined letter in the menu name, then enter the underlined letter in the menu items name. If there is a submenu, you must enter another letter. You can also use the arrow keys to move through menu items and press the Enter key to select one. The Esc key backs out of the menu items one level at a time. There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available shortcut keys to the right of the items name. You can use the techniques for choosing menu items in combination.

Design Window
The design window is where the application is contained. The name of the current drawing file appears at the top center, in the title bar. You can close, minimize, and maximize the design window using the buttons in the top left corner. You can also minimize the design window by double-clicking the title bar.

After you choose the tool you want, the toolset collapses out of sight and the active tool appears in the toolbar, so you have an unobstructed view of the design window.

View Icons
When you load Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you will be working in 2D Full Plan View. This allows you to quickly draw walls, add doors and windows, and so on. When you want to focus primarily on your 2D actions, while maintaining a clear view of the 3D design, open Quarter View. Then, when youre ready to add materials and colors to your Dream Home it will be easier in 3D Full View mode or Elevation View. Full View and Quarter View are available in a pop-up menu. For information or recommendations on using environmentally-friendly alternatives, click the Green Information icon. For a full explanation of the five view options, see the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 23.

Toolset Pop-up Menus


There are two standard toolset pop-up menus in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. The Edit toolset pop-up menu contains tools youll use to select, rotate, zoom, and so on. The Text toolset pop-up menu contains text and dimension tools. Each plan toolbar also includes toolsets, for example the Floor Plan includes toolsets for drawing walls, stairs, railings, and floors. To access the tools, click the arrow that appears next to the active tool. The toolset appears.

6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Working Floor Button

Working Floor Button


Use the Working Floor pop-up menu to switch the current view, based on the number of floors in your home plan. When you click the Working Floor button, a pop-up menu appears. Simply choose the floor on which you would like to work to switch the current working floor.

Choose Help > Training Center. The How-To Center appears.

Elevation field
The Elevation field is a dynamic, on-demand way to quickly change your working elevation or adjust object elevations while you work. You can make adjustments to elevations without clicking in the field; just type the elevation you want as youre working in the design window and the values appear. Working Elevation While nothing is selected in the design window type the elevation at which you want to work and press the Enter key. The field is populated and all subsequent objects are placed at the elevation youve specified. Object Elevation When an object is selected, you can type the elevation at which you want the object to appear and press the Enter key. The field is populated and the object is set at the elevation youve specified. The topics appear on the left side of the How-To Center. You can choose to view the content by Category or Room.

Virtual Ruler
The Virtual Ruler works like a real-world tape measure. You can access the Virtual Ruler the following ways: In the 2D menu In the shortcut menu In the Inspector, while nothing is selected When active, the Virtual Ruler appears in the middle of the design window, where you can move it into any position necessary to make a needed measurement. To move the Virtual Ruler, drag from the center. To resize, click on one of the ends, then drag.

Training Center
You can get started easily with Punch! Home Design Studio Pros Step-by-Step Tutorials. They are available at all times, in the How-To Center.

To access the Training Center


Click the Training Center button in the toolbar. You are not constrained to vertical or horizontal; the Vertical Ruler can be stretched in any direction necessary.

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 7

Chapter

2 A Quick Tour

Measurement Tools
Measurement tools include automatic dimensions, window/door calloutss and the shortcuts to calculate floor square footage. Automatic Dimensioning is the measurements that appear as you are adding features. For example, the Automatic Dimensions feature will show how far from the ends of each wall the window is positioned. When the Window/Door Callouts option is selected, the measurements of all window and door openings will be shown, with the wall measurements, and be displayed in the floor plan view. You can also control the displays of dimensions and callouts the following ways: In the 2D menu In the shortcut menu In the Inspector, while nothing is selected You can access the square footage calculations in the Design menu.

Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the design window. The Status Bar displays information related to your drawing, such as calculated area, plant names, and material names.

Plan Tabs
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro utilizes a collection of layers, which are accessible by clicking the tabs along the top and right side of the design window. Clicking a plan tab accesses a set of tools relative to that plan, which you can use to design your plan; for example, clicking the Electrical tab accesses outlets, switches, and ceiling fans, while clicking the Landscaping tab accesses tools for edging, fencing, ground fill, excavation, and so on. In some cases, the tools are organized into toolsets, available from a pop-up menu. Once placed, each feature such as a door, window, plant, outlet, and so on, can be altered at any time. Click to select the feature and its properties appear in the Inspector. You can further customize which plan layer or combination of plan layers you want to be active. In addition, you can make each plan layer a different color, so you can tell at a glance which layer a specific feature is on. You can even move features to a different plan, when necessary.

Preview Window
You can drag objects, templates, materials, colors, and so on, from their Preview window into your plan. The Preview window changes to reflect your selection. For instance, if you choose a Plant library, plant options appear.

8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Selecting a Plan Tab

Selecting a Plan Tab


Using the easily-accessible plan tabs, you can quickly access each toolset at any time.

To select a plan tab


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. plan tab is selected and the tools appear in the toolbar.

2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The

OR
Swipe three fingers on the trackpad to scroll through the plan tabs.

No selection

Wall selected

Inspector
The Inspector is a floating window with four tabs that allow you to control the details of your drawing. The tabs include: Properties tab Content tab History tab Tips & Tricks tab

To access the Properties Inspector


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. press Command-I). The Inspector appears.

2 Choose Window > Show Inspector (or 3 Click the Properties tab.

To open the Inspector, choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I).

Content Inspector tab


From this pane, you can drag objects, templates, materials, colors, and so on, from the Preview window to the design window. Some libraries are contained within disclosure triangles; click the triangle to view the libraries. Once you choose a library, its contents appear in the Preview window.

Properties Inspector tab


You can easily modify features you have previously drawn by selecting them and editing their properties in the Inspector. Here you can control properties of your drawing while nothing is selected, and then edit an actual object when the object is selected. The Properties Inspector is easily accessed by clicking a feature in your floor plan. For example, clicking a door opens the customizable properties for doors, and clicking a plant opens the properties for plants. If nothing is selected, the Plan and Editing and Plant Growth options appear.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 9

Chapter

2 A Quick Tour
double-arrow buttons to undo all or redo all. You can also click the action you want to revert back to. Some actions that are not tracked in the History Inspector include changing the view from 2D to 3D, rendering styles, navigation modes; any action that cannot be undone or redone from the Edit menu is not included in the History. Each drawing file has its own History list in the Inspector. So when a new drawing file is opened, the History tab will be empty. This means that when a drawing is saved and closed, and then reopened at a later time, the History list will be empty.

N O T E : The libraries that are available are dependent upon your current view. If you are viewing the 2D Plan View, colors, materials, and trim will not be available from the pop-up menu, as they can only be applied in a 3D View.
There is a Search field at the bottom of the Content pane that allows you to search for a specific object, or filter all the objects within a specific category (for example, chairs).

To access the Content Inspector


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. press Command-I). The Inspector appears.

Tips & Tricks Inspector tab


The Tips & Tricks tab is a point of reference for you as you design. Here you have access to an extensive list of topics with informative tips and design ideas. You can also search for a particular topic by entering text in the field at the top.

2 Choose Window > Show Inspector (or 3 Click the Content tab.

History Inspector tab


The History tab displays a list of your actions as you design. This powerful tool will contain every action that happens in the design window, so you are free to design and redesign with the ability to revert back and flash forward at any time.

The History list is displayed with the most recent action at the bottom. Use the single arrow buttons to undo or redo actions in increments, or use the

1 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 3

Finding Answers
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro is not just one software application, but several applications that can be used together. Punch! provides you with a number of sources you can use to familiarize yourself with these applications. When you have questions about a specific feature or procedure, this manual and the integrated Training Center, which you can access from the program, provide a comprehensive guide to all of the tools in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. The video tutorials that are accessible from the Training Center, on the other hand, are an excellent way to learn about the way real projects are constructed from the ground up. This chapter also discusses ways to access technical support and the Punch! website.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 1

Chapter

3 Finding Answers Graphic Cues


This guide uses several types of graphic elements. Some show the window or a dialog that appears during an operation. When this type of graphic illustration is used, every effort is made to show the element exactly as it appears on the window. Graphic Cues Used in this Guide
Convention Meaning

About This Guide


The text and graphics in this guide are tailored to help you find the information you need quickly and get the most out of Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. Each section of this guide is divided into a series of step-by-step instructions, making it easy for you to scan a page to find exactly what you need. You can also refer to the index for additional topics on the same subject, if necessary. Instructions for installing and using Mac or Mac OS do not appear in this guide. If youre uncomfortable with your knowledge of Mac OS or with the concepts associated with a user interface object, you should review Mac online Help before attempting any serious work with Punch! Home Design Studio Pro.

mouse click that selects a pointthe number, when present, specifies the mouse clicks position in a series of clicks drag operationbeginning of arrow indicates where to start; end of arrow indicates where to stop a right mouse click the number, when present, specifies the mouse clicks position in a series of clicks

Basic Terms
The following is a list of terms used throughout this guide. Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the language used in this guide and to reinforce your understanding of basic terminology. Click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once. Control-click (Ctrl-click) Holding down the Control key while pressing and releasing the mouse button once.

Video Step-by-Step Tutorials


You can get started easily with Punch! Home Design Studio Pros Step-by-Step Tutorials. They are available at all times, in the Training Center.

N O T E : Pressing two fingers on your trackpad will also access the Ctrl-click features.
Double-click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice. Drag Pressing the left mouse button, holding it down and moving the mouse, and then releasing the mouse button. Common uses include: Drag to extend the wall segment, and Drag the object onto the design window. Scroll Using the scroll bars on the sides of the application window by clicking the scroller, holding down the mouse button and dragging.

To access the step-by-step tutorials


1
Click the Training Center button in the toolbar. The Training Center dialog appears.

N O T E : Swiping two fingers on the trackpad will also


scroll your view.

1 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Technical Support
The topics appear on the left pane in the Training Center. You can choose to view the content by Category or Room. Video Tutorials To visit the Punch! Customer Support Center, click the Support button on the Task Bar. At the Customer Support Center you can register your software, search the knowledge base, or ask a question, if necessary. The Customer Support Center is also available at http://punch.custhelp.com. The Punch! Online Community is available at http://forums.punchsoftware.com. At the Online Community, users can post questions and trade useful tips and tricks. The Customer Support Center can only answer questions that are related to features of Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. They cannot answer specific questions about home building, local building codes, and so on. When contacting the Support Center, please provide the following details:

2 Double-click a topic to display the cascading list


of tutorials available.

3 Click the topic you want and the tutorial video


appears.

Serial Number; in the menu bar, choose Punch! Home Design Studio Pro > About Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. Your serial number appears in the dialog.

OR
Choose Punch! Home Design Studio Pro > About Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. Your Serial Number appears on the window. Your computers operating system Make and model of your computer After registering your program, you will receive free technical support. When you call, you should be in front of your computer, with the program running, and have the above information handy. T he technical support contact information can be located at the Customer Support Center - http://punch.custhelp.com.

You can also open the corresponding tutorial drawing from the Other Tasks window, in the bottom left corner.

4 (optional) Click the Do It tab for detailed


articles regarding your topic.

Technical Support
Before contacting Punch! Technical Support, please verify that the answer to your question is not available from one of the following resources: Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Help System

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 3

Chapter

3 Finding Answers

1 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 4

Before You Draw


To get the most benefit from Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you should take a minute to become familiar with some of its basic concepts. With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can set a precise drawing scale, define units of measurement, and set the reference grid. There are also many performance settings you can apply to optimize drawing speed and 3D viewing.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 15

Chapter

4 Before You Draw

Important System Settings


Some of your computers settings can impact Punch! Home Design Studio Pros efficiency. By changing one (or more) of these settings, you can control how the program performs. Set your Display Settings to 1024x768 pixels and Millions of Colors. Choose Apple > System Preferences > Displays. By default, all measurements display in English Units; to choose Metric Units go to Design > Unit of Measure and choose Metric Units from the Measurement Units pop-up menu.

To access preferences
Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

Speed Tips
You can Speed Up Punch! Home Design Studio Pro by changing some of the program's settings. Close the 3D View window when you are not working in 3D. No 3D calculations are performed when the 3D View window is closed. Turn off shadows. For more information, see Adding Lighting and Shadows, which begins on page 95. Hide floors that are not active. Turning off inactive floors means the program will not waste resources on them. From the 3D menu, choose Rendering Options. The 3D View dialog appears. You can adjust the navigation speed and also the quality in which objects render; the lower the render quality, the faster 3D View will render your design.

To set general editing preferences


1
Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

Setting Your Preferences


Your preferences control the overall look and way your Punch! Home Design Studio Pro operates. The Preferences dialog contains four tabs. You can control Editing Preferences, Design Colors, Measurements, and the Content Library. Measurement preferences can also be set by choosing Design > Unit of Measure. However, using the Preferences dialog, you can set your measurement preferences while setting other preferences.

2 Select or deselect to set your interaction

preferences. Show wall distance indicators enables the distance to the nearest walls to appears as you draw new walls. Click to select or deselect this option. Highlight entities when mouse hovers over them will highlight existing objects in your

1 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Setting Your Preferences


drawing when your pointer is in a position to select the object. Select or deselect the snap points you want. Intersections displays the intersection of two lines. Segment Center displays the center point along a segment, as you drag. Along with the plans, the plan background, inactive floors, interior fill, topography lines, ClearView, Wireframe Background, and grid colors can be customized.

Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. The colors appear.

On segment displays when the crosshair is actively on a segment as you drag.

Object Center displays the center of an object as you drag to place within its bounds. A useful example would be centering a lamp on a table. Use laser alignment enables a dotted-line wall to appear when the wall you are drawing is in alignment with an existing wall. Drag the Selection sensitivity slider to change the radius of the snap points.

3 Each customizable feature appears with a color


beside it. Click a color to change it. The Colors window appears. For example, if you want to change the color that Topography Lines appear in the design window, click the color next to Topography Lines. The current color appears in the Colors window, as seen below.

3 Click Save to save your preferences.

To set design colors preferences


When creating a design, organization is not only important, but extremely helpful. To enhance organization and efficiency, many of the features in Punch! are color-coded so they are easily noticeable in the design window. For example, each of the floor plans appear in a different color in the design window. The Foundation plan appears in red, while the Floor plan is black, and Electrical components appear in orange. So, at a glance you can distinguish one floor plan from another. Each of these colors can be customized.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 7

Chapter

4 Before You Draw


3 Choose how many decimal places you want when
Color Wheel Colors Sliders Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons an angle appears, from the Angle Format pop-up menu.

There are five panes of coloring options:

4 Select the tab you want to use and choose a new

color then close the window. Customized colors appear with an earmark in the top right corner of the color preview.

5 Click Save to save your preferences.

To set measurement preferences


You can select either English or Metric Units of measurement for your design, as well as the number of decimal places angles appear, the precision of measurements, and the format in which measurements appear.

4 Choose how precise you want measurements to


appear from the Precision pop-up menu.

Choose Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,) and click the Measurements tab. The Preferences dialog appears.

5 Choose how you want measurements to appear


from the Readout Format pop-up menu.

2 Choose which measurement unit you want to use


from the Measurement Units pop-up menu.

6 By default, measurements appear as fractions in

the design window. If you want measurements to appear with decimals, select Use Decimals.

1 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Display Settings
7
Click Open existing drawings using these settings to automatically apply the Measurement preferences to existing drawings. Otherwise, preferences only apply to drawings created after the preferences have been set.

8 Click Save to save your preferences.

To set defaults for previous designs


1
Follow the instructions for either English or Metric units, outlined above, then select the Open existing drawings using these settings checkbox to set the defaults for all previouslydrawn designs.

2 Enter the number of search results you want to


appear in the Limit search results to field.

3 Drag the Content preview size slider to set the


size of the images that appear in the Preview window.

4 Click Save to save your preferences.

Display Settings
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro is designed to run effectively, based on the system requirements printed on the software packaging. However, there are some specific settings you can select to obtain the best display possible.

2 Click Save. The defaults are applied to any


previously-drawn design when it is opened.

To adjust your display settings


1
Choose Apple menu > System Preferences. The System Preferences dialog appears. want.

To set content library preferences


The Content Library displays colors, materials, and 2D and 3D objects. You can limit the number of results that appear when searching for specific items, as well as control the size of items that appear in the Preview window.

2 Click Displays and choose the resolution you 3 From the Colors pop-up menu, choose the number
of colors you want your computer to use for display. Selecting the highest Colors setting shows a more realistic view of your design. you want.

Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,), and click the Content Library tab. The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Click the Color tab and choose the display profile


For more information on these settings, see Mac Help.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 9

Chapter

4 Before You Draw

Setting the Units of Measurement


You can set units of measurement by specifying either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened.

To use English measurements


1
Choose Design > Unit of Measure. A dialog appears.

5 (optional) From the Readout Format pop-up menu,


choose the format you want.

2 Choose English Units from the Measurement


Units pop-up menu.

3 (optional) From the Angle Format pop-up menu,

choose the number of decimal points you want to use.

6 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options


you selected are applied.

To use Metric measurements


1
Choose Design menu > Unit of Measure. A dialog appears. Units pop-up menu.

2 Choose Metric Units from the Measurement

4 (optional) From the Precision pop-up menu,

choose how precise you want the measurements to appear.

2 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Setting the Scale


3 (optional) From the Angle Format pop-up menu,
choose the number of decimal points you want to use.

2 Select the plan scale setting you want, then click

OK. The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.

4 (optional) From the Readout Format pop-up menu,


choose the format you want.

5 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options


you selected are applied.

Setting the Scale


Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You can customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as well as print your drawing to scale.

To set the drawing scale


1
Choose Design > Plan Scale. A dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 1

Chapter

4 Before You Draw

2 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 5

Viewing in 2D & 3D
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides many options for looking at your design onscreen. You can display several windows, each containing a different view of your plan. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view, or using only Punch! 3D View. When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction. 3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design. In this chapter, youll learn about the numerous commands designed to let you view your design in both 2D and 3D.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 3

Chapter

5 Viewing in 2D & 3D
factor to obtain exact zoom precision. Once youve finished viewing your plan close-up, you can return to the previous full view with one mouse click.

Viewing the 2D Plan


When initially designing your plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. In addition, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro organizes your floor plan into layers, which are each easily accessible with a single mouse click. For example, you can choose to view the deck plan with landscaping one moment, then quickly switch to view electrical and plumbing. Any combination ... any time!

To zoom
1
Choose the Zoom button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (or drag down to zoom out).

2 In the design window, drag up to zoom in N O T E : When the mouse is clicked, the location of the pointer will be centered on the design window.

To view the 2D plan only


In the Plan toolbar, click the 2D Plan View button. The 2D plan view appears.

To zoom using the wheel mouse


Click the design window and drag the wheel on the mouse to zoom in or out.

To view all 2D floor plan views at once


Choose 2D > Floor Visibility > View All Floors.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose View All Floors from the shortcut menu.

N O T E : To access this feature, using some older wheel mouse drivers, set the Scrolling Size to None in your System Preferences.

To zoom using the trackpad


1
Locate the cursor at the center of what you want to view.

OR
Press two fingers on the trackpad and choose View All Floors from the shortcut menu.

2 Pinch to zoom in or out.

To view the working floor only


Choose 2D > Floor Visibility > View Working Floor Only.

To set the zoom factor


1
Choose 2D > Set Plan View Zoom. A dialog appears.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose View Working Floor Only from the shortcut menu.

OR
Press two fingers on the trackpad and choose View Working Floor Only from the shortcut menu.

2 Enter a new zoom factor, then click OK.

To reset the 2D plan view


Choose 2D > Reset Plan View (or press Command-R). The plan is reset to the original, default view.

Zooming In and Out in 2D


You can get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. By dragging over the drawing, the view enlarges or decreases dynamically. You can also set the zoom

Panning Across the 2D Drawing


You can move the design window to see portions of the plan which are outside the current view, by

2 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size


panning. Panning also makes it easy to slowly view areas of your drawing piece-by-piece.

2 Choose 2D > Plan Visibility and click to deselect


the plan you want to hide.

To pan in any direction


1
Choose the Pan button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to reflect pan mode. want to move. The view changes dynamically as you drag.

2 In the design window, drag in the direction you

3 (optional) Repeat until all of the plans you want to


hide are deselected.

N O T E : The active plan is always unavailable. N O T E : Items in a hidden plan layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your drawing.

To pan using the trackpad


Use two fingers on the trackpad to position your drawing.

To view a plan layer

Fitting Your Design to Your Current Window Size


You can quickly position your entire design within your window, without using the Pan button or Zoom button.

Click the tab of the plan you want to customize. The changes you make only affect the active plan. plan you want to be visible.

2 Choose 2D > Plan Visibility and click to select the

To fit your entire design within your window


Choose 2D > Fit to Window.

Customizing Visible Plans


During the design of your floor plan, there may be times when you want certain layers, that by default are hidden, to be visible. For example, while working on your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing will be. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers. You can also assign custom colors to areas of your design, such as plans, inactive floors, grid line colors, and the color of your crosshair. These color settings, and more, can be customized by accessing the 2D Menu.

3 (optional) Repeat until all of the plans you want to


see are visible.

N O T E : The active plan is always unavailable.

To customize the color of plan layer


1
From the Home Design Studio Pro menu, choose Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. colors appear.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. The current plan

To hide a plan layer from view


1
Click the tab of the plan you want to customize. The changes you make only affect the active plan.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 5

Chapter

5 Viewing in 2D & 3D
4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a
color, then close the window.

To assign an interior fill color


1
The Plan Background has been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. customizable colors appears. appears.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with 3 Click the Interior Fill color. The Colors window
There are five panes available for choosing colors:

3 To change a plans color, click the color

associated with that plan. The Colors window appears. When you click the Plumbing Plan color, for example, the Colors window appears with the default Plumbing Plan color.

Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

To assign an inactive floor color


1
Inactive Floors have been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. customizable colors appears. appears.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with 3 Click the Inactive Floor color. The Colors window
There are five panes for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

There are five panes available for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

To assign a plan background color


1
The Plan Background has been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears.

2 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Customizing Visible Plans


2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with
customizable colors appears. window appears. Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

3 Click the Plan Background color. The Colors


There are five panes available for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

To assign a ClearView color


1
The ClearView lines have been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. customizable colors appears. appears.

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with 3 Click the ClearView color. The Colors window
There are five panes available for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

To assign a grid line color


1
The Grid lines have been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. customizable colors appears.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with 3 Click the Grid color. The Colors window appears.
There are five panes available for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

To assign a wireframe background color


1
The wireframe background has been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. customizable colors appears. Colors window appears.

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with 3 Click the Wireframe Background color. The
There are five panes available for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

To assign a topography line color


1
The Topography Lines have been assigned a color. To customize the color, choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. customizable colors appears. window appears.

2 Click the Design Colors tab. Each feature with 3 Click the Topography Lines color. The Colors
There are five panes available for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider

4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a


color, then close the window.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 7

Chapter
1

5 Viewing in 2D & 3D

To reset all colors


Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences. The Preferences dialog appears. Colors button. Each features color is reset to its default color.

2 Click the Design Colors tab, then click the Reset

Green Information
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes information to help you with designing an energy-efficient, environmentally-minded home. Tips and information are available to help guide you as you are creating your design.

3 Click the close button to close the window.

To access the green tips center


1
Choose the Green Tips button in the Plan toolbar. The Green Tips window appears.

Working with 3D
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you view your design in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your design completely unique. There are a variety of 3D views available from the Plan toolbar, in the 3D View pop-up menu. Using a 3D view, you can see your design from a variety of angles.

To display plan view


Choose the Plan View button from the Plan toolbar.

Objects in your drawing that have green tips available appear highlighted in green.

2 Select a green feature in the design window, to

access tips and information about that feature.

2 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the 3D Cutaway Slider

To display a floating 3D view


1
Choose the 3D Window View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A floating 3D view appears. the bottom right corner.

To reset the 3D view


Choose Reset 3D View from the 3D menu (or press Shift-Command-R).

2 Drag to move the window, or resize by dragging

Using the 3D Cutaway Slider


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pros 3D Cutaway Slider you peel away layers of your floor plan, with ease. You can slice away layer after layer of your design from any of the four sides or from the top, making it easy to see room arrangements, furniture placement, and so on.

To view a plan using the 3D Cutaway Slider


1
Choose the 3D View button. A full 3D view appears.

To display a 3D view only


Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 9

Chapter

5 Viewing in 2D & 3D

2 Using the 3D navigation tools, set the 3 Drag the 3D Cutaway Slider, in the

view from where you would like to see the design cut away. left side of the design window, up and down to see a cutaway view of the design.

To set a viewpoint angle


1
Choose the 3D View button. A full 3D view appears.

2 Choose 3D > Set Viewpoint > Lots Right Edge.

Setting the Viewpoint Angle


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro has four preset viewpoint angles and, from those angles, moving to the needed viewpoint is easy.

3 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Selecting Features in 3D
N O T E : By clicking the other three directions, you can view the floor plan from the other edges of your lot.

To use the select material/paint tool


1
Choose the Select Material/Color Finder button from the toolbar. material that you want to identify. That color or material appears in the Preview window.

2 In the 3D View window, click the color or

Selecting Features in 3D
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pros 3D Selection Tool, you can click features on the 3D View window and they are automatically selected on your 2D plan. This makes fine-tuning your design much easier.

To use the 3D selection tool


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. feature. That feature is activated in the design window and its properties appear in the Inspector.

2 In the 3D View window, click to select a

N O T E : The material being identified in this example is the placemat on the table.

N O T E : You can select features on the active floor only. If the feature you click does not become active, make sure it is on the active floor.

Identifying Colors and Materials from 3D View


As you experiment with different colors and materials during the design process, you may want to identify a previously-used material. This is easy with Punch! Home Design Studio Pros Select Material/ Paint Tool.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 1

Chapter

5 Viewing in 2D & 3D

3 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 6

Adding 3D Features
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you view your home in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials, and select from a variety of woods to make your home design completely unique. View all your customizations in the 3D View window. By adding color, trim, and materials, you can make decorative changes to the 3D presentation of your home design as quickly as you think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of colors, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a paintbrush!

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 3

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features

Objects Libraries
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you add details to the 3D view presentation of your design using a variety of objects. Included in the library are 3D Objects, 2D Symbols, and Accessories. The Objects libraries are accessible at any time and objects can be placed on any plan tab. The Accessories category is very large and includes drapes, blinds, curtains, shutters, and so on. An Accessory can only be placed on a wall segment. It is important to keep in mind that the objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing in 3D mode. In the plan drawing, objects appear as 2D symbols, while textures such as color, wallpaper, wainscoting, and so on, do not appear in 2D at all.

To add 3D objects using drag-and-drop


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears.

2 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 3 Choose 3D Objects from the pop-up menu.

6 Scroll through the previews and drag the object


you want to the design window.

(optional) Click the Selection button, then drag the object you just placed to move it to another location in the design window.

To add 3D objects using import


1 Choose File > Import > Punch! 3D Object. 2 In the dialog that appears, choose the file you
want to import. window.

3 Click Open. The object appears on the design 4 Click the Punch! & Vendor Library disclosure
triangle to access the 3D object libraries. Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, for example, the Bath library. To access those libraries, click the disclosure triangle.

4 (optional) Click the Selection button, then click

the object you just placed to drag it to another location in the design window.

To add 2D symbols
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears.

5 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear.

2 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 3 Choose 2D Symbols from the pop-up menu.

3 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Objects Libraries
6 Scroll through the previews and drag the object
you want to the design window.

(optional) Click the Selection button, then drag the object you just placed to move it to another location in the design window.

To add log home components using drag-anddrop


4 Click the Punch! Library disclosure triangle to
access the 2D symbol libraries.

Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears.

2 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 3 Choose 3D Objects from the pop-up menu. 4 Click the Punch! Library disclosure triangle to
access the 3D object libraries. contents appear.

5 Scroll down and choose the LogHome library. Its

Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, the Exterior Elements library, for example. To access those libraries, click the disclosure triangle.

5 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear.

6 Drag the component(s) you want to the design


window.

(optional) Click the Selection button, then drag the object you just placed to move it to another location in the design window.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 5

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features

Plant Libraries
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes thousands of plants to make designing the landscape easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the ones that grow best in your area of the country.

To add plants
1
Click the Landscape plan tab so your plants are added to the Landscape plan. Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears. libraries appear.

2 Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press 3 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 4 Choose Plants from the pop-up menu. The Plant

Scroll through the previews to find the plant you want.

N O T E : The name of the plant appears in the Status 5 Click the disclosure triangle next to the library
you want to see. appear. Bar if you hold the pointer over the preview of the plant.

8 Drag the plant(s) you want to the design window. N O T E : You can change plant libraries at any time as
well and move between them freely.

6 Choose the plant library you want. Its contents

3 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Viewing Hardiness Zones

To identify which plant has been placed and view its info
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. choose Plant Details from the shortcut menu. The Plant Details window appears.

2 Ctrl-click the plant you want to identify, then 3 Click OK to close the window.

Viewing Hardiness Zones


To apply a series of the same plant
You can apply a series of one plant using Auto-Click Placement. For more information, see AutoClick Placement, which begins on page 44. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes USDA Hardiness Zone maps for the contiguous 48 states, Alaska and Hawaii, Canada, Europe, and Australia. All plants included in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro can be sorted, using this information.

To view a hardiness zone map


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears. libraries appear.

To move a plant
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. drag it to the new location.

2 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 3 Choose Plants from the pop-up menu. The Plant 4 At the bottom of the
Inspector, click the Plants Action pop-up menu and choose Plant Hardiness Zones. The Hardiness Zones map appears. the Plant Hardiness Zone pop-up menu.

2 Select the plant you want to move and

To customize the planting age


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Select the plant you want to customize. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
Age Planted field appears.

5 (optional) Choose the map you want to see from

4 Enter the age of the plant at the time of planting


in the Inspector and press the Enter key.

N O T E : Planting age can only be adjusted after a plant is placed.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 7

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features

4 Deselect the criteria that does not meet your 6 Click the Close button to close the map.
needs, then click Search.

PlantFinder
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. PlantFinder is a powerful sorting engine that lets you see only the plants that fit your particular criteria.

N O T E : Only the plants matching all the variables selected will be displayed in the preview window. To broaden the search, select more criteria. N O T E : By default, both the Punch! Plant Library and Custom Plant Library are included in the search. You can narrow your search by selecting or deselecting one or the other.

To find a plant by name


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. pop-up menu that appears.

To sort plants
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. pop-up menu that appears.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Plants in the 3 At the bottom of the Inspector, enter the type
of plant, or plant name, in the Search Content field and press the Enter key. The search results appear. To clear the search field, click the small x within the field.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Plants in the 3 Choose PlantFinder from the
Plants Action pop-up menu. The PlantFinder appears.

Making Plants Grow


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can watch the landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can watch your landscape change over 20 years. You can also customize the maximum growing age. For more information, see Plant Growth Projection, which begins on page 77.

3 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Applying Trims

To grow the landscape


1
Open the floating 3D window and position it so you can easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch mature. landscape objects are visible.

2 Click the Landscape tab so all of the plants and 3 With nothing selected, click the Properties
Inspector tab. The Plant Growth Meter appears in the Inspector.

Applying Trims
It is easy to add base trim, crown molding, or library paneling for an elegant appearance or use wainscotting if you want to apply two different materials on one wall. You can also add casing molding around doors and windows. All customizations are made in the 3D view, so be sure you have a 3D view open. In this example we will use Base Trim, but crown molding, door casings, library paneling, and wainscotting are applied in exactly the same way.

4 Clicking the left arrow makes the plants appear


younger, while clicking the right arrow makes them appear older.

To apply trim
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. pop-up menu that appears. The Trim libraries appear.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Trim from the

Watch the Inspector as you click, to see the age.

N O T E : To change the planting age for individual plants, see To customize the planting age on page 37.

Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, the Base library, for example.

3 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 9

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features
3 Choose the library of the trim you want to
remove. For base or crown trim, click the disclosure triangle and choose the Standard library. The librarys contents appear in the Preview window.

4 Apply the last trim option, the

Remove Trim, to a wall in 3D, to remove the trim.

N O T E : Each Trim library (Base Trim, Crown Trim, Library Paneling, Wainscot) contains its own remove trim option.

Applying Paint and Color


4 Scroll through the trim previews and drag the
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks. Walls are just one example of what can be colorized; you can also apply color to furniture, window trim, doors, and so on. All customizations are made on the 3D window.

one you want onto a wall in the 3D view. The trim is applied.

To apply a series of the same trim


You can apply a series of the same trim to multiple surfaces using Auto-Click Placement. For more information, see AutoClick Placement, which begins on page 44.

To apply paint
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. pop-up menu that appears. The Colors libraries appear.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Colors from the

Removing Wall Trims


All wall trims are removed in the same way; drag the no trim material onto the wall. In this example we will use Base Trim, but crown molding, library paneling, and wainscoting are all removed the same way.

To remove wall trim


1
In the Inspector, click the Content tab and choose Trim from the pop-up menu. The Trim libraries appear. Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, the Base library, for example.

3 Click the Paint Library disclosure triangle to


show the Paint libraries.

2 Click the disclosure triangle next to Base Trim.


The Base Trim libraries appear.

4 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Applying Paint and Color


2 Click the Content tab and choose Colors from the
pop-up menu. The Colors libraries appear. reveal the Custom Colors libraries.

3 Click the Custom Colors disclosure triangle to

Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, the Sherwin-Williams Interior library, for example.

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window.

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window.

5 Scroll through the colors and drag the one you


want onto a wall or surface in 3D.

N O T E : To customize a color, see To define a


custom color on page 42.

To apply color from the color ramp


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. pop-up menu. The Colors libraries appear. the Color Ramp libraries.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Colors from the 3 Click the Color Ramp disclosure triangle to reveal

5 Scroll through the paint colors and drag the N O T E : To customize a color, see To define a
custom color on page 42.

color you want onto a wall or surface in 3D. The paint is applied.

To apply color from a customizable palette


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open.

4 Choose the category you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window.

5 Scroll through the colors and drag the one you


want onto a wall or surface in 3D. The color is applied.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 1

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features

To apply a series of the same color


You can apply a series of one color to multiple surfaces using Auto-Click Placement. For more information, see AutoClick Placement, which begins on page 44.

Using Custom Colors


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can define your own custom color with the Color dialog. You can start with one of the basic colors available, then change its red, blue or green values, or click on a color in the color spectrum window to mix your own color. By customizing colors, you are sure to find the exact color you want. There are five panes for choosing colors: Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

To define a custom color


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. pop-up menu that appears. The Colors libraries appear. access the Custom Colors libraries.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Colors from the 3 Click the Custom Colors disclosure triangle to

Select the pane you want to use and then select a color, then close the window. The color you specified appears in the Preview window.

8 Drag the color onto a wall or surface in 3D.

Find Applied
After you have applied colors or materials, or after placing plants, you can easily identify which color, material or plant has been used.

To find an applied color or material


4 Choose the category you want; its contents 1
appear, and the Action pop-up menu becomes available. one you want to customize. Choose the Select Material/Color Finder button from the toolbar. you want to identify. The color or material appears in the Preview window.

2 In the 3D view, click the color or material

5 Scroll through the color previews and select the 6 Choose Change Color from the
Action pop-up menu. The Color window appears.

4 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Applying Building Materials

Applying Building Materials


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, customizing the exterior of your home is a simple drag-and-drop procedure. Available materials include brick, stucco, gravel, roofing, and so on. You can create and import your own custom materials. For more information, see Importing Files, which begins on page 55. You can even apply two different materials to a wall, using the Wainscotting feature. For more information, see Applying Trims, which begins on page 39.

To apply material
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. the pop-up menu. The Materials libraries appear.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Materials from

5 Scroll through the materials and drag the one


you want onto a surface in 3D. The material is applied.

N O T E : To increase the accuracy of applying materials, zoom in closer to the surface you are texturing. 3 Click the Punch! Library disclosure triangle to
show the Punch! libraries.

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window.

To apply custom materials


1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. the pop-up menu. The Materials libraries appear.

2 Click the Content tab and choose Materials from

3 Click the Vendor & Bonus Library disclosure

triangle to reveal the Vendor and Bonus libraries. Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, the Bamboo Hardwoods library, for example.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 43

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window.

To use AutoClick Placement


1
Find the content you want to apply from one of the libraries in the Content tab and select it in the Preview window. or objects) to make the window active.

2 Click in the 3D view (or design window for plants 3 Press the Option key. Notice the pointer changes
to a pointing finger. This means auto-click placement is active.

4 With the Option key pressed, click each surface


where you want the selection to appear to tag the surface. A crosshair appears on each surface. visible in the 3D view.

5 To place, release the Option key and the series is

Editing 3D Objects
Once youve placed 3D objects in your drawing, its easy to move, delete, copy, and rotate objects, usually involving just one or two mouse clicks.

5 Scroll through the materials and drag the one


you want onto a surface in 3D. The material is applied.

To resize an object
1 1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open and click the Inspector tab. The objects properties appear in the Inspector.

materials, zoom in closer to the surface you are texturing.

N O T E : To increase the accuracy of applying

To apply a series of the same material


You can apply a series of one material to multiple surfaces using Auto-Click Placement. For more information, see AutoClick Placement, which begins on page 44.

2 Click to select an object in the design window.

AutoClick Placement
You can apply the same object, plant, trim, and so on, using the AutoClick Placement feature. If youre applying a series of a color or material to the 3D view, be sure a 3D navigation mode is active, and not another 3D tool (such as the Select Material Tool).

3 Enter the Width, Height, and Depth to


customize the values.

4 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

User Library Organizers


OR
Enter the percentage by which you want the object resized. Press the Enter key to accept the new value(s).

4 (optional) If you want shadows, make sure the


Cast Shadow checkbox is selected. the object, and press the Enter key.

5 (optional) Enter an angle, if you want to rotate

To rename objects
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Information from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears.

3 Close the Organizer when you are done.

2 Ctrl-click an object and choose Object

To move contents from one category to another


1 Open the Organizer you want. 2 Choose the category with the object you want to 3 Drag the object you want to move to the
category where you want it to appear. move. The categorys contents appear in the pane on the right.

3 Enter a new name in the field then click OK.


spreadsheet, created by Estimator.

N O T E : This is the name that will be listed in the

To create a new category


1 Open the Organizer you want. 2 Choose the Category within which you want to
create a category and click the New button. The dialog appears.

User Library Organizers


You can create categories and customize lists of furnishings, accessories, and so on, to make Punch! Home Design Studio Pro more personal. In this example we will use the 3D Objects Organizer, but all Organizers work the same way. Setting up individual libraries, for example Shower, Air Conditioner, etc., also enables Estimator to calculate correctly.

3 Enter the Category Name and click Create.

To delete a category
1 Open the Organizer you want. 2 Choose the Category you want to delete and click
the Delete button. A warning dialog appears. contents.

To open an Organizer
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. choose the 3D Object Organizer from the Action pop-up menu. The 3D Objects Organizer appears.

3 Click Delete to delete the category and all of its

2 Click the Content tab and 1

To rename a category
Open the Organizer you want.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 5

Chapter

6 Adding 3D Features

2 Choose the Category you want to rename and


click the Rename button. A dialog appears.

3 Enter the name you want and click Rename.

To delete an object from the organizer


1 Open the Organizer you want. 2 Choose the category with the object you want to
delete. The categorys contents appear on the right.

3 Select the object you want to delete. 4 Click the Delete button. A warning dialog
appears.

5 Click Delete to permanently delete the object.

4 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 7

Elevation Editor View


Punch! Home Design Studio Pros powerful Elevation View allows you to view and edit your design in 3D! You can add and remove windows or doors, or change their elevation, and all your changes are automatically applied to your 2D floor plan.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 7

Chapter

7 Elevation Editor View


There are many styles of openings and doors available in Elevation View and they are all placed in the same manner.

Elevation View
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you easily edit your design in 3D, and view the design from different directions quickly.

To add an opening or door


1
Choose the Door button in the Floor plan toolbar. The properties appear in the Inspector.

Opening Elevation View


Choose the Elevation Editor button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu.

To pan the design


In the Elevation View window, drag to pan around the design.

To use a predefined view


Click one of the four predefined view tabs, at the top of the toolbar.

OR
Ctrl-click the Elevation View window and choose the view you want from the shortcut menu.

2 Choose the door style you want. The Door

Appearance properties for that style appear. customize the door appearance. Press the Enter key to accept new values. you want to place the door or opening. The door appears.

To set a custom view


1
Click the Custom tab at the top of the toolbar.

3 Enter the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim to 4 In the Elevation View window, click a wall where

OR
Ctrl-click the Elevation View window and choose View Custom Elevation from the shortcut menu.

OR
With three fingers on the trackpad, swipe to scroll through the view tabs.

Changing Door Settings


There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a different size or style. You can control many of the doors features using the Inspector. Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open.

2 Click the Rotate View button. 3 In the Elevation View window, drag to

rotate the view to the position you want.

Adding and Modifying Doors and Windows


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro takes the guesswork out of placing doors and windows by allowing you to add and modify doors and windows, while viewing your design in 3D.

To change door style


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the
toolbar.

3 Click to select a door in the Elevation

View window. The doors properties appear in the Inspector.

4 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Windows
4 Scroll through the doors styles and choose the
style you want.

3 Click to select a door in the Elevation View

window. The doors properties appear in the Inspector. Enter key to accept the values.

To resize a door by specifying dimensions


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a door in the Elevation View
window. The doors properties appear in the Inspector.

4 Enter the elevation in the field and press the

Adding Windows
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in the Elevation View and they are all placed in the same manner.

4 Enter the new dimensions in the Width, Height,

Elevation, or Trim fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To change door swing


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a door in the Elevation View
window. The doors properties appear in the Inspector. press the Enter key.

To add a window
1
Choose the Window button in the Floor plan toolbar. The properties appear in the Inspector.

4 Enter the new door swing angle in the field and

To flip the direction of a door


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a door in the Elevation View
window. The doors properties appear in the Inspector.

4 Click the Flip Door button. The door is flipped.

2 Choose the window style you want. The Door

To change the elevation of a door


1
Choose the Selection button in the toolbar.

Appearance properties for that style appear. customize the window appearance. Press the Enter key to accept new values. windows, specify the grill spacing.

3 Enter the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim to 4 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture 5 In the Elevation View window, click a wall where
you want to place the window. The window appears.

2 Click to select the door. 3 Type the elevation you want. The Object

Elevation filed, in the toolbar, is populated with the values. changed.

4 Press the Enter key. The doors elevation is OR 1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar.

N O T E : If you change the elevation, all windows placed after this are placed at the newly-specified elevation.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 9

Chapter

7 Elevation Editor View


Click the arrow buttons to specify the number of grill dividers you want.

Changing Window Settings


Elevation View allows you to resize, reposition, or change the properties on windows. You can specify exact dimensions, change the grill settings, flip windows vertically or horizontally, or change their elevations.

To elevate a window
1
Choose the Selection button in the toolbar.

To change window style


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a window in the Elevation View
window. The windows properties appear in the Inspector. style you want.

2 Click to select the window. 3 Enter the elevation you want. The Object

Elevation field, in the toolbar, is populated with the values. changed.

4 Press the Enter key. The windows elevation is OR 1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a window in the Elevation View
window. The windows properties appear in the Inspector. Enter key to accept the values.

4 Scroll through the window styles and choose the

To resize a window by specifying dimensions


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a window in the Elevation View
window. The windows properties appear in the Inspector.

4 Enter the elevation in the field and press the

4 Enter the new dimensions in the Width, Height,

Elevation, or Trim fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Adding Accessories
You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds, and so on, to any window. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls. For more information, see Adding Accessories, which begins on page 135.

To change the grill settings of a window


1 Open the Inspector and click the Properties tab. 2 Choose the Selection button in the toolbar. 3 Click to select a window in the Elevation View
window. The windows properties appear in the Inspector. Picture style. The Grill Divider fields become active.

4 Choose either the Double Hung or Casement/ N O T E : The Grill settings only displays when a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window option is chosen. 5 Enter the number of horizontal and vertical grill
dividers you want in the fields, and press the Enter key to accept each value.

Adding Colors, Materials, and Trim


You can easily add paint, brick, crown trim, or other 3D elements to your design in Elevation View. The method is a simple drag-and-drop procedure. For more information, see Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 33.

OR

5 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Part 2

MENU BARS

Just like with everything else, the best place to begin is with the basics. Within this section you will find information on techniques and features that you will use in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro.

Chapter 8: File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Chapter 9: Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Chapter 10: Design Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Chapter 11: 2D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Chapter 12: 3D Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Chapter 13: Window Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Chapter 14: Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

CHAPTER 8

File Menu
When you start Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, the QuickStart designer appears. If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open, or display, it on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open in the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. Once you have opened a file, you can edit, import, export, print, view, and save it. You can have more than one file open at a time. The exact number of files you can have open depends on the amount of memory in your system and the complexity of the home plan file. When you open a file, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro displays it in a new window. The changes you make to a plan drawing occur only in your computers memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing using a new name, use Save As. At any point during the design process you can import objects created in 3D Custom Workshop to further customize your design. In addition, you can export a 3D View rendering to make it easy to share your design with friends.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 5 3

Chapter

8 File Menu

Starting a New File


Starting a new file displays QuickStart, an easy way to start your design process. For more information, see QuickStart, which begins on page 115.The first time Punch! Home Design Studio Pro is launched, you will be asked to Register your software. For more information, see Registering Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, which begins on page 4.

Accessing the Sample Plans


Sample plans are another set of predesigned home plans, not created by an architect, that can be used as-is, or can be edited to your liking. There are eleven sample plans available, each with 2D and 3D previews, and room dimensions.

To open a sample plan


1
Choose File > Open Sample Plan (or press ShiftCommand-O). The Sample Plans are displayed.

To save a new, unnamed file


1
Choose File > Save As (or press Shift-CommandS). A dialog appears. Home Design Studio Pro automatically adds the PRO extension.

2 Enter a file name in the Save As field. Punch! 3 Choose where you want to save the file. 4 Click Save.

Opening a File
Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, making it available for you to edit or print the plan drawing.

2 By default, all home styles

To open an existing file


1
Choose File > Open (or press Command-O). The Open dialog appears.

are displayed. You can narrow the options by choosing the home style you want from the pop-up menu. options and choose the one you want. A 2D preview is displayed, as well as the plans dimensions. in 3D.

2 Find the file you want to open. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to
open, click to select it.

3 Scroll through the style

4 Click Open.

4 (optional) Click the 3D View tab to see the home 5 When you find the plan you want, click Open Plan.
The plan is opened in a new design window.

To see a list of recently opened files


Choose File > Open Recent then choose the file you want to open from the pop-up menu. The file opens.

Closing a File
When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computers memory. When you are done working in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, close all your files and exit the program.

To clear the recently opened files listing


Choose File > Open Recent > Clear Menu. The list of files is cleared.

5 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Saving a File

To close a file
Choose File > Close (or press Command-W). If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro prompts you to save them before it closes the file.

Importing Files
You can import a variety of file types into Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. From designing custom furniture in 3D Custom Workshop to importing designs from other popular software, you are able to design and customize your dream home faster and easier than ever before.

To close all open files and exit


Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Quit Home Design Studio Pro (or press Command-Q). If any open drawings have unsaved changes, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro prompts you to save them before it closes their files.

To import a DXF/DWG file


1
Choose File > Import > DXF/DWG File. A dialog appears.

2 Find the file you want to open and select it. 3 (optional) Choose the scale by which you want the
image opened form the Scale pop-up menu.

Saving a File
When you open a file, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disc. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after youve completed any work you wouldnt want to redo. When you click the Save command, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks.

4 Click Open. N O T E : Once you have imported your file, you will need to convert the lines into Punch! intelligent objects before they can be viewed in 3D. For more information, see Converting Details to Intelligent Features, which begins on page 221.

To import a 3D object
1
Choose File > Import > Punch! 3D Object. A dialog appears.

2 Find the file you want to open and select it. 3 Click Open. The object appears centered in the
design window.

N O T E : Double-click the object to reopen it in 3D Custom Workshop.

To save an existing file


Choose File > Save (or press Command-S).

To import a SketchUp file


1
Choose File > Import > SketchUp File. A dialog appears.

To save a file to a different name, drive, or folder


1
Choose File > Save As (or press Shift-CommandS). A dialog appears. Home Design Studio Pro automatically adds the PRO extension.

2 Find the file you want to open and select it. 3 Click Open. N O T E : The Status Bar will display the progress, as the file is converted.

2 Enter a file name in the Save As field. Punch! 3 Choose where you want to save the file. 4 Click Save.

To import a material
1 Open a 3D view. 2 Choose File > Import > Image to 3D Material
Library. The Import Material to Library dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 5 5

Chapter

8 File Menu
Enter new values to change the width and height of each material tile. Choose Stretches across width of surface to stretch the width and/or height of one tile of the material across the entire surface to which it is applied.

(optional) Select the Substitute black areas with transparency to designate all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent. library you specified.

1 0 Click Import. The material is imported into the N O T E : To edit a materials details after it has been imported, see User Library Organizers on page 45.

3 Find the file you want to open and select it. 4 Click Open. The material appears in the Import
Material to Library dialog.

To import an accessory
1 Open a 3D view. 2 Choose File > Import > Image to 3D Accessories
Library. The Import Accessory to Library dialog appears.

5 Choose the library to where you want to import


the material. Name field.

6 Enter a name for the material in the Material 7


Enter a description of the material in the Material Description field (up to 128 characters). This is the description that appears in the Status Bar when the material is hovered over in the Preview window. By default, when the material is applied to a surface it will be tiled over the surface in sections, based on the width and height values.

3 Find the file you want to open and select it. 4 Click Open. The accessory appears in the Import
Accessory to Library dialog.

8 (optional) Specify the material width and height.

5 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Importing Files
1 2 Click Import. The accessory is imported into the
library you specified.

N O T E : To edit an accessorys details after it has been imported, see User Library Organizers on page 45.

To import a plant
1
Choose File > Import >Image to Plant Library. A dialog appears. you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. open, click to select it.

2 In the Look In field, enter the name of the file 3 When you see the name of the file you want to 5 Choose in which library you want the accessory
imported. You can import images to the window accessory libraries, or to be applied to window accessories or images to be added as artwork. Name field.

6 Enter a name for the accessory in the Accessory 7


Enter a description of the accessory in the Accessory Description field (up to 128 characters). This is the description that appears in the Status Bar when the accessory is hovered over in the Preview window. height.

8 (optional) Specify the accessory width and 9


(optional) By default, when the accessory is applied, the image will be tiled over the surface in sections, based on the width and height values. Enter new values to change the width and height of each material tile.

4 Click Open. The Import Plant to Library dialog


appears.

N O T E : If you know that the windows where youre going to apply an accessory are 6'-0" wide, then the accessory should be at least 6'-0" wide as well (a 4'0" width would require two tiles to cover the 6'-0" window surface, so a seam would appear). 1 0 (optional) Choose Stretches across width of
surface to stretch the width and/or height of one tile of the material across the entire surface to which it is applied. with transparency to designate all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the accessory image as transparent.

1 1 (optional) Select the Substitute black areas

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 5 7

Chapter

8 File Menu
By exporting your design to VRML, it becomes available for viewing with a VRML viewer or through a web browser (provided an appropriate plug-in is installed). These helper applications and plug-ins are available as free downloads on the Internet.

5 Choose the Library to which you want to import


the plant.

N O T E : Some categories have sub-categories, in which you can save your plant. Simply expand the main category to see the sub-categories. 6 By default, the Description tab is active. Enter
the plants descriptive details in the corresponding fields.

N O T E : The 3D design will appear without the materials, when viewed from a VRML file.

Click the Requirements & Growth tab. The plant requirement and growth options appear.

To export a DXF/DWG file


1
Choose File > Export > DXF/DWG File. A dialog appears.

2 Enter a name for the file in the Save As field. 3 Choose where you want to save the file. 4 Choose the Format and Version from the
corresponding pop-up menus.

5 Click Save. A progress bar appears and the file is 8 Provide details and choose options to specify the
plants requirements and growth rate. saved. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro DXF Exporter automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension.

N O T E : For more information, see Viewing


Hardiness Zones, which begins on page 37.

To export a 3D Image
1
Open a 3D View window and set the position and render style you want. appears.

Click the Import button. The plant is imported and appears in the library you selected.

2 Choose File > Export > 3D Image. A dialog

Exporting Files
You can export a rendering of your 3D View window to BMP, GIF, JPG, PNG, or TIFF format. Files can be exported in Textured, Wireframe, and ClearView modes. The exported file will appear just as your 3D View window does. Be sure to render your drawing in high-resolution, before exporting. Size is also controlled by how your 3D View window appears; the larger the 3D View window, the larger the file will be. For more information on controlling the 3D View environment, see Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 23.

3 Enter a name for the file in the Save As field. 4 Choose where you want to save the file.

5 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Printing floor plans


5 Choose the Format and Render Quality from the
corresponding pop-up menus. To enter a custom paper size, choose Manage Custom Sizes. Enter the custom paper size information, in the corresponding fields, and click OK.

6 Click Save. Your 3D view is saved.

To export to VRML
1
Open a 3D View window and set the position and render style you want.

5 Select the Orientation you want. 6 Enter the scale to which you want your page to
print, in the Scale field.

2 Choose File > Export > VRML. A dialog appears. 3 Enter a name for the file in the Save As field.
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro automatically adds the extension.

Click OK to apply your page setup. The settings are applied to the printer(s) you chose.

To set printing, faxing, and sharing preferences


1
Choose File > Page Setup and from the Format for pop-up menu choose Print & Fax Preferences. The Print & Fax window appears.

4 Choose where you want to save the file. 5 Click Save. The file is saved.

Printing floor plans


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro prints, using the current printer drivers. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print dialog you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. You can print your drawing in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, whatever you require. Follow these steps to print your 2D drawing.

To set up your page for printing


1
Choose File > Page Setup (or press ShiftCommand-P). A dialog appears.

2 Click the tab you want and set your preferences. 3 After youve set your preferences, close the
Print & Fax window.

4 Close the dialog when your preferences are set.

To preview your document


1
Choose File > Print (or press Command-P). A dialog appears. (If you do not see the Preview button, click the triangle button to collapse the dialog). Preview; they appear on the toolbar.

2 Click the Preview button. The Preview appears. 2 To set any changes you make as default settings,
choose Save As Default from the Settings popup menu. format from the Format for pop-up menu.

3 There are three Tool Modes you can use in

3 Choose the printer or fax machine you want to 4 Choose the Paper Size from the pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 5 9

Chapter

8 File Menu

To print to fit page


1
Use the Move Tool to move through multiple preview pages or zoom in and use the Move Tool to focus on a specific area of the preview. Use the Text Tool to highlight text that appears in your preview. Use the Select Tool to select a specific part of your preview for zooming, cropping, rotating, etc. Choose File > Print (or press Command-P). A dialog appears. Click the disclosure triangle to expand the sheet.

N O T E : Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed.

4 Close Preview when you are done viewing.

To set preview preferences


1
Choose File > Print (or press Command-P). A dialog appears.

2 Click the Preview button. The Preview appears. 3 Choose Preview > Preferences, or press
Command-Comma (,). The Preview Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the printer you want from the Printer


pop-up menu.

3 (optional) The Presets pop-up menu allows you to

customize your print settings. You can use the standard settings, use the previous print setting or save new settings.

4 From the pop-up, choose Paper Handling. 4 Click the General tab to enter a User Name and
Window Background Color.

5 Click the Images tab and select the appearance


of the images in your preview and the size they appear. and enter the Greeking threshold in the text field. Click the Bookmarks tab to control previews youve bookmarked.

6 Click the PDF tab and select the scale you want, 7

5 Select the Scale to fit paper size checkbox. 6 Choose the paper size from the Destination
Paper Size pop-up menu. Click Print.

The Destination Paper Size pop-up menu becomes active.

8 Close the dialog and Preview, when you are done.

6 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Printing a 3D View Rendering

To print to scale
1
Choose Design > Plan Scale and select which scale you want to use for your design in the dialog that appears, then click OK.

To print a 3D View rendering


1 Open a 3D View window. 2 Choose File > Print 3D View (or press OptionShift-Command-P). pop-up menu.

3 Choose the Render Quality you want from the 4 5 6 7


Click OK. A dialog appears. Choose the printer you want to use. (optional) Change the paper settings and size. Click Print.

2 Choose File > Print to Scale (or press OptionCommand-P). The Print dialog appears.

N O T E : Grid lines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed. 3 From the Printer pop-up menu, choose the
printer you want to use. The Presets pop-up menu allows you to customize your print settings. You can use the standard settings, use the previous print setting or save new settings.

4 By default, the design prints one page per sheet

of paper. To adjust the number of pages that are printed on each sheet of paper, choose Layout from the pop-up menu, and choose the number of sheets you want from the Pages per Sheet popup menu.

5 Select the layout direction you want for each


sheet.

6 Click Print.

Printing a 3D View Rendering


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro streamlines the process used to print the 3D View images. With just a couple of clicks, you can print beautiful, full-color renderings of your design.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 6 1

Chapter

8 File Menu

6 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 9

Edit Menu
In addition to standard Apple commands like cut, copy, paste, and delete, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes more sophisticated modes of editing your design. You can copy or move entities, walls, and so on, to different floors, as well as between plan layers. You can flip or mirror your entire design, either vertically or horizontally, to make it easy to view it from any angle, or from any direction. In addition, you can move or rotate your entire floor plan at one time. More advanced concepts are also covered here, such as rotating individual entities to custom fit them into your design and elevating entities, using the Object Elevation field, to achieve perfect placement. Learn to customize settings like nudge factor, so Punch! Home Design Studio Pro works best for you.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 6 3

Chapter

9 Edit Menu
Clipboard into your drawing. By default, when you paste a selection multiple times, each time you paste, the object is offset so each is visible. You can also paste a selection without offset, so each time you paste the selection it will stack on top of the previous one. You can place the Clipboard contents as many times as necessary. Clear removes the selection.

Undo
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can undo or redo actions from the Edit menu, or dynamically using the History Inspector.

To undo an action
Choose Edit > Undo (or press Command-Z). The previous action is reversed.

To cut a selection
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To use redo
Choose Edit > Redo (or press Shift-CommandZ). The previous action is reversed.

2 Click to select the entity you want to cut. 3 Choose Edit > Cut (or press Command-X). The
selection is removed to the Clipboard.

To undo a series of actions


1
Click the History tab in the Inspector. The history list appears, with the most recent action at the bottom. actions after the selection are undone.

To copy a selection to the clipboard


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Choose the point to which you want to return. All OR


Click the single left arrow button to undo one action at a time. To redo a single action, click the right arrow button.

2 Click to select the entity you want to copy. 3 Choose Edit > Copy (or press Command-C). The
selection is copied to the Clipboard.

To paste a selection from the clipboard


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. selection is copied from the Clipboard to the design window.

To undo all
1
Click the History tab in the Inspector. The history list appears, with the most recent action at the bottom. actions since opening the file.

2 Choose Edit > Paste (or press Command-V). The

2 Click the double left arrow to undo all of the

To delete a selection
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To redo all
1
Click the History tab in the Inspector. The history list appears, with the most recent action at the bottom. actions since opening the file.

2 Click to select the entity you want to delete. 3 Press the Delete key, or choose Edit > Delete.

2 Click the double right arrow to redo all of the

Nudge
You can also precisely move features into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected features a specified distance. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, refer to Using the Grid on page 83.

Cut, Copy, and Paste


Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the

6 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Moving a Selection

To adjust Nudge settings


1
From the 2D Menu, confirm there is a checkmark next to Snap to Grid. This confirms that the Snap Grid is activated.

To move entities by dragging


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move.

2 Choose 2D > Grid Properties. OR


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu.

2 Click to select the entity you want to


To select more than one entity; hold down the Shift key, while clicking.

3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the entity

3 The Grid Properties dialog appears. 1

to a new location, then release the mouse button.

To move entities by specifying coordinates


Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking.

2 Click to select the entity you want to move

3 Choose Edit > Move. 4 Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid Spacing distance
you want to set, then click OK. Nudge moves the entity or feature one pixel at a time, instead of snapping to the grid distance.

OR
Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

N O T E : When the Snap to Grid is turned off,

To move a selection using the Nudge feature


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. nudge.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Nudge, then click the direction (up,
down, left, right) you want the selection to move. Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the entity in that direction.

4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. on the coordinates you specified.

5 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based

4 OR

Rotating a Selection
Using the rotate feature, you can easily spin an entity around any point. This is useful when you want to face an entity in a different direction from which it was drawn. Using the Rotate Tool, you can freely rotate the selection, or you can specify the exact amount of rotation, using the Rotate dialog.

Moving a Selection
Once youve placed features, you can move them by dragging or by specifying exact cartesian or polar coordinates that correspond to the reference grid. For more information on the reference grid, see Using the Grid on page 83.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 6 5

Chapter
1

9 Edit Menu
For more information, see Editing Detail Shapes, which begins on page 222.

To freely rotate an entity


Choose the Rotate button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu, rotate.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag in the
direction that you want the entity to rotate.The degree of rotation appears in the Status Bar, as you drag.

To fillet (round) a corner


1
Choose the Fillet Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. fillet.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The radius appears as you drag.

N O T E : By default, entities are rotated around their centerpoint, in 5-degree increments. 4 Release the mouse button to place.

To rotate by specifying an amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. rotate.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

4 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

To inversely fillet a corner


1
Choose the Fillet Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. fillet.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to 4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle
Unit System you want.

3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and


move the pointer toward the center of the object. The radius appears as you drag.

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

4 Press and hold the Shift key to invert the fillet.

Reshaping Elements
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you manipulate shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points and rounding or chamfering corners. When editing individual points, Point Level editing mode must be active. To activate Point Level Editing, select the entity, then on the Inspector check the Point Level radio button.

6 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Flip and Mirror


5 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner,
then release the Shift key. duplicate. Mirror creates two identical entities, facing one another.

To chamfer a corner
1
Choose the Chamfer Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to fillet.

To flip a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Horizontal.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The dimensions appear as you drag.

To flip a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Vertical.

To mirror a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Horizontal.

To mirror a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Vertical. 4 Release the mouse to stop chamfering the
corner.

Set Object Elevation


Youll find it extremely useful to set the elevation of each object or group of objects. From lifting lamps onto tables to elevating planters and benches onto your deck, exact placement is easy. With the Object Elevation field in the toolbar, you can easily move selected items vertically by simply entering the elevation you want. This on-the-fly feature makes it a snap to make sure windows, doors, plants, and so on, are in exactly the position you want. Additionally, the Object Elevation field automatically detects the elevation of nearby objects in the drawing. This allows you to precisely place a planter on top of a deck, for example.

To add additional points


1
Choose the Add Point button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to a crosshair to reflect drawing mode. point and click to add the point.

2 Position the crosshair where you want to insert a

To remove a point
1
Choose the Remove Point button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. is removed.

2 Click the point you want to remove and the point

To elevate an entity

Flip and Mirror


The Flip function takes the original feature and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that Mirror leaves the original and makes a

Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar.

2 Click to select the entity you want to

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 6 7

Chapter

9 Edit Menu
2 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The
entities are elevated.

3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches,


or just inches, then press the Enter key. The selection is elevated based on the values you entered.

N O T E : All selected entities will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the entities were originally located at various elevations.

OR 1
Choose Edit > Elevate Object. A dialog appears.

To elevate to nearby elevations


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate to an existing elevation in the design window.

2 Select the entity (or entities) you want to

2 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The


entity is elevated.

N O T E : To specify an amount in inches you may use either 18 or 18". To specify an amount in feet and inches they must be separated by a hyphen, for instance 18'-0", 8'-6", and so on. A single number like 20 will be understood as 20 inches. 3 (optional) Select Float Above Topography. The
entity will follow the lay of the land.

N O T E : The entity being elevated must be positioned on top of the surface to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a potted plant to a deck surface, drag the plant so it is positioned within the boundaries of the deck. 3 Deselect the Float Above Topography
checkbox, if it is selected.

4 Click the Object Elevation pop-up menu. A list of


detected elevations appears.

To set the elevation of a group of entities


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. entity you want to elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar.

5 Select the surface to which you want the entity


elevated. The object is elevated.

2 Hold down the Shift key and click to select each N O T E : If an object in the selection set is configured to float above the topography, deselect the checkbox to elevate the object(s) freely. 3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches,
or just inches, then press the Enter key. The selections are elevated based on the values you entered.

To set the working elevation


1
Choose Design > Set Working Elevation. A dialog appears.

2 Enter the necessary elevation in inches, or feet


and inches, and click OK.

OR 1
Choose Edit > Elevate Object. A dialog appears.

OR
While nothing is selected, the Working Elevation field is active in the toolbar. Type the working elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, then press the Enter key. Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the design based on the new working elevation.

6 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Copy To Floor

To make features follow custom topography


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to follow the custom topography. in the toolbar.

To copy from one floor to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. duplicated. (To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities.) Floor > Upper Floor (or Lower Floor to copy to a lower level).

2 Click to select the entity (or entities) you want 3 Select the Float Above Topography checkbox OR
Ctrl-click the entity and choose Float Above Topography from the shortcut menu.

2 Click to select the entity you want 3 Choose Edit > Copy to

OR
Choose Edit > Elevate Object. A dialog appears.

To move entities from one floor to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities.) to Floor > Upper Floor (or Lower Floor to move the original down one level).

2 Click to select the entity you want to move. (To 4 Select the Float Above Topography checkbox
and click OK.

3 Choose Edit > Move

Move To Plan
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can move selections to different plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position. This will be useful if you want to move a feature between two stories that you have drawn.

To move features from one plan to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities).

2 Click to select the entity you want moved.

Copy To Floor
There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the entity in its original position and places a duplicate on the floor you define. Move to Floor deletes these entities from their original position and relocates them to the floor you define.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 6 9

Chapter

9 Edit Menu
3 Click OK. The plan is moved, based on the
coordinates you specified.

3 Choose Edit > Move to


Plan, then choose the plan where you want the feature to appear.

N O T E : Coordinates are measured in inches, or they


can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

N O T E : Items on a hidden layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be moved along with the other items and features in your drawing. OR
Ctrl-click the entity you want to move and choose Move to Plan from the shortcut menu, then choose the plan where you want the entity to appear from the submenu. The selection is moved to that plan.

Rotate Entire Plan


At any point during the design process, you can rotate the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look facing a different direction on your lot.

To rotate the entire floor plan


1
Choose Edit > Rotate Entire Plan. A dialog appears.

OR
Click with two fingers on the trackpad, to select the entity you want to move. Then choose Move to Plan from the shortcut menu, and choose the plan where you want the entity to appear from the submenu. The selection is moved to that plan.

2 Select Degrees or Radians, to specify the Angle


Unit System you want.

3 Enter the angle you want the plan rotated. 4 Click OK. The plan is rotated based on the angle
measurement you specified.

Move Entire Plan


At any point during the design process, you can move the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look on different parts of your lot.

To move the entire floor plan


1
Choose Edit > Move Entire Plan. A dialog appears.

2 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields.

70 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 10

Design Menu
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to control your working environment. From setting the plan scale and units of measure to defining your ceiling heights on any floor of your design, all these tools are available in the Design Menu. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro even lets you import a scanned image into the background of your design. Once scanned and loaded into your design file, you can trace it to create a Punch! Home Design Studio Pro floor plan. You can even set the scale of the new drawing to the scale of the image. When you are done tracing, you can save the new file without the background bitmap image. Find or sketch your favorite floor plan design. Using a scanner, digital camera or with the help of a scanning service, scan the plan and save it in one of the most popular formats. The designer or owner of most home plans hold the copyright to them. Make sure you have permission before you copy a plan.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 7 1

Chapter 10 Design Menu

Setting the Working Elevation


Before you draw, be sure to set your working elevation. All entities are drawn in relation to this elevation. There are a few ways to set the working elevation as you work.

3 (optional) Repeat these steps for each floors


ceiling height you want to adjust.

Setting the Scale


Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You can customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as well as print your drawing to scale.

To set the working elevation


While nothing is selected, the Working Elevation field is active in the toolbar. Type the working elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, then press the Enter key.

To set the drawing scale


1
Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the design based on the new working elevation. Choose Design > Plan Scale. A dialog appears.

OR 1
Choose Design > Set Working Elevation (or Ctrlclick the design window). A dialog appears.

2 Select the scale setting you want, then click OK.


The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.

Unit of Measure
2 Enter the necessary elevation in inches, or feet
and inches, and click OK. You can set units of measurement by selecting either English or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened.

Default Ceiling Height


Not only can you control your working elevation and individual object elevations, but you can set your default ceiling height. Once you define your default ceiling height, all walls will be drawn to that height.

To use English measurements


1
Choose Design > Unit of Measure. A dialog appears.

To set default ceiling height


1
Choose Design > Default Ceiling Heights, then choose which floors ceiling you want to adjust from the submenu. A dialog appears.

2 Enter the ceiling height you want and click OK. 72 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Unit of Measure
2 Choose English Units from the Measurement
Units pop-up menu.

6 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options


you selected are applied.

3 (optional) From the Angle Format pop-up menu,

choose the number of decimal points you want to use.

To use Metric measurements


1
Choose Design > Unit of Measure. A dialog appears. Units pop-up menu.

2 Choose Metric Units from the Measurement

4 (optional) From the Precision pop-up menu,

choose how precise you want the measurements to appear.

3 (optional) From the Angle Format pop-up menu,

choose the number of decimal points you want to use.

5 (optional) From the Readout Format pop-up menu,


choose the format you want.

4 (optional) From the Readout Format pop-up menu,


choose the format you want.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 73

Chapter 10 Design Menu

2 Enter the True North Angle you want, or drag


the dial to set the angle.

3 Click OK.

Lot Properties
5 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options
you selected are applied. The Lot Properties dialog allows you to control not only the size of your lot, but how it is rendered in 3D.

To set defaults for previous designs


1
Follow the instructions for either English or Metric units, outlined above, then select the Open existing drawings using these settings checkbox to set the defaults for all previouslydrawn designs.

To change the lot size


1
Choose Design > Set Lot Properties. A dialog appears.

2 Under Lot Properties, enter the width and depth


values you want in the corresponding fields. updated lot size, select the Scale existing contours checkbox.

3 (optional) To scale existing contour lines to the 4 Click OK. 2 Click Save. The defaults are applied to any
previously-drawn design when it is opened.

To define the patch resolution


1
Choose Design > Set Lot Properties. A dialog appears. want (1'-0" minimum).

True North Angle


The true north angle determines the direction of the North Pole, relative to your position.

2 Under Patch Properties, enter the Resolution you


A lower value results in a more accurate 3D rendering of your topography, but may also impact performance.

To establish true north


1
Choose Design > True North Angle. A dialog appears.

3 Click OK.

74 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Work on Plan

To define the topography generation quality


1
Choose Design > Set Lot Properties. A dialog appears. slider to raise or lower the Generation Quality. Higher generation quality reduces rendering speed.

appears. Simply click the floor on which you would like to work to switch the current working floor.

2 Under Topography Generation Quality, drag the

To work on a selected floor


Choose Design > Work on Floor, then choose the floor you want to work on from the submenu.

3 Click OK.

OR
Click the Working Floor button in the toolbar, and choose the floor on which you want to work from the pop-up menu.

Work on Plan
By default, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro opens in 2D Full View with the Floor Plan tab active. You can activate another plan tab a few different ways, to accommodate you as you work.

OR
To work on the first floor, press OptionCommand-1. To work on the second floor, press OptionCommand-2. To work on the third floor, press OptionCommand-3.

To change the working plan


At the top of the toolbar, click the Plan tab you want to work on.

OR
Swipe three fingers on the trackpad to scroll through the plan tabs.

Calculate Area
Punch! Home Design Studio Pros QuickStart automatically calculates the square footage for each room of your design, as you add them. QuickStart also updates the square footage, as you change the walls in your design. You can calculate the square footage for each floor at any time. This feature makes it easy to figure how much carpet youll need to cover the first floor, for instance, or simply estimate your overall home size.

OR
Choose Design > Work on Plan, then choose the plan you want from the submenu.

OR
Press Command-1 for the Foundation plan. Press Command-2 for the Floor plan. Press Command-3 for the Electrical plan. Press Command-4 for the Plumbing plan. Press Command-5 for the Roof plan. Press Command-6 for the HVAC plan. Press Command-7 for the Deck plan. Press Command-8 for the Landscape plan. Press Command-9 for the Detail plan. Press Command-0 for the Framing plan.

To calculate floor square footage


Choose Design > Calculate Area, then choose which floors area you want to calculate. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro calculates the square footage and the total appears in the Status Bar.

Work on Floor
Use the Working Floor button to switch back and forth between the floors in your home plan. When you click the Working Floor button, a pop-up menu

N O T E : The square footage calculation is based on


wall centerline measurements.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 75

Chapter 10 Design Menu

Text Font
Use text to add information to your drawing. For example, you might add text to annotate rooms, specify a home address, the date the drawing was created, or a specific feature in your plan. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your plan drawing, using different formatting techniques for each text instance. Text you place in your drawing appears on all 2D printed output.

To change alignment of multi-line text


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Control points appear at each corner of the bounding box that surrounds the text. The text alignment determines the position of the text within this bounding box. bounding box.

2 Click to select the text you want to edit.

3 Drag a cornerpoint to set the size of the

To place text in your drawing


1
Choose the Multi-line Text button from the Annotation toolset. The pointer changes to a crosshair. place text. A dialog appears.

2 Click in the design window where you want to 3 Enter the annotation in the field. (Press the
Enter key to move to the next line).

4 Double-click to select the text you want to edit. OR


Ctrl-click the text you want to edit and choose Edit Text from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears.

4 (optional) Select the Text Alignment you want. 5 (optional) Click the Choose Font button and

change the font, style, and size, then close the dialog.

5 Select the text alignment style


you want.

6 Click OK. The text appears within the bounding


box, based on the alignment you selected.

6 Click OK to place the text.

76 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Plant Growth Projection

To place text at an angle


1
Choose the Rotated Text button in the Annotation toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to a crosshair. place text. A dialog appears.

4 To narrow the font options choose the Collection


and Family you want. The available fonts appear in the Typeface column. the size you want.

5 Choose the Size you want, or drag the slider to 6 Close the dialog and click OK to accept the
changes. The text is updated in the design window.

2 Click in the design window where you want to 3 Enter an annotation in the field.

Plant Growth Projection


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can watch your landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can watch your landscape change over 20 years.

4 Enter the Rotation Angle you want, or drag the


dial to set the angle.

For more information on adding and growing plants, see Adding 3D Features on page 33.

5 (optional) Click the Choose Font button and 6 Click OK to place the text.

To set the maximum growing age


1
Choose Design > Set Plant Growth Projection. A dialog appears.

change the font, style, and size, then close the dialog.

To edit text
1 Double-click the text you want to edit. 2 Edit the text and click OK to apply the updates. OR
Ctrl-click the text you want to edit and choose Edit Text from the shortcut menu. The text appears in a dialog.

2 Enter the maximum age you want plants to grow


and click OK. When a plants age, or plant growth, is adjusted, it will not exceed the value you entered.

To grow your landscape


1
Open the floating 3D window and position it so you can easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch mature. landscape objects are visible.

To change formatting of existing text


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to edit.

2 Click the Landscape tab so all of the plants and 3 With nothing selected, click the Properties
Inspector tab. The Plant Growth Meter appears in the Inspector.

2 Double-click to select the text you want OR


Ctrl-click the text you want to edit and choose Edit Text from the shortcut menu. The text appears in a dialog.

3 Click the Choose Font button, The Fonts dialog


appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 7 7

Chapter 10 Design Menu

Import a Floor Plan Image


After you have scanned the plan you want to trace and saved it, you are ready to import it into Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. You can import a floor plan image to the second or third floor also. To be sure all floors line up correctly, scan all plans at the same size and match the scale identically (see following section).

To load a floor plan trace image


4 Clicking the left arrow makes the plants appear
younger, while clicking the right arrow makes them appear older.

Choose Design > Load Floor Plan Trace Image. A dialog appears.

2 Find the file you want to open. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to
open, click to select it.

Watch the Inspector as you click to see the age. plants, see To customize the planting age on page 37.

N O T E : To change the planting age for individual

N O T E : You can import a plan to trace in any of the following file formats; BMP, JPG, PSD, PNG, TGA, WMF, EMF, WBMP, or PTX. 4 Click Open. The floor plan loads and appears at
the center of the design window.

Match the Drawing Scale


If the floor plan is not the correct size, you can scale it in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. Be sure to use the same scale when preparing to trace an upper floor.

To match the drawing scale


1
Choose Design > Load Floor Plan Trace Image and open the image you want. scanned image.

2 Find a wall section with a known length on the 78 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Trace the Imported Floor Plan


N O T E : If you need the imported image to be larger, the percent you enter will be greater than 100%. Conversely, if you need the image to be smaller, the percent will be less than 100%.

Trace the Imported Floor Plan


3 Open the Virtual Ruler. For information on how to
use the Virtual Ruler, see The Virtual Ruler on page 87. If you do not see the Virtual Ruler, zoom out until you can see it. wall of the scanned image. Tracing the image is an easy, straight-forward process. Using the tools explained earlier in this Users Guide, you will soon have an editable floor plan of your scan.

4 Move the Virtual Ruler into position, along the 5 Drag to extend the Virtual Ruler to match the
known length on the image. segment.

To trace the floor plan image


To trace walls, see To draw walls, which begins on page 126. To add electrical features, see Electrical Plan Tab, which begins on page 147. To place landscape plants, see To add plants, which begins on page 36.

6 Set the Virtual Ruler parallel to the wall N O T E : It is best to measure along a longer wall to minimize the margin of error when scaling.

Show/Hide an Imported Floor Plan


There may be times when it is easier to work on your floor plan if the tracing image is not visible. It is easy to switch the Floor Plan Trace image on and off.

To hide the floor plan trace image


Choose Design > Hide Floor Plan Trace Image.

To show the floor plan trace image


7
Choose Design > Resize Floor Plan Trace Image. A dialog appears. Choose Design > Show Floor Plan Trace Image.

Accessing PowerTools
The PowerTools that are available with Punch! Home Design Studio Pro are accessible in the Design menu.

8 Enter values in the Horizontal Scale and Vertical

Scale fields to equal amounts, to change the scale of the entire drawing in proportion. Repeat until you have matched the scale. Click OK.

To launch a PowerTool
1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 7 9

Chapter 10 Design Menu

2 Choose the PowerTool you want to open and click


Launch. The PowerTool appears.

8 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 11

2D Menu
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides many options for looking at your design onscreen. You can display several windows, each containing a different view of your plan. This gives you the flexibility to view your drawing as a 2D plan, as a 2D plan with a corresponding 3D view or using only Punch! 3D View. When viewing your 2D home plan, you can magnify the view by zooming in, reduce the view by zooming out, or pan the view in any direction. 3D viewing provides many options, from walking through the home plan to flying around the plan or viewing the framing or completion phase of your project. You can adjust 3D display settings using a variety of viewing features, including adding shadows, for a realistic effect, or adjusting the lighting intensity of the view. Finally, you can create a photo-realistic view of your design. In this chapter, youll learn about the numerous commands designed to let you view your design in both 2D and 3D.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 8 1

Chapter

11 2D Menu
N O T E : To access this feature, using some older wheel mouse drivers, set the Scrolling Size to None in your System Preferences.

View the 2D Plan


When initially designing your plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. In addition, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro organizes your floor plan into layers, which are each easily accessible with a single mouse click. For example, you can choose to view the deck plan with landscaping one moment, then quickly switch to view electrical and plumbing. Any combination ... any time! For information on plan visibility, see Customize Visible Plans on page 82.

To set the zoom factor


1
Choose 2D > Set Plan View Zoom. The dialog appears.

2 Enter a new zoom factor, then click OK.

To view all 2D floor plan views at once


Choose 2D > Floor Visibility > View All Floors.

To reset the 2D plan view


Choose 2D > Reset Plan View (or press Command-R). The plan is reset to the original, default view.

To view the working floor only


Choose 2D > Floor Visibility > View Working Floor Only.

Fit Your Design to Your Current Window Size


You can quickly position your entire design within your window, without using the Pan button or Zoom button.

Zoom In and Out in 2D


You can get a closer look at an area or see a larger portion of your plan drawing by zooming in and out. By dragging over the drawing, the view enlarges or decreases dynamically. You can also set the zoom factor to obtain exact zoom precision. Once youve finished viewing your plan close-up, you can return to the previous full view with one mouse click.

To fit your entire design within your window


Choose 2D > Fit to Window.

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (or drag down to zoom out).

Customize Visible Plans


During the design of your floor plan, there may be times when you want certain layers, that by default are hidden, to be visible. For example, while working on your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing will be. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers.

2 In the design window, drag up to zoom in N O T E : When the mouse is clicked, the location of the crosshair will be centered on the design window.

To zoom in using the wheel mouse


Click the design window and drag the wheel on the mouse to zoom in or out.

To hide a plan layer from view


1
Click the tab of the plan you want to customize. The changes you make only affect the active plan. the plan you want to hide.

2 Choose 2D > Plan Visibility and click to deselect 8 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Grid


reference grid, which is useful when you want to make sure certain points are specified precisely. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects, snapping objects to the grid, and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is on. You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing, grid style, and hiding or displaying. Grid properties can also be set from the shortcut menu by Control-clicking a blank space in the design window.

3 (optional) Repeat until all of the plans you want to


hide are not unchecked.

N O T E : The active plan is always unavailable.


during a Select All process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your drawing.

N O T E : Items in a hidden plan layer are not available

To view a plan layer


1
Click the tab of the plan you want to customize. The changes you make only affect the active plan. plan you want to be visible.

To define Snap to Grid settings


1
Choose 2D > Grid Properties.

2 Choose 2D > Plan Visibility and click to select the

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

3 (optional) Repeat until all of the plans you want to


see are visible.

N O T E : The active plan is always unavailable.

To view drawing layer combinations


1
Choose 2D > Plan Visibility, then choose the plan combination you want. Plans that appear with a checkmark are visible.

2 Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid Spacing distance

you want to set, then click OK. Objects you draw or drag into the design window will snap to the measurements youve defined. settings, Minor Grid Lines appear. To turn off the display of Minor Grid Lines, deselect the Show Minor Grid Lines checkbox.

3 (optional) When you change the Snap Grid

2 (optional) Repeat until the


combination you want is reached.

N O T E : Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making


it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs.

Using the Grid


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can set specific grid properties that aid in drawing your home plan. You can set points, based on the

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 8 3

Chapter

11 2D Menu
3 Click OK. The new grid style is applied. N O T E : Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric).

N O T E : Snap settings can be set as low as 0.0625 (1/16 inch) English, 0.01 meter (1 cm) Metric, and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 meter (Metric).

To select grid spacing


1
Choose 2D > Grid Properties.

To move objects/features along the grid


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

2 Click to select the object you want to 3 Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move
the object into position.

N O T E : Each time you press an arrow key, the selection moves one increment that you have set in the Snap Grid settings.

To turn off Snap to Grid


Choose 2D > Snap to Grid to deselect Snap to Grid.

OR 2 Enter new Horizontal and Vertical measurements


under the Visible Grid Spacing section. Ctrl-click the design window and choose Snap to Grid from the shortcut menu. The feature is disabled. To enable, simply reselect Snap to Grid in the menu.

3 Click OK. The new grid spacing is applied.

To change the grid style


1
Choose 2D > Grid Properties.

To display the grid


Choose 2D >Show Grid.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Show Grid from the shortcut menu. The grid appears in the design window. To hide the grid, choose Hide Grid from the menu.

AutoSnap Options
Snap points are automatically enabled as you design. Snap points are designated points or hot spots where your pointer can lock-in, for help with accurate placement. By default, when snap points are enabled, the midpoint and endpoints appear when your pointer

2 Choose Line Grid or Dot Grid from the Style popup menu.

8 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

AutoSnap Options
reaches these points. You can control these, and other hot spots or points, to which your pointer snaps in the Preferences dialog, which is available in the Home Design Studio Pro menu. In addition to snap points, you can control the laser alignment that appears when your pointer is in alignment with an existing point, as you are dragging. On segment displays when the crosshair is actively on a segment as you drag.

To control automatic snaps


1
Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

Object Center displays the center of an object as you drag to place within its bounds. A useful example would be centering a lamp on a table.

2 Click the Editing tab to access the snap options.

4 Click Save.

To control snap sensitivity


1
Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Click the Editing tab to access the snap options. 3 Under Snapping and alignment, drag the

Selection sensitivity slider to change the radius of the snap point. Notice, as the Snap Sensitivity is adjusted, the actual radius of the snap point is affected.

3 Under Snapping and alignment, select or deselect


the snap points you want. Intersections displays the intersection of two lines.

Sensitivity = 0

Sensitivity =10

4 Click Save to accept your changes.

To control laser alignment


1
Choose Home Design Studio Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

Segment Center displays the center point along a segment, as you drag.

2 Click the Editing tab to access the snap options. 3 Select, or deselect, the Use lase alignment
checkbox to enable or disable the laser line.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 8 5

Chapter

11 2D Menu
button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require.

3 Release the mouse button. 4 Drag in the direction you want to offset the

dimension and release to place the dimension.

To use the length dimension tool


1 4 Click Save.
Choose the Length Dimension button from the Annotation toolset pop-up menu. define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require.

2 Position the crosshair in the design window to

Dimensioning
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro automatically displays dimensions, as you draw, making it easy to precisely place walls, doors, and other items in your plan drawing. The powerful Dimension Wall Spacing Tool will be especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall Spacing Tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved. Youll find this tool extremely useful when measuring between the main house and the walls of other buildings, like a garden shed or playhouse. In some instances, you might want to print your plan drawing without dimension annotation. You have the option of turning off automatic dimensioning, if you dont want it displayed on the drawing page or as you draw.

3 Release the mouse button. 4 Drag in the direction you want to offset the

dimension and release to place the dimension.

To use the zero-offset dimension tool


1
Choose the Zero-offset Dimension button from the Annotation toolset popup menu. define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require. measurement.

2 Position the crosshair in the design window to

3 Release the mouse button to set the

To use the wall-spacing dimension tool


1
Choose the Dimension Wall Spacing button from the Annotation toolset popup menu. starting point, then drag to the second wall. measurement.

To use the diameter dimension tool


1
Choose the Diameter Dimension button from the Annotation toolset pop-up menu. the Detail tab, to define the starting point. The dimension automatically snaps to the opposite edge of the circle. counterclockwise, to position the diameter dimension, before releasing the mouse button.

2 Click a wall in the design window to define the 3 Release the mouse button to set the

2 Click a point on the edge of a circle, drawn from

3 (optional) Move the mouse clockwise or

To use the offset dimension tool


1
Choose the Offset Dimension button from the Annotation toolset pop-up menu. define the starting point; hold down the mouse

To use the leader dimension tool


1
Choose the Leader Dimension button from the Annotation toolset pop-up menu.

2 Position the crosshair in the design window to

8 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Control Topography Line Visibility


2 Position the crosshair in the design window to
define the starting point (this is the point where the arrow appears); hold down the mouse button and drag to draw the first segment of the dimension. direction you want the second segment to be placed. dimension.

Control Topography Line Visibility


There may be times when you will want to work on the Landscape Plan, but you may want to hide the topography lines. This is a one-click procedure.

3 Release the mouse button and drag in the 4 Click to set the end point and place the

To show topography lines


Choose 2D > Show Topography Lines.

To hide topography lines


Choose 2D > Hide Topography Lines.

To turn off automatic dimensioning


Choose 2D > Hide Automatic Dimensions.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Hide Automatic Dimensions from the shortcut menu.

The Virtual Ruler


The Virtual Ruler is a handy feature for measuring items in your home plan that are not automatically dimensioned. You can undock the ruler at any time, leaving it active, or hide it from view with one mouse click. The Virtual Ruler is an easy way to measure at an angle, too.

To hide window and door dimensions


Choose 2D > Hide Window & Door Callouts.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Hide Window & Door Callouts from the shortcut menu.

To measure using the Virtual Ruler


1
Choose 2D > Show Virtual Ruler. The Virtual Ruler appears in the design window. want to measure. The measurement appears in the center of the Virtual Ruler. and drag it to a new location in the design window.

2 Drag an endpoint on the ruler in the direction you 3 (optional) Click the center of the Virtual Ruler T I P : Zoom in on the area you are measuring so you
have a close-up view of the ruler.

To change the endpoint style


1
Choose 2D > Dimension Properties. A dialog appears.

2 Choose the endpoint style you want from the


Style menu.

To hide the Virtual Ruler


Choose 2D > Hide Virtual Ruler.

3 (optional) Click the Font button and choose the 4 Click OK. All dimensions are updated to reflect
your changes.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Hide Virtual Ruler from the shortcut menu.

font style and size in which you want the dimension text to appear, then close the dialog.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 8 7

Chapter

11 2D Menu

8 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 12

3D Menu
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you view your design in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your design completely unique. In the 3D View window, you can view your design from a variety of angles. Using Decorator Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your design, before picking up a paintbrush! With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing, and so on. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro integrates the exclusive, patented RealModel technology, making it easy to construct an actual scale model of any home you draw. Once you have completed your home design, details are automatically transferred to RealModel. Instructions on building your home model are printed, with numbered sections and floor plan templates that make assembling it simple. This hands-on model shows you how to improve your design and save on construction costs, before you break ground. This is the perfect tool for presenting your ideas to your builder or architect.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 8 9

Chapter

12 3D Menu

Working with 2D and 3D Windows


At some point during your design process, you will want to view your design in 3D.

To reset your 3D view


Choose 3D > Reset 3D View (or press ShiftCommand-R).

To display a floating 3D view


1
Choose the 3D Window View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A floating 3D view appears. the bottom right corner.

Moving around in 3D
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides two interactive 3D viewing options, the 3D Walkthrough and Fly-Around views. Using interactive viewing, you can vary the viewing level by adjusting the altitude and height. Viewing speed and camera angle can also be adjusted to provide the best viewing capabilities available.

2 Drag to move the window, or resize by dragging

To view your design using Walkthrough


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Choose the Walkthrough button in the 3D
View toolbar.

OR
Choose 3D > 3D Navigation Method > Walkthrough.

3 In the 3D View, drag to navigate around your

design; drag up to move inward, down to move outward.

To display a 3D view only


Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears.

To change Walkthrough elevation


Hold down the Control key while pressing the mouse button and drag to raise and lower the viewpoint, alternately.

OR
Hold down the right mouse button and drag your mouse.

OR
Using two fingers on the trackpad, swipe up or down.

To specify an absolute Walkthrough elevation


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Double-click the Walkthrough button. OR 90 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Moving around in 3D
Choose 3D > 3D Navigation Method > Walkthrough Elevation. A dialog appears.

To see an aerial or birds eye view of your design


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Choose the Aerial View button in the 3D
View toolbar.

OR 3 Enter a new Walk Through Elevation, in inches or


feet and inches, then click OK. Choose 3D > 3D Navigation Method > Aerial View.

3 Drag to pan around the 3D View. OR


In the 3D View, hold down the left mouse button and press the arrow keys to position the aerial view incrementally.

To specify the viewpoint angle


1
Open a floating 3D View window, as explained previously. can see the Viewpoint icon and drag it to a new position. to view. Your 3D view is updated automatically.

2 In the design window, zoom out until you

4 Ctrl-click and drag to rotate around the


designated center of reference.

3 Drag the arrow to point in the direction you want


where the viewpoint originates.

N O T E : The placement of the icon will be the point

To change your aerial view altitude


1
Double-click the Aerial View button.

OR
Choose 3D > 3D Navigation Method > Aerial View Altitude. A dialog appears.

To view your design using Fly-Around


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Choose the Fly-Around button in the 3D
View toolbar.

OR
Choose 3D > 3D Navigation Method > Fly-Around.

3 In the 3D View, drag to navigate around your


design; dragging up and down changes your viewing angle, while dragging side-to-side navigates around the designated center of reference.

2 Enter the Aerial View Altitude, in inches or feet


and inches, then click OK.

OR
Using two fingers on the trackpad, swipe up or down.

To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse


Hold down the Control key while pressing the mouse button and drag to raise and lower the viewpoint, alternately.

To specify a center of reference in Fly-Around mode


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 In the design window, zoom out until you
can see the Center of Reference icon and drag it to a new position.

OR
Hold down the right mouse button and drag your mouse.

OR
Press down with two fingers on the trackpad, and swipe up or down.

N O T E : The location of the icon will be the point that Fly-Around mode and the Aerial View revolve around.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 91

Chapter

12 3D Menu
A dialog appears.

To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Double-click the Fly-around button. OR
Choose 3D > 3D Navigation Method > Fly-Around Altitude. A dialog appears.

2 Drag the Speed slider to slow down or speed up


the navigation speed.

3 Click Apply. N O T E : The faster the viewing speed, the lower the
quality of the rendered 3D image.

Setting a Viewpoint
3 Enter a new Fly-Around Altitude, then click OK.
You can position your 3D view quickly using one of the preset views.

To adjust the 3D camera angle


1
Click the Navigation and Rendering Options button in the 3D View toolbar.

To position using a preset view


Choose 3D > Set Viewpoint, then choose an edge from which you want to view the submenu.

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Options. A dialog appears. The 3D view appears from the selected edge.

Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pros five rendering options you can view your 3D design in a variety of ways. To access the 3D rendering styles, be sure 3D Rendering mode is activated. Framing mode displays your design to show the studs, rafters, and other framing features.

2 Drag the Camera Angle slider to make it thinner


or wider.

3 Click Apply.

Color Wireframe mode displays your design on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls will be displayed in the color you have defined for the Floor Plan Tab. Textured Wireframe mode also displays your design on a white background. But, each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the material you have applied to it. ClearView lets you see potential conflicts hidden by walls, for example, between utilities, and so on.

To increase or decrease the Fly-Around and Walkthrough speed


1
Click the Navigation and Rendering Options button in the toolbar.

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Options.

92 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Accessing the 3D Rendering Styles

To render using color Wireframe mode


1
Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears. toolbar, then choose Wireframe from the pop-up menu.

To view a room using ClearView


1
Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears.

2 Click the Rendering Style button in the

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Style > Wireframe.

N O T E : While in color Wireframe mode, your design


will be displayed on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls will be displayed in the color you have defined for the Floor Plan tab.

To render using shaded Wireframe mode


1
Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears. then choose Textured Wireframe from the popup menu.

2 Click the Rendering Style button in the toolbar,


then choose ClearView from the pop-up menu.

2 Click the Rendering Style button in the toolbar,

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Style > ClearView.

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Style > Textured Wireframe.

N O T E : While in Textured Wireframe mode, your design will be displayed on a white background. Each feature of your floor plan will be shaded in the color of the material you have applied to it.

To render a framing view


1
Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears. then choose Framing from the pop-up menu.

2 Click the Rendering Style button in the toolbar, OR


Choose 3D > Rendering Style > Framing.

To control the opacity of a ClearView rendering


1
Click the Navigation and Rendering Options button in the toolbar.

N O T E : Wall attachments such as plumbing and electrical components are not visible while in framing mode.

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Options. A dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 93

Chapter

12 3D Menu

To render view with materials


1
Choose the 3D View button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. A full 3D view appears. then choose Solid from the pop-up menu.

2 Click the Rendering Style button in the toolbar, OR


Choose 3D > Rendering Style > Solid.

Adjusting 3D Rendering Quality


2 Drag the ClearView Opacity slider to adjust the
transparency/opacity. Your floor plan appears more translucent or opaque, depending on your setting. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro technology includes anti-aliased, photo-realism. With this technology, you can view your plan with incredible detail, whether you are in ClearView, viewing materials, viewing framing, and so on.

To render a plan in 3D final quality


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Render Final Quality button in
the toolbar.

OR
Choose 3D > Render 3D Final Quality.

To set 3D render quality


Choose 3D > 3D Final Quality > Low. This results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output. Choose 3D > 3D Final Quality > High. This results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output. Choose 3D > 3D Final Quality > Ultra-High. This results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output. Choose 3D > 3D Final Quality > Excellent. This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.

N O T E : You can stop the rendering process at any time by pressing the Esc. key.

Setting 3D Rendering Options


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can customize the render quality of many of the

94 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Lighting and Shadows


customized features you use. By setting these features to a lower render quality, you can speed up the rendering time. Choose 3D > Lighting Options. A dialog appears.

To set the render quality


1
Click the Navigation and Rendering Options button in the 3D View toolbar.

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Options. A dialog appears.

2 Click the Geometry Quality tab.

3 (optional) Deselect the Turn sunlight on 4 Drag the Brightness slider to increase or
decrease the suns brightness. effect.

checkbox, to bypass all of the sunlight settings.

5 Click Apply and render the design to see the 3 Drag the slider to set the rendering quality for
each feature you want to change.

To change the sun angle


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained earlier. 2 Click the Lighting button in the 3D View toolbar. OR
Choose 3D > Lighting Options. A dialog appears.

4 Click Apply. N O T E : The lower the render quality is set, the faster 3D View will render your design.

Adding Lighting and Shadows


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can customize the lighting and shadows. You can virtually see how that big oak tree casts shadows into your living room window.

3 Drag the Direction Angle

slider to position the sun in the direction you want, relative to design. Notice the sun moves as you drag.

OR

To adjust the sunlight brightness in a 3D View


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained earlier. 2 Click the Lighting button in the 3D View
toolbar.

Use the Angle field or stepper controls to specify the angle you want.

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 95

Chapter

12 3D Menu
4 Drag the Brightness slider to increase or
decrease the brightness.

4 Drag the Overhead Angle

slider to position the sun at the overhead position you want. Notice the sun moves as you drag.

5 Click Apply.

OR
Use the Angle field or stepper controls to specify the angle you want.

To render shadows to a 3D view


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Choose 3D > Render Shadows. Shadows are
rendered in the 3D View.

5 Click Apply. N O T E : You can further specify the sun positioning by defining your exact location, as well as the date and time. For more information, see Customizing the Sun Position, which begins on page 96.

To control shadow quality


Choose 3D > Shadow Quality, then choose the quality you want from the submenu.

To adjust the suns shadow quality in 3D


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Lighting button in the 3D View toolbar. OR
Choose 3D > Lighting Options. A dialog appears.

Customizing the Sun Position


Using the Sun Position and Lighting Assistant you can establish your sites location, relative to the sun, virtually anywhere in the world. Then, adjust the lighting controls, hour-by-hour. This ensures that your design will render with accurate sun angle and intensity any time, any day of the year.

3 Select the Use optimal quality checkbox, for


highest quality.

To set a date and time for your site


1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears.

OR
Deselect the Use optimal quality checkbox. The slider becomes active. Drag the slider to change the suns shadow quality.

4 Click Apply. N O T E : A lower shadow quality speeds up rendering times, while a higher quality slows down rendering times.

To adjust ambient light in 3D


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Lighting button in the 3D View toolbar. OR
Choose 3D > Lighting Options. A dialog appears.

2 Under Date & Time, click the arrow buttons to

choose the month you want and select the date in the calendar. To use the current date, click the Use Current Date button.

3 Under Ambient Light, drag the Intensity slider


to increase or decrease the intensity.

3 To change the time, select the hour, minutes, or

seconds and enter the value you want, or use the

96 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Customizing the Sun Position


stepper controls to increase or decrease the selection. or East/West from the corresponding pop-up menu.

4 To use the current time, click the Use Current


Time button. checkbox.

6 Choose the time zone from the UTC Offset popup menu.

5 (optional) Select the Daylight Savings Time 6 Click OK.

Click OK.

To edit a locations details


1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears. city from the Country pop-up menu. pop-up menu. appears.

To set a specific location


1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears. from the Country pop-up menu. menu.

2 Choose the country in which you want to edit a 3 Choose the city you want to edit from the City 4 Click the Edit button. A dialog

2 Under Location, choose the country you want 3 Choose the city you want from the City pop-up 4 Click OK.

To add a city
1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears. city.

2 Choose the country in which you want to add a 3 Click the Add button. A dialog
appears.

5 Enter the City Name in the corresponding field. 6 To specify the citys location, click the map to
set its coordinates.

OR
Enter the citys coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude fields. Be sure to choose North/South or East/West from the corresponding pop-up menu.

4 Enter the City Name in the corresponding field. 5 To specify the citys location, click the map to
set its coordinates.

Choose the time zone from the UTC Offset popup menu.

8 Click OK.

OR
Enter the citys coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude fields. Be sure to choose North/South

To delete a city
1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 9 7

Chapter

12 3D Menu
5 Click OK, then click OK again in the dialog that
appears.

2 Choose the country from which you want to 3 Click the Delete button. A dialog
appears.

delete a city from the Country pop-up menu.

To customize the shadow contrast


1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears. Contrast tab. The Shadow Contrast controls appear.

2 Click the Lighting button and choose the Shadow

4 Click to select the city you want to delete.


Hold down the Shift key, as you click, to select more than one city.

5 Click Delete and then click Delete again, when


asked to confirm the deletion.

3 Drag the sliders to adjust the hours contrast 4 (optional) Select the Adjust your designs
lighting based on these values checkbox to update your current drawing. appears.

level; drag up to heighten, drag down to lower.

6 Click OK.

To customize the scene brightness


1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears. Brightness tab. The Scene Brightness controls appear.

5 Click OK, then click OK again in the dialog that

2 Click the Lighting button and choose the Scene

To customize the shading intensity


1
Choose 3D > Sun Position and Lighting Assistant. A dialog appears. Intensity tab. The Shading Intensity controls appear.

2 Click the Lighting button and choose the Shading

3 Drag the sliders to adjust the hours brightness;


drag up to brighten, drag down to darken.

4 (optional) Select the Adjust your designs

lighting based on these values checkbox to update your current drawing.

3 Drag the sliders to adjust the hours intensity;


drag up to heighten, drag down to lower.

98 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Decorator Palette


4 (optional) Select the Adjust your designs
lighting based on these values checkbox to update your current drawing. appears.

To hide the Decorator Palette


Choose 3D > Hide Decorator Palette (or press Command-L). The Palette is hidden.

5 Click OK, then click OK again in the dialog that 1

To build a palette
Choose 3D > Show Decorator Palette (or press Command-L). The Palette appears. empty palette space.

Using the Decorator Palette


Punch! Decorator Palette allows you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so they can be easily used throughout your design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other segment of your design. You simply load the Decorator Palette with the colors and materials you want to apply to your 3D view, then save the palette for use in later sessions. Decorator Palettes can even be exported and imported for use in different drawings.

2 Drag a color or material from a library into an

To apply colors and materials from the palette


Drag the color or material you want from the palette space to the surface in 3D. The selection appears in the 3D View.

T I P : To apply the same color or material to multiple surfaces in the 3D View, use AutoClick Placement; hold down the Option key as you click to tag each surface and then release to apply.

To clear a palette entry


Ctrl-click the entry you want to remove and choose Clear Entry from the shortcut menu.

To display the Decorator Palette


1 Open a 3D view, as previously explained. 2 Choose 3D > Show Decorator Palette (or press
Command-L). The Palette appears.

To search for a color or material in a palette


1 Select the palette in which you want to search. 2 Enter the name, or part of the name, of the color
or material you want to find. All palette entries that do not match the search criteria appear behind a shadow.

In the example below, a search for stone highlights the two materials with stone in their names and shades the other entries.

N O T E : If a 3D view is not open, the palettes are not available.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 9 9

Chapter

12 3D Menu

To expand a group
Click the disclosure triangle next to the group name that you want to expand. The group expands and displays your entries.

Managing Decorator Palettes


Your Decorator Palettes are saved separately from the rest of your design. That means you can use the same palette in different drawings, different sessions, or even share palettes with colleagues.

Managing Groups
You can organize the colors and materials of each room by assigning groups. Decorator Palette provides you with 15 blank group labels.

To save a custom palette


1
Double-click the palette name (the initial palette is named Default Palette). The text becomes editable.

To create a group
1
Drag the material or color you want into the palette. Repeat with additional materials or colors, as desired. want, double-click the Group 1 label. The text becomes editable.

2 When you have all the materials and colors you

2 Enter the name of the palette and press the


Enter key. The new name appears.

3 Enter the name of group and press the Enter key.


The new name appears.

To copy an existing palette


Click the Palettes action button and choose Add Copy of Current Palette from the pop-up menu. A copy of that palette appears in the palette list window, with a number signifying that its a copy.

To collapse a group
Click the disclosure triangle next to the group name that you want to collapse. The group collapses and displays only its assigned name.

1 0 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Customize the 3D View

Customize the 3D View


There may be times when you will need to see your design without specific features, objects, and so on. With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you have complete control over what parts of your design are visible.

To delete a palette
1
Select the palette you want to delete, in the Palette list. Delete Palette from the pop-up menu.

To hide/view specific features in 3D


1 Open a 3D View window, as explained previously. 2 Click the Navigation and Rendering
Options button in the 3D View toolbar.

2 Click the Palettes action button and choose

OR
Choose 3D > Rendering Options. A dialog appears.

N O T E : You cannot delete the Default Palette.

To import a custom palette


1
Click the Palettes action button and choose Import Palette from the pop-up menu. The Open dialog appears. it.

2 Find the palette you want to import, and select 3 Click Open. The palette appears in the Decorator
Palette.

4 (optional) To rename the palette, double-click


the name and enter a new one, then press the Enter key.

3 Select, or deselect, the feature(s) that you want


to show or hide in 3D.

To export a palette
1
Select the palette you want to export in the Palette list. Export Palette from the pop-up menu. The Save Palette dialog appears. field.

4 Click Apply.

2 Click the Palettes action button and choose

Saving Custom 3D Views


You can save 3D views you have set that can be easily accessed at any time.

3 Enter a name for the palette in the Save As 4 Choose where you want to save the palette. 5 Click Save.

To save a 3D view
1
Set the 3D View with the direction and angle that you want to save. View Name dialog appears.

2 Choose 3D > Saved 3D Views > Save 3D View. The

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 0 1

Chapter

12 3D Menu

Preparing to Construct a RealModel


3 Enter a View Name in the field and click Save.
The view is added to the Saved 3D Views submenu. When constructing a RealModel, youll need to get a few supplies together first. Visit your local craft supply or hobby store to purchase these materials.

Items youll need to construct a RealModel


Construction material foam board or poster board Adhesive spray adhesive, rubber cement or glue stick, and so on Tape Straight pins Straight-edge ruler Artists knife or scalpel

To access a saved view


Choose 3D > Saved 3D Views, then choose the view you want from the submenu.

To organize the 3D View views


1
Choose 3D > Saved 3D Views > Organize 3D Views. A dialog appears.

To open the RealModel view


Choose the RealModel button from the 3D View toolset pop-up menu. Your design appears in the RealModel View and RealModel appears in the Menu Bar.

Defining Scale
2 To rename a view, select the view name and click
the Rename button, then enter the name you want. The scale you choose will define the actual size of your model. All model templates will print in this scale. For example, if you choose 1/2"=1' - a ten-foot wall will print as a five-inch template.

OR 3 Double-click to select the text and enter the


name you want. Delete button.

To select scale
1
Choose RealModel > Model Scale. A dialog appears.

4 To delete a view, select the view and click the OR


To delete a view, click to select the view and press the Delete key.

5 Click OK to close the dialog. 1 0 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Setting Print Parameters


2 Choose the Scale Type you want from the pop-up
menu. Architectural offers an X-inches-to-thefoot scale (x representing a value). Hobby offers standard gauge scale options. Ratio offers a 1-to-X scaling (x representing a value).

6 Enter the scale to which you want your page to


print, in the Scale field.

Click OK to apply your page setup. The settings are applied to the printer(s) you chose.

3 Select the Scale you want. 4 Click OK.

Printing Templates
The templates are used to guide you, as you build your RealModel. They will specify which wall section is attached to other walls and where doors and windows are placed. Floor templates show where each wall is placed. You have the choice of printing all wall, roof, or floor templates at one time or printing each individually.

Setting Print Parameters


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro prints using the current printer. You can, however, print using any installed, Apple-compatible printer. In the Print dialog you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. For more information, see Printing floor plans, which begins on page 59.

To print wall templates


1
Choose > RealModel > Print Template. A dialog appears.

To set up your page for printing


1
Choose File > Page Setup (or press ShiftCommand-P). A dialog appears.

2 Select the All Wall Templates button and click


OK.

3 In the dialog that appears, confirm your default


printer selection, then click Print.

To print roof templates


1
Choose > RealModel > Print Template. A dialog appears. OK.

2 Select the All Roof Templates button and click 2 To set any changes you make as default settings,
choose Save As Default from the Settings popup menu. format from the Format for pop-up menu.

3 In the dialog that appears, confirm your default


printer selection, then click Print.

3 Choose the printer or fax machine you want to 4 Choose the Paper Size from the pop-up menu.
To enter a custom paper size, choose Manage Custom Sizes. Enter the custom paper size information, in the corresponding fields, and click OK.

To print floor templates


1
Choose > RealModel > Print Floor Template and choose the floor you want to print from the submenu. printer selection, then click Print.

2 In the dialog that appears, confirm your default

5 Select the Orientation you want.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 103

Chapter
1

12 3D Menu

To print a specific, individual template


Choose > RealModel > Print Template. A dialog appears. Number field becomes active. and click OK.

Printing Template Materials and Colors


To add a realistic look to your RealModel, you can print sheets of materials and colors to be applied to your model and trimmed to size. With this process, you can see what your design will look like. Follow these steps for every wall and roof on your model.

2 Select Single Template button. The Template 3 Enter the Template Number you want to print 4 In the dialog that appears, confirm your default
printer selection, then click Print.

To print template materials and colors


1
Decide which material you want to print first.

Constructing Wall Templates


You will notice that some wall templates will have darker, shaded edges. These shaded areas indicate the thickness of your construction material. Use these as guidelines on where to attach adjoining walls. The directions for connecting the walls will be printed on each page. Be sure to transfer this information to the template, before cutting it out.

To construct a wall template


1
Attach each wall template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive. template. Be sure to include shaded areas. counterpart.

2 Cut out each wall section to the exact size of the 3 Attach each template to its appropriate

2 Choose RealModel > Print Material or Color. A


dialog appears.

Constructing Roof Templates


Although your roof templates may print attached at points, cut out each roof section separately from your construction material to the exact size of the template.

3 Enter the template number of the material or

color you want to print, then click OK. The Print dialog appears. printer selection, then click Print.

4 In the dialog that appears, confirm your default N O T E : It is best to print and assemble the material
and color on each wall, before moving on to the next wall. If you choose not to do this, you should label each material template and color, as they are printed, to make identifying them easier, when attaching them to your model.

To construct a roof template


1
Attach each roof template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive. the template. counterpart.

2 Cut out each roof section to the exact size of 3 Attach each roof template to its appropriate 4 Secure the roof to the walls.

1 0 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your Model

Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your Model


Once the materials and colors have been printed, you will need to affix them to the appropriate template and trim them to size. It is best to use spray adhesive, glue stick or tape for this step, as using white glue may cause the paper to wrinkle.

To attach the template materials and colors


1
Affix the material to the proper wall template, which has already been attached to the construction material. wall template.

2 Carefully trim around the outside edges of the 3 Cut out the door and window openings. 4 Attach each template to its appropriate
counterpart.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 0 5

Chapter

12 3D Menu

1 0 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 13

Window Menu
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides several options for managing your window orientations and visibility.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 0 7

Chapter

13 Window Menu

Controlling Window Orientation


You can quickly minimize windows or zoom them to maximize your view. When you have multiple drawing files open at one time, each file appears in the Window menu. You can navigate through them by choosing the one you want to view.

To minimize a window
Choose Window > Minimize (or press Command-M). The active window is minimized to the dock.

N O T E : Minimized windows appear with a diamond icon beside them on the menu.

To maximize a window
Choose Window > Zoom. The active window is maximized.

To bring all windows to front


Choose Window > Bring All to Front. All hidden windows are brought to the front.

To bring a drawing file to the front


In the Window menu, choose the drawing file you want to see.

Controlling the Inspector Visibility


As you work, the number of open windows tends to accumulate. You can hide the Inspector to create more workspace, and then reopen it when needed.

To show the Inspector


Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I).

To hide the Inspector


Choose Window > Hide Inspector (or press Command-I).

1 0 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 14

Help Menu
In addition to the Users Guide, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides many ways to get help or learn more about features of the program.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 0 9

Chapter

14 Help Menu

Video Step-by-Step Tutorials


You can get started easily with Punch! Home Design Studio Pros Step-by-Step Tutorials. They are available at all times, in the Training Center.

To access the step-by-step tutorials


1
Choose Help > Training Center. The Training Center appears.

You can also open the corresponding tutorial drawing, and the written documentation associated with the tutorial. Click the left button for the drawing file, and the right button for the written tutorial.

4 (optional) Click the Do It tab for detailed


articles regarding your topic.

The topics appear in the left pane of the Training Center. The pop-up menu in the top left corner lets you choose to view the content by Rooms or Categories.

About Punch! Product Providers


You can access information about each manufacturer of name-brand content, for example, materials, paint, and so on. This information is available from the Home Design Studio Pro menu.

2 Click the disclosure triangle to display the list of


tutorials available.

To access information about product providers


1
From the Punch! Home Design Studio Pro menu, choose Content Providers. The Content Providers dialog appears.

3 Choose the topic you want and the tutorial video


appears in the window.

1 1 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

About Punch! Home Design Studio Pro


2 Select a product providers name to read
information about them.

3 Click OK.

About Punch! Home Design Studio Pro


You can access your serial number or confirm the version of your program, with one click, at any time.

To access your serial number


From the Home Design Studio Pro menu, choose About Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. The programs splash screen appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 1 1

Chapter

14 Help Menu

1 1 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Part 3

FROM THE GROUND UP

As with any actual building project, the best place to start is with the lot. The topography tools let you simulate your actual lot, then you can draw your walls and foundation features. Next, personalize your design by adding doors, windows, and so on, to create exactly the design you want. Once youve completed your home foundation and floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro features a suite of tools so you can design these important features. The fun really begins when you start personalizing your dream homes exterior. Decks add value while landscaping adds beauty.

Chapter 15: Chapter 16: Chapter 17: Chapter 18: Chapter 19: Chapter 20: Chapter 21: Chapter 22: Chapter 23: Chapter 24: Chapter 25:

QuickStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

115 119 125 147 165 173 183 191 199 215 223

CHAPTER 15

QuickStart
For many people, visualizing their dream home does not start with the outside shape of the building, but with a wish list of individual rooms. Now you can create complex floor plans from the inside out, by laying out your home design room by room. Create entire rooms with one click of the mouse! Build an entire floor in just seconds, with Punch! QuickStart.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 15

Chapter

15 QuickStart

Launching QuickStart

QuickStart launches automatically upon starting the application.

To control the visibility of overlapping rooms


Double-click the room you want to bring to the front.

Adding Rooms
You can create rooms with a few simple clicks of the mouse. Punch! allows you to use predesigned room dimensions, customize these dimensions, or create your room from scratch. The QuickStart toolbar features eleven color-coded room types, as well as the option to create a custom room to be saved in the toolbar. Simply drag your room type into the design window and change your rooms dimensions if you wish. When youre finished placing rooms, click the Continue button to update your design!

To resize rooms
1 Click to select the room you want to resize. 2 Drag a corner point to the desired size.

To edit your design


Click the Continue button. Your drawing opens in the design window.

Creating Rooms
In addition to the predefined rooms available for quick placement, you can create custom rooms to add to the toolbar.

To create a room for placement


1
Click the QuickStart action popup menu and choose Add Room. The Add QuickStart Room dialog appears.

To place auto-sized rooms


1 Click to select the room you want to create. 2 Click in the design window to place the room. 3 Continue to place rooms until youve created the
desired design.

2 Enter a Room Name in the field. 3 Specify the Room Dimensions in the fields (in
feet).

4 Click the color next to Room Color and choose a


color to represent the room, then close the window.

5 Click OK. The room is updated in the toolbar. 4 Click the Continue button to edit your design in
the design window.

To edit a rooms properties


1 Select the room you want to edit. 2 Click the QuickStart action pop-up menu and 3 Enter a Room Name in the field.
choose Edit Room. The Edit QuickStart Room dialog appears.

T I P : You can resize an auto-sized room by clicking on a wall and expanding it to the length you want.

1 1 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Drawing Settings


4 Specify the Room Dimensions in the fields (in
feet).

2 Enter a new zoom factor, then click OK.

5 Click the color next to Room Color and choose a


color to represent the room, then close the window. the toolbar.

To reset the 2D plan view


Choose 2D > Reset Plan View (or press Command-R).

6 Click OK. Your room appears at the bottom of

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Reset Plan View from the shortcut menu. The plan is reset to the original, default view.

To delete a room
1 Select the room you want to delete. 2 Click the QuickStart action pop-up menu and
choose Delete Room. The room is removed from the toolbar.

To fit your entire design within your window


Choose 2D > Fit to Window.

Controlling Drawing Settings


You can easily control the drawing space by moving from floor to floor and setting your zoom level.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Fit to Window from the shortcut menu.

To work on a selected floor


Choose Design > Work on Floor, then choose the floor you want to work on from the submenu.

To change the default wall heights


In the Inspector, enter the height you want for the walls on each floor, in feet and inches, in the corresponding fields. Press the Enter key to accept each value.

OR
Click the Working Floor button in the toolbar, and choose the floor on which you want to work from the pop-up menu.

To control automatic roof options


To turn off the automatically built roofs, deselect the Build roofs for structures checkbox.

OR
To work on the first floor, press OptionCommand-1. To work on the second floor, press OptionCommand-2. To work on the third floor, press OptionCommand-3.

OR
To turn on the automatically built roofs, select the Build roofs for structures checkbox.

To regenerate roofs in the design window


1
In the Inspector, select the Build roofs for structures checkbox to automatically build a roof. checkbox to regenerate the roof when walls are resized in the design window.

To set the zoom factor


1
Choose 2D > Set Plan View Zoom. The dialog appears.

2 Select the Automatically rebuilds roofs

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 1 7

Chapter

15 QuickStart

Deselect the Automatically rebuilds roofs checkbox to disable roof regeneration in the design window.

Show QuickStart Help Window at Startup


You can turn the initial QuickStart Help Window on and off, to suit your needs.

To hide QuickStart help at Startup


In the Welcome dialog, deselect the Display this window on startup checkbox.

To show QuickStart at Startup


In the Welcome dialog, select the Display this window on startup checkbox.

1 1 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 16

Foundation Plan Tab


Just like building in the real world, the best place to start is with solid foundation. The Foundation Plan Tab includes tools to help you add the foundation details to your plan. You will also learn to add stiffener beams, draw piers, and define post tension and slope.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 1 9

Chapter

16 Foundation Plan Tab

Setting Foundation Properties


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides the tools to create a good foundation in your home plan. From wall thickness, slab height, and framing materials, to floor joist spacing, you have alternatives for almost every feature. You can customize these settings at any time.

To define the slab height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Its properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the foundation perimeter.

To select the foundation


1
In the Design window, move the pointer over the outer walls of your drawing until you see a light blue highlighted perimeter.

3 Under Slab Appearance, enter the slab height


you want and press the Enter key.

To define the foundation width


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the foundation perimeter. Its 3 Under Foundation Appearance, enter the 2 Click to select and the perimeter appears
highlighted in yellow and its properties appear in the Inspector. foundation width you want and press the Enter key.

To define foundation framing type


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the foundation perimeter. Its 3 Specify a slab height. 4 Click the Framing Options button. A dialog
appears.

1 2 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Editing Foundation Walls


5 Choose the foundation material you want from
the Material pop-up menu.

Editing Foundation Walls


At any point during design of your new home, foundation walls can be moved, reshaped, removed, and so on.

6 (optional) To see the framing, select the Frame


foundation and floor joists checkbox. Click OK.

To define joist spacing


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. properties appear in the Inspector. appears.

To reshape the foundation


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. you want to reshape. wall segment.

2 Click to select the foundation perimeter. Its 3 Click the Framing Options button. A dialog 4 Select the Frame foundation and floor joists
checkbox. The Angle and Spacing fields become available.

2 Click to select the wall of the foundation 3 Drag an endpoint (or endpoints) to reshape the OR
Drag a wall segment to move the entire wall.

Controlling Auto Roof Generation


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to put a roof over the walls of your drawing. You can control the size of eaves, soffit, rafter size and spacing, and so on.

5 Enter the required Angle and Spacing in the


fields. (optional) Select the Frame Rim Joist checkbox.

To automatically generate a roof


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Its properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the foundation perimeter.

6 Select the Automatically Update Foundation


Framing checkbox. Click OK.

To show dimensions
1
Choose 2D > Plan Visibility > Floor Plan to turn on the Floor Plan.

2 Choose 2D > Show Automatic Dimensions. OR


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Show Automatic Dimensions from the shortcut menu.

3 (optional) Choose Show Window & Door Callouts


from the 2D menu or shortcut menu to enable those dimensions.

3 Under Auto-Roof Properties, click the Generate


Roof button. A hip roof is automatically generated. the roofs properties.

4 (optional) Click the Roof Options button to edit

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 2 1

Chapter
1

16 Foundation Plan Tab

To configure the automatic roof options


Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. properties appear in the Inspector. Options button. A dialog appears.

To place stiffener beams


1
Choose the Stiffener Beam button from the Foundation Plan toolbar. Its properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the foundation perimeter. Its 3 Under Auto-Roof Properties, click the Roof

2 Under Beam Dimensions, enter the width and 3 Position the crosshair where you want the

depth you want for the stiffener beam. Press the Enter key to accept each value. stiffener beam to start and drag to the location you want. A rubber-band line appears and follows the pointer.

4 Enter the Ratio and Pitch you want for the roof. 5 Enter the soffit depth you want. 6 Set the roof perimeter options.

4 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode. N O T E : Drawing is constrained to 15-degree angles.
To release this constraint, hold down the Shift key, while drawing.

Select the Automatically regenerates panels checkbox to regenerate roof panels when changes are made to the roof options. Select Clips automatic roofs on lower floors to remove roof panels from the lower floors in multi-floor plans. Select Generates eaves to automatically generate eaves. Set the rafter framing options. Enter the rafter Height. Enter the rafter Spacing. Choose the rafter material from the pop-up menu.

To change the length of a stiffener beam


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit. The endpoints appear.

2 Click to select the stiffener beam you 3 Drag an endpoint to change the position of the
stiffener beam. Release the mouse button to place the beam.

To change the dimensions of a stiffener beam


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. edit. The endpoints appear.

8 Click OK.

Adding Stiffener Beams


Stiffener beams are used to support the foundation; typically they run from one end of the foundation to the other. You can control the length, width, and dimension of each beam.

2 Click to select the stiffener beam you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab and
enter the width and depth of stiffener beam you want. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

1 2 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Defining Foundation Piers

Defining Foundation Piers


Foundation piers support the foundation. They are concrete pads that add strength under a support column. Even after you place piers, you can customize them.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the post-

tension strand to start and drag to the location you want. A rubber-band line appears and follows the pointer.

To place foundation piers


1
Choose the Foundation Pier button in the Foundation Plan toolbar. Its properties appear in the Inspector.

3 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode.

Drawing the Foundation Slope


Foundation Slope is typically specified in garages or basement areas where there is a drain. It specifies which direction the floor area slopes.

2 Under Pier Dimensions, enter the diameter of


piers you want to use. Press the Enter key to accept each value.

To draw the foundation slope


1
Choose the Foundation Slope button in the Foundation Plan toolbar. the slope to start and drag in the direction you want the floor to slope. A rubber-band line appears and follows the pointer.

3 Position the crosshair where you want the pier

and click. A foundation pier will be placed at the location of each click.

2 Position the crosshair where you want

3 Release the mouse button. The slope is defined.

To resize a foundation pier


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Its properties appear in the Inspector. the Enter key.

To change the slope direction


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Its endpoints appear.

2 Click to select the pier you want to edit. 3 Enter the new pier diameter you want and press

2 Click to select the slope you want to edit. 3 Drag an endpoint to reposition the slope. 4 Release the mouse button to place.

Adding Post Tension Strands


Post tension strands are used to prevent cracking in a concrete slab foundation. They extend from one edge of the foundation to the other and are bolted into the frame and set in concrete.

To place a post tension strand


1
Choose the Post-Tension Strand button in the Foundation Plan toolbar.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 123

Chapter

16 Foundation Plan Tab

1 2 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 17

Floor Plan Tab


By beginning with QuickStart, walls of each room are automatically generated. Customize your floor plan by adding doors, windows, stairs, and so on. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes creating the final home plan of your dreams, exactly as you want it, simple. You can define your wall thickness, before placing, and create custom-sized walls in a snap. Further customize your design by adding windows, doors, stairs, cabinets, and more.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 125

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab


The wall properties appear in the Inspector; you can edit these before or after drawing the wall.

Drawing Walls
QuickStart makes it easy to begin your design process, but you can add walls at any time. You can either draw free form or to specific dimensions, whichever suits your needs best. Walls are automatically joined, when you draw, and are placed at right angles. Both types of wall tools are available in the toolset pop-up menu. The active tool appears in the toolbar.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the wall to


start and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and the dimensions appear as you drag. appears.

3 Release the mouse button at any point. A dialog

4 Enter the Custom Length needed, then click OK.


The wall is resized based on the value you entered.

To draw walls
1
Choose the Wall button from the first Wall toolset pop-up menu. The wall properties appear in the Inspector; you can edit these before or after drawing the wall. start and drag to the length you want. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and the dimensions appear as you drag.

5 Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical

walls. Notice that Punch! Home Design Studio Pro automatically connects walls to form corners.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the wall to

N O T E : Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 100 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. N O T E : To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button, while the pointer is atop the start point of the first wall.

3 Release the mouse button to place the wall. 4 Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical

walls. Notice that Punch! Home Design Studio Pro automatically connects walls to form corners.

N O T E : To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button while the pointer is atop the start point of the first wall. N O T E : Drawing is constrained to 5-degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down the Shift key, while drawing. N O T E : If you dont see automatic dimensioning, while you draw, it might be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, choose 2D > Show Automatic Dimensions. T I P : Punch! Home Design Studio Pros default is to track walls along adjoining walls; to avoid this constraint, begin drawing from the center of the room and drag toward the wall.

Changing Wall Segment Length


Once you have drawn walls for your design, you can easily change the length of individual wall segments. You can not only change the length of a wall, but also move an adjoining wall with the segment.

To change the wall segment length


1
Choose the Resize Segment (Custom Length) button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. dialog appears.

2 Click to select the wall you want to change. A

To draw walls to exact lengths


1
Choose the Wall (Custom Length) button from the first Wall toolset pop-up menu.

3 Enter the new Segment Length, in inches or feet


and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example,

1 2 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Setting Wall Options


10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

4 Select the Resize Direction button you want

(each endpoint on the wall appears in a color). Center resizes the segment from its center. Red Point resizes the first point placed on the wall segment. Green Point resizes the second point placed on the wall segment. When selected, the Also resize linked segments checkbox resizes connected walls.

5 Click OK. The wall segment is resized.

Depending on your wall style, there may be up to three height fields available. Each field corresponds to the style at the top of the Inspector.

4 Enter a new height in the field and press the

Setting Wall Options


Once you have drawn walls for your design, you can customize many features. From wall thickness, floor height, and stud spacing to automatic flooring options, you have alternatives for almost every feature. Wall properties appear in the Inspector, so be sure the Inspector is open. For more information, see Properties Inspector tab, which begins on page 9.

Enter key.

To change the height of an entire floor


1
Choose Design > Default Ceiling Heights > then choose the floor you want to change. A dialog appears.

To change the height of a wall


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. that you want to change.

2 Enter a new Ceiling Height in the field and then


click OK.

N O T E : Changing the ceiling height this way will

2 Click to select the wall segment (or walls) 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
wall style is selected and the walls properties appear.

cause subsequently-drawn walls to be at the new height. If walls were drawn before setting the new wall height, they will need to be individually changed.

To define wall thickness


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the wall to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The
walls properties appear.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 2 7

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab


3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The
walls properties appear.

4 Enter the Thickness you want in the OR

corresponding field, and press the Enter key.

4 Select the Surfaces button.

Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the thickness by increments of one inch.

To change dimension location


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To define stud spacing


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select an interior wall. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The
walls properties appear.

2 Click to select the wall to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The
walls properties appear.

4 Click the Flip Dimensions button.

4 Enter the Stud Spacing you want in the

corresponding field, and press the Enter key.

To rotate walls
1
Choose the Rotate button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To hide all window and door dimensions


Choose 2D > Hide Window & Door Callouts.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Hide Window & Door Callouts from the shortcut menu.

2 Click to select the wall you want to rotate. 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag in the

direction that you want the wall to rotate.The degree of rotation appears in the Status Bar, as you drag.

To turn off dimensions or callouts for a selected wall


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

OR 1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the wall to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The
walls properties appear.

2 Click to select the wall you want to rotate. 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. A dialog appears. 4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then enter the
angle you want to rotate the wall, in the Angle field. selected is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.

4 Deselect the Dimensions checkbox to hide the


measurements from view. measurements from view.

5 Click OK. The wall segment or wall group you

5 Deselect the Callouts checkbox to hide the

To dimension from wall surfaces


By default, measurements are drawn from wall center to wall center; to measure walls from surface to surface, follow these steps.

Automatic Flooring
By default, enclosed walls are drawn with a 1/4" auto-floor. You can turn on and off the floors display and edit its depth in the Inspector.

Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the wall to edit. 1 2 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Automatic Ceiling

To control automatic flooring display


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. edit the floor.

2 Click within the room where you want to 3 Click the Properties Inspector tab. The rooms
properties appear.

3 Click the Properties Inspector tab. The rooms


properties appear. ceiling is removed.

4 Deselect the Display Ceiling checkbox. The

4 To display the auto-floor, select the Display

Floor checkbox. Flooring automatically appears between joined walls. (optional) Enter a new Depth in the field to customize the flooring depth. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

OR
To remove automatic flooring, deselect the Display Floor checkbox. The flooring disappears. To replace the ceiling, reselect the Display Ceiling checkbox.

Automatic Ceiling
By default, enclosed walls are automatically drawn with a ceiling. You can turn this function on or off on the Inspector.

N O T E : You can remove or replace the ceiling over multiple rooms at once by holding down the Shift key, as you select rooms.

To control automatic ceiling


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to remove the ceiling. The room appears highlighted in yellow.

Defining Gable Wall Segments


When a wall is drawn that will be roofed by a gable roof section, you can easily match the wall to the pitch of the roof. It does not matter whether you draw the roof first or alter the wall segment first.

2 Click to select the room where you want

To define a gable wall segment


1
Click to select the wall segment that will be fitted to the gable roof.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 2 9

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab

2 Click the Properties Inspector tab. The walls


properties appear.

To draw a bay wall


1
Choose the Bay Wall button from the second Wall toolset pop-up menu. bay wall where you want it. extrusion direction.

3 Choose the Gable Style in the Inspector. The


gable wall dimensions appear.

2 Drag along an existing wall to position the 3 Drag to either side of the wall to set the 4 Release to place the wall.

4 Enter the base height. The base height, denoted


by the blue bar, will typically be your ceiling height. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values. roof section they will meet. your roofline).

5 Enter Pitch A and B to match the pitch of the 6 Enter Height - C and D (if necessary, to match

Breaking a Wall
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, its easy to fine tune your rooms, adding an inset, for example.

To break a wall
1
Choose the Wall Break button in the Floor Plan toolbar. create a break at that location. The wall is broken into separate segments on either side of that point.

2 Position the crosshair on a wall and click to

Drawing a Curved or Bay Wall


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can easily add curved walls. You could even draw a round house!

Adding Doors and Openings


All doors and cased openings are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors, and windows. There are three types of openings and nine door styles available in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro and they are all placed in the same manner.

To draw a curved wall


1
Choose the Curved Wall button from the second Wall toolset pop-up menu. diameter of the curved wall. A rubber-band line follows the pointer and dimensions appear.

To add a door
1
Choose the Door button in the Floor Plan toolbar. and choose the door style you want.

2 In the design window, drag to set the

2 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab

3 Release to set the diameter. 4 Drag clockwise, or counterclockwise, to set the


angle and click to place.

N O T E : Press the Shift key to reverse the direction


the arc is drawing.

1 3 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Changing Door Settings


3 Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where
you want the center of the door and release the mouse button.

4 Move the crosshair to either side of the wall to


set the door swing and click to place.

4 Scroll through the door styles and choose the 5 (optional) Enter the Width, Height, Elevation,
style you want. The style is applied to the selected door.

and Trim Width to customize the values in the Inspector. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize a door by specifying dimensions


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

6 (optional) Enter the Door Swing Angle.


become the default and will be used the next time a door is placed.

N O T E : Any changes made to the door properties

2 Click to select the door you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
doors properties appear.

Changing Door Settings


There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a different size or style. You can control many of its features using the Properties Inspector.

To change door style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. modify.

2 Click to select the door you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
doors properties appear.

4 Under Door Appearance, enter the Width,

Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize a door by dragging


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. endpoints appear.

2 Click to select the door you want to edit. Its

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 3 1

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab

3 Drag an endpoint to resize the door to the


desired width.

To add door hardware


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to add hardware.

2 Click to select the door to which you want 4 Release the mouse button to place. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
doors properties appear.

To flip the direction of a door


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

4 Choose Door Hardware from the pop-up menu at


the top of the Inspector. The hardware options appear.

2 Click to select the door you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
doors properties appear. side of the wall.

4 Click the Flip button. The door flips to the other

To change door swing


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the door you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
doors properties appear.

4 Enter a new value in the Swing field and press


the Enter key. The door swing is updated.

To change the elevation of a door


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar. key. The door is elevated.

2 Click to select the door you want to modify. The 3 Type the elevation you want and press the Enter OR
Click the Properties tab in the Inspector and enter a new value in the Elevation field, then press the Enter key. The door is elevated.

5 Scroll through the DoorKnobs library and select


the hardware style you want. The hardware is applied.

6 (optional) Enter the Horizontal offset (distance


from the hinges) and Vertical offset (distance from the bottom) values in the corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

Adding Door Hardware


Door hardware is one of the most personal details that you can add to your design. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro has an extensive library of hardware.

1 3 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Double Doors

To remove door hardware


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. hardware.

2 Click to select the door to which you want to add 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
doors properties appear.

4 Choose Door Hardware from the pop-up menu at


the top of the Inspector. The hardware options appear. DoorKnobs library and choose the No Hardware style. The hardware is removed.

5 Scroll to the bottom of the

Adding Double Doors


Double doors add an elegant look to any room. To simulate French Doors, use glass doors instead of the wooden ones used in this example.

To draw double doors


1
Choose the Door button in the Floor Plan toolbar. and choose the Custom Door style. The custom door properties appear.

3 Choose the Double Doors library. Its contents


appear in the Preview window.

2 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab

N O T E : Right and left doors are placed individually. 4 Select a left door style. 5 Drag along a wall to position the door
and release to place. the door.

6 Set the door swing and click to place 7


Repeat steps 4-6 for the right door. Overlap them slightly to minimize the center post.

Adding Windows
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. They are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors, and windows. There are 19 window styles available in

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 133

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro and they are all placed in the same manner.

To add a window
1
Choose the Window button in the Floor Plan toolbar. and choose the window style you want.

2 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab

3 Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where

you want the center of the window and release to place.

4 Under Window Appearance, enter the Width,

Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values. windows, specify the number of horizontal and vertical Grill Dividers.

5 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture 4 (optional) Enter the Width, Height, Elevation,
and Trim Width to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept the values.

5 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture


windows, specify the number of horizontal and vertical Grill Dividers.

To resize a window by dragging


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. endpoints appear. desired width.

N O T E : Any changes made to the window properties become the default and will be used the next time a window is placed.

2 Click to select the window you want to edit. Its 3 Drag an endpoint to resize the window to the

Changing Window Settings


Once windows have been placed, it is easy to resize them. You can do this by specifying exact dimensions, or by dragging one end, until you have the required size. You have control over the look of your windows by changing the grill settings. You can also flip windows vertically or horizontally to create beautiful groupings to suit any room design.

4 Release the mouse button to place.

To flip a window
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Flip Horizontally or Flip Vertically from the shortcut menu.

2 Ctrl-click the window you want to flip and choose

To resize a window by specifying dimensions


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. resize.

2 Click to select the window you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
windows properties appear.

1 3 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Elevating a Window
N O T E : Flip is not available if a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window is selected.
Click the Properties tab in the Inspector and enter a new value in the Elevation field, then press the Enter key. The window is elevated.

To change the grill settings of a window


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Picture window you want to edit. windows properties appear.

5 Continue selecting and elevating windows until


the look you want is achieved.

2 Click to select the Double Hung or Casement/ 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the

N O T E : The Grill settings dialog will appear only when a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window is selected. 4 Under Grill Dividers, enter the number of
horizontal and vertical dividers you want in the corresponding fields, press the Enter key.

Stacking Windows
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it simple to create window groups or transoms. The Object Elevation field makes it almost a one-click process.

OR
Click the arrow buttons to adjust the dividers in increments of one.

To stack windows
1
Place windows using the technique outlined in Adding Windows on page 133. toolset pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Selection button from the Edit 3 Click to select the window you want to modify.
The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar. key.

Elevating a Window
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it simple to create window groups or transoms. The Elevation Slider makes it almost a one-click process.

4 Type the elevation you want and press the Enter 5 Drag to position the window in place. 6 Continue placing and elevating windows, until the
look you want is achieved.

To elevate a window
1
Place windows, using the technique outlined in Adding Windows on page 133. toolset pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Selection button from the Edit 3 Click to select the window you want to modify.
The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar. key.

N O T E : Stacked windows will appear on top of one another in the 2D design window. To easily select individual stacked windows, see Selecting Features in 3D, which begins on page 31.

4 Type the elevation you want and press the Enter OR

Adding Accessories
You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds, and so on, to any window. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 3 5

Chapter
1

17 Floor Plan Tab

To add accessories
Choose the Accessory button from the Floor Plan toolbar. the accessory properties appear.

2 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; 3 Choose the Accessories Library you want. Its
contents appear in the Preview window.

6 (optional) Enter the Width, Height, Elevation,

and Wall Offset to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept the values.

To resize an accessory by specifying dimensions


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. modify.

2 Click to select the accessory you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
accessorys properties appear.

4 Under Accessories Appearance, enter the

Width, Height, Elevation, and Wall Offset to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To adjust accessory transparency


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the accessory you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
accessorys properties appear.

4 Drag the Transparency slider to make the


accessory more opaque or transparent.

Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles, for example, the Bali Blinds library. To access those libraries, click the disclosure triangle.

Slider at 0

4 In the Preview window, select the accessory you

Slider at 50%

want to place. You can edit its dimensions before or after you place the accessory. you want the center of the accessory, on the side of the wall where you want it to appear, and release to place.

To change an accessory style


1
Open a 3D View and choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears.

5 Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where

2 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 3 Choose Accessories from the pop-up menu. The
Accessories libraries appear.

1 3 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Nudging Wall Attachments


Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles. To access those libraries, click the disclosure triangle. design, refer to the chapter titled Foundation Plan Tab, which begins on page 119.

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear.

To copy all exterior walls from the first floor to the second
1
Click the Foundation Plan tab to make it the active plan. visible plan so that only the Foundation Plan is visible.

5 Scroll through the previews and drag the

accessory you want onto an existing accessory in the 3D View. The style is updated,.

2 Choose 2D > Plan Visibility and deselect each

To change the elevation of an accessory


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar. key. The accessory is elevated.

2 Click to select the accessory you want to modify. 3 Type the elevation you want and press the Enter OR
Click the Properties tab in the Inspector and enter a new value in the Elevation field, then press the Enter key. The accessory is elevated.

3 Select each exterior wall in the design window. 4 Choose Edit > Copy to Floor > Upper Floor. All
exterior walls are copied to the second floor.

Nudging Wall Attachments


You can nudge wall attachments using the arrow keys.

To nudge wall attachments


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to nudge.

N O T E : For further information about drawing on multiple floors, see the chapter titled Edit Menu, which begins on page 63, and the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 23.

2 Click to select the wall attachment you 3 Press the Left or Right Arrow key to nudge the
selection in that direction.

Creating a Split Level


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pros Elevation Slider, you can easily design a split level home. With one or two mouse clicks, your split level can be perfectly positioned.

Adding a Second Floor


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can create a home design with up to three stories. Once youve completed your foundation and other first floor features, you can begin adding upper stories to your home design. For more information on foundation

To create a split level


1
Choose Design > Work on Floor > Work on Second Floor.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 3 7

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab


4 Click to set the endpoint for the stairway, then
Ctrl-click to place.

2 Choose the Wall button from the first


Wall toolset pop-up menu.

3 Using the techniques outlined in the

section Drawing Walls on page 126, draw an entirely separate area. clicking on each wall while holding down the Shift key. Object Elevation field is populated in the toolbar. Press the Enter key to accept the value.

4 Select all points of the newly-drawn section, by 5 Type the elevation needed for the split; the

To draw a curved stairway


1
Choose the Curved Stairway button in the Stairway toolset pop-up menu. the stairway to the location you want. A rubberband stairway, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. drawing, to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.

2 Click to define the start point and extend

3 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while

Placing a Stairway
As you create more than one floor in your design, youll want to draw a stairway. As you are placing stairs, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro displays the stair length, so you know the exact measurements, as you draw. To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see Adding a Floor Cutout, which begins on page 141. There are two type of stairways you can draw: straight and curved. After youve drawn your stairway, you can apply different colors and materials to the steps, railing spindles, posts, and handrails.

4 Click to set the endpoint and place the stairway.

To create a landing
1
Choose the Straight Stairway button in the Stairway toolset pop-up menu. the stairway to the location you want. A rubberband stairway, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. landing.

To draw a straight stairway


1
Choose the Straight Stairway button in the Stairway toolset pop-up menu. the stairway to the location you want. A rubberband stairway, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. drawing, to release the 5-degree constraint.

2 Click to define the start point and extend

2 Click to define the start point and extend

3 Click to define the point where you want the 4 Drag to extend the stairway to the location you
want, then Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place.

3 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while

1 3 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Modifying a Stairway

To resize a stairway
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the stairway you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
stairways properties appear.

4 Under Staircase Appearance, enter the Height


and Width to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

5 Nudge points into position to refine the look of


the landing.

5 (optional) Select, or deselect, the checkboxes to


enable or disable the following options: Skirt Walls aligns both sides to enclose the stairway. Closed Stringer encloses the sides of the steps. Large base adds additional support at the base steps of the stairway.

Modifying a Stairway
Once you have drawn a stairway, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you have control over stairway width, riser, and tread dimensions, handrail height and placement, and whether the stairs are open or enclosed.

To resize stairway steps


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Reversing the direction of a stairway


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. you want to edit and choose Reverse Staircase Direction from the shortcut menu. The direction of the stairway is reversed.

2 Click to select the stairway you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
stairways properties appear.

2 Ctrl-click the centerline of the stairway

4 Under Step Appearance, enter the Height and


Depth to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values. remove the riser.

5 (optional) Select the Open Steps checkbox to

stairways.

N O T E : This works for both curved and straight

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 3 9

Chapter
1

17 Floor Plan Tab


5 After the last point has been placed, Ctrl-click
to place the railing.

To control stairway handrails


Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the stairway you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
stairways properties appear.

Modifying a Railing
Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify its features and shape.

4 Under Handrail Appearance, enter the Height to


customize the dimension. Press the Enter key to accept new values. the Left Handrail and Right Handrail.

To resize and reshape by dragging


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to reshape or resize. The control points appear.

5 (optional) Select include, or deselect to exclude,

2 Double-click to select the railing you want

Adding Railings
After drawing a stairway, youll need to draw a railing around the opening to provide a barrier. There are two types of railings available in the toolbar: straight and curved.

3 Drag points to reshape or resize the railing.

To change the railing height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the railing you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
railings properties appear.

To draw a straight railing


1
Choose the Straight Railing button from the Railing toolset pop-up menu. the railing to the location you want. A rubberband railing, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. Ctrl-click to place.

4 Under Handrail Appearance, enter the Height to

customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Click to define the start point and extend

For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 220.

3 Click to set the endpoint for the railing and then

To adjust baluster spacing


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To draw a curved railing


1
Choose the Curved Railing button from the Railing toolset pop-up menu. railing. A rubber-band railing, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair.

2 Click to select the railing you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
railings properties appear.

2 Click to define the start point of the

4 Under Baluster Appearance, enter the Spacing to


customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values. checkbox to include, or exclude, posts.

but will curve after the next point is set. the railing.

N O T E : The railing appears angular as it is drawn, 3 Continue to click points to define the shape of 4 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while
drawing, to constrain the railing to a perfect arc.

5 (optional) Select, or deselect, the Include Post

1 4 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Flooring

Adding Flooring
Whether you want to carpet the whole floor with one color or you want each room to have an individual feel, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro helps you experiment with different flooring options, before spending hundreds of dollars on something youre not happy with. Once drawn, you can customize the flooring by applying materials like tile, carpet, wood, and so on. For more information, see Applying Building Materials, which begins on page 43. There are two ways to customize your flooring: drawing floor sections and removing floor sections.

2 Click to select the edge or point you want to


reshape. flooring.

3 Drag a control point to reshape or resize the 4 (optional) Drag a segment to move an entire edge. N O T E : To move an entire floor section, double-click
to select all of the points and drag to a new location.

To change the floor thickness


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the floor you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
floors properties appear.

To draw flooring
1
Choose the Floor button from the Flooring toolset pop-up menu.

4 Under Floor Appearance, enter the Thickness to

customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

N O T E : If necessary, you can turn off the automatic flooring option. Click within an enclosure and deselect Display Floor on the Inspector. 2 Click to define the start point of the flooring. 3 Drag to extend the floor. A rubber-band line
appears and follows the crosshair. Notice dimensions appear, as you draw.

For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 220.

To control floor dimensions display


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

4 Click to set the next point. 5 Continue to drag and click points to define the
shape of the floor.

2 Click to select the floor you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
floors properties appear.

4 Under Floor Appearance, deselect the Display


Dimensions checkbox to hide the dimensions.

6 Ctrl-click to finish and place the floor.

OR
Select the Display Dimensions checkbox to show the dimensions.

Adding a Floor Cutout


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to design lofts, creative stairway openings, and so on. You can also easily convert that space over the garage to a versatile room.

To reshape flooring
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To draw a floor cutout


1
Choose the Floor Cutout button from the Flooring toolset pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 4 1

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab


3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
floor cutouts properties appear.

2 Click to define the start point of the floor


cutout.

3 Drag to extend the cutout. A rubber-band line


appears and follows the crosshair. Notice dimensions appear, as you draw.

4 Under Floor Cutout Appearance, deselect the


Display Dimensions checkbox to hide the dimensions.

4 Click to set the next point. 5 Continue to drag and click points to define the
shape of the floor cutout.

OR
Select the Display Dimensions checkbox to show the dimensions.

6 Ctrl-click to finish and place the cutout. 7 (optional) To customize the thickness of the
cutout, enter a new value in the Properties Inspector.

Adding Cabinets
Cabinets can be added to your design with just a few mouse clicks. In addition to placing predesigned cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a cabinet of your own from scratch. There are many cabinet styles available and each cabinets dimensions are customizable.

To reshape a floor cutout


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. reshape.

2 Click to select the edge or point you want to 3 Drag a control point to reshape or resize the
floor cutout.

To add cabinets
1
Choose the Cabinet button in the Floor Plan toolbar. tab; the cabinet styles appear.

4 (optional) Drag a segment to move an entire edge. N O T E : To move an entire floor cutout section, double-click to select all of the points and drag to a new location.

2 In the Inspector, click the Properties

To change the floor cutout thickness


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. modify.

2 Click to select the floor cutout you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
floor cutouts properties appear.

3 Scroll through the cabinet styles and select the


cabinet you want.

4 Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where


you want the center of the cabinet, on the side of the wall where you want it to appear, and release to place.

4 Under Floor Cutout Appearance, enter the

Thickness to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 220.

To edit a cabinets style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. modify.

To control floor cutout dimensions display


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. modify.

2 Click to select the cabinet you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
cabinets properties appear. updated.

2 Click to select the floor cutout you want to

4 Select the cabinet style you want. The cabinet is

1 4 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Customizing Cabinet Dimensions

To add an island
1
Choose the Cabinet button in the Floor Plan toolbar. want to place the island. The island appears. into place.

2 Click in the design window where you

3 (optional) Select the island and drag or rotate it

To edit an islands style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the island you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
cabinets properties appear. updated.

4 Select the cabinet style you want. The island is 4 Choose the cabinet component you want to edit
from the pop-up menu. The components properties appear.

Customizing Cabinet Dimensions


Each cabinet style is made up of individual components, which can be customized to change the overall appearance of the cabinet. This gives you complete control over the cabinet design, and ultimately your entire cabinet layout.

To customize cabinet components


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. modify.

The customizable dimensions and options that are available will vary depending on the individual component you are editing.

5 Enter the dimensions you want in the

2 Click to select the cabinet you want to 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
cabinets properties appear.

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values. to edit from the pop-up menu and customize the cabinet options until it appears the way you want.

6 Continue to choose cabinet components you want

Adding Cabinet Hardware


Cabinet hardware is one of the most personal details that you can add to your design. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro has an extensive library of hardware.

To add hardware
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 143

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab


2 Click to select the cabinet where you want to
remove hardware.

2 Click to select the cabinet to which you want to


add hardware.

3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the


cabinets properties appear.

3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the


cabinets properties appear.

4 Choose Base Doors, Top Doors or Drawers from


the pop-up menu. The components properties appear in the Inspector.

4 Choose the component (Base Doors, Top Doors,

5 (optional) Click the Hardware Position button

or Drawers) from which you want to remove hardware, from the pop-up menu. The components properties appear in the Inspector. Preview window and select the Remove Hardware style. The hardware is removed from the selected component.

and, in the dialog that appears, click to specify the location for the hardware, then click OK.

5 Scroll down to the bottom of the

To change the cabinet facing style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the cabinet you want to modify. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
cabinets properties appear.

6 Under Hardware and Facings, choose Hardware

from the pop-up menu and choose the hardware library you want, Knob or Pulls. Its contents appear in the Preview window.

4 Choose Base Doors, Top Doors or Drawers from


the pop-up menu. The components properties appear in the Inspector.

5 Under Hardware and Facings, choose Facings

from the pop-up menu. The Cabinet Door Styles library appears.

Select the knob or pull style you want. The hardware is added to the door and displayed in the 3D View.

6 Choose the facing style you want. The style is

To remove hardware
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

applied to the door or drawer and displayed in the 3D View.

1 4 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Building Rooms Using Templates

Building Rooms Using Templates


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes dozens of room templates, which will make designing your home easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the template that suits your needs best.

5 Scroll through the templates and drag the one


you want into the design window.

6 (optional) Click the Selection button, then select


the template you just placed and drag it to another location in the design window.

To place a template
1
Choose Window > Show Inspector (or press Command-I) if the Inspector is not open. in the pane that appears.

2 Click the Content tab. A pop-up menu is available 3 Choose Templates from the pop-up menu. The
Templates libraries appear.

Some of the library categories are organized into sub-categories, contained within disclosure triangles. To access those libraries, click the disclosure triangle.

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window. Notice, as you move your pointer over each preview, a description appears in the Status Bar.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 4 5

Chapter

17 Floor Plan Tab

1 4 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 18

Electrical Plan Tab


Adding electrical components to your home design is a simple matter of selecting the component you want to place and clicking on your drawing plan. You can even turn the lights on and off! Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides handy placement features, such as associative dimensioning and wall tracking. Using associative dimensioning, you can place components a specific distance from a neighboring wall or other electrical component. Automatic wall tracking makes sure you place components, such as outlets and switches, without error.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 4 7

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab

Placing Outlets and Switches


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it simple to add electrical components to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the components you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place components a specific distance from a neighboring electrical component or wall segment. Youll notice that when placing certain outlets and switches, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. Floor and ceiling outlets are not tracked to walls. If the outlet is to be placed within 6" of a water source, for example, in a kitchen, bath or outdoors, always use a GFI outlet. Ground Fault Interrupters are designed to shut themselves off, if they get wet. Gang switches are designed to have multiple switches, that control multiple lights, ceiling fans, and so on. All of the outlet and switch tools are available in the Electrical toolbar, organized into toolsets.

4 Release the mouse button to place the


receptacle.

To place ceiling or floor outlets


1
Choose the receptacle style you want from the toolset pop-up menu. in the Inspector and choose the type you want from the pop-up menu.

2 Click the Properties tab

3 Click in the design window to place the outlet.

To place 110v or 220v wall receptacles


1
Choose the receptacle style you want from the Receptacle toolset pop-up menu.

To place switches
1
Choose the switch style you want from the Switch toolset pop-up menu.

2 Unless you chose the Switch button, click the 2 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as
you drag the outlet. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the outlet to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the outlet to appear.

Properties tab in the Inspector and choose the style you want from the pop-up menu. you drag the switch. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the switch to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the switch to appear.

3 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

4 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall 5 Release the mouse button to place the switch.

1 4 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Connector Switches

To move a ceiling or floor outlet by a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the outlet you want to 3 Choose Edit > Move. A dialog appears. 4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate
system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. on the coordinates you specified.

5 Click OK. The outlet you selected is moved, based

To move switch connectors by a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move. Selection handles appear.

Adding Connector Switches


Its easy to add connector switches to your home design. Using the Connector Switch Tool, just drag to define the connection.

2 Click to select the connector switch you want to 3 Choose Edit > Move. A dialog appears. 4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate
system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields.

To place connector switches


1
Choose the Switch Connector button in the Electrical Plan toolbar. and drag. The wiring appears, as you drag.

5 Click OK. The switch connector you selected is

moved, based on the coordinates you specified.

2 Position the crosshair on a wall segment

Adding Fixture Lighting


Adding fixture lighting to your design is very similar to adding other electrical components; however, they do not track directly to walls or automatically display dimensioning. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides many lights to choose from, including recessed canned lights, heat/vent lights, and so on. In addition, you can control the amount of illumination that each fixture generates.

3 Drag to the ceiling fan or light you want to

connect. The wiring appears in your drawing.

To add light fixtures


1
Choose the Fixture Lights button in the Electrical Plan toolbar. the light properties appear. style you want.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector; 3 Scroll through the styles and choose the light

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 4 9

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab To turn glow on and off


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

4 Position the crosshair where you want the light


to appear and click to place.

2 Click to select the light fixture you want to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
lights properties appear.

4 Select the Displays Glow Effect checkbox to


turn on the glow.

To move a light fixture by a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to move. Selection handles appear.

OR
Deselect the Displays Glow Effect checkbox to turn off the glow.

2 Click to select the light fixture you want 3 Choose Edit > Move. A dialog appears. 4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate
system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. based on the coordinates you specified.

To dim the lights


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

5 Click OK. The light fixture you selected is moved,

2 Click to select the light fixture you want to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
lights properties appear.

To turn the lights on and off


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

4 Drag the Dimmer slider to customize the


brightness of the light.

2 Click to select the light fixture you want to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
lights properties appear.

To set the radius of the lights


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the light fixture you want to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
lights properties appear.

4 Select the Light On checkbox to turn on the


light.

OR
Deselect the Light On checkbox to turn off the light.

4 Drag the Radius slider to customize the radius of


the light.

1 5 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Flood Lights

To set the falloff from the lights


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To place a ceiling fan


1
Choose the Ceiling Fan button in the Electrical Plan toolbar. the ceiling fan properties appear. fan style you want.

2 Click to select the light fixture you want to edit. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the
lights properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector; 3 Scroll through the library and choose the ceiling

4 Drag the Falloff slider to customize the amount


of falloff around the radius of the light.

Adding Flood Lights


Flood lights are added just like outlets and switches; they attach to and track along walls and their lighting, which can be turned off and on, appears in 3D View.

To add a flood light


1
Choose the Flood Light button in the Electrical Plan toolbar. flood light. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the light to the nearest wall or other electrical component. light.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

3 Release the mouse button to place the flood 4 Position the crosshair where you want the ceiling
fan to appear and click to place.

4 (optional) Select the flood light and enter a new

elevation in the Object Elevation field. be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

Adding a Ceiling Fan


Placing ceiling fans is as simple as one mouse click. Once you place a ceiling fan, you can move it by dragging or by specifying exact coordinates.

5 (optional) While the ceiling fan is selected,

choose a different style from the Ceiling Fans library.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 5 1

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab To move a ceiling fan by a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move. Selection handles appear.

4 Release the mouse button to place the jack.

2 Click to select the ceiling fan you want to 3 Choose Edit > Move. A dialog appears. 4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate
system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. based on the coordinates you specified.

Adding Smoke Detectors and Thermostats


Placing smoke detectors and thermostats is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. Youll notice that, when placing these components, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

5 Click OK. The ceiling fan you selected is moved,

Placing Phone, Cable, CAT5, and CAT6 Jacks


Placing phone and cable jacks is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. Youll notice that when placing jacks, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

To place smoke detectors and thermostats


1
Choose the Smoke Detector or Thermostat button in the Electrical Plan toolbar. detector or thermostat. Dimensions appear as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the component to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the smoke detector or thermostat to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the smoke

To place phone, cable, CAT5, and CAT6 jacks


1
Choose the jack type you want from the Jacks toolset pop-up menu.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

4 Release the mouse button to place the smoke


detector or thermostat.

2 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as


you drag the jack. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the jack to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the jack to appear.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

1 5 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Home Theater Components

Adding Home Theater Components


Creating and customizing your home theater couldnt be easier. There is an entire set of tools available to add audio and video components to your design, with just a couple of mouse clicks. These components have default elevations and orientations. For example, the Video Projector button attaches the video projector to the ceiling. You can reposition any of the home theater components using basic editing techniques. For more information, see Rotating a Selection, which begins on page 65. For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

N O T E : By default, the video projector is attached to the ceiling, based on the default ceiling height.
For more information, see Default Ceiling Height, which begins on page 72.

To add a satellite dish


1
Choose the Satellite Dish button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place. By default, the satellite dish is placed at ground level.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To add a flat screen television


1
Choose the Flat Screen Television button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place. By default, the television is placed on the floor.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

needed.

N O T E : Rotate and elevate the satellite dish as

To add a satellite receiver


1 N O T E : Rotate and elevate the television as needed.
Choose the Satellite Receiver button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place. By default, the receiver is placed on the floor.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To add a video projector


1
Choose the Video Projector button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

N O T E : Rotate and elevate the receiver as needed.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 5 3

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab To add wall speakers


1
Choose the Wall Speaker button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. wall speaker. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the speaker to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the speaker to appear.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the


component to appear and click to place.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

N O T E : Rotate and elevate the speaker as needed.

Adding Home Security Components


Home security components are available to suit all levels of security, from light and heat detection to cameras and control panels.

4 Release the mouse button to place the wall


speaker.

These components have default elevations and orientations. For example, the Dome Camera button attaches a camera to the ceiling. You can reposition any of the home security components using basic editing techniques. For more information, see Rotating a Selection, which begins on page 65. For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

To add ceiling speakers


1
Choose the Ceiling Speaker button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To add a security camera to a wall


1 N O T E : The ceiling speaker is placed based on the
For more information, see Default Ceiling Height, which begins on page 72. Choose the Security Camera button from the Home Security toolset. security camera. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the camera to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the component to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

default ceiling height.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

To add floor speakers


1
Choose the Floor Speaker button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu.

1 5 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Home Security Components

4 Release the mouse button to place the security


camera.

4 Release the mouse button to place the security


contact.

To add a dome camera to a ceiling


1
Choose the Dome Camera button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

To add a motion detector


1
Choose the Motion Detector button from the Home Security toolset. motion detector. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the motion detector to the nearest wall or other electrical component. In the example below, the motion detector is measured between a wall endpoint and the center of a door. where you want the component to appear.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

N O T E : By default, the dome camera is attached to


the ceiling, based on the default ceiling height. For more information, see Default Ceiling Height, which begins on page 72.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

To add a security contact


1
Choose the Security Contact button from the Home Security toolset. security contact. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the contact to the nearest wall or other electrical component. In the example below, the contact is measured between a wall endpoint and the center of a door. where you want the component to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

4 Release the mouse button to place the motion


detector.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall N O T E : The motion detector is placed at a default elevation near the ceiling.
For more information, see Rotating a Selection, which begins on page 65.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 5 5

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

To add a wall-mounted glass break detector


1
Choose the Wall Mount Glass Break Detector button from the Home Security toolset. break detector. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the detector to the nearest wall or other electrical component. In the example below, the detector is measured between a wall endpoint and the center of a door. where you want the component to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the glass

N O T E : By default, the glass break detector is attached to the ceiling, based on the default ceiling height.
For more information, see Default Ceiling Height, which begins on page 72.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

To add a photo beam


1
Choose the Photo Beam button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

4 Release the mouse button to place the glass


break detector.

N O T E : In this example, the photo beam has been rotated to fit into a corner. Rotate and elevate the photo beam as needed.

To add a security keypad


default elevation on the wall.

N O T E : The glass break detector is placed at a


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

Choose the Security Keypad button from the Home Security toolset. security keypad. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the keypad to the nearest wall or other electrical component. In the example below, the keypad is measured between a wall endpoint and the center of a door. where you want the component to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

To add a ceiling-mounted glass break detector


1
Choose the Ceiling Mount Glass Break Detector button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

1 5 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Home Security Components


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

To add a heat detector


1 4 Release the mouse button to place the security
keypad. Choose the Heat Detector button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

N O T E : The security keypad is placed at a default elevation on the wall.


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

N O T E : By default, the heat detector is attached to the ceiling, based on the default ceiling height.
For more information, see Default Ceiling Height, which begins on page 72.

To add a security control panel


1
Choose the Security Control Panel button from the Home Security toolset. security control panel. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the control panel to the nearest wall or other electrical component. In the example below, the security control panel is measured between a wall endpoint and the center of a door. where you want the component to appear.

To add a wall-mounted security keypad


1
Choose the Security Keypad Wall Mount button from the Home Security toolset. security keypad. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the keypad to the nearest wall or other electrical component. In the example below, the security access keypad is measured between two endpoints. where you want the component to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

4 Release the mouse button to place the security


control panel.

4 Release the mouse button to place the security


access keypad.

N O T E : The security control panel is placed at a default elevation on the wall.

N O T E : The security access keypad is placed at a default elevation on the wall.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 5 7

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

To add a pedestal-mounted access keypad


1
Choose the Security Keypad (Pedestal Mount) button from the Home Theater toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

N O T E : The touch-panel is placed at a default elevation on the wall.


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

Adding a Network Router


N O T E : Rotate the security access keypad as
You can place a network router with one simple mouse click. Once placed, you can move the router by dragging or by specifying coordinates.

needed.

To place a network router


1
Choose the Network Router button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

Adding a Home Automation Touch-Panel


You can add a home automation touch-panel to any wall in your design. This component is a wall attachment, so it moves with the wall. Once placed, you can easily move the touch-panel to a new location by dragging along the wall.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To place a home automation touch-panel


1
Choose the Home Automation Touch-Panel button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. panel. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the touch panel to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the component to appear.

N O T E : Rotate the network router as needed.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the touch

Adding a Photo Cell


You can place a photo cell with one simple mouse click. Once placed, you can move the photo cell by dragging or by specifying coordinates, or elevate the photo cell to the desired location.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

To place a photo cell


1
Choose the Photo Cell button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

4 Release the mouse button to place the home


automation touch-panel.

1 5 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding a Backup Generator


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

Adding a Backup Generator


You can place a backup generator in your drawing with one simple mouse click. Once placed, you can move the generator by dragging or by specifying coordinates. You can also add a backup generator panel to any wall in your design. This component is a wall attachment, so it moves with the wall. Once placed, you can easily move the panel to a new location by dragging along the wall.

4 Release the mouse button to place the backup


generator panel.

N O T E : The panel is placed at a default elevation on


the wall. For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

To place a backup generator


1
Choose the Backup Generator button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

Adding a Circuit Panel


You can add a circuit panel to any wall in your design. This component is a wall attachment, so it moves with the wall. Once placed, you can easily move the panel to a new location by dragging along the wall.

To place a circuit panel


N O T E : Rotate the backup generator as needed. 1
Choose the Circuit Panel button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. panel. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the panel to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the component to appear.

To place a backup generator panel


1
Choose the Backup Generator Panel button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the panel to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the component to appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the panel.

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

4 Release the mouse button to place the circuit


panel.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 5 9

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab

Adding an Intercom
N O T E : The panel is placed at a default elevation on
the wall. For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67. You can add an intercom to any wall in your design. This component is a wall attachment, so it moves with the wall. Once placed, you can easily move the intercom to a new location by dragging along the wall.

To place an intercom
1
Choose the Intercom button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. intercom. Notice that dimensions display as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the intercom to the nearest wall or other electrical component. where you want the component to appear.

Adding a Conduit
You can add conduit to your design to show the routing of electrical wires or components. Conduit is placed line other lines, using a drag method. Conduit is visual representation that appears in 2D, but not in 3D.

2 Drag along a wall segment to position the

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

To place a conduit
1
Choose the Conduit button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. conduit to start and drag to extend to the desired length.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the 3 Release the mouse button to place. 4 Continue to place conduit, as desired.

4 Release the mouse button to place the intercom.

Adding a Freeze Detector


You can place a freeze protector in your drawing with one simple mouse click. Once placed, you can move the freeze detector by dragging or by specifying coordinates.

N O T E : The intercom is placed at a default elevation on the wall.


For more information, see Set Object Elevation, which begins on page 67.

To place a freeze detector


1
Choose the Freeze Detector button from the Advanced Electrical toolset pop-up menu. component to appear and click to place.

Adding a Battery Power Supply


Placing a battery power supply, or uninterruptible power supply (UPS), is as simple as one mouse click. Once you place the UPS, you can move it by dragging or by specifying exact coordinates.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To place a battery power supply


1 N O T E : Rotate the freeze detector as needed.
Choose the Battery Power Supply button from the Advanced Electrical toolset popup menu.

1 6 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Elevating Entities
2 Position the crosshair where you want the
component to appear and click to place.

N O T E : The entity being elevated must be positioned on top of the surface to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a television to the top of a corner table surface, drag the television so it is positioned within the boundaries of the table. 3 Click the Object Elevation pop-up menu. A list of
detected elevations appears.

N O T E : Rotate the battery power supply as needed.

4 Select the surface to which you want the entity


elevated. The object is elevated.

Elevating Entities
You can set an objects elevation to match that of an existing surface, or manually specify an elevation. This makes it easy to accurately place objects at custom elevations, such as elevating lights to a ceiling or receptacles to a floor or ceiling.

Nudging Wall Attachments


You can nudge wall attachments using the arrow keys.

To elevate an entity
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar.

To nudge wall attachments


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. nudge.

2 Click to select the entity you want to

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Nudge, then click the direction (up,
down, left, right) you want the selection to move. Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the entity in that direction.

4 OR 3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches,


or just inches, then press the Enter key. The selection is elevated based on the values you entered.

Controlling Drawing Settings


You can control a variety of drawing settings in the Design menu. When working within multiple floors, it is important to have control of your ceiling heights, working floor and to be sure youre at the correct working elevation.

OR 1 Choose Edit > Elevate Object. A dialog appears. 2 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The
entity is elevated.

To elevate to nearby elevations


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate to an existing elevation in the design window.

To set the working elevation


While nothing is selected, the Working Elevation field is active in the toolbar. Type the working elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, then press the Enter key. Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the design based on the new working elevation.

2 Select the entity (or entities) you want to

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 6 1

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab


1
Choose Design > Set Working Elevation. A dialog appears. and inches, and click OK.

3 Choose Edit > Copy to Floor > Upper Floor (or


Lower Floor to copy to a lower level).

2 Enter the necessary elevation in inches, or feet

N O T E : The first floor is set as your default working floor.

To set ceiling heights


1
Choose Design > Default Ceiling Heights, then choose which floors ceiling you want to adjust from the submenu. A dialog appears.

To move objects from one floor to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities.) Lower Floor to move the original down one level).

2 Enter the ceiling height you want and click OK. 3 (optional) Repeat these steps for each floor
ceiling height you want to adjust.

2 Click to select the entity you want to move. (To 3 Choose Edit > Move to Floor > Upper Floor (or

To work on a selected floor


Choose Design > Work on Floor, then choose the floor you want to work on from the submenu.

To move an object or entity a specified amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking.

OR
Click the Working Floor button in the toolbar, and choose the floor on which you want to work from the pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the entity you want to move.

3 Choose Edit > Move. OR


Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

OR
To work on the first floor, press OptionCommand-1. To work on the second floor, press OptionCommand-2. To work on the third floor, press OptionCommand-3.

4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. on the coordinates you specified.

5 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based

Editing Your Design


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides you with editing tools to help you modify your interior floor plan. You must select the object(s) you want to edit before clicking the Edit menu.

To freely rotate an entity


6 Choose the Rotate button from the Edit
toolset pop-up menu.

Click to select the entity you want to rotate. direction that you want the entity to rotate. The degree of rotation appears in the Status Bar, as you drag.

To copy an object from one floor to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities.)

8 Hold down the mouse button and drag in the

2 Click to select the entity you want duplicated.

N O T E : By default, entities are rotated around their centerpoint, in 5-degree increments. 9


Release the mouse button to place.

1 6 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Editing Your Design

To rotate by specifying an amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the entity you want to rotate. 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle


Unit System you want.

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

To flip a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Horizontal.

To flip a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Vertical.

To mirror a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Horizontal.

To mirror a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Vertical.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 6 3

Chapter 18 Electrical Plan Tab

1 6 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 19

Plumbing Plan Tab


Once youve completed your floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro features a suite of plumbing fixtures from basic toilets to spa tubs. Other important considerations are gas bibs and floor drain placement, also included in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. Most plumbing objects are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments to offer flawless design. Tubs and showers are automatically annotated and dimensions appear, as you add plumbing, to ensure accurate placement. Each plumbing symbol is simple to include in your drawing, with the flexibility to modify it at any time.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 6 5

Chapter 19 Plumbing Plan Tab

Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib or Gas Bib


When you place an outdoor hose bib or a gas bib, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or the end of a wall segment. Youll notice that when placing hose bibs, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

Adding Floor Drains


Once youve completed your plumbing plan, the final step is to add floor drains to your design. Adding floor drains is as simple as a mouse click.

To add a floor drain


1
Choose the Floor Drain button in the Plumbing Plan toolbar. floor drain to appear and click to place.

To place an outdoor hose bib


1
Choose the Hose Bib button from the Bib toolset pop-up menu. appear as you drag the hose bib. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the hose bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture. where you want the hose bib to appear.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

2 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall 4 Release the mouse button to place the hose bib.

Placing Toilets
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it simple to add plumbing to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the fixtures you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or wall segment. Youll notice that, when placing toilets, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

To place a gas bib


1
Choose the Gas Bib button from the Bib toolset pop-up menu. appear as you drag the gas bib. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the gas bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture. where you want the gas bib to appear.

To place toilets
1 2
Choose the Toilet button in the Plumbing Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the toilets properties appear.

2 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions

3 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall 4 Release the mouse button to place the gas bib.

1 6 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Placing Sinks
4 Release the mouse button to place the toilet in
the new location.

To resize a toilet
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. toilets properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the toilet you want to resize. The

3 Enter the dimensions you want in the

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

To change a toilet style


1 3 Choose the toilet or bidet style you want from
the Toilets and Bidets library. Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. toilets properties appear in the Inspector. Bidets library. The style is updated.

2 Click to select the toilet you want to edit. The 3 Select a different style from the Toilets and

4 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as

you drag the toilet. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the toilet to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture. where you want the toilet to appear.

5 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall 6 Release the mouse button to place the toilet.

Placing Sinks
As with toilets, sinks are automatically tracked to wall segments, as you place them, as well as automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls and plumbing fixtures. Once placed, you can go back and edit the fixture at any time by selecting it, then editing its properties in the Inspector.

To move a toilet
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Selection handles appear.

To place sinks
1 2
Choose the Sink button in the Plumbing Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the sinks properties appear.

2 Click to select the toilet you want to edit. 3 Drag the toilet to a new location. As you move
the toilet, associative dimensioning appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 6 7

Chapter 19 Plumbing Plan Tab


3 Drag the sink to a new location. As you move the
sink, associative dimensioning appears. new location.

4 Release the mouse button to place the sink in the

To resize a sink
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. sinks properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the sink you want to resize. The

3 Enter the dimensions you want in the

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

To change the sink style


3 Choose the Bathroom Sink or Kitchen Sink 1
library. Its contents appear in the Preview window. Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. sinks properties appear in the Inspector. appear in the Preview window. The style is updated.

2 Click to select the sink you want to edit. The 3 Choose the sink library you want. Its contents 4 Select a different style in the Preview window.

4 Select the sink style you want. 5 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as
you drag the sink. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the sink to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture. where you want the sink to appear.

6 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall 7


Release the mouse button to place the sink.

Placing Bathtubs
In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a tub, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro automatically adds annotation to your design, once the tub is placed. This makes reading home plans, at a later date, simple. If you dont find the exact sized tub you are looking for, simply place a tub that is similar in size, then adjust the tub or spa properties to the exact size you want for your home design. Once placed, you can go back and edit the fixture at any time by selecting it, then editing its properties in the Inspector.

To move a sink
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the sink you want to edit.

1 6 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Placing a Shower

To place a bath tub


1 2
Choose the Bath Tub button in the Plumbing Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the bath tubs properties appear.

To move a bath tub


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. edit. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the bath tub you want to 3 Drag the bath tub to a new location. As you move
the bath tub, associative dimensioning appears. in the new location.

4 Release the mouse button to place the bath tub

To resize a bath tub


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The bath tubs properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the bath tub you want to resize.

3 Enter the dimensions you want in the

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

3 Choose the bath tub style you want from the


Bathtubs library.

To change the bath tub style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. bath tubs properties appear in the Inspector. library. The style is updated.

4 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as


you drag the bath tub. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the bath tub to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture. where you want the bath tub to appear.

2 Click to select the bath tub you want to edit. The 3 Select a different style from the Bathtubs

5 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall 6 Release the mouse button to place the tub.
Notice annotation is automatically displayed in the tub symbol.

To switch the faucet location


Ctrl-click the tub you want to edit and choose Flip Component from the shortcut menu. The faucet flips to the opposite side.

Placing a Shower
Showers are placed in the same manner as bath tubs. In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a shower, Punch! Home Design

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 6 9

Chapter 19 Plumbing Plan Tab


Studio Pro automatically adds annotation to your design, once the shower is placed. If you dont find the exact sized shower you are looking for, simply place a shower that is similar in size, then adjust the shower properties to the exact size you want for your home design. Once placed, you can go back and edit the fixture at any time by selecting it, then editing its properties on the Inspector.

6 Release the mouse button to place the shower.

Notice annotation is automatically displayed on the shower symbol.

To place a shower
1 2
Choose the Shower button in the Plumbing Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the showers properties appear.

To move a shower
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. edit. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the shower you want to 3 Drag the shower to a new location. As you move
the shower, associative dimensioning appears. the new location.

4 Release the mouse button to place the shower in

To resize a shower
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The showers properties appear in the Inspector.

2 Click to select the shower you want to resize.

3 Enter the dimensions you want in the

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

To change the shower style


3 Choose the shower style you want from the
Shower and ShowerTub Combos library.

Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. showers properties appear in the Inspector.

4 Drag along a wall segment. Dimensions appear as

2 Click to select the shower you want to edit. The 3 Select a different style from the Showers and
ShowerTub Combos library. The style is updated.

you drag the shower. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the shower to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture. where you want the shower to appear.

5 Position the crosshair on the side of the wall

1 7 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Placing the Hot Water Heater

To switch the faucet location


Ctrl-click the shower you want to edit and choose Flip Component from the shortcut menu. The faucet flips to the opposite side.

Placing the Hot Water Heater


Adding a hot water heater to your home plan is as simple as a mouse click.

To add a hot water heater


1
Choose the Water Heater button in the Plumbing Plan toolbar. water heater to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 7 1

Chapter 19 Plumbing Plan Tab

1 7 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 20

Roofing Plan Tab


One of the features that will set your design apart from all others will be its roofline. Using the roofing tools available in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can design intricate roofs with ease. From basic rooflines, like hipped or gable, to less common ones, like saltbox, gambrel, or a roof over a bay window, you will be able to create any roof to match the style of your home plan.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 7 3

Chapter 20 Roofing Plan Tab

Auto-Generating a Roof
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, your roof is automatically generated when you exit QuickStart. If you want to customize your roofline, its easy to delete the auto-generated roof. If you change your mind, you can regenerate the automatic roofing at any time.

instead of a cathedral one, see Automatic Ceiling on page 129. Automatic dimensioning makes it easy to achieve exact placement. While there are nine roof tools available, six of them are placed in the same manner. These styles are: hip gable connector gable hip connector hip/gable cross connector

To delete the auto-generated roof


1
Click the Roof Plan tab and turn off all layers except the Roof layer. For more information, see Customizing Visible Plans, which begins on page 25.

2 Choose Edit > Select All. 3 Press Delete. All of the roof panels are deleted.

To draw a manual roof


1
Choose the roof style you want from the Roofs toolset pop-up menu.

To auto-generate a roof
1
Position your pointer on the foundation perimeter of your design. When you see the perimeter highlight in yellow (default), click on the highlighted perimeter. perimeters properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector; the

The Roof Pitch properties appear in the Inspector.

2 (optional) Enter the Pitch or Angle you want. Be 3 Under Auto-Roof Properties, click the Generate
Roof button. A hip roof is automatically generated.

sure to press the Enter key to accept new values. choose the floor where you want to add a roof. to start and drag, diagonally, to the opposite corner.

3 (optional) Choose Design > Work on Floor > then 4 Position the crosshair where you want the roof

Adding a Roof
There are several styles of roof available in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, including three powerful freehand roofing tools. To match the gable ends of these roof styles, refer to Defining Gable Wall Segments on page 129. To draw a flat ceiling,

1 7 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Freehand Roof Tools

5 Release the mouse button to place the roof.

3 (optional) Enter the pitch or angle you want in

the Inspector. Press the Enter key to accept new values. want.

4 (optional) Select the Elevation Measurement you 5 (optional) Select or deselect the soffits you want
to include or exclude.

6 Click to define the start point of the roof

section and drag. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first edge of the roof section. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw. Click to set next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the roof section.

descends. The elevation of each corner is noted.

N O T E : The arrows show which way the roof section

Using the Freehand Roof Tools


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro has three Freehand Roof tools that provide versatility and power, when drawing complex roofing plans. Using the three-point and four-point freehand tools, roof sections are attached to walls, making it easy to draw them the necessary size the first time. After drawing roof sections, all parts of it can be customized, for example, pitch, placement, shape, and so on. With the three- and four-point freehand tools you can specify a width for soffit.

8 (optional) Drag the arrow in the center of the

roof section to rotate the direction of the roof slope.

To draw with the freehand roof tool


1 2
Choose the Freehand Roof button in the Roof Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The Roofs properties appear.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 7 5

Chapter 20 Roofing Plan Tab

N O T E : The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match roof sections. 8 Release the mouse button. The roof section is

To draw with the four-point freehand roof tool


1 2
Choose the Four-point Freehand Roof (Wall Assist) button from the Freehand toolset pop-up menu. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The Roofs properties appear.

drawn.

To draw with the three-point freehand roof tool


1 2
Choose the Three-point Freehand Roof (Wall Assist) button from the Freehand toolset pop-up menu. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The Roofs properties appear.

3 (optional) Enter the pitch or angle you want in

the Inspector. Press the Enter key to accept new values. want.

4 (optional) Select the Elevation Measurement you 5 (optional) Select or deselect the soffits you want
to include or exclude.

3 (optional) Enter the pitch or angle you want in

the Inspector. Press the Enter key to accept new values. want.

4 (optional) Select the Elevation Measurement you 5 (optional) Select or deselect the soffits you want
to include or exclude.

6 Position the crosshair on a wall where you want


the roof section to start.

Drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

6 Position the crosshair on a wall where you want


the roof section to start.

Drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line

1 7 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Dormer Cutout Tool


signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

3 Drag a cornerpoint of the roof until the roof is


the size you want.

4 Release the mouse button to place.

To change the roofs pitch


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select an edge of the roof. 3 In the Inspector, click the Properties tab. The
Roofs properties appear.

8 Release the mouse button. The roof section is


drawn.

4 Enter the Pitch or Angle you want. Be sure to


press the Enter key to accept new values. create a flat roof.

Using the Dormer Cutout Tool


A Cutout Tool is available for creating dormers on roofs. The tool is similar to other cutout tools available.

5 (optional) Enter a pitch of 0.0 in the field to

To change a roofs elevation


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. to edit. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar.

To cut out a roof for a dormer


1
Choose the Dormer Cutout button in the Roofing Plan toolbar. roof. Click to start the cutout and drag to the next point. and click points to create the shape you want.

2 Click to select the roof or roof section you want 3 (optional) Select the Elevation Measurement you

2 Be sure you are on the same floor as the

3 Click to set the next point and continue to drag 4 Ctrl-click to finish. The roof section is cut out.

want in the Inspector. Measure from base sets the base of the roof at the specified elevation. Measure from peak set the top of the roof at the specified elevation. Enter key to accept the values.

4 Type the elevation you want, then press the

Editing Roofs
Once drawn, roof sections can be altered to suit your design. From resizing to rotating the slope to changing its pitch, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it simple to create even the most complex roofline.

OR
Choose Edit > Elevate Object, and specify the elevation you want, then click OK.

To change the roofs slope direction


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. roof or roof section you want to edit.

To resize the roof


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the arrow in the center of the

2 Click to select an edge of the roof.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 7 7

Chapter 20 Roofing Plan Tab


3 Drag to rotate the arrow in the direction you
want the roof to slope down.

4 Choose the Wall button from the Wall


toolset pop-up menu, in the Floor Plan toolbar.

4 Release the mouse. The slope is repositioned. N O T E : Rotation is constrained to 5-degree increments.

T I P : Turn on the Roof Plan visibility while working


on the Floor Plan so you can see the dormer.

5 Drag to draw a wall across the front of the roof

Drawing a Dormer
Dormers are windows set into small gables, used to add light and space to the top floor of a building, typically the attic. Dormers are more easily applied after the roof has been completed. In the following example, the dormer itself is drawn on the third floor, while the Dormer Cutout is drawn on the second floor. The Dormer Cutout Tool must be applied to a roof object.

section. Notice that the wall follows the crosshair and automatically displays the wall length. length is reached.

6 Release the mouse button when the correct wall 7


Click to select the wall. Its properties appear in the Inspector. and pitch needed to match the roof. In this example, the gable wall is four feet high, with a pitch of 10:12. While the wall is selected, set the elevation needed to position the gable wall vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an elevation of 21'-0".

8 Choose the Gable wall style and enter the height

To draw a dormer
1
Choose the Gable Connector button from the Roofs toolset pop-up menu. The roofs properties appear. Be sure the Pitch is set to 10:12. Press the Enter key to accept new values. the shape needed. Release the mouse button to place.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

3 In the design window, drag the dormer roof to

1 0 Choose the Wall button from the Wall toolset


pop-up menu.

1 1 Drag to draw a wall on each side of the dormer.


Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

1 2 Release the mouse button when the correct wall 1 3 In the Inspector, enter the dimensions of the

length is reached. In this example, the side walls are only seven inches long. side wall. In this example, the side wall is one inch high, tapering to a height of four feet, with a pitch of 10:12.

1 7 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding a Skylight

1 9 (optional) Choose Design > Work on Floor >

Second Floor (or the floor where the original roof is placed).

OR 1 4 (optional) Use the Object Elevation field to


Choose the floor where the original roof is placed from the Working Floor pop-up menu.

exactly position the gable wall, vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an elevation of 21'0".

2 0 Choose the Dormer Cutout button in the


Roof toolbar.

2 1 Trace the Dormer Roof, leaving some

space at the end where the dormer connects to the roof.

1 5 Repeat steps 9 through 13 for the opposite side


wall.

1 6 Choose the Window button in the Floor

Plan toolbar and choose a window style in the Inspector. and release to place.

Adding a Skylight
Skylights are windows cut into the roof. They add a touch of elegance, in addition to letting in more natural light.

1 7 Drag along the gable wall to position the window 1 8 While the window is selected, enter the
dimensions in the Inspector. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 7 9

Chapter 20 Roofing Plan Tab To add a skylight


1
Choose the Skylight button in the Roof toolbar. The skylights properties appear.

Drawing a Gambrel Roof


The Gambrel, or barn, roof is a popular style because it increases the usable space in the loft/attic area. A gambrel roof is composed of two pitches. The lower sections are created using the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool, while the upper pitch will be drawn using the Gable Roof Tool.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

3 Choose the skylight style you want.


(optional) Click the Custom Skylight option to see a listing of the available custom skylights.

To draw a gambrel roof


1
Choose the Four-point Freehand Roof (Wall Assist) button from the Freehand toolset pop-up menu. roofs properties appear. key.

4 To place, click a roof section in the design

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The 3 Enter 12 in the Pitch field, and press the Enter 4 Drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band
line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

window to define the placement of the skylight.

To resize a skylight
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. edit.

2 Click to select the skylight you want to 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
skylights properties appear.

4 Enter the Width, Height, and Trim to customize

the dimensions. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

To change a skylight style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the skylight you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
skylights properties appear. updated.

5 Release the mouse button. The roof section is


drawn.

4 Choose the style you want. The skylight is

6 Choose Edit > Copy (or press Command) to copy


the roof section.

Choose Edit > Paste (or press Command-V). A duplicate roof section is created. the roof section 180 degrees, so it faces the opposite direction from the other arrow.

8 Drag to rotate the bold arrow in the center of

1 8 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Saltbox Roof


9
Drag to align this roof section on the other side of the floor plan. Note the elevation that is specified in red as the upper elevation of the roof section.

N O T E : At this point there will be a gap between the two roof sections; this gap will be filled with the Gable Roof section. Note the highest elevation on these roof sections; this will be the elevation to which the center roof section will be elevated. 1 0 Choose the Gable button from the Roofs
toolset pop-up menu.

N O T E : To close the gable ends of this roof style, use a combination of the Wall Break Tool and Gable Wall segments. For more information, see Breaking a Wall, which begins on page 130 and Defining Gable Wall Segments on page 129.

Drawing a Saltbox Roof


Saltbox roofs are similar to gable roofs, with an offset ridge. Although they are not symmetrical, they are extremely attractive and easy to create.

1 1 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.


The roofs properties appear. key.

1 2 Enter 4 in the Pitch field and press the Enter 1 3 Drag to extend the roof between the two
freehand roof sections.

1 4 Elevate the roof section to the top of the


freehand sections (as noted above).

To draw a saltbox roof


1
Choose the Four-point Freehand Roof (Wall Assist) button from the Freehand toolset pop-up menu. roofs properties appear. key.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The 3 Enter 8 in the Pitch field and press the Enter 4 Enter 1" (one inch) in the Soffit Depth field and
press the Enter key.

5 (optional) Deselect the Show Soffits checkbox


4:12 pitches, but any combination of pitches will work for this roof.

N O T E : The previous example specified 12:12 and

to remove the soffits.

6 Drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band


line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 8 1

Chapter 20 Roofing Plan Tab

Drag a selection box around all points of the roof section to select it. Make a note of the elevation that is specified as the upper elevation of the roof section.

8 Choose Edit > Copy (or press Command-C). 9 Choose Edit > Paste (or press Command-V). A
duplicate roof section is created.

1 3 Under Elevation Measurement, select the

Measure from base button to measure from the ground to the peak of the roof section. elevation noted in step 7, and press the Enter key to elevate the roof section.

1 0 Drag to rotate the bold arrow in the center of


the roof section 180 degrees, so it faces the opposite direction from the other arrow.

1 4 While the roof section is selected, enter the

OR
Choose Edit > Elevate Object and enter the elevation, then click OK.

1 1 Click the lower edge of the second roof section


and drag to resize the roof.

N O T E : To close the gable ends of this roof style, refer to Defining Gable Wall Segments on page 129.

1 2 Click the roof section to select it. Its properties


appear in the Inspector.

1 8 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 21

HVAC Plan Tab


Correctly adding HVAC ducts and units is an important part of the home design process. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to flawlessly design your HVAC system, making sure all rooms receive adequate ventilation. Once you place HVAC, with a few mouse clicks, its easy to adjust or move components. You can even move components by a specific distance, based on Cartesian or Polar coordinates, or rotate items, as needed.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 8 3

Chapter

21 HVAC Plan Tab


A dialog appears.

Placing Air Ducts


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro features several sized air ducts to ensure the perfect HVAC plan. To place air ducts, simply drag. Air ducts are drawn horizontally and vertically, just as standard HVAC ducts are actually placed in a new home. You can move air ducts by dragging, by a specific distance, or rotate them to fit your home design. If you dont find the perfectly-sized air duct for your home plan, you can define the size of the duct yourself, using the HVAC Properties Inspector.

4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. coordinates you specified.

5 Click OK. The air duct is moved, based on the

To place air ducts


1
Choose the Air Duct button in the HVAC Plan toolbar. duct work appears, as you drag, displaying the measurements of the duct.

To rotate air ducts


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Drag in the design window to extend. The

2 Click to select the air duct you want to rotate. 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

N O T E : Drawing is constrained to 15-degree angles;


to release this constraint, hold down the Shift key, while drawing. segment.

3 Release the mouse button to place the air duct

4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle


Unit System you want.

5 Enter the angle you want the air duct rotated. 6 Click OK. The air duct is rotated.

To resize an air duct


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To move air ducts a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the air duct you want to resize. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The air
ducts properties appear.

2 Click to select the air duct you want to 3 Choose Edit > Move. OR
Double-click the Selection button.

1 8 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Placing Vents and Registers


4 Enter new Width and Depth measurements in the
appropriate fields, and press the Enter key to accept new values. The air duct you selected is resized.

Placing Vents and Registers


Placing vents and registers involves one mouse click. Once youve placed vents, you can move them by dragging or defining specific coordinates. You can even rotate vents at custom angles to fit your design. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides several vents to choose from, including floor and ceiling vents.

To move a vent or register by a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Move. OR
Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

To place ceiling and floor registers


1
Choose the register type you want from the Register toolset pop-up menu. you want the vent to appear and click to place.

2 Position the crosshair where

4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. coordinates you specified.

5 Click OK. The selection is moved, based on the

To place an air return


1
Choose the Air Return button in the HVAC Plan toolbar. you selected is placed.

To rotate registers or vents


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click once in your plan drawing. The vent

2 Click to select the entity you want to rotate. 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 8 5

Chapter

21 HVAC Plan Tab

4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle


Unit System you want.

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units, and Pumps


Adding heating and air conditioning units only involves one mouse click. Once placed, you can move units by specific distances, drag to move them, and even rotate them to fit your home design.

To move a heating or air conditioning unit by a specific distance


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move. Selection handles appear.

To place a furnace
1
Choose the Furnace button in the HVAC Plan toolbar. furnace to appear and click to place.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Move. OR
Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. coordinates you specified.

5 Click OK. The selection is moved, based on the

To place an air conditioner or heat pump


1
Choose the type of unit you want from the Heating/Cooling toolset pop-up menu. you want the unit to appear and click to place.

To rotate heating or air conditioning units


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Position the crosshair where

2 Click to select the entity you want to rotate. 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

1 8 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Placing Baseboard Heaters


2 Click to select the heater you want to move.
Selection handles appear.

3 Drag the register to a new location. As you move


the heater, automatic dimensioning appears. the new location.

4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle


Unit System you want.

4 Release the mouse button to place the heater in

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

Elevating Entities
You can set an objects elevation to match that of a floors base or surface. This makes it easy to accurately place objects at custom elevations, such as placing a floor register perfectly on the surface of a floor with a custom elevation, or an air conditioner onto a slab so it is set to the exact elevation as the floor surface.

Placing Baseboard Heaters


As you place baseboard heaters in your home plan, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place heaters a specific distance from a neighboring HVAC component or wall segment. Youll notice that, when placing heaters, the object is automatically tracked to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

To elevate an entity
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar.

To place baseboard heaters


1
Choose the Baseboard Heater button in the HVAC Plan toolbar. baseboard heater. The heater appears, as you drag, with dimensions. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the heater to the nearest wall or other HVAC component.

2 Click to select the entity you want to

2 Drag along a wall to position the

3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches,


or just inches, then press the Enter key. The selection is elevated based on the values you entered.

OR 1 Choose Edit > Elevate Object. A dialog appears. 2 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The
entity is elevated.

3 Release the mouse button to place the heater.

To elevate to nearby elevations


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate to an existing elevation in the design window.

2 Select the entity (or entities) you want to

To move a baseboard heater


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 8 7

Chapter

21 HVAC Plan Tab


OR
Click the Working Floor button in the toolbar, and choose the floor on which you want to work from the pop-up menu.

N O T E : The entity being elevated must be positioned on top of the surface to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a television to the top of a corner table surface, drag the television so it is positioned within the boundaries of the table. 3 Click the Object Elevation pop-up menu. A list of
detected elevations appears.

OR
To work on the first floor, press OptionCommand-1. To work on the second floor, press OptionCommand-2. To work on the third floor, press OptionCommand-3.

4 Select the surface to which you want the entity


elevated. The object is elevated.

Controlling Drawing Settings


You can control a variety of drawing settings in the Design menu. When working within multiple floors, it is important to have control of your ceiling heights, working floor and to be sure youre at the correct working elevation

Editing Your Design


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides you with editing tools to help you modify your interior floor plan. You must select the object(s) you want to edit before clicking from the Edit menu.

To set the working elevation


While nothing is selected, the Working Elevation field is active in the toolbar. Type the working elevation you want, in inches, or feet and inches, then press the Enter key. Subsequently-drawn entities are added to the design based on the new working elevation.

To copy an object from one floor to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities.) Lower Floor to copy to a lower level).

2 Click to select the entity you want duplicated. 3 Choose Edit > Copy to Floor > Upper Floor (or N O T E : The first floor is set as your default working floor.

OR 1
Choose Design > Set Working Elevation. A dialog appears. and inches, and click OK.

2 Enter the necessary elevation in inches, or feet

To set ceiling heights


1
Choose Design > Default Ceiling Heights, then choose which floors ceiling you want to adjust from the submenu. A dialog appears.

To move objects from one floor to another


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking entities.) Lower Floor to move the original down one level).

2 Click to select the entity you want to move. (To 3 Choose Edit > Move to Floor > Upper Floor (or

2 Enter the ceiling height you want and click OK. 3 (optional) Repeat these steps for each floor
ceiling height you want to adjust.

To work on a selected floor


Choose Design > Work on Floor, then choose the floor you want to work on from the submenu.

To move an object or entity a specified amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

1 8 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Editing Your Design


2 Click to select the entity you want to move.
To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking.

To flip a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Vertical.

3 Choose Edit > Move. OR


Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

To mirror a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Horizontal.

4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate


system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. on the coordinates you specified.

To mirror a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Vertical.

5 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based

To freely rotate an entity


1
Choose the Rotate button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. rotate.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag in the
direction that you want the entity to rotate.The degree of rotation appears in the Status Bar, as you drag.

N O T E : By default, entities are rotated around their centerpoint, in 5-degree increments. 4 Release the mouse button to place.

To rotate by specifying an amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the entity you want to rotate. 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle


Unit System you want.

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

To flip a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Horizontal.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 8 9

Chapter

21 HVAC Plan Tab

1 9 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 22

Deck Plan Tab


If you are looking for a way to add more living space to your existing home, but dont want to build an addition, you might consider adding a deck. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro contains an extensive toolset for designing outdoor living areas. You will learn how to design multi-story and multi-level decks, including options for handrails, skirt trim, and steps.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 9 1

Chapter 22 Deck Plan Tab

Adding a Deck
Adding a deck is a great way to add living space to your home. With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can build deck sections on the fly, with or without railings. All sections can be altered, if you change your mind, in the middle of the design process.

5 Drag the crosshair to the next cornerpoint.

Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck. Right-click to finish.

To reshape a deck
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to reshape.

To draw a deck
1
Choose the deck tool you want from the Deck toolset pop-up menu. the Inspector. The decks properties appear.

2 Click to select the side of the deck you 3 Drag a cornerpoint to the position you want.
Release to place.

2 Click the Properties tab in

Tracing an Exterior Wall Perimeter


The two Trace Wall Deck tools make designing a deck against an intricate set of exterior walls simple. At any time during the designing process, you can view your work in 3D.

To draw a wall trace perimeter deck


1
Choose the Deck Wall Trace button from the Wall Trace toolset pop-up menu. want the center of the deck and drag to extend the deck. A rubber-band rectangle appears and follows the pointer. Dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 Position the crosshair on a wall where you

3 Choose the deck style you want. 4 Click in the design window to define the start

point of the deck. A rubber-band line appears and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the deck. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

3 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the


deck to the size you want.

1 9 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Changing the Deck Height

4 Click and drag the crosshair to the next

cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck.

4 Release the mouse button. The deck will conform


to the wall perimeter.

5 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode.

N O T E : Only the edges of the deck that are away from the house perimeter will have railings.

To draw a wall trace perimeter polygon deck


1
Choose the Custom Deck Wall Trace button from the Wall Trace toolset popup menu. the deck to be drawn. A rubber-band arrow appears and follows the crosshair. Release the mouse button.

Changing the Deck Height


Creating multi-story and multi-level decks is easy. With just a few mouse clicks, you can design a very elaborate and elegant deck.

2 Drag along a wall to define the direction you want

To change deck height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to raise or lower.

2 Click to select the side of the deck you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
decks properties appear.

3 Click the wall where you want to change

direction. The deck will conform to the wall perimeter.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 9 3

Chapter 22 Deck Plan Tab

Editing Handrail Options


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can easily customize deck options. By default, handrail height is 36" and baluster spacing is set to 6".

To remove handrails
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. you want to remove handrails. decks properties appear.

2 Click to select the side of the deck where 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The 4 Enter the Height, in inches or feet and inches. A

positive number raises the deck, while a negative number lowers it. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

form.

N O T E : Fractions of inches are entered in decimal

Editing Skirt Trim Options


By default, Skirt Trim is included on all sides of the deck. In addition to including skirt trim on only the sides you want, you can customize it by applying colors or materials. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Viewing in 2D & 3D, which begins on page 23.

4 Under Rails and Balusters, deselect the


Handrails checkbox.

To remove skirt trim


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. you want to remove skirt trim. decks properties appear.

N O T E : To select more than one side of your deck, hold the Shift key down, while clicking sides.

2 Click to select the side of the deck where 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The 4 Under Deck Appearance, deselect the Skirting
checkbox to remove the skirting. To replace deck skirting, reselect the Skirting checkbox. hold the Shift key down, while clicking sides.

To change handrail height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit handrails.

2 Click to select the side of the deck where you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
decks properties appear.

4 Under Rails and Balusters, enter the Height you


want and press the Enter key.

N O T E : To select more than one side of your deck, 1 1 9 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

To change baluster spacing


Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Editing Step Options


2 Click to select the side of the deck where you
want to edit handrails.

3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The


decks properties appear.

2 Click to select the steps you want to resize. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
deck step properties appear.

4 Under Rails and Balusters, enter the Spacing you


want and press the Enter key. remove posts.

5 (optional) Deselect the Posts checkbox to

Editing Step Options


Using Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can add steps to any side of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position.

4 Enter the new Width and press the Enter key.

To change the step height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To add steps
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to add steps.

2 Click to select the steps you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
deck step properties appear.

2 Click to select the side of the deck where you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
decks properties appear.

4 Enter the new Height and press the Enter key. N O T E : This is especially useful when designing multi-level decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground, just the next deck level.

To edit handrail placement


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the steps you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
deck step properties appear.

4 Deselect the Left Handrail checkbox or Right


Handrail checkbox to remove the handrail. reselect a checkbox to replace the handrail.

Placing a Custom Staircase


4 Under Deck Step Properties, click the Insert
Steps button. The steps will be inserted in the middle of the selected side. In addition to the Insert Steps feature, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro gives you the option of easily drawing custom staircases.

To resize steps by a specific measurement


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To draw a straight staircase


1
Choose the Straight Stairway button from the Stairway toolset pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 9 5

Chapter 22 Deck Plan Tab


2 Click to define the start point and extend the
stairway to the location you want. A rubber-band stairway, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while drawing, to release the 5-degree constraint. Click to set the endpoint for the stairway and then Ctrl-click to place.

3 4

To draw a curved staircase


1 2
Choose the Curved Stairway button from the Stairway toolset pop-up menu. Click to define the start point and extend the stairway to the location you want. A rubberband stairway, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while drawing, to constrain stairs to a perfect arc. Click to set the endpoint and place the stairway.

3 4

4 Under Staircase Appearance, enter the Height 5

Modifying a Custom Staircase


Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you have total control over stairway width, riser, and tread dimensions, as well as handrail height and placement.

and Width to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values. (optional) Select, or deselect, the checkboxes to enable or disable the following options: Skirt Walls aligns both sides to enclose the stairway. Closed Stringer encloses the sides of the steps. Large base adds additional support at the base steps of the stairway.

Reversing the direction of a staircase


1 2
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Ctrl-click the centerline of the stairway you want to edit and choose Reverse Staircase Direction from the shortcut menu. The direction of the stairway is reversed.

Resizing a staircase
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. resize. resize.

2 Click the centerline of the staircase you want to 3 Drag an endpoint or midpoint of the staircase to OR 1 2 3
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the stairway you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the stairways properties appear.

N O T E : This works for both curved and straight stairways.

To resize stairway steps


1 2 3 4
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the stairway you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the stairways properties appear. Under Step Appearance, enter the Height and Depth to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

1 9 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Custom Railings


5 (optional) Select the Open Steps checkbox to
remove the riser.

Modifying a Custom Railing


Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. Using Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you gain total control over railing handrail height, baluster spacing, and railing posts.

To control stairway handrails


1 2 3 4 5
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the stairway you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the stairways properties appear. Under Handrail Appearance, enter the Height to customize the dimension. Press the Enter key to accept new values. (optional) Select include, or deselect to exclude, the Left Handrail and Right Handrail.

Resizing a railing
1 2 3
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Double-click to select the railing you want to reshape or resize. The control points appear. Drag points to reshape or resize the railing.

Adding Custom Railings


Customizing railings is easy with Punch! Home Design Studio Pro; you can simply add railings to any side of your deck.

To change the railing height


1 2 3 4
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the railing you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the railings properties appear. Under Handrail Appearance, enter the Height to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To draw a straight railing


1 2
Choose the Straight Railing button from the Railing toolset pop-up menu. Click to define the start point and extend the railing to the location you want. A rubberband railing, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair. Click to set the endpoint for the railing and then Ctrl-click to place.

For more information, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 220.

To adjust baluster spacing


1 2 3 4 5
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the railing you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the railings properties appear. Under Baluster Appearance, enter the Spacing to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept new values. (optional) Select, or deselect, the Include Post checkbox to include, or exclude, posts.

To draw a curved railing


1 2
On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Railing button on the collapsible toolset. The Handrail Edit Sheet appears. Click to define the start point of the railing. A rubber-band railing, with dimensions, appears and follows the crosshair.

N O T E : The railing appears angular as it is drawn, but will curve after the next point is set. 3 Continue to click points to define the shape of 4 5
the railing. (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while drawing, to constrain the railing to a perfect arc. After the last point has been placed, Ctrl-click to place the railing.

Creating a Deck Cutout


You can easily create a space in your deck to insert a pool or hot tub by using the Deck Cutout Tool.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 9 7

Chapter 22 Deck Plan Tab To create a deck cutout


1
Choose the Deck Cutout button in the Deck toolbar. cutout.

2 Click to define the start point of the deck 3 Drag to extend the cutout. A rubber-band line
appears and follows the crosshair. Notice dimensions appear, as you draw.

4 Click to set the next point. 5 Continue to drag and click points to define the
shape of the deck cutout.

6 Ctrl-click to finish and place the cutout.

Elevating Objects to a Decks Base or Surface


You can set an objects elevation to match that of a decks base or surface. This makes it easy to accurately place objects at custom elevations, such as tables and chairs to the surface of a deck, a grill onto a deck, and other objects perfectly on a decks top or bottom surface.

To elevate to a decks surface


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate to the deck surface.

2 Select the entity (or entities) you want to N O T E : The entity being elevated must be positioned on top of the deck in the design window. 3 Click the Object Elevation pop-up menu. in the
toolbar. A list of detected elevations appears.

4 Select the Deck - Surface, or the surface to

which to want the entity elevated. The object is elevated.

1 9 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 23

Landscape Plan Tab


From adding a flower bed near your front door to designing an elaborate pool area, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro contains an extensive toolset to help you design your outdoor living areas. You will learn to add a pond, pathways, and fencing to your home plan. In addition, you can create flower beds that you can landscape, using flowers, shrubs, and trees, accessible from the Plant libraries.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 1 9 9

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab

Defining the Property Line


If you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area, you may want to define the property lines. The property line will only appear in the 2D design window.

To curve a property line


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit.

2 Click to select the property line segment you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
property lines properties appear. appears.

To define the property line


1
Choose the Property Line button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. property line. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first edge of the property line. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw. cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the property line.

4 Click the Adjust Curvature button. A dialog 5 Adjust the Curve Tension by entering a value 6 Click OK. Your property line is updated.
from 0 (straight line) to 10, or click the arrows.

2 Click to define the start point of the

3 Click and move the pointer to the next 4 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode.

Entering Points from a Survey Plan


Double-clicking the Property Line button, launches a survey coordinates dialog. There are three methods for defining a property line. Points are defined almost identically in the three methods; choose the one that is most comfortable for you. Azimuth: Defines points in degrees, minutes, and seconds, clockwise from North. Bearing: Defines points in angles, minutes, and seconds, using North, South, East, and West as guides. Relative: Defines points in feet and inches, using the previous point as a reference.

Defining a drawing method


Curve Tool on the Detail Tab, then see Converting Details to Intelligent Features, which begins on page 221.

N O T E : To draw curved property lines, use the

Double-click the Property Line button. in the Landscape toolbar. A dialog appears.

To edit the property line


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the property line. 3 Drag a cornerpoint or edge of the property line
to resize or reshape.

2 00 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Entering Points from a Survey Plan

2 Choose the method you want to use from the


Coordinate Mode pop-up menu.

Adding a point
1
Click the Add button. A dialog appears.

Click OK. Your survey perimeter will be displayed in the design window.

Deleting a point
1
In the coordinates dialog, select the point you want to delete.

2 Click the Delete button to delete the point.

Inserting a point
options available for adding a point may vary. Meridian pop-up menu. pop-up menu. fields.

N O T E : Depending on your Coordinate Mode, the 2 Choose North or South from the Reference 3 Choose East or West from the Line Direction 4 Enter the points details in the corresponding 5 Click OK to add the point. 6 Continue defining points until you have defined
your entire lot perimeter.

In the coordinates dialog, select the row number where you want the new point to appear.

2 Click the Add button. N O T E : Points are always inserted before the point you have selected. 3 Specify the points coordinates and click OK to
add the point.

Editing a point
1
In the coordinates dialog, select the point you want to edit.

2 Click the Edit button. 3 Make the necessary edits to the


coordinate.

4 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 20 1

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab Editing a Survey Plan


Ctrl-click a survey plan line and select Edit Survey Coordinate from the pop-up menu that appears.

Adding a Ground Fill Region


From simple, rectangular garden entryways and flower beds to elaborate planting areas, Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes designing them easy. You can design flower beds to flawlessly integrate with your home design.

5 (optional) Drag materials to the region in the 3D


View window.

To draw ground fill region


1
Choose the Ground Fill Region button from the Fill toolset pop-up menu. ground fill region. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first edge of the ground fill region. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 Click to define the start point of the

To reshape a ground fill region


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. region you want to reshape.

2 Click to select an edge of the ground fill 3 Drag points or edges to reshape the fill region. 3 Drag the crosshair to the next cornerpoint.
Repeat until you have completely drawn the ground fill region. region appears in both 2D and 3D.

Adding Fill
You can use the Fill Tool to show mulch around trees or shrubs, or to add a pond or stream to your landscaping.

4 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode. The ground fill

To mulch around a tree


1
Choose the Fill button from the Fill toolset pop-up menu. A rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair. Notice dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 Drag to extend the fill to the size needed. 3 Release the mouse button. 2 02 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Patio

4 (optional) Move the fill area into position, if


necessary.

N O T E : By default, mulch material will be applied to


the shape you drew. To apply different mulch or other material, see To apply material on page 43.

To add a pond
1
Choose the Fill button from the Fill toolset popup menu.

2 Drag to extend the pond to the size needed. 3 Release the mouse button to place. 4 Click the Content tab in the Inspector and
choose Materials from the pop-up menu.

Drag the water texture to the pond in the 3D View window.

5 Choose Mulch from the Punch! Library. The

Mulch library contents appear in the Preview window. water texture.

Drawing a Patio
Easily customize your outdoor living space by adding a patio.

6 Scroll through the available materials and find a

To define the patio shape


1
Choose the Patio button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first edge of the patio. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 Click to define the start point. A rubber-

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 03

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab

Customizing Cabinet Dimensions


Each cabinet style is made up of individual components, which can be customized to change the overall appearance of the cabinet. This gives you complete control over the cabinet design, and ultimately your entire cabinet layout.

To customize outdoor cabinet components


1 2 3 Drag the crosshair to the next cornerpoint. 4 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode.
Repeat until you have completely drawn the shape of your patio. Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the outdoor cabinet you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the cabinets properties appear.

To edit the patio shape


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the patio. 3 Drag a cornerpoint or edge of the patio to resize
or reshape.

Adding Outdoor Cabinets


Outdoor Cabinets can be added to your design with just a few mouse clicks. In addition to placing predesigned cabinets, you can customize each feature as well as create a cabinet of your own from scratch.

4 Choose the outdoor cabinet component you want


to edit from the pop-up menu. The components properties appear.

To add out cabinets


1
Choose the Outdoor Cabinet button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. and choose the cabinet style you want.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector

The customizable dimensions and options that are available will vary depending on the individual component you are editing.

3 Position the crosshair where you want the


cabinet to appear and click to place.

5 Enter the dimensions you want in the

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 04 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Cabinet Hardware


6 Continue to choose cabinet components you want
to edit from the pop-up menu and customize the cabinet options until it appears the way you want.

Adding Cabinet Hardware


Cabinet hardware is one of the most personal details that you can add to your design. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro has an extensive library of hardware.

To add hardware
1 2 3 4
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the outdoor cabinet to which you want to add hardware. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the outdoor cabinets properties appear. Choose Base Doors, Top Doors or Drawers from the pop-up menu. The components properties appear in the Inspector. and, in the dialog that appears, click to specify the location for the hardware, then click OK.

Select the knob or pull style you want. The hardware is added to the door and displayed in the 3D View.

To remove hardware
1 2 3 4
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the cabinet where you want to remove hardware. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the cabinets properties appear. Choose the component (Base Doors, Top Doors, or Drawers) from which you want to remove hardware, from the pop-up menu. The components properties appear in the Inspector. Scroll down to the bottom of the Preview window and select the Remove Hardware style. The hardware is removed from the selected component.

5 (optional) Click the Hardware Position button

6 Under Hardware and Facings, choose Hardware

from the pop-up menu and choose the hardware library you want, Knob or Pulls. Its contents appear in the Preview window.

To change the cabinet facing style


1 2 3 4 5
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Click to select the cabinet you want to modify. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab; the cabinets properties appear. Choose Base Doors, Top Doors, or Drawers from the pop-up menu. The components properties appear in the Inspector. Under Hardware and Facings, choose Facings from the pop-up menu. The Cabinet Door Styles library appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 0 5

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab


6 Drag the crosshair to the next point. Repeat 7
Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the pathway. until you have completely drawn the pathway.

N O T E : While drawing, curved pathways will appear angular, but will curve after the second mouse click.

To straighten a curved pathway


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. straighten.

2 Click to select the pathway you want to 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The 6 Choose the facing style you want. The style us
applied to the door or drawer and displayed in the 3D View. pathways properties appear.

4 Select the Straight button.

To curve a straight pathway


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or Driveways


In Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can design sidewalks, pathways, and driveways, using the same tool. Once a pathway is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material to suit your needs. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 33.

2 Click to select the pathway you want to curve. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
pathways properties appear.

4 Select the Curved button.

To reshape a pathway
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to reshape.

To add a pathway
1
Choose the Pathway/Driveway button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. The pathways properties appear.

2 Click to select the centerline of the pathway you 3 Drag a control point to reshape the pathway.
Release to place.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

To change the width of a pathway


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

3 Enter the Width you want and press the Enter


key.

2 Click to select the pathway you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
pathways properties appear.

4 (optional) Select the Curved or Straight style. 5 Click to define the start point of the pathway. A
rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

4 Enter a new Width, in inches, or feet and inches,


separated by a hyphen. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 06 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Edging an Area

Edging an Area
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to place edging around flower beds or along walkways. There are a variety of edging styles available, along with customizable properties like size and spacing. You can also apply colors or materials to the edging so it blends with your home plans color scheme. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 33. By default, edging is drawn as straight segments, but you can add curvature to selected or all segments.

4 Click to define the start point of the edging. A

rubber-band line appears and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

To draw straight edging


1
Choose the Edging button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. The edging properties appear.

5 Drag the crosshair to the next point and click to


place.

6 Continue to define the shape of the edging. Ctrlclick to end drawing mode.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

(optional) While the edging is selected, choose a different style in the Preview window to change the style.

3 (optional) Enter Width, Depth, Height, and

Spacing values to customize the dimensions. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 0 7

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab To draw curved edging


1
Choose the Edging button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. edging. A rubber-band line appears and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw. place. The following example will show you how to draw a typical fence of chain link. The material is a custom fencing material.

2 Click to define the start point of the

To add a fence
1
Choose the Fence button from the Fence toolset pop-up menu. The fence properties appear.

3 Drag the crosshair to the next point and click to 4 Continue to define the shape of the edging. Ctrlclick to end drawing mode.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

5 While selected, click the Adjust Curvature

button in the Inspector, then follow the steps for adding curvature, see Changing Curve Tension, which begins on page 220. different style in the Preview window to change the style.

6 (optional) While the edging is selected, choose a

To straighten curved edging


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

3 (optional) Choose the fence style you want from


the Style pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the edging you want to straighten. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
edging properties appear. appears.

4 Click the Adjust Curvature button. A dialog 5 Enter 0 in the Curve Tension field and click OK.

N O T E : To specify the dimensions, choose the Custom Fence style and enter the dimensions you want. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values. 4 Click to define the start point of the fence. A
rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

To reshape edging
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the edging you want to reshape. 3 Drag a control point to reshape the edging.
Release to place.

Drawing Fences and Gates


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can draw fences and gates with ease. Once a fence or gate is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled Adding 3D Features, which begins on page 33.

2 08 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Fences and Gates


5 Drag the crosshair to the next point and click.
Repeat until you have completely drawn the fence. appears.

6 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode. The fence

To customize the fence material


1
Click the Content tab in the Inspector and choose Materials from the pop-up menu. the Custom Fences disclosure triangle. The custom fence libraries appear.

2 From the Punch! Vendor & Bonus Library, click

4 Drag the chain link material to the fence in the


3D View window.

3 Click Chain-Linked, and its contents appear in the


Preview window.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 0 9

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab To resize a gate


Drag an endpoint on the gate and release to place.

OR 1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the fence segment with the gate. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
fence properties appear.

4 Under Gate Appearance, enter the Height you 5 (optional) Apply a gray color to the posts to
want and press the Enter key. simulate steel posts. For more information, see Applying Paint and Color, which begins on page 40.

Drawing Retaining Walls


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes it easy to add interest and functionality to your outdoor living areas by adding retaining walls. Retaining walls can be used to create raised planting beds, to line an above-ground swimming pool, and so on.

To change the fence style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the fence you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
fence properties appear.

To draw a retaining wall


1
Choose the Retaining Wall button in the Landscape Plan toolbar. retaining wall to the length you want. Notice that the retaining wall follows the crosshair and automatically displays the dimensions. wall length you want.

4 Choose a different fence style from the Style


pop-up menu. The fence is updated.

2 In the design window, drag to extend the

To reshape a fence
1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

3 Release the mouse button when you reach the 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, drawing individual walls,
until the retaining wall is complete.

2 Click to select the fence you want to reshape. 3 Drag a control point to reshape the fence.
Release to place.

To add a gate
1
Choose the Gate button from the Fence toolset pop-up menu. Inspector and enter a Length. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values. release to place.

2 (optional) Click the Properties tab in the

3 Drag along the fence to position the gate and N O T E : The style of the gate will always conform to
the fencing material; i.e., if a gate is placed on a privacy fence, the gate will be a privacy fence gate.

2 1 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Designing a Sprinkler System


N O T E : Drawing is constrained to 5-degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down the Shift key, while drawing. N O T E : If you dont see automatic dimensioning, while you draw, it may be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, choose 2D > Show Automatic Dimensions.

To change wall height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the wall you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
wall properties appear.

4 Drag to set the swing of the sprinkler head and


click to place.

4 Enter a new Height and press the Enter key. N O T E : Measurements are measured in inches, or in
feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

Designing a Sprinkler System


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro will be useful to design a sprinkler system for your yard.

To place a sprinkler head


1
Choose the Sprinkler Head button from the Irrigation toolset pop-up menu. center of the sprinkler area and drag. A rubberband line appears and follows the crosshair. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw, measuring the radius of the sprinkler area.

N O T E : By placing a series of sprinkler heads, with various coverages, you will achieve a complete watering pattern.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To draw an irrigation water line


1
Choose the Irrigation Water Line button from the Irrigation toolset pop-up menu. start point of the water line and drag. A rubberband line appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

3 Drag to extend the line to the length you want.

4 Release the mouse button to place the water line. 3 Drag until the degree of coverage is reached and
then release the mouse button.

To define an irrigation zone


1
Choose the Irrigation Zone button from the Irrigation toolset pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 1 1

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab


2 Position the crosshair where you want the
irrigation zone and click to place.

To place an irrigation control panel


1 2
Choose the Irrigation Control Panel button from the Irrigation toolset pop-up menu. Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where you want the irrigation control panel, on the side of the wall where you want it to appear, and release to place.

3 (optional) Choose the contour style you want and, 4 (optional) Enter the Elevation you want. N O T E : When an elevation is entered, it becomes the default elevation for the next contour line placed. 5 Draw the topography object, according to the
shape you chose.

To place an irrigation backflow valve


1
Choose the Irrigation Backflow Valve button from the Irrigation toolset pop-up menu. irrigation backflow valve and click to place.

if available, choose the drawing method from the Method pop-up menu.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To place a rain sensor


1
Choose the Rain Sensor button from the Irrigation toolset pop-up menu. rain sensor and click to place.

6 Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape. N O T E : You can find more information about drawing standard shapes. For more information, see Drawing Shapes, which begins on page 216.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

To change a contour line elevation

Drawing Topography Objects


Contour lines represent a series of connected points that share the same elevation; you can draw open or closed contours to represent the topography of your lot. The various contour tools all work in much the same way. You begin by choosing a general shape for your contour, setting the elevation, then choosing the drawing method. cumulative, each is relative to the working elevation of your drawing.

Select the contour line and type the elevation you want, then press the Enter key. The Object Elevation field is populated and the contour line is elevated.

OR 1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

N O T E : Elevations for topography objects are not

To draw topographical features


1
Choose the Topography Contour button from the Topography toolset pop-up menu. The contour properties appear.

2 Click to select the contour line. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
contour properties appear. key.

4 Enter the Elevation you want and press the Enter

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

Adding Slopes
Many topographical maps show slope, rather than complex topography shapes. Once youve defined the

2 1 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Excavating Topography
slope, you can move selected topography lines to create plateaus or otherwise customize your topography design.

5 Enter a new Descent angle and press the Enter


key.

To define slope sections


1
Choose the Topography Slope button from the Topography toolset pop-up menu. The slope properties appear.

Excavating Topography
From earth-contact homes to split front-to-back lots, you can excavate the footprint of your floor plan with ease.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

To excavate an area
1
Choose the Excavate Topography button from the Topography toolset pop-up menu. to be excavated and drag. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 Click to define the start point of the area 3 (optional) Enter the Elevation for the slope and
press the Enter key.

4 (optional) Enter the Descent angle for the slope


and press the Enter key.

5 Position the crosshair where you want the

N O T E : Drawing is constrained to 5-degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down the Shift key, while drawing. 3 Drag the crosshair to the next cornerpoint.
excavation. Repeat until you have completely drawn the area.

descent to begin and drag to extend the slope.

6 Release the mouse button to place the slope. 7 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the topography is
drawn to your lots specifications.

4 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the 5 (optional) While the excavated area is selected,
enter the elevation you want in the Object Elevation field and press the Enter key.

feet).

N O T E : Default elevation is -3' (negative three

To change a topography slope


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the slope you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
slopes properties appear.

4 Enter a new Elevation and press the Enter key.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 213

Chapter 23 Landscape Plan Tab

2 1 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 24

Detail Plan Tab


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro provides tools specifically for 2D drawing. Items drawn with these tools will not show up in the 3D View window, unless converted to 3D entities. These tools make it easy to label your plan, from description blocks that are used to label what is being printed on each page to notations about square footage on each floor. In addition, using the tools on the Detail Plan toolbar, you will be able to easily convert imported DXF/ DWG shapes to various smart entities like walls, stairways, flooring, property lines, and so on.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 15

Chapter 24 Detail Plan Tab

Drawing Shapes
The Detail Plan Tab features several tools for drawing basic shapes like rectangles, arcs, and curves. Methods for drawing these shapes are used throughout Punch! Home Design Studio Pro.

Drawing Rectangles and Squares


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window. If you choose, these shapes can be converted to a variety of features, for instance walls, stairways, pathways, edging, and so on. Rectangles can also be used as label boxes for your printed plans or can be converted to walls or flooring.

6 Drag to the size you want and then release the


mouse button to place the shape.

Drawing Circles and Ovals


You can draw circles and ovals, which can be converted to curved walls, curved stairways, groundfill regions, and so on.

To draw rectangles and squares


1
Choose the Rectangle button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

To draw circles and ovals


1
Choose the Circle/Oval button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


Pattern and Style for the shape. drawing method.

4 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the


draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from center, draw square from corner, and draw square from center.

3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


Pattern and Style for the shape. drawing method.

N O T E : The four predefined drawing methods are

4 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the N O T E : The four predefined drawing methods are draw oval from corner, draw oval from center, draw circle from corner, and draw circle from center. 5 Position the crosshair where you want to start
the shape and drag. A rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear, as you draw.

5 Position the crosshair where you want to start


the shape and drag. A rubber-band rectangle appears and follows the pointer. Dimensions appear, as you draw.

2 1 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Lines

6 Drag to the size you want and then release the


mouse button to place the shape.

Drawing Polygons
6 Drag to the size you want and then release the
mouse button to place the shape. You can draw open or closed polygons that can be easily converted into walls, roof sections, floors or floor cutouts, topography, and so on.

Drawing Lines
You can draw lines that can in turn be converted to walls, stairs, ducts, stiffener beams, edging, pathways, and so on.

To draw a polygon
1
Choose the Polygon button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

To draw lines
1
Choose the Line button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


Pattern and Style for the shape. drawing method.

4 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the N O T E : The two predefined drawing methods are closed polygon and open polygon. 5 Click to define the start point of the polygon. A
rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear, as you draw. have drawn the necessary shape.

3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


line Style for the shape. drawing method.

4 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the


draw from endpoint and draw from centerpoint.

N O T E : The two predefined drawing methods are 5 Position the crosshair where you want to start
the shape and drag. A rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear, as you draw.

6 Drag to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 1 7

Chapter 24 Detail Plan Tab

Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the shape.

N O T E : Hold down the Shift key to constrain the arc to a circular arc. 6 Drag to the size you want and then release the
mouse button to place the shape.

Drawing Arcs
With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and so on.

Drawing Circular Arcs


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs, and so on.

To draw an arc
1
Choose the Arc button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

To draw a circular arc


1
Choose the Circular Arc button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


line Style for the shape. drawing method.

3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


line Style for the shape.

4 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the N O T E : The two predefined drawing methods are free-form arc and 90-degree arc. 5 Position the crosshair where you want to start
the shape and drag. A rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear, as you draw.

4 Position the crosshair where you want the

centerpoint of the circular arc and drag. A rubber-band line follows the crosshair. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

2 1 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Multigons

5 Drag to extend the radius to the size you want


angle.

and release the mouse button to set the radius.

6 Drag clockwise, or counterclockwise, to set the

3 Enter the number of Sides for the multigon and


press the Enter key.

4 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the


Pattern and Style for the shape. drawing method.

5 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the 6 Position the crosshair where you want the
centerpoint of the multigon and drag. A rubberband multigon appears and follows the crosshair.

Click to end drawing mode and place the shape.

Drawing Multigons
You can draw equal-sided decks, floors, even treehouses with the easy-to-use Multigon button and the Convert To feature. For more information, see Converting Details to Intelligent Features, which begins on page 221.

N O T E : To change the multigons size, but constrain


its orientation, hold down the Command key while drawing. Drag to extend the multigon to the size you want and then release the mouse button to place.

To draw a multigon
1
Choose the Multigon button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

Drawing Curves
You can draw intricate curved flowerbeds and walls, among many other things, using the Curve Tool and the Convert To feature of Punch! Home Design Studio Pro.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

To draw a curve
1
Choose the Curve button in the Detail Plan toolbar. The shapes properties appear.

2 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 1 9

Chapter 24 Detail Plan Tab


4 Click the Adjust Curvature button. A dialog
appears.

5 Enter the amount of Curve Tension that you want 3 (optional) Under Detail Appearance, choose the
Pattern and Style for the shape. drawing method. or click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease in increments of one. A lower value results in less curvature, while a higher value results in more curvature.

4 (optional) Under Detail Editing, choose the


closed curve and open curve.

6 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is


applied.

N O T E : The two predefined drawing methods are 5 Click to define the start point of the curve. A
rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear, as you draw. have drawn the necessary shape.

Examples: Default Curve Tension (8):

6 Drag to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you N O T E : Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 7
Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the shape.

Curve Tension set at 2:

Changing Curve Tension


To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Straighten feature, it is easy to create angular shapes and, with Curve Tension, you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 10. Specifying 1 in the dialog results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 10 causes a slightly-exaggerated curve.

To change curve tension


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Using Rules and Fills


You can change the thickness (size) of the lines or fills of the shapes drawn with tools on the Detail Plan tab.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

2 20 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Converting Details to Intelligent Features

To change the line weight


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To set the fill to solid


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear. and press the Enter key.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

4 Enter the thickness you want in the Size field OR


Click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the size in increments of one.

4 Choose Solid foreground from the Pattern popup menu. The shape appears filled with a solid color.

To set the fill to a pattern


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To change the line style


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

4 Choose the fill pattern you

4 Choose the line style you

want from the Pattern popup menu. The shape is filled with the selected pattern.

want from the Style pop-up menu. The style of the rule outlining the detail shape is changed.

To control layering of detail shapes


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. Bring to Front or Send to Back from the shortcut menu.

To set the fill to transparent


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Ctrl-click the shape you want to edit and choose

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

4 Choose No Fill from the Pattern pop-up menu.


The shape appears transparent.

Converting Details to Intelligent Features


With Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window, or you can convert them to intelligent features. For example, you can convert a line to a fence, a rectangle to four exterior walls, a circle to a deck or even a circular stairway, and so on. There is virtually no limit to what you can draw, using this combination. Following are a few examples of what this powerful process can do!

To set the fill to white


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

4 Choose Solid background from the Pattern popup menu. The shape appears in white.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 22 1

Chapter 24 Detail Plan Tab To convert a shape to an intelligent object


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The


shapes properties appear. button.

4 Under Detail Editing, select the Object Level 5 Drag the selection to the new position or shape. 6 Release the mouse button to place.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear.

4 Choose the feature to which you want the

selection converted from the Convert pop-up menu. The shape is converted to the feature you specified.

To use point selection mode


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear. button.

4 Under Detail Editing, select the Point Level 5 Drag points to the a new position to reshape the
selection.

6 Release the mouse button to place.

Editing Detail Shapes


Object-Level Editing is active by default. ObjectLevel Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To fine-tune your design further, use the Insert Point or Delete Point tools. These tools are available anytime, but are especially useful when editing shapes.

To use object selection mode


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit.

2 22 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 25

Framing Plan Tab


The tools contained on Punch! Home Design Studio Pros Framing Plan tab allow you to view and edit the framing of your design. You can add beams, joists, and other supports, plus you have total control over what size lumber is used for what purpose.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 2 3

Chapter 25 Framing Plan Tab

Customizing Wall Framing Properties


As you draw walls in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you specify which walls are insulated, which are load bearing, and so on.

Adding Structural Components


The Framing tools let you define exactly where and what kind of lumber or other material is to be used for the framing phase of your design.

To specify insulation
1
Ctrl-click a wall and choose Framing Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears.

To add a framing beam


1
Choose the Framing Bean button in the Framing Plan toolbar. beam to start and drag. Notice that the beam follows the crosshair and automatically displays the length. and place the beam.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the

3 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode 2 Select the Insulated wall checkbox to include
insulation.

N O T E : Drawing is constrained to 15-degree angles;


to release this constraint, hold down the Shift key, while drawing.

OR
Deselect the Insulated wall checkbox to exclude insulation.

To add flooring joists


1
Choose the Framing Joist button in the Framing Plan toolbar. flooring joists, and drag. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring joists. Notice that dimensions appear, as you draw.

3 Click OK.

2 Click to define the start point of the

To specify load bearing


1
Ctrl-click a wall and choose Framing Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears. wall is load-bearing.

2 Select the Load bearing wall checkbox if the OR


Deselect the Load bearing wall checkbox if the wall is not load-bearing.

3 Click OK.

To specify framing material


1
Ctrl-click a wall and choose Framing Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears. Material pop-up menu.

3 Drag the crosshair to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring joists area. joists.

2 Choose the material you want to use from the 3 Click OK.

4 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the

To place support columns


1
Choose the Framing Column button in the Framing Plan toolbar.

2 24 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Customizing Framing Beam Properties


2 Position the crosshair where you want the column
and click to place. A support column will be placed at the location of each mouse click.

2 Click to select the perimeter of the joist you


want to edit.

3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The


beams properties appear.

Customizing Framing Beam Properties


After adding a framing beam you can change its type and size.

To specify beam type


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the beam you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
beams properties appear.

4 Choose the type of joist material you want from


the Type pop-up menu.

To change joist angle


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit.

2 Click to select the perimeter of the joist you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The 4 Choose the type of beam you want from the Type
pop-up menu. beams properties appear.

4 Enter the degree at which you want the joists


placed in the Angle field, and press the Enter key.

To change framing beam size


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To change joist spacing


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit.

2 Click to select the beam you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
beams properties appear.

2 Click to select the perimeter of the joist you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
beams properties appear.

4 Enter the Width and Depth you want in the

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

4 Enter the new spacing, in the Spacing field and

Customizing Joist Properties


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro automatically frames each floor, wall, and roof section with specifications that you can easily modify.

press the Enter key. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

To change joist height


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit.

To specify joist material


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the perimeter of the joist you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
beams properties appear.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 2 5

Chapter 25 Framing Plan Tab


4 Enter the new size in the Height field and press
the Enter key. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The


beams properties appear.

4 Enter the Height and Diameter you want in the

To specify rim joists


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to edit.

corresponding fields. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Click to select the perimeter of the joist you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
beams properties appear.

Customizing Rafter Properties


Roof sections are automatically framed with specifications set in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. You can easily modify all of these settings.

4 Select the Rim-joist (header) checkbox. OR


Deselect the Rim-joist (header) checkbox to remove the header.

To specify rafter material


1
Ctrl-click the perimeter of a roof and choose Framing Properties. A dialog appears.

Specifying Support Column Properties


After adding a support column, you can change its material and size.

To specify column material


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. edit.

2 Choose the rafter material you want from the


Material pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the column you want to 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
beams properties appear.

3 Click OK.

To change rafter spacing


1
Ctrl-click the perimeter of a roof and choose Framing Properties. A dialog appears.

2 Enter the Rafter Spacing you want and click OK.

To change rafter size


1 4 Choose the type of column material you want
from the Type pop-up menu. Ctrl-click the perimeter of a roof and choose Framing Properties. A dialog appears.

2 Enter the Rafter Height you want and click OK.

To specify roof framing style


1
Ctrl-click the perimeter of a roof and choose Framing Properties. A dialog appears. specify the Framing style. OK.

To change column size


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Select the Trusses button or Rafter button to 3 Enter the corresponding Spacing value and click

2 Click to select the column you want to edit.

2 26 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Customizing Deck Framing Properties

Customizing Deck Framing Properties


Decks are automatically framed with specifications set in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro. You can easily modify all of these settings.

To specify deck material


1
Ctrl-click the perimeter of a deck and choose Framing Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears.

2 Choose the framing material you want from the


Material pop-up menu.

3 Click OK.

To edit deck framing properties


1
Ctrl-click the perimeter of a deck and choose Framing Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears. the corresponding fields.

2 Enter the decking boards Width and Angle, in 3 Enter the deck joist Height, Spacing, and Angle,
in the corresponding fields.

4 Click OK.

To edit deck pier/post properties


1
Ctrl-click the perimeter of a deck and choose Framing Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog appears. want in the corresponding fields.

2 Enter the post piers Diameter and Depth you 3 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 2 7

Chapter 25 Framing Plan Tab

2 28 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Part 4

DESIGN & DRAWING POWERTOOLS

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes a wide variety of PowerTools. PowerTools are programs that work in concert with your Punch! Program to provide additional functionality. The Design & Drawing PowerTools allow users to add features to their designs.

Chapter 26: Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Chapter 27: Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Chapter 28: Fireplace Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

CHAPTER 26

Door Designer
Whether youre drawing custom grillwork or simply designing a door for a unique space, Punch! Door Designer lets you create custom doors that behave and render like any other door in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 3 1

Chapter 26 Door Designer

Designing Custom Doors


With Door Designer you can create custom doors by using an unlimited variety of the three door components. Door Casing is the trim that surrounds the door opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine shapes to create a more ornate door casing. Door Panels are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing. By varying the thickness of the panels, you can create raised panels to define the door. Raised Grills add elegance to your door design after you have added the casing and panels. As you draw, you can set the width of the grills on the Properties Bar. If you want your door design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.

these tools in conjunction with Snaps and editing tools to reshape door elements, minimize repetition, and increase accuracy. For more information about using editing tools, see Editing Your Door Design on page 235.

To draw a rectangular door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Rectangle button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Drag to define the start point of the rectangle. 4 Drag to extend the rectangle to the size you
A rubber-band rectangle appears and follows the crosshair. want. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

Launching Door Designer


1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears. button. The Door Designer is launched.

2 Choose Door Designer and click the Launch

Drawing Door Components


You can modify an existing door design or draw your own custom doors from scratch. As you draw each component, Punch! displays your door design in 3D. Door Designer has three design toolsets, available in the toolbar, that let you draw doors from the outside to the inside. Casing. Start by drawing the trim to surround your custom door. Panels. Next, draw the wood panels that comprise the visible body of your door. Grills. Finally, add detailed grillwork to define windows in a door. If you want your door design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty. Each of the three toolsets features an assortment of 2D design tools. The geometry of all three toolsets is drawn the same. For best results, use

5 Release the mouse button to place. 6 (optional) In the Inspector, select the Open
button to leave one side of the casing open.

T I P : To draw the shape with the bottom open, draw from top to bottom.

To draw a circular door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Circle/Oval button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Drag to define the start point of the oval. A
rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair.

4 Drag to extend the oval to the size you want.


Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

2 32 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Door Components

To draw a polygon door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Polygon button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Click to define the start point of the polygon. A 5 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while
drawing, to draw a perfect circle. rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first side of your polygon. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. have drawn the needed shape. shape.

6 Release the mouse button to place the shape.

4 Drag to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you 5 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the

To draw a multigon door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Multigon button. want for the multigon.

2 In the Inspector, enter the number of sides you 3 Position the crosshair where you want the center
of the multigon and drag to extend the shape. A rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

To draw an open arc door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Arc button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Drag to define the start point of the arc. A
rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair.

4 Drag to extend the multigon to the size you want.

4 Drag to extend the arc to the size you want.


Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

N O T E : To constrain the multigons orientation as you resize, hold down the Command key while dragging. 5 Release the mouse button to place the shape. N O T E : You can control the number of sides on your multigon by changing the Sides value. For more information, see Controlling Drawing Settings, which begins on page 238.

5 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while

drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

6 Release the mouse button to place the shape.

To draw a circular arc door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Circular Arc button.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 33

Chapter 26 Door Designer


2 Position the crosshair where you want the center
of the arc. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the radius of your arc. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

4 (optional) Hold down the Command key, while


drawing, to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

3 Drag to extend the radius to the size you want.

5 Drag to extend the line to the length you want. 6 Release the mouse button to place the shape

To draw a curved door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Curved button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Click to define the start point of the curve. A
rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first side of your curve. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. have drawn the needed shape.

4 Release the mouse button. 5 Drag clockwise, or counterclockwise, to set the


angle you want.

4 Drag to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you N O T E : Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. For more information, see Controlling Curve Tension, which begins on page 238. 5 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the
shape.

6 (optional) In the Inspector, select the Open


button to leave one side of the casing open.

6 Click to end drawing mode and place the shape.

Adding Custom Doors


In addition to drawing individual door components, you can add complete door designs from the Custom Doors library. Customize these door designs using the design toolsets or by editing the existing components.

To draw a linear door component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Line button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Click to define the start point of the line and
drag. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

To add a door from the Custom Doors library


1
Choose Window > Show Content Library, if it is not already open. The Custom Doors library appears.

2 34 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Editing Your Door Design

To rotate door elements


1
Choose the Rotate button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu,

2 Click to select the entity you want to rotate. 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag in the

direction that you want the entity to rotate.The degree of rotation appears in the Status Bar, as you drag.

N O T E : By default, entities are rotated around their centerpoint, in 5-degree increments. 4 Release the mouse button to place. N O T E : The entity rotates around its centerpoint. 2 Choose the library you want. Its contents appear
in the Preview window.

To rotate by specifying an amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. rotate.

3 (optional) In the Properties Bar, select the

Replace Existing Design checkbox, to remove existing door designs from the design window as you import from the library. When this checkbox is deselected, imported designs are placed on top of existing designs (important to deselect when adding double doors). Scale to Current Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the door design to the current design window size, as you import from the library. window.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

4 (optional) In the Properties Bar, select the

5 Drag the door style you want to the design 4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle
Unit System you want.

Editing Your Door Design


Rather than draw each geometric feature of your door casing, panel or grill separately, use Door Designers editing tools to reshape, reposition, reorient, or even join existing door elements. For more information on reshaping and joining objects, see Reshaping Door Elements on page 236. For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see Flipping & Mirroring Objects on page 237.

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

To resize door elements


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click a door element to select it. 3 Drag the segment or point to a new location, then
release the mouse button.

N O T E : To constrain movements horizontally or vertically, press the Command key while reshaping the object.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 3 5

Chapter 26 Door Designer To move door elements


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking.

To select the previous door element


Choose Edit > Select Previous Object (or press Command-Left Arrow). Door Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

2 Click to select the entity you want to move.

3 Choose Edit > Move. OR


Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

Reshaping Door Elements


Punch! Door Designer lets you manipulate CAD shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points, and rounding or chamfering corners. You can even join lines, arcs and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.

To fillet (round) the corner of a door element


1 4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate
system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. on the coordinates you specified. Choose the Fillet Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to fillet. 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The radius appears as you drag.

5 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based N O T E : Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

To place a door element on top of another object


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. choose Bring to Front from the shortcut menu.

2 Ctrl-click the object you want to place on top and 4 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

To place a door element behind another object


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. choose Send to Back from the shortcut menu.

To inversely fillet (round) the corner of a door element


1
Choose the Fillet Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Ctrl-click the object you want to place on top and

To select the next door element


Choose Edit > Select Next Object (or press Command-Right Arrow). Door Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to fillet. 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The radius appears as you drag.

4 Press and hold the Shift key to invert the fillet.

2 36 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Flipping & Mirroring Objects


N O T E : You can separate the segments of any polyline (whether or not you created it using the Join Tool) by choosing Edit > Unjoin Objects (or press Shift-Command-J).

To add additional points to a door element


1
Choose the Add Point button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to a crosshair to reflect drawing mode. point and click to add the point.

5 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

2 Position the crosshair where you want to insert a

To chamfer the corner of a door element


1
Choose the Chamfer Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. chamfer.

To remove a point from a door element


1
Choose the Remove Point button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. is removed.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The dimensions appear as you drag.

2 Click the point you want to remove and the point

Flipping & Mirroring Objects


The Flip function takes the original object and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects facing one another.

To flip a feature horizontally


4 Release the mouse to stop chamfering the
corner.

1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Horizontal.

To join arcs, lines or polylines


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. that you want to be joined.

To flip a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Vertical.

2 Hold down the Shift key and click each object N O T E : The endpoints of each object must be nearby for those objects to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity, see Controlling Drawing Settings. 3 Choose Edit > Join Objects (or press CommandJ). The objects are joined into a polyline.

To mirror a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Horizontal.

To mirror a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Vertical.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 3 7

Chapter 26 Door Designer

Controlling Drawing Settings


There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select or modify door elements. The Properties Bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your design window.

your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge or corner of the object is treated separately, as you edit. In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode.

To set the design window boundary


1
In the Properties Bar, enter new values in the Width and Height fields and press the Enter key. the design window, select the Scale Existing Objects checkbox to resize them accordingly.

2 (optional) If you have already drawn objects in

To use object selection mode


Select the Object Level button in the Inspector.

To adjust the nudge rate


In the Properties Bar, enter a new value in the Nudge Rate field, then press the Enter key.

To use point selection mode


Select the Point Level button in the Inspector.

To adjust the join sensitivity


In the Properties Bar, enter a new value in the Join Sensitivity field, then press the Enter key. A lower value means that you must position objects closer to join them.

Controlling Curve Tension


To further control the look of the shapes drawn in Door Designer, you have control over the degree of smoothing tension applied to them. Clicking Straighten in the Inspector will easily create angular shapes, while clicking Adjust allows you to specify precise smoothing tension. Specifying 0 in the dialog results in no tension being applied, while specifying 10 will cause an exaggerated curve.

To set the tracking constraints


In the Properties Bar, select to Constrain to Angle or Constrain to Roof Pitch under the Editing Options section. polygons and lines at the top of the door design automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home design.

N O T E : When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected,

To change curve tension


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To control automatic dimensioning


While in an active drawing mode, select or deselect the Display Dimensions checkbox in the Inspector to show or hide the dimensions.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear. appears.

4 Click the Adjust Curvature button. A dialog

Using Object or Point Selection Modes


Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how

2 38 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using Nudge, Snap Tools, and the Grid


5 Enter the amount of Curve Tension that you want
or click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease in increments of one. A lower value results in less curvature, while a higher value results in more curvature. Snap Tool is activated; Shift-Tab reverses the process. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning door objects, snapping objects to the grid, and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on.

6 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is


applied.

Examples: Default Curve Tension (8):

Changing Grid Settings


By default, the grid is visible and set at one inch. This way you can visualize each small square in the design window as one (1) square inch. By customizing the grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the objects simple.

Curve Tension set at 2:

To define Snap to Grid settings


1
Choose View > Grid Properties.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

To remove curve tension


1 Click an object to select it. 2 Click the Straighten Curve button in the
Inspector. The curve is changed to a polyline.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools, and the Grid


Once youve placed a door object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. With snaps, you can define exactly where door objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next

2 Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid Spacing distance

you want to set, then click OK. Objects you draw or drag into the design window will snap to the measurements youve defined.

N O T E : Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making


it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 3 9

Chapter 26 Door Designer


N O T E : Snap settings can be set as low as 0.0625 (1/16 inch) English, 0.01 meter (1 cm) Metric, and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 meter (Metric).

To turn off Snap to Grid


Choose View >Snap to Grid to deselect Snap to Grid.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Snap to Grid from the shortcut menu. The feature is disabled. To enable, simply reselect Snap to Grid in the menu.

To select grid spacing


1
Choose View > Grid Properties.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

To display the grid


Choose View >Show Grid.

2 Enter new Horizontal and Vertical measurements


under the Visible Grid Spacing section.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Show Grid from the shortcut menu. The grid appears in the design window. To hide the grid, choose Hide Grid from the menu.

3 Click OK. The new grid spacing is applied.

To change the grid style


1
Choose View > Grid Properties.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

Using Snaps to Draw Door Elements


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance door elements are placed from other door elements. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated; Shift-Tab reverses the process.

2 Choose Line Grid or Dot Grid from the Style popup menu.

3 Click OK. The new grid style is applied. N O T E : Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric).

N O T E : Each Snap Tool defaults back to No Snap after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode.

To move objects/features along the grid


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move.

To snap a door element to the end of another door element


1 Click one of the door element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Endpoint button or press TAB.

2 Click to select the object you want to 3 Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move
the object into position.

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

N O T E : Each time you press an arrow key, the selection moves one increment that you have set in the Snap Grid settings.

window. The door element will snap to the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

To snap a door element to the segment center of another door element


1
Click one of the door element buttons.

2 40 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Viewing Your Drawing


2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Segment Centerpoint button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to


Perpendicular button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

window. The door element will snap to the segment centerpoint nearest where you clicked.

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

window. The door element will snap, perpendicularly, to the segment nearest where you clicked.

To snap a door element to the center of another door element


1 Click one of the door element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Object Centerpoint button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar. window. The door element will snap to the centerpoint of the door element clicked.

To snap a door element a specified distance from another door element


1 Click one of the door element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Segment-Offset button. The Snap Offset dialog becomes active.

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

To snap a door element to the corner of another door element


1 Click one of the door element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Object Cornerpoint button or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar. window. The door element will snap to the cornerpoint of the door element clicked.

3 Enter a value in the field, then press the Enter


key.

4 Click a door element in the Door Designer

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

window. The door element will snap to the point at the specified distance from the door element clicked.

To snap a door element exactly opposite another door element


1 Click one of the door element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Intersection button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

To snap a door element to a segment of another door element


1 Click one of the door element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
On-Segment button or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar. window. The door element will snap to the segment of the door element clicked.

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

3 Click a door element in the Door Designer

window. The door element will snap to the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

To snap a door element at right angles to another door element


1
Click one of the door element buttons.

Viewing Your Drawing


The Door Designer supports the same zoom and pan capabilities you can use when viewing your design in 2D.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 24 1

Chapter 26 Door Designer To zoom in


1
Choose the Zoom button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (or drag down to zoom out).

Viewing Your Drawing in 3D


Door Designer displays your door design in 3D in the upper right corner of the Door Designer screen. You control the 3D view in the same way you control a 3D View rendering using Fly-Around mode.

2 In the design window, drag up to zoom in N O T E : When the mouse is clicked, the location of the pointer will be centered on the design window.

To view your door in 3D


Move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the 3D View and watch the view move dynamically.

To zoom in using the wheel mouse


Click the design window and drag the wheel on the mouse to zoom in or out. wheel mouse drivers, set the Scrolling Size to None in your System Preferences.

N O T E : To access this feature, using some older

To increase or decrease the Fly-Around speed


1
Click the 3D Settings button on the toolbar.

OR
Choose LiveView > Rendering Options. A dialog appears.

To zoom using the trackpad


1
Locate the cursor at the center of what you want to view.

2 Drag the Speed slider to slow down or speed up


the navigation speed.

2 Pinch to zoom in or out.

3 Click Apply. N O T E : The faster the viewing speed, the lower the
quality of the rendered 3D image.

To set the zoom factor


1
Choose View > Set Plan View Zoom. A dialog appears.

2 Enter a new zoom factor, then click OK.

To reset the 3D view


Choose LiveView > Reset 3D View.

To reset the 2D plan view


Choose View > Reset Plan View. The plan is reset to the original, default view.

To view a door design using ClearView


Click the Style button in the toolbar and choose ClearView from the pop-up menu.

To pan in any direction


1
Choose the Pan button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to reflect pan mode. want to move. The view changes, dynamically, as you drag.

OR
Choose LiveView > Rendering Style > ClearView.

2 In the design window, drag in the direction you

To render a door design in 3D final quality


Click the Render button in the toolbar.

OR
Use two fingers on the trackpad to position your drawing.

OR
Choose LiveView > Render 3D Final Quality.

2 42 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Managing Door Designs

To set 3D render quality


Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > Low. This results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output. Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > High. This results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output. Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > Ultra High. This results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output. Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > Excellent. This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.

To move doors between categories


1
In the Content dialog, click the Action pop-up menu and choose Custom Door Organizer. The Door Organizer dialog appears.

Managing Door Designs


Door Designer not only allows you to save new doors for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-touse tools for organizing and managing door libraries.

2 Select the category where the door to be moved


currently exists.

3 In the right pane, select the door to be moved. 4 Drag the door to the category where you want it
to appear. The door is moved.

To save a new door design


1
Choose File > Save Door to Library (or press Command-S). The Save Door to Library dialog appears.

5 Close the dialog.

To create, delete or rename a door category


1
In the Content dialog, click the Action pop-up menu and choose Custom Door Organizer. The Door Organizer dialog appears. a new sub-category and click the New button.

2 Select the category in which you want to create


In the dialog that appears, enter the Category Name and click Create.

OR
Select the Category you want to delete and click the Delete button, then click Delete to confirm.

OR 2 Choose the category in which you want to save


the door. Select the Category you want to rename and click the Rename button, then enter the Category Name and click Rename.

3 Enter the Door Name in the field. New door


names can contain up to 44 characters. door descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

3 Close the dialog. T I P : If you are deleting a category that contains


doors you want to keep, move the doors you want to keep to a new category first.

4 Enter the Door Description in the field. New 5 Click Save.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 43

Chapter 26 Door Designer

Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing


Once youve designed a custom door, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other door, making sure to select the custom door library before you place the door. In the 2D design window, custom doors appear the same as standard doors, but they are fully rendered in 3D View.

To add a custom door


1 2 3
Choose the Door button in the Floor Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab and choose the Custom Door style. The custom door properties appear. Choose the library where the custom door is saved. Its contents appear in the Preview window.

4 Select the door in the Preview window. 5 Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where
you want the center of the door, and release the mouse button.

6 Move the crosshair to either side of the wall to


set the door swing and click to place.

(optional) Enter the Width, Height, Elevation, and Trim Width to customize them.

N O T E : Any changes made on the Door Properties Bar, become the default and will be used the next time a door is placed.

2 44 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 27

Window Designer
Whether youre selecting the number of panes in a bay window, or detailing window shapes, Window Designer lets you create custom windows that behave and render like any other window in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 45

Chapter 27 Window Designer

Designing Custom Windows


With Punch! Window Designer, you can create custom windows by using an unlimited combination of the three window components. Window Casing is the trim that surrounds the window opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine shapes to create a more ornate window casing. Window Sills are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing. Raised Grills add elegance to your window design, after you have added the casing and sills. As you draw, you can set the width of the grills on the Properties Bar. Wherever you want your window design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.

information about using editing tools, see Editing Your Window Design on page 249.

T I P : When drawing multiple instances of a window object, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. From the 2D menu, deselect Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent window objects without selecting the corresponding window tool each time.

To draw a rectangular window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Rectangle button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Drag to define the start point of the rectangle. 4 Drag to extend the rectangle to the size you
A rubber-band rectangle appears and follows the crosshair. want. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

Launching Window Designer


1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears. Launch button. The Window Designer is launched.

2 Click to select Window Designer and click the

Drawing Window Components


You can modify an existing window design or draw your own custom windows from scratch. As you draw each component, Punch! displays your window design in 3D. Window Designer has three design toolsets that let you design windows from the outside to the inside. Casing. Start by drawing the trim to surround your custom window. Panels. Next, draw the wood trim that comprises the base of your window. Grills. Finally, add detailed grillwork to define panes in a window. Wherever you want your window design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty. Each of the three design toolsets modes features an assortment of 2D drawing tools. For best results, use these tools in conjunction with snaps and editing tools to reshape window elements, minimize repetition, and increase accuracy. For more

5 Release the mouse button to place. 6 (optional) In the Inspector, select the Open
button to leave one side of the casing open.

T I P : To draw the shape with the bottom open, draw from top to bottom.

To draw a circular window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Circle/Oval button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method

2 46 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Window Components


3 Drag to define the start point of the oval. A
rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair.

5 Release the mouse button to place the shape. N O T E : You can control the number of sides on your multigon by changing the Sides value. For more information, see Controlling Drawing Settings, which begins on page 252.

4 Drag to extend the oval to the size you want.


Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

To draw a polygon window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Polygon button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Click to define the start point of the polygon. A 5 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while
drawing, to draw a perfect circle. rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first side of your polygon. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. have drawn the needed shape. shape.

6 Release the mouse button to place the shape.

4 Drag to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you 5 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the

To draw a multigon window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Multigon button. want for the multigon.

To draw an open arc window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Arc button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, enter the number of sides you 3 Position the crosshair where you want the center
of the multigon and drag to extend the shape. A rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Drag to define the start point of the arc. A
rubber-band shape appears and follows the crosshair.

4 Drag to extend the multigon to the size you want.

4 Drag to extend the arc to the size you want.


Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

N O T E : To constrain the multigons orientation as you resize, hold down the Command key while dragging.

5 (optional) Hold down the Shift key, while

drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 4 7

Chapter 27 Window Designer


6 Release the mouse button to place the shape. 3 Click to define the start point of the line and
drag. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

To draw a circular arc window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Circular Arc button. of the arc. A rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the radius of your arc. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw.

2 Position the crosshair where you want the center 4 (optional) Hold down the Command key, while
drawing, to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

3 Drag to extend the radius to the size you want.

5 Drag to extend the line to the length you want. 6 Release the mouse button to place the shape.

To draw a curved window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Curved button. from the Method pop-up menu.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method 3 Click to define the start point of the curve. A 4 Release the mouse button. 5 Drag clockwise, or counterclockwise, to set the
angle you want. rubber-band line appears and follows the crosshair. This line signifies the first side of your curve. Dimensions appear in the Status Bar, as you draw. have drawn the needed shape.

4 Drag to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you N O T E : Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. For more information, see Controlling Curve Tension, which begins on page 253. 5 Ctrl-click to end drawing mode and place the
shape.

6 (optional) In the Inspector, select the Open


button to leave one side of the casing open.

6 Click to end drawing mode and place the shape.

To draw a linear window component


1
Choose the design toolset you want from the Toolset pop-up menu, then click the Line button. from the Method pop-up menu.

Adding Custom Windows


In addition to drawing individual window components, you can add complete window designs from the Custom Windows library. Customize these window designs using the design toolsets or by editing the existing components.

2 In the Inspector, choose the drawing method

2 48 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Editing Your Window Design

To add a window from the Custom Windows library


1
Choose Window > Show Content Library, if it is not already open. The Custom Windows library appears.

For more information on reshaping and joining objects, see Reshaping Window Elements on page 250. For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see Flipping & Mirroring Objects on page 252.

To nudge a window element


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. nudge.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Nudge, then click the direction (up,
down, left, right) you want the selection to move. Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the entity in that direction.

4 OR

N O T E : For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate, see Controlling Drawing Settings on page 252. 2 Choose the library you want; its contents appear
in the Preview window.

To rotate window elements


1
Choose the Rotate button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

3 (optional) In the Properties Bar, select the

Replace Existing Design checkbox, to remove existing door designs from the design window as you import from the library. When this checkbox is deselected, imported designs are placed on top of existing designs (this is important when combining different window styles, or two of the same style). Scale to Current Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the window design to the current design window size as you import from the library. window.

2 Click to select the entity you want to rotate. 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag in the

direction that you want the entity to rotate.The degree of rotation appears in the Status Bar, as you drag.

4 (optional) In the Properties Bar, select the

N O T E : By default, entities are rotated around their centerpoint, in 5-degree increments. 4 Release the mouse button to place. N O T E : The entity rotates around its centerpoint.

5 Drag the window style you want to the design

To rotate by specifying an amount


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. rotate.

Editing Your Window Design


Rather than draw each geometric feature of your window casing, sill or grill separately, use Window Designers editing tools to reshape, reposition, reorient, or even join existing window elements.

2 Click to select the entity you want to 3 Choose Edit > Rotate. OR
Double-click the Rotate button. A dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 4 9

Chapter 27 Window Designer


N O T E : Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. 4 Select Degrees or Radians to specify the Angle
Unit System you want.

To place a window element on top of another object


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. choose Bring to Front from the shortcut menu.

5 Enter the angle you want the selection rotated. 6 Click OK. The selection is rotated.

2 Ctrl-click the object you want to place on top and

To resize window elements


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To place a window element behind another object


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. choose Send to Back from the shortcut menu.

2 Click a window element to select it. 3 Drag the segment or point to a new location, then
release the mouse button. vertically, press the Command key while reshaping the object.

2 Ctrl-click the object you want to place on top and

N O T E : To constrain movements horizontally or

To remove window elements


Select the object you want to remove and choose Edit > Delete (or press the Delete key).

To move window elements


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. To select more than one entity, hold down the Shift key while clicking.

2 Click to select the entity you want to move.

To select the next window element


Choose Edit > Select Next Object (or press Command-Right Arrow). Window Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

3 Choose Edit > Move. OR


Double-click the Selection button. A dialog appears.

To select the previous window element


Choose Edit > Select Previous Object (or press Command-Left Arrow). Window Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

Reshaping Window Elements


4 Select either the Cartesian or Polar coordinate
system, then enter new coordinates in the appropriate fields. on the coordinates you specified. Punch! Window Designer lets you manipulate window shapes to match your custom design by inserting or removing points and rounding or chamfering corners. You can even join lines, arcs and polylines into a single entity for editing purposes.

5 Click OK. The entity you selected is moved, based

2 5 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Reshaping Window Elements

To fillet (round) the corner of a window element


1
Choose the Fillet Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to


chamfer.

3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and


move the pointer toward the center of the object. The dimensions appear as you drag.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to fillet. 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The radius appears as you drag.

4 Release the mouse to stop chamfering the


corner.

4 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

To join arcs, lines or polylines


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. that you want to be joined.

To inversely fillet (round) the corner of a window element


1
Choose the Fillet Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Hold down the Shift key and click each object N O T E : The endpoints of each object must be nearby for those objects to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity. See Controlling Drawing Settings on page 252. 3 Choose Edit > Join Objects (or press CommandJ). The objects are joined into a polyline.

2 Click to select the cornerpoint you want to fillet. 3 Drag the point; hold down the mouse button and
move the pointer toward the center of the object. The radius appears as you drag.

4 Press and hold the Shift key to invert the fillet.

N O T E : You can separate the segments of any polyline (whether or not you created it using the Join Tool) by choosing Edit > Unjoin Objects (or press Shift-Command-J).

To add additional points to a window element


1
Choose the Add Point button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to a crosshair to reflect drawing mode. point and click to add the point.

5 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

2 Position the crosshair where you want to insert a

To chamfer the corner of a window element


1
Choose the Chamfer Corner button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 5 1

Chapter 27 Window Designer To remove a point from a window element


1
Choose the Remove Point button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. is removed.

2 (optional) If you have already drawn objects in

the design window, select the Scale Existing Objects checkbox to resize them accordingly.

2 Click the point you want to remove and the point

To adjust the nudge rate


In the Properties Bar, enter a new value in the Nudge Rate field, then press the Enter key.

Flipping & Mirroring Objects


The Flip function takes the original object and reverses it, either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works similarly to the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects facing one another.

To adjust the join sensitivity


In the Properties Bar, enter a new value in the Join Sensitivity field, then press the Enter key. A lower value means that you must position objects closer to join them.

To flip a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Horizontal.

To set the tracking constraints


In the Properties Bar, select to Constrain to Angle or Constrain to Roof Pitch under the Editing Options section.

To flip a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to flip. 2 Choose Edit > Flip > Vertical.

N O T E : When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the window design automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home design.

To mirror a feature horizontally


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Horizontal.

To control automatic dimensioning


While in an active drawing mode, select or deselect the Display Dimensions checkbox in the Inspector to show or hide the dimensions.

To mirror a feature vertically


1 Click to select the entity you want to mirror. 2 Choose Edit > Mirror > Vertical.

Using Object or Point Selection Modes


Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge or corner of the object is treated separately, as you edit. In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode.

Controlling Drawing Settings


There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select or modify window elements. The Properties Bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your design window.

To set the design window boundary


1
In the Properties Bar, enter new values in the Width and Height fields and press the Enter key.

2 5 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Curve Tension

To use object selection mode


Select the Object Level button in the Inspector.

To use point selection mode


Select the Point Level button in the Inspector.

Controlling Curve Tension


To further control the look of the shapes drawn in Window Designer, you have control over the degree of smoothing tension applied to them. Clicking Straighten in the Inspector will easily create angular shapes, while clicking Adjust allows you to specify precise smoothing tension. Specifying 0 in the dialog results in no tension being applied, while specifying 10 will cause an exaggerated curve.

Curve Tension set at 2:

To change curve tension


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

To remove curve tension


1 Click an object to select it. 2 Click the Straighten Curve button in the
Inspector. The curve is changed to a polyline.

2 Click to select the shape you want to edit. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
shapes properties appear. appears.

4 Click the Adjust Curvature button. A dialog

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid


Once youve placed a window object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. With snaps, you can define exactly where window objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated; Shift-Tab reverses the process. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning window objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on.

5 Enter the amount of Curve Tension that you want


or click the arrow buttons to increase or decrease in increments of one. A lower value results in less curvature, while a higher value results in more curvature.

6 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is


applied.

Examples: Default Curve Tension (8):

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 5 3

Chapter 27 Window Designer

Changing Grid Settings


By default, the grid is visible and set at one inch. This way you can visualize each small square in the Design window as one (1) square inch. By customizing the grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the objects simple.

The Grid Properties dialog appears.

2 Enter new Horizontal and Vertical measurements


under the Visible Grid Spacing section.

3 Click OK. The new grid spacing is applied.

To change the grid style


1
Choose View > Grid Properties.

To define Snap to Grid settings


1
Choose View > Grid Properties.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu. The Grid Properties dialog appears.

2 Choose Line Grid or Dot Grid from the Style popup menu.

3 Click OK. The new grid style is applied. N O T E : Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric).

To move objects/features along the grid


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. move.

2 Click to select the object you want to 2 Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid Spacing distance
you want to set, then click OK. Objects you draw or drag into the design window will snap to the measurements youve defined.

3 Press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move


the object into position.

N O T E : Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making


it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs.

N O T E : Each time you press an arrow key, the selection moves one increment that you have set in the Snap Grid settings.

(1/16 inch) English, 0.01 meter (1 cm) Metric, and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 meter (Metric).

N O T E : Snap settings can be set as low as 0.0625

To turn off Snap to Grid


Choose View >Snap to Grid to deselect Snap to Grid.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Snap to Grid from the shortcut menu. The feature is disabled. To enable, simply reselect Snap to Grid in the menu.

To select grid spacing


1
Choose View > Grid Properties.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Grid Properties from the shortcut menu.

To display the grid


Choose View >Show Grid.

2 5 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements


OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Show Grid from the shortcut menu. The grid appears in the design window. To hide the grid, choose Hide Grid from the menu.

2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to

Object Centerpoint button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar. window. The window element will snap to the centerpoint of the window element clicked.

3 Click a window element in the Window Designer

Using Snaps to Draw Window Elements


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes the power of snaps. With snaps, you can define exactly what distance window elements are placed from other window elements. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated; Shift-Tab reverses the process. after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode.

To snap a window element to the corner of another window element


1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Object Cornerpoint button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar. window. The window element will snap to the cornerpoint of the window element clicked.

N O T E : Each Snap Tool defaults back to No Snap

3 Click a window element in the Window Designer

To snap a window element to the end of another window element


1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Endpoint button or press TAB.

To snap a window element exactly opposite another window element


1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Intersection button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3 Click a window element in the Window

Designer window. The window element will snap to the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

3 Click a window element in the Window Designer


window. The window element will snap to the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

To snap a window element to the segment center of another window element


1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Segment Centerpoint button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

To snap a window element at right angles to another window element


1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Perpendicular button, or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3 Click a window element in the Window Designer

window. The window element will snap to the segment centerpoint nearest where you clicked.

3 Click a window element in the Window Designer


window. The window element will snap perpendicularly to the segment nearest where you clicked.

To snap a window element to the center of another window element


1
Click one of the window element buttons.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 5 5

Chapter 27 Window Designer To snap a window element a specified distance from another window element
1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
Segment-Offset button. The Snap Offset dialog becomes active.

To zoom in using the wheel mouse


Click the design window and drag the wheel on the mouse to zoom in or out.

N O T E : To access this feature, using some older wheel mouse drivers, set the Scrolling Size to None in your System Preferences.

To zoom using the trackpad


1
Locate the cursor at the center of what you want to view.

2 Pinch to zoom in or out.

To set the zoom factor


3 Enter a value in the field, then click OK. 4 Click a window element in the Window Designer 1
Choose View > Set Plan View Zoom. A dialog appears. window. The window element will snap to the point at the specified distance from the window element clicked.

2 Enter a new zoom factor, then click OK.

To reset the 2D plan view


Choose View > Reset Plan View. The plan is reset to the original, default view.

To snap a window element to a segment of another window element


1 Click one of the window element buttons. 2 In the Snaps toolset, click the Snap to
On-Segment button or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar. window. The window element will snap to the segment of the window element clicked.

To pan in any direction


1
Choose the Pan button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. The pointer changes to reflect pan mode. want to move. The view changes dynamically, as you move drag.

3 Click a window element in the Window Designer

2 In the design window, drag in the direction you

OR

Viewing your Drawing


The Window Designer supports the same zoom and pan capabilities you can use when viewing your design in 2D.

Use two fingers on the trackpad to position your drawing.

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom button in the Edit toolset pop-up menu. (or drag down to zoom out).

Viewing your Drawing in 3D


Window Designer displays your window design in 3D in the upper right corner of the Window Designer screen. You control the 3D view in the same way you control a 3D View rendering using Fly-Around mode.

2 In the design window, drag up to zoom in N O T E : When the mouse is clicked, the location of the pointer will be centered on the design window.

2 5 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Managing Window Designs

To view your window in 3D


Move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the 3D View and watch the view move dynamically.

To increase or decrease the Fly-Around speed


1
Click the 3D Settings button in the toolbar.

Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > Ultra High. This results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output. Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > Excellent. This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.

OR
Choose LiveView > Rendering Options. A dialog appears.

Managing Window Designs


Window Designer not only allows you to save new windows for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing window libraries.

2 Drag the Speed slider to slow down or speed up


the navigation speed.

3 Click Apply. N O T E : The faster the viewing speed, the lower the
quality of the rendered 3D image.

To save a new window design


1
Choose File > Save Window to Library (or press Command-S). The Save Window to Library dialog appears.

To reset the 3D view


Choose LiveView > Reset 3D View.

To view a window design using ClearView


Click the Style button in the toolbar and choose ClearView from the pop-up menu.

OR
Choose LiveView > Rendering Style > ClearView.

To render a window design in 3D final quality


Click the Render button in the toolbar.

2 Choose the category in which you want to save


the window.

OR
Choose LiveView > Render 3D Final Quality.

3 Enter the Window Name in the field. New window


names can contain up to 44 characters.

4 Enter the Window Description in the field. New


window descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

To set 3D render quality


Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > Low. This results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output. Choose LiveView > 3D Render Quality > High. This results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output.

5 Click Save.

To move windows between categories


1
In the Content dialog, click the Action pop-up menu and choose Custom Window Organizer. The Window Organizer dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 5 7

Chapter 27 Window Designer


standard windows, but they are fully rendered in 3D View.

To add a custom window


1 2 3 2 Select the category where the window to be
moved currently exists. Choose the Window button in the Floor Plan toolbar. In the Inspector, click the Properties tab and choose the Custom Window style. The custom window properties appear. Choose the library where the custom window is saved. Its contents appear in the Preview window.

3 In the right pane, select the window to be moved. 4 Drag the window to the category where you want
it to appear. The window is moved.

4 Select the window in the Preview window. 5 Drag along a wall to position the crosshair where

you want the center of the window and release to place.

5 Close the dialog.

To create, delete or rename a window category


1
In the Content dialog, click the Action pop-up menu and choose Custom Window Organizer. The Window Organizer dialog appears. a new sub-category and click the New button.

6 (optional) Enter the Width, Height, Elevation, 7

2 Select the category in which you want to create


In the dialog that appears, enter the Category Name and click Create.

and Trim Width to customize the dimensions. Press the Enter key to accept the values. (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture windows, specify the number of horizontal and vertical Grill Dividers.

OR
Select the Category you want to delete and click the Delete button, then click Delete to confirm.

N O T E : Any changes made to the window properties become the default and will be used the next time a window is placed.

OR
Select the Category you want to rename and click the Rename button, then enter the Category Name and click Rename.

3 Close the dialog.

Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing


Once youve designed a custom window, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other window, making sure to select the custom window library before you place the window. In the 2D design window, custom windows appear the same as

2 5 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 28

Fireplace Assistant
Adding a fireplace is on the Top 10 list of things that add value to your home! With Punch! Fireplace Assistant, its a snap to do. Once you have walked through the steps, you are able to customize every feature of your Fireplace. You can add materials and colors to create a truly individual home feature!

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 5 9

Chapter 28 Fireplace Assistant

Fireplace Assistant
Punch! Fireplace Assistant walks you through the initial design process, then allows total customization of each feature.

To launch the Punch! Fireplace Assistant


1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears. Launch button. The Fireplace Assistant is launched and the Introduction window appears.

2 Click to select Fireplace Assistant and click the

To design a full fireplace


1
Launch the Punch! Fireplace Assistant PowerTool. The Introduction dialog appears.

3 Select the type of fireplace you want to design,

then click Continue. The Fireplace Measurements appear.

2 Click Continue. The Fireplace Styles appear. Here


you can choose the style fireplace you want to start with. Remember, this style is just a base, you can customize the properties to make the fireplace your own.

4 (optional) Choose the Face you want to edit, from N O T E : You can always change these dimensions
The Chimney Measurements appear.

the Face pop-up menu, and double-click a value to edit. Click Continue.

later.

2 6 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Defining Dimension Increments


3 Click Save.

Customizing the Fireplace Properties


A fireplace is made up of three components: Face and Firebox, Hearth and Mantle, and Chimney. Each of these components properties are individually customizable. As you work, you can quickly move between the fireplace components to display and edit their properties. Simply choose the fireplace component you want from the pop-up menu at the top of the Properties Bar.

5 (optional) Select the feature(s) you want and


double-click a value to edit. fireplace.

N O T E : The Hearth and Mantel, and Chimney can be


removed.

6 Click Continue, then click Finish to see your

Customizing the Face Dimensions


The Face includes the actual height, width, and depth of the actual face as well as the firebox. These two components make up the face. The Face properties allow you to control the dimensions of these components. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.

To select a face
Choose Design > Work on Face > then choose the face you want from the submenu menu.

N O T E : All faces may not be available at all times. Some fireplaces may have three faces, while others may have only one face.

Defining Dimension Increments


Specifying dimensions in incremental amounts gives you great control over the fireplace design. This increment is the measurement amount used when you click the arrows to alter each dimension.

To change the face dimensions


1
Choose Face and Firebox from the component pop-up menu. The Face Dimensions and Firebox Dimensions appear. enter the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth fields, or click the arrow buttons. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment amount youve set.

2 Under Face Dimensions,

To change the dimension increment


1
Choose Fireplace Assistant > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears. Value increment amount field.

2 Enter the increment amount you want in the

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 6 1

Chapter 28 Fireplace Assistant


As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

2 Under Mantel Dimensions,

To change the firebox dimensions


1
Choose Face and Firebox from the component pop-up menu. The Face Dimensions and Firebox Dimensions appear. enter the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, Depth, and Elevation fields, or click the arrow buttons. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment amount youve set. As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

2 Under Firebox Dimensions,

enter the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, Depth, and Elevation fields, or click the arrow buttons. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment amount youve set. As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

To include a hearth
Choose Design > Show Hearth.

OR 1
Choose Hearth and Mantel from the components pop-up menu. the hearth and enable its properties.

2 Select the Include Hearth checkbox to display

Customizing Hearth and Mantel Dimensions


The Hearth and Mantel properties affect the appearance of these components, the dimensions as well as their overall inclusion on your fireplace. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.

To change the hearth dimensions


1
Choose Hearth and Mantel from the component pop-up menu. The Hearth Dimensions and Mantel Dimensions appear. enter the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth fields, or click the arrow buttons. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment amount youve set. As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

2 Under Hearth Dimensions,

To include a mantel
Choose Design > Show Mantel.

OR 1
Choose Hearth & Mantel from the components pop-up menu. the mantel and enable its properties.

2 Select the Include Mantel checkbox to display

To change the mantel dimensions


1
Choose Hearth and Mantel from the component pop-up menu, The Hearth Properties and Mantel properties appear.

Customizing the Chimney Dimensions


The Chimney properties in Punch! Fireplace Assistant allow you to update whether or not you want a chimney and let you specify its dimensions. As you make changes, the preview window displays them.

To include a chimney
Choose Design menu > Show Chimney.

2 6 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Moving around in Fireplace Assistant


OR 1
Choose Chimney from the components pop-up menu. display the chimney and enable its properties.

Moving around in Fireplace Assistant


Fireplace Assistant provides the same two interactive 3D viewing options available in the 3D view, the Walkthrough and Fly-Around tools. Using these tools, you can vary the viewing level, by adjusting the angle, to provide the best viewing capabilities available.

2 Select the Include Chimney checkbox to

To change the chimney dimensions


1
Choose Chimney from the component pop-up menu. The Chimney Dimensions and Pot Dimensions appear. enter the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth fields, or click the arrow buttons. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment amount youve set. As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

To view your home using Walkthrough


1
Choose the Walkthrough button in the toolbar.

2 Under Chimney Dimensions,

OR
Choose LiveView > 3D Interaction Method > Free Walkthrough.

2 In the 3D View, drag to navigate around your

design; drag up to move inward, down to move outward.

To change Walkthrough elevation with the mouse


Hold down the Control key while pressing the mouse button and drag to raise and lower the viewpoint, alternately.

To include a chimney pot


Choose Design Show Chimney Pot.

OR 1
Choose Chimney from the components pop-up menu. chimney pot and enable its properties.

OR
Right-click and drag your mouse.

OR
Use two fingers on the trackpad to position your drawing.

2 Select the Include Pot checkbox to display the

To change the chimney pot dimensions


1
From the Component pop-up menu, choose Chimney. The Chimney Pot Properties appear. enter the dimensions you want in the Width, Height, and Depth fields, or click the arrow buttons. Each click increases (or decreases) the dimension based on the increment amount youve set. As you change the dimensions, the fireplace will be updated in the preview window.

To specify an absolute Walkthrough elevation


1
Choose LiveView > 3D Interaction Method > Walkthrough Elevation. A dialog appears.

2 Under Pot Dimensions,

2 Enter a new Walkthrough Elevation, in inches or


feet and inches, then click OK.

To view your home using Fly-Around


1
Choose the Fly-Around button in the toolbar.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 6 3

Chapter 28 Fireplace Assistant


OR
Choose LiveView > 3D Interaction Method > Free Fly-Around.

2 In the 3D View, drag to navigate around your


design; dragging up and down changes your viewing angle, while dragging side-to-side navigates around.

To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse


Hold down the Control key while pressing the mouse button and drag to raise and lower the viewpoint, alternately.

3 Click the Punch! Library disclosure triangle to


show the Punch! libraries.

4 Choose the library you want and its contents


appear in the Preview window.

OR
Right-click and drag your mouse.

To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude


1
Choose LiveView > 3D Interaction Method > FlyAround Altitude. A dialog appears.

2 Enter a new Fly Around Altitude, then click OK.

Applying Material or Color to Fireplaces


You can customize your fireplaces appearance by applying different materials or colors. Just as in Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, customizing your fireplace is a simple drag-and-drop procedure.

5 Scroll through the materials and drag the one


you want to a surface in 3D. The material is applied.

To apply a custom material to a fireplace


1
Choose Window > Show Content Library if the Content window is not open. Materials libraries appear.

To apply material to a fireplace


1
Choose Window > Show Content Library if the Content window is not open. Materials libraries appear.

2 Choose Materials from the pop-up menu. The 3 Click the Punch! Vendor & Bonus Library
appear in the Preview window. disclosure triangle to show the Punch! libraries.

2 Choose Materials from the pop-up menu. The

4 Choose the library you want and its contents 5 Scroll through the materials and drag the one
you want to a surface in 3D. The material is applied.

2 6 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Adding Lighting and Shadows

To apply a series of the same material or color


1
Find the content you want to apply from one of the libraries in the Content Library and select it in the Preview window.

3 Drag the Brightness slider to increase or


decrease the brightness.

4 Click Apply.

2 Click in the 3D view to make the window active. 3 Press the Option key. Notice the pointer changes
to a pointing finger. This means auto-click placement is active.

Default Views
There are predefined views, to which you can default in Fireplace Assistant; views for each edge of the design.

4 With the Option key pressed, click each surface


where you want the selection to appear to tag the surface. A crosshair appears on each surface. visible in the 3D view.

N O T E : Choosing a viewpoint defaults to Walkthrough mode.

5 To place, release the Option key and the series is

To set a viewpoint
Choose LiveView > Set Viewpoint, then choose the edge from which you want to view.

Adding Lighting and Shadows


With Fireplace Assistant you can customize how lighting and shadows are rendered.

To reset the 3D view


Choose LiveView > Reset 3D View.

To adjust the lighting intensity


1
Click the Lighting button in the toolbar.

Saving a Fireplace
When you open a file, Fireplace Assistant copies the file to your computers memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes, or after youve completed any work you wouldnt want to redo. When you click the Save As command, Fireplace Assistant saves the active drawing, using the name and location you specify. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name, in different folders or on different disks.

OR
Choose LiveView > Lighting Options. A dialog appears.

N O T E : When you save a custom fireplace, the Fireplace Assistant automatically adds the PFW extension.

2 Under Ambient Light, drag the Intensity slider


to increase or decrease the intensity.

Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop Pro


By exporting a Fireplace Assistant design to 3D Custom Workshop Pro, the smallest details can be

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 6 5

Chapter 28 Fireplace Assistant


added or altered. For more information, see 3D Custom Workshop Pro, which begins on page 279.

To export a fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop Pro


1
Choose File > Export as Punch! 3D Object. A dialog appears. Assistant automatically adds the POB extension. Click Save.

2 In the Save As field, enter a name. Fireplace

N O T E : You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.

2 6 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Part 5

ENHANCEMENT & CUSTOMIZATION POWERTOOLS


Chapter 29: PhotoView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Chapter 30: Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes a vast variety of PowerTools. PowerTools are programs that work in concert with your Punch! Program to provide additional functionality.

CHAPTER 29

PhotoView
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro lets you import a digital photograph or a scanned image of your home and landscape around it. From window and door treatments to entire facades, you can simulate your home with ease. From cars to pets, windows to chimneys, doors to neighbors, you can customize your design to match your dreams. You can even place an imported image of your own backyard, so when you look out a window, youre home.

Tips for Using PhotoView


Punch! Home Design Studio Pros PhotoView lets you take digital pictures and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying. Verify that the image is level and square, when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial photograph is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments, until it is. Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image. Double-check the dimensions when importing PhotoView images. Take your time masking the image; the better the mask, the better the end result. Images are placed in the center of the lot. When importing multiple images, move each image, as it is placed, to avoid stacking them on top of each other. Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 6 9

Chapter 29 PhotoView

Importing PhotoView Images


Whether you want to import an image of your homes facade to landscape around or you want to add a custom door or window, Punch! PhotoView makes it easy. You can import any image you want, even your pet or your neighbor.

6 Enter the real-world Width and Height, in

inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, then click OK. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

To import PhotoView images


1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears. Open dialog appears.

2 Click to select PhotoView and click Launch. The

Moving PhotoView Images


When you import a PhotoView image into your file, it will be placed in the center of the lot. You have freedom to move the image anywhere on the plan window and between plan tabs.

3 Find the image you want to import and select it.


when one is highlighted, it will be displayed in the browser.

N O T E : As you scroll through the available images, 4 Click Open. The image appears in the design
window.

To move PhotoView images by dragging


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

2 Click to select a PhotoView image. N O T E : In the design window, a PhotoView image appears as a line. 3 Drag the image to a new location, then release
the mouse button to place.

N O T E : PhotoView Images appear as lines in the design window. 5 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
PhotoView image properties appear.

N O T E : Be sure to drag the image from the center; dragging an endpoint resizes the image.

To move PhotoView images from one plan tab to another


Ctrl-click the image and choose Move to Plan, then choose the plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.

OR

2 7 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Replacing PhotoView Images


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. select more than one image, press the Shift key, while clicking objects. where you want the feature to appear from the submenu.

2 Click to select the image you want to move. To

(optional) Enter the Width and Height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, then click OK. Be sure to press the Enter key to accept new values.

3 Choose Edit > Move to Plan, then choose the plan

To locate PhotoView images


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu.

Replacing PhotoView Images


You can try out different window or door images, for example, by using the Set PhotoView Image option in the shortcut menu.

2 Click to select the PhotoView image. 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
PhotoView image properties appear.

4 Click the Image Information button. A dialog

appears with the Image Path and the Resolution details.

To replace PhotoView images


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. design window.

5 Click Close to close the dialog. T I P : You will find it useful to store PhotoView
images in the Content folder in the Punch! Home Design Studio Pro directory. The content folder is designed to be the first place searched for missing files, for instance, PhotoView files, custom materials, custom trims, and so on.

2 Click to select the PhotoView image in the 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
PhotoView image properties appear.

Elevating PhotoView Images


You can elevate PhotoView images, based on a measurement you define.

To elevate PhotoView images by specifying a measurement


1 4 Under PhotoView Image, click the Set Image
button. A dialog appears. Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate. The Object Elevation field becomes active in the toolbar.

2 Click to select the image you want to

5 Find the image you want and select it. 6 Click Open. The image appears in the design
window and inherits the previous image properties.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 7 1

Chapter 29 PhotoView
3 Type the elevation you want, in feet and inches,
or just inches, then press the Enter key. The selection is elevated based on the values you entered.

To resize PhotoView images by specifying dimensions


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. want to resize.

OR 1
Choose Edit > Elevate Object. A dialog appears.

2 Click to select the PhotoView image you 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
PhotoView image properties appear.

4 Enter the Width and Height, in inches or feet 2 Enter the elevation you want and click OK. The
image is elevated.

and inches, separated by a hyphen, in the fields and press the Enter key to accept new values. The image is resized.

To resize PhotoView images by dragging To elevate to nearby elevations


1
Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. elevate to an existing elevation in the design window.

Choose the Selection button from the Edit toolset pop-up menu. resize. Selection handles appear.

2 Click to select the PhotoView image you want to 3 Drag an endpoint of the image until it is the size
you want, then release the mouse button.

2 Select the entity (or entities) you want to

N O T E : The entity being elevated must be positioned on top of the surface to which you want it elevated. For example, if you want to elevate a potted plant to a deck surface, drag the plant so it is positioned within the boundaries of the deck. 3 Deselect the Float Above Topography
checkbox, if it is selected.

N O T E : Dragging an endpoint only changes the width


of the image; to keep proportions accurate, update the height in the PhotoView properties field, as described above.

To flip PhotoView images


1
On the Edit toolset pop-up menu, click the Selection button. flip.

4 Click the Object Elevation pop-up menu. A list of


detected elevations appears.

2 Click to select the PhotoView image you want to 3 Click the Properties tab in the Inspector. The
PhotoView image properties appear.

5 Select the surface to which to want the entity


elevated. The object is elevated.

4 Click the Flip Image button. The image is flipped.

Altering PhotoView Images


Once you have imported your PhotoView image, you have the option of further customizing its appearance. This can be done at any time during the design process. You can resize, change elevation, rotate or flip it, and so on.

Landscaping Using PhotoView Images


One way to get started landscaping your yard is to import a PhotoView image of your home. You can then embellish your design with landscaping and other objects.

To landscape using PhotoView images


1
Import the image of your home, as explained previously.

2 7 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Right in Your Own Backyard


2 Open the 3D Window View so you have a
2D and 3D view of your design.

To view your own backyard


1
Create your home design, using tools and techniques outlined in previous chapters. 2D and 3D view of your design.

2 Open the 3D Window View so you have a

N O T E : Its very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see To import PhotoView images, which begins on page 270. 3 Using tools and techniques described in previous
chapters, add pathways, furniture, topography, and so on.

3 Import the PhotoView image of your own


backyard.

4 Drag the PhotoView image to a position where it


can be viewed from your virtual home.

5 (optional) Enter the Width and Height values in


the Properties Inspector to resize the image.

N O T E : PhotoView images appear in the 2D design window as lines, similar to interior walls. N O T E : In this example, the PhotoView image is the
line at the bottom in the design window.

Right in Your Own Backyard


In Punch! Home Design Studio Pro you can even look out the window of your new home design and see your own backyard. By taking a digital picture of your backyard, you can position it so when you view your design in 3D View, youre home.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 7 3

Chapter 29 PhotoView

2 7 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 30

Estimator
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro keeps track of building materials, as you design your home. Estimator continually and automatically tallies your expenses and building materials. This information is presented in an editable, printable, exportable spreadsheet format. Estimator also utilizes the Plan Tabs from Punch! Home Design Studio Pro, so you can easily find the materials for a specific part of your design. As you input the material costs for your area, Estimator calculates the subtotals of each size door and window, each plant type, including sod, roofing materials, and roof trusses, and computes the grand total for the entire project. You can even create custom pricelists, so you use appropriate vendors or wholesalers for specific parts of the job.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 7 5

Chapter 30 Estimator

Launching Estimator
Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes an extremely versatile PowerTool called Estimator. Estimator inventories almost every feature of your design. Prices may be higher during the peak building season and will depend on the part of the country where you are building your new home. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.

To customize the estimation defaults


1
Choose Estimator > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

To launch Estimator
1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears. button. The Estimator is launched.

2 Click to select Estimator and click the Launch 2 Select the items you want to include in your
estimate.

To specify the estimation items


1
Choose BOM > Estimation. A dialog appears.

OR
Deselect the items you want to exclude from your estimate.

3 Click Save.

To customize colors
1 2 Select the items you want to include in your
estimate. Choose Estimator > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Click the Colors tab. The default colors appear.

OR
Deselect the items you want to exclude from your estimate.

3 Click OK.

Customizing the Spreadsheet


You may find it easier to use or read the data, if you change the colors of specific areas of your spreadsheet. Punch! Home Design Studio Pro makes this easy. You can assign any color you want to certain parts of the spreadsheet.

3 Click the color next to the component you want


to change. The color window appears. There are five panes available for choosing colors:

2 7 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Selecting a Plan Tab


Color Wheel Colors Slider Color Palettes Image Palettes Crayons

3 Press the Enter key. Punch! Home Design Studio

Pro automatically calculates the total and places it in the Total Cost column.

Completing the Various Schedules


4 Select the pane you want to use and choose a
color, then close the window. spreadsheet. Estimator catalogs the features of your design that appear on each Plan Tab. From cubic yards of concrete, for a slab foundation, to light switches, everything appears on individual lines and calculations are based upon prices that you obtain from a building supply company near you.

5 Click Save. The color is applied to the

To reset colors to the default


Click the Reset Colors then click Save.

To complete Estimator schedules


1
Double-click the Unit Cost cell for each item you want to calculate.

Selecting a Plan Tab


Estimator will automatically display features and materials used on all plan tabs of your design. You can choose to estimate specific areas of your design, for instance just the HVAC materials or just the materials for your deck.

2 Enter the estimated cost. 3 Press the Enter key. Punch! Home Design Studio

Pro automatically calculates the total and displays it in the Total Cost column, then keeps a running Grand Total of each schedule.

N O T E : Use the arrow keys, on your keyboard, to move around your spreadsheet.

To select a plan tab


Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the materials list for that tab appears.

Exporting a Pricelist
You can export the information contained in an Estimator spreadsheet so you can use the information in other programs, such as Microsoft Excel or Quickbooks. You can even display your pricelist on the web!

OR
Choose BOM > Work on Schedule, then choose the plan you want to see.

To export a pricelist
1
Choose File > Export then choose how you want to export the pricelist from the submenu.

Calculating Construction Costs


Estimator automatically calculates the total square footage for each floor of your design. The Construction Cost Per Square Foot is dependent upon variables specific to your area. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.

To calculate construction costs


1
Double-click the Unit Cost cell for the item you want to calculate.

2 Enter a file name in the Save As field and choose


where you want to save the pricelist.

3 Click Save.

2 Enter the estimated cost.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 7 7

Chapter 30 Estimator
N O T E : All necessary graphics are copied to the directory where you save the HTML file. You will need to upload all files to your web server to make them available to be viewed by others.

Printing a Pricelist
You can print pricelists any way you need them. There are many ways to customize your estimations.

To print a pricelist
1
Choose File > Print (or press Command-P). A dialog appears.

2 Choose the printer and presets. 3 (optional) Click the disclosure triangle and
specify the printer settings.

4 Click Print.

2 7 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Part 6

3D CUSTOM WORKSHOP PRO


Punch! Home Design Studio Pro includes a vast variety of PowerTools. PowerTools are programs that work in concert with your Punch! Program to provide additional functionality.

Chapter 31: Chapter 32: Chapter 33: Chapter 34: Chapter 35: Chapter 36:

Before You Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing 2D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing 3D Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert 2D Objects to 3D . . . . . . . . . Editing 2D and 3D Shapes . . . . . . . . . Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

281 299 323 349 371 395

CHAPTER 31

Before You Draw


3D Custom Workshop Pro is an advanced creation and editing tool for creating new objects. There are many drawing features and settings that are unique to 3D Custom Workshop Pro. It has many of the basic features, but offers intricate tools such advanced snap options, a short cut manager, and many options for controlling your display.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 8 1

Chapter

31 Before You Draw


To turn off the axis at startup, deselect the Show Axis at Startup checkbox.

Customizing the Startup Screen


3D Custom Workshop Pros startup screen features the Menu Bar, Prompt Window, Main Tool Palette, and Render Library. The Prompt Window displays tool buttons, tool tips, and data entry fields associated with tools and selections.

3 (optional) Click Apply to save your changes and


continue editing preferences.

4 Click OK.

Changing User Interface Preferences


You can specify the delay for how long the pointer must be in or out of a dialog before it expands or collapses. User Interface Properties also allow you to change the Render Library icons to smaller icons. Another preference you can customize is the zoom direction of the mouse wheel zoom.

Launching 3D Custom Workshop Pro


1
Choose Design > Launch a PowerTool. The PowerTool Launcher appears. the Launch button. 3D Custom Workshop Pro is launched.

2 Click to select 3D Custom Workshop Pro and click

To change startup preferences


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

To change the dialog collapse delay


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the User Interface category. 3 Enter values in the Expand and Collapse fields to
specify the length of delay.

4 Click OK.

To use smaller library icons


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the General category.

2 Choose the User Interface category. 3 Select Use Small Palette Icons. 4 Click OK.

To turn off tool tips, deselect the Enable Tool Tips checkbox. To turn off short cut keys, deselect the Enable Short Cut Keys checkbox. To turn off tool cursors, deselect the Enable Tool Cursors checkbox. To turn off auto resolve, deselect the Enable Auto Resolve checkbox. To turn off saving the dialog positions, deselect the Save Dialog Positions checkbox. To turn off saving palette positions, deselect the Save Palette Positions checkbox.

To reverse the mouse wheel zoom


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the User Interface category. 3 Select Reverse Mouse Wheel Zoom. 4 Click OK.

2 8 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Windows, Palettes, and Dialogs

Controlling Windows, Palettes, and Dialogs


The Main Tool Palette and the Render Library appear upon startup. You can control the display of these windows, as well as other important windows. The Main Tool Palette contains the 2D and 3D drawing, editing, and navigation tools. You can switch between the 2D and 3D tools by clicking the Go To 2D, or Go To 3D button at the top of the palette. Buttons that appear with an arrow in the bottom right corner indicate that there is a toolset palette. To access tools on the palette, hold down your mouse button on the tool and the toolset appears. You can tear off the toolset from the Main Tool Palette and access tools from a floating palette by dragging through the tools and tearing the palette away from the Main Tool Palette.

2 Enter a name for your custom palette in the


Name field.

3 (optional) Enter values in the Columns and Rows


fields to specify the number you want. the pop-up menu.

4 (optional) Choose the Icon Size you want from 5 (optional) To create a palette with a transparent
background, select the Transparent Background checkbox.

N O T E : The last active tool in a toolset appears in the Main Tool Palette.

6 Click OK. An empty palette appears. 7 Drag the tools you want into the palette to
create the custom palette.

To control the tools visibility


Choose Window > Tools to change the visibility of the Main Tool Palette.

To access custom tool palettes


Choose Window > Custom Tools > Show, then choose the tool palette you want to see.

Creating Custom Tool Palettes


With all of the available tools, you could end up spending a lot of time navigating through toolset palettes. For tools you use more frequently, you can create a custom palette for one-stop access to a variety of tool buttons.

To delete a custom tool palette


Choose Window > Custom Tools > Delete, then choose the tool palette you want to delete.

Accessing the Pen Color Palette


The Pen Color Palette allows you to change the drawing pen color, or the color of a selected object. There are four color palette options. To access the different levels between the number of colors, click the maximize button.

To create custom tool palettes


1
Choose Window > Custom Tools, then choose New Palette from the submenu. The Custom Tools dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 8 3

Chapter

31 Before You Draw

Accessing the Concept Explorer


The Concept Explorer allows you to view a feature tree and manage layers.

To control the color palette visibility


Choose Window > Pen Color to turn on or off the palettes display.

Accessing the Show-Hide Tool Palette


The Show-Hide tools allow you to control the visibility of objects in the drawing.

To control the show-hide palette visibility


Choose Window > Show-Hide to turn on or off the palettes display.

To control the explorer visibility


Choose Window > Concept Explorer to turn on or off the dialogs display.

Accessing the Snap Filter


The Snap Tools are all contained and controlled in the Snap Filter dialog. To disable a Snap Tool, deselect its checkbox. To enable a tool, select its checkbox.

Inspector
The Inspector displays a variety of information regarding a selected object.

To control the snaps dialog visibility


Choose Window > Snaps to turn on or off the dialogs display.

Accessing the Render Library


The Render Library appears automatically upon startup. To apply colors and materials, drag from the Render Library. The Data tab allows you to adjust an objects values and dimensions. The Display tab is only available for surfaces and solids. It contains controls for object transparency and iso lines.

To control the library visibility


Choose Window > Render Library to turn on or off the librarys display.

2 8 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Accessing Select Mask


The Attributes tab accesses settings associated with the selection, such as name, resolution, color, and layer.

Exporting Files
You can export data to formats listed on the Export dialog. Supported formats include: Custom Workshop Pro ACIS SAT Adobe Illustrator BMP CGM DWG/DXF EPS FACT JPG Macro RAW STL VRML Wavefront OBJ

To control the display of the Inspector


Choose Window > Inspector (or press Command-I) to turn on or off the dialogs display.

Accessing Select Mask


The Select Mask dialog provides information for fine tuning your selections.

To control the display of the Select Mask dialog


Choose Window > Select Mask to turn on or off the dialogs display.

To export a file
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Choose File > Export. The Export dialog appears. Choose the Export Type you want. (optional) Set the Export Options. Click OK. The Save dialog appears. Enter a name in the Save As field. Find the location where you want the file saved. Click Save.

Importing Files
You can import data from formats listed on the Import dialog. Supported formats include: Custom Workshop Pro 3D Studio ACIS SAT Adobe Illustrator BMP DWG/DXF FACT JPG Macro Punch! Objects SketchUp STL Truespace COB Wavefront OBJ

Closing 3D Custom Workshop Pro


If you attempt to close 3D Custom Workshop Pro without saving your object to a library, you will be prompted to do so before closing.

To close 3D Custom Workshop Pro


Choose File > Close (or press Command-W). A warning dialog appears. To continue without saving, click Yes.

To import a file
1 2 3 4 5 6
Choose File > Import. The Import dialog appears. Choose the Import Type you want. (optional) Set the Import Options. Click OK. The Open dialog appears. Find the file you want to import and select it. Click Open. The file appears in the design window.

Saving an Object to Library


You can save an object to any of the object libraries. To save an object, you must enter a name and description.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 8 5

Chapter
1

31 Before You Draw

To save an object to an object library


Choose File > Save To Object Library (or press Command-S). The Save to Object Library dialog appears.

You can also create Key Sets and have multiple configurations.

To assign a short cut key


2 Choose where you want to save the object in the
Object Category pop-up menu, or category submenu.

Choose File > Short Cuts. The Short Cut Manager appears.

3 (optional) Choose the objects preview

orientation from the Preview Angle pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Category you want. 3 Select the Command for which you want to
create a short cut.

4 Enter a name in the Object Name field. 5 Enter a description in the Object Description
field.

4 Enter the shortcut key in the Shortcut key field


and click the Assign Key button.

6 (optional) Enter searchable keywords in the


Object Keywords field. Click Save.

5 Click OK.

To create a new key set


1
Choose File > Short Cuts. The Short Cut Manager appears. appears.

To view recently saved object names


In the Save to Object Library dialog, click the arrow button to the right of the Object Name field. A list of recently used object names appears. (optional) Choose a name to use.

2 Click the New button. The New KeySet dialog 3 Enter a name in the KeySet Name field and click 4 (optional) Assign short cut keys. 5 Click OK.
OK. The new key set becomes the active key set.

To clear recently used object names


In the Save to Object Library dialog, click the arrow button to the right of the Object Name field and choose Reset name list.

To delete a key set


1
Choose File > Short Cuts. The Short Cut Manager appears. Key Set pop-up menu.

2 Choose the key set you want to delete from the 3 Click the Delete button. 4 Click OK.

Assigning Short Cut Keys


You can assign short cut keys to frequently used functions so they are easily accessible. The Short Cut Manager allows you to choose short cut keys to execute commands.

2 8 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Printing Objects

To remove a short cut key


1
Choose File > Short Cuts. The Short Cut Manager appears. appears.

2 Choose the Category in which the command 3 Choose the Command from which you want to
remove a short cut.

4 Click the Remove Key button. 5 Click OK.

To revert to original dialog settings


Click the Revert button and click OK.

2 From the Setup Mode pop-up menu, choose how

To revert to factory settings


Click the Factory button and click OK.

To print short cut keys


1
Choose File > Short Cuts. The Short Cut Manager appears. print only a list of short cut keys that are assigned to commands. Otherwise, all keys are printed.

2 (optional) Select the Assigned checkbox to

you want to lay out your design: Single Page fits your entire drawing onto one page. Height and Width allows you to specify the drawing size in inches. Rows and Columns allows you to specify the drawing size based on rows and columns. Advanced allows you to specify the drawing size using both height and width and rows and columns. up menu.

3 (optional) Choose the scale from the Scale pop4 (optional) Click the Fit to Scale button to adjust
the height and width to fit the current scale value. This option is only available using Advanced Setup Mode. the scale value to the current height and width. the drawing board to the geometry extents. (optional) Select the Overlay Drawing in Preview checkbox to see the drawing with current settings.

3 Click the Print button. The Print dialog appears. 4 Click Print.

5 (optional) Click the Fit to Area button to adjust

Printing Objects
There are three printing options: printing based on your page setup, printing the window or contents of the current drawing, and printing by layer.

6 (optional) Click the Align Center button to center 7

To setup the page layout


1
Choose File > Page Layout. The Page Layout dialog appears.

8 Click OK.

To set up the print page


1
Choose File > Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog appears. settings to the current design, or to save them as your default settings. printer.

2 From the Settings pop-up menu, choose to apply 3 From the Format for pop-up menu, choose the

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 8 7

Chapter

31 Before You Draw

4 From the Paper Size pop-up menu, choose the


size paper you want.

To select an object or point


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

5 Select the orientation you want. 6 Enter a value in the Scale field. 7 Click OK.

2 On the WorkPlane, click to select the object.

To print based on current settings


1
Choose File > Print (or press Command-P). The Print dialog appears. based on your Page Layout and Page Setup specifications.

To select multiple objects or points


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Click the Print button. Your drawing is printed

2 Hold down the Shift key. 3 Click to select objects. Each object is added to
the selection set.

To print current drawing contents


1
Choose File > Print Window. The Print dialog appears. drawing.

To select all objects


Double-click the Selection button. All objects are selected.

2 Click the Print button to print the current

To select and display control points


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. The control points appear.

To print by layer
1
Choose File > Print by Layer. The Print Layers dialog appears. pop-up menu. up menu.

2 Click to select the object in the design window.

2 Choose the starting print layer from the Start 3 Choose the ending print layer from the End pop4 Click OK. The Print dialog appears. 5 Click the Print button.

To drag a selection box


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. surround an object and select it.

2 In the design window, drag, from left to right, to OR


Drag, from right to left, around part of the object to select it.

Selecting Objects
There are two tools available for selecting objects. You can use the Selection Tool or the Deep Select Tool to select objects. When you click to select an object or point, and it is near, or on top of another possible selection, the Select Object pop-up menu appears with a list of the possible selections. As you move your pointer over the possible selections, they are highlighted in the design window. Select the object you want and it is selected in the design window.

To remove an object or point from a selection set


Hold down the Shift key and click to deselect an object or point.

Customizing Selection Preferences


The Preferences dialog allows you to customize selection preferences, including turning on or off the Selection Ambiguity pop-up menu and changing the selected objects color.

2 8 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Unit of Measure

To change selection fence mode


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Select category. 3 Select the Entire Object Extents button to drag
an entire selection box around an object for selection.

OR
Select the Partial Object Extents button to drag a partial selection box around an object for selection.

To change the select box size


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting


preferences).

2 Choose the Select category. 3 Choose a size from the Select Box Size pop-up
menu.

To change the transparency of the selection box


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting


preferences).

2 Choose the Select category. 3 Drag the slider to change the transparency. The
higher the value, the more transparent the selection box. preferences).

To turn on or off ambiguity pop-up


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

2 Choose the Select category. 3 Deselect the Enable Ambiguity Popup checkbox
to turn it off. Select the Enable Ambiguity Popup checkbox to turn it on.

To change the color of the selection box


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting


preferences).

2 Choose the Select category. 3 Click the Select Fence Mode thumbnail. The
Colors dialog appears.

To change the color of selected objects


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Choose the color you want and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

2 Choose the Select category. 3 Click the color under Selected Objects Color.
The Colors dialog appears.

Controlling Unit of Measure


You can specify the units used for measuring, number of decimal places, as well as how angles appear.

4 Choose a new color and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 8 9

Chapter

31 Before You Draw

To use a comma as decimal point


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Localization category. 3 Select the Use Comma as Decimal checkbox. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

Controlling Drawing Colors


To change the unit of measurement
1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears. By default, objects appear in Punch! Blue. You can change a single objects color, multiple objects or the color in which you draw.

2 Choose the Units category. 3 Choose a unit of measurement from the Units
pop-up menu.

4 (optional) Select the Display Value Units

checkbox to display unit symbols in the Data Entry fields. preferences).

5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To change number of decimal digits


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

N O T E : When changing the drawing color, be sure nothing is selected.

2 Choose the Units category. 3 Choose a number from the Display Decimal Digits
pop-up menu.

To change an objects color


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Default Pen
dialog appears.

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting


preferences).

To display angles as decimal values


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

3 Choose a color and close the dialog. OR


Ctrl-click the object you want to change and choose Color from the shortcut menu, then choose the color you want from the submenu. To pick a custom color, choose More from the submenu and choose the color you want in the dialog that appears.

2 Choose the Units category. 3 Select the Display Decimal Angles checkbox. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

N O T E : Deselecting this option displays angles in degrees, minutes, and seconds.

2 9 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Object Display Resolution

To change the drawing color


1
Click an empty space in the design window to be sure nothing is selected. dialog appears.

Using Snaps
3D Custom Workshop Pro features an intelligence which allows you to automatically snap to specific geometric points along the WorkPlane and along other shapes.

2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Default Pen

To snap to a specific point


1
Select the tool you want to snap to an existing point. the snap point you want. Notice snap tools tell you when you are on an object, as well as when the pointer locks onto a specific object point, such as the center, endpoint, midpoint, intersection, quadrant, vertex, at 45-degree angles (creation angles), or along the X or Y axis. Pointer is snapping on an object

2 In the design window, move your pointer to find

3 Select the color you want. Each subsequent


object will be drawn in this color.

4 Close the dialog.

To change the foreground color


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Colors category. 3 Under Foreground, click the current color and
choose the color you want, in the Color dialog, then click OK. preferences).

Pointer is snapping to the center of a circle or ellipse or arc Pointer is snapping to the endpoint of a line, arc, circle, ellipse or spline Pointer is snapping to the midpoint of a line Pointer is snapping at the intersection of two lines or curves Pointer is snapping to a quadrant along a circle or arc, displayed at 3 oclock, 6 oclock, 9 oclock, and 12 oclock Pointer is snapping to vertices along an ellipse or spline Pointer is snapping at a 45-degree angle (creation angle)

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

Controlling Object Display Resolution


You can set the resolution at which curves, surfaces, and solids appear. This setting can be changed for individual objects as you work.

To change object resolution


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Display category. 3 Choose the object you want to change from the
Object Type pop-up menu. Resolution pop-up menu. preferences).

4 Choose the resolution you want from the 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 9 1

Chapter

31 Before You Draw


Pointer is snapping along the X axis

3 Click to set the lines endpoint.

Pointer is snapping along the Y axis

3 When youve locked onto the snap point you want,


click to set the point.

To snap along the X or Y axis


Hold down the X or Y key as you click, to automatically snap to the specified axis.

To disable all snap functions


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. tools are disabled.

2 Deselect the Enable checkbox. All of the snap

To snap to the grid


1
Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G) to turn on the grid. appears.

To turn snaps on or off


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. Enabled snap features appear with a checkmark.

2 Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog 3 Select the To Grid checkbox to activate the
snap tool.

4 In the WorkPlane, click to snap to the grid. N O T E : For more information, see Using the Grid,
which begins on page 293.

2 Deselect the tool(s) you want to turn off. 3 Select the tool(s) you want to turn on.

Controlling Snap Preferences


You can customize your snap preferences to further help with precision and accuracy. Hit Radius is a distance detection measured in pixels. When the pointer is within the specified snapping distance, or hit radius, the appropriate notations appear. Alignment Angles are the construction lines snap tools use. They appear automatically as you move the pointer over specific points. By default, they display 0 and 90-degrees. Creation Angles are snap points that appear, in addition to the standard eight active points. By default, these points are set at 45 and -45-degrees, but you can change or add to these points.

To snap tangent to a curve


1 Choose the Single Line button. 2 Click an existing arc or circle and drag, at about a
45-degree angle, until you see the tangent appear.

3 Click to set the lines endpoint.

To snap perpendicular to a curve


1 Select the Single Line button. 2 Click on an existing arc or circle and drag, at
about a 90-degree angle, until you see the perpendicular snap point.

% Point specifies a point along a curve or line. As you move your pointer over an object, the specified percentage along that object becomes a snap point.

2 9 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Grid

Using the Grid


The grid appears in the WorkPlane. You can control the grids size, appearance, and snap options. The grid is defined by the major grid lines (spacing), and minor grid lines (sub-spacing). The minor grid lines can be displayed as lines or dots. Using grid lines while drawing can help with aligning and precise placement. Using the Snap to Grid feature, objects can be snapped to align with the grid lines. By default, the Snap to Grid feature is turned off. Enable this feature in the Snaps menu. To change the Grid Preferences, choose File > Preferences and choose the Grid Category. The Preferences dialog allows you to click the Apply button to see your changes before clicking OK to accept them.

10% Point & 20% Point

To change the hit radius


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Snaps category. 3 Enter a new value in the Hit Radius field. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

To change the alignment angles


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To display the grid


Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G). This turns the grid on or off.

2 Choose the Snaps category. 3 Enter new Alignment Angles in the field. Use a
semicolon to separate values. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To change grid spacing


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To change creation angles


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the Spacing dX and dY fields
to change the spacing between major grid lines.

2 Choose the Snaps category. 3 Enter new Creation Angles in the field. Use a
semicolon to separate values. preferences).

4 Enter new values in the Sub-spacing X Divs and Y


Divs fields to change the spacing between minor grid lines. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To change the % Point


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To change the grid style


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Snaps category. 3 Enter new % point in the field. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Grid Dots or Grid Lines button. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

To change the grid size


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 9 3

Chapter

31 Before You Draw


4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the X Size and Y Size fields
to change the number of cells in the grid. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

Resetting Preferences
Preferences can be reset for an individual category or all categories at once. You can revert preferences to their settings before you opened the dialog, or restore them to the factory settings.

To turn on Snap to Grid at startup


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Snap to Grid at Startup checkbox. N O T E : vFor more information, see Using Snaps,
which begins on page 291.

To revert category preferences to previous settings


1
In the Preferences dialog, choose the category you want to revert. reverts back to its previous settings.

To change grid color


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Click the Revert Page button. The category

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Under Grid Color, click the New button. The
Color dialog appears.

To revert all category preferences to previous settings


In the Preferences dialog, click the Revert All button. All categories are reverted back to their previous settings.

4 Choose the color you want and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

To hide grid at startup


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To restore category preferences to factory settings


1
In the Preferences dialog, choose the category you want to restore. restored back to its factory settings.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Deselect the Display Grid at Startup checkbox. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

2 Click the Factory Page button. The category is

To restore factory settings to all preferences


In the Preferences dialog, click the Factory All button. All categories are restored to their factory settings.

To reset grid preferences


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Click the Revert Page button to revert back to
the settings before you opened the dialog.

Verifying Information
The Verify menu has a collection of tools to help you gather and verify information at any time while you draw. You can verify object sizes and distances, as well as view other properties and details regarding your current design.

OR
Click the Factory Page button to reset to the factory grid preferences.

2 9 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Verifying Information

To verify a points coordinates along the XYZ axis


1 Select a 3D object. 2 Choose Verify > X, Y, Z. The Verify XYZ dialog
appears.

3 Click OK.

To verify the minimum distance between two objects


1 Select two objects. 2 Choose > Verify > Minimum Distance. The
Minimum Distance dialog appears displaying the minimum distance between the objects in the Distance field.

3 Click a point anywhere in the WorkPlane to


display its coordinates in the dialog.

4 Click OK. N O T E : You can also specify a point by entering values in the fields and clicking OK.

To verify the angle between three points


1
Choose Verify > Ang 3 Pts. The Angle dialog appears.

3 Click OK.

To verify length
1 Select the object you want to verify. 2 Choose Verify > Length. The Verify Length dialog
appears displaying the length.

2 Click three points. The angles appear in the


dialog.

3 Click OK.

To verify distance between two points


1
Choose Verify > Dist Pt-Pt. The Distance dialog appears.

3 Click OK.

To verify perimeter
1 Select the object you want to verify. 2 Choose Verify > Perimeter. The Perimeter dialog
appears, displaying the perimeter.

2 Click two points. The distance appears in the

Distance field. The distance to the dX, dY, and dZ components appears as well.

3 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 9 5

Chapter

31 Before You Draw


X-Axis calculates the principle x-axis of a 2D planar object. Y-Axis calculates the principle y-axis of a 2D planar object. Point at CG creates a point at the centroid for 2D planar objects. ASCII dumps the result into a text ASCII file. Pr Axis Lines creates two lines corresponding to the principle axis lines. This is only valid for 2D planar objects.

To verify area
1 Select a surface or solid. 2 Choose Verify > Area. The Verify Area dialog
appears, displaying the area.

3 Click OK. 3 Click OK.

To verify mass properties


1 Select one or more solid objects. 2 Choose Verify > Properties. The Mass Properties
dialog appears.

To verify volume
1 Select a solid. 2 Choose Verify > Volume. The Verify Volume dialog
appears, displaying the objects volume.

3 Click OK.

To verify planar properties


1 Select a closed curve or surface. 2 Choose Verify > Properties. The Planar Area
Properties dialog appears.

3 (optional) If you selected more than one object,


choose the object you want to edit from the Object pop-up menu. Render pop-up menu.

4 (optional) Choose a render material from the 5 Enter a new value in the Density field. All other 6 (optional) Choose a unit of measure from the
Units pop-up menu. To use ounces, select the Ounces checkbox. computed values are affected and automatically update.

Perimeter is the sum of all the curves or surface edges. Area calculates the 2D planar or 3D surface area. Centroid calculates the 2D area centroid. Prin. Moments calculates the principle moments for inertia for a 2D planar object.

(optional) Select the Point at C.G. checkbox to create a point at the center of gravity of each object in the assembly, and at the center of gravity itself. create an ASCII dump file containing the mass

8 (optional) Select the ASCII File checkbox to

2 9 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Verifying Information
property values for each object in the assembly, and the assembly itself.

(optional) Select the Pr. Axis Lines checkbox to create three lines at the center of gravity of each object in the assembly, and at the center of gravity of the assembly itself.

1 0 Click OK.

To display the bounding box around selections


1 Select the objects to create the selection set. 2 Choose Verify > Bounding Box. A box appears
around the selected objects to show the selection set.

3 (optional) To delete the bounding box, click to


select it, then press the Delete key.

To show object direction


1 Select the object you want to verify, 2 Choose Verify > Show Direction. Arrows appear
to show the direction of each point.

3 (optional) To turn off the direction display,

select the object and choose Verify > Show Direction again.

To show object counts


1
Choose Verify > Object Counts. The Object Counts dialog appears, displaying the number of each type of object in your drawing

2 Click OK.

To check objects
1
Choose Verify > Check Object. The Check Object dialog appears, displaying potential problems, including geometry and topological errors. results.

2 (optional) Click Save As to save log file of the 3 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 9 7

Chapter

31 Before You Draw

2 9 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 32

Drawing 2D Entities
This chapter contains concepts and procedures that teach you to draw 2D objects in 3D Custom Workshop Pro. Many of the methods are familiar, however the tool selection is incredible. This chapter teaches you about the tools and their capabilities. You will use this information throughout the entire design process.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 2 9 9

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities

2D Drawing Tools
The 2D drawing tools allow you to create both basic and complex wireframe shapes. You can use the 2D drawing tools to create profiles which can later be converted into 3D objects.

To insert a point
1
Choose the Point button in the Point toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. the WorkPlane. The point appears.

2 Click to insert a point at the specified location in

To access 2D drawing tools


In the Main Tool Palette, click the Go to 2D button to switch to 2D drawing mode. The 2D drawing, editing, and navigation tools appear. Each of the tools in the Main Tool Palette have an arrow in the bottom right corner. This signifies that there are more tools available in a tear-away palette. To access these tools hold down your mouse button on the tool icon, and drag the pointer to the tool you want, then release to activate the tool. To tear off a toolset from the Main Tool Palette, drag through the toolset. They appear in a floating palette, that can moved around the design window.

Inserting Points Along a Curve


The Points Along Curve Tool allows you to specify a number of points, then place them evenly along a curve.

To insert points along a curve


1
Choose the Points Along Curve button in the Point toolset. The #Pts field appears in the Prompt Window. field, then press the Enter key.

2 Enter the number of points you want in the #Pts 3 Click in the WorkPlane to insert the points along
a curve. The points appear, spaced evenly along the curve.

Drawing 2D Lines
There are six Line tools available on the Main Tool Palette. Drag through the Line tools to tear off the floating palette.

Inserting Points
There are two Point tools available for inserting points. Drag through the Point toolset to tear off the floating palette.

Once placed, you can customize a line in the Prompt Window or the Inspector. You can place a single point at a specified location, or specify a number of points to be displayed along a line or curve. Once placed, you can enter new X, Y values in the Prompt Window, or using the Inspector.

Drawing Single Lines


The Single Line Tool allows you to draw an individual line, consisting of a start point and an end point.

Inserting a Single Point


The Point Tool allows you to place a single point, specified by its X, Y location.

To draw a single line


1
Choose the Single Line button in the Line toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

3 00 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Multiple Lines


2 Click to set the lines start point, and the position
of its X and Y coordinates. to place the line.

Drawing a Line From its Midpoint


The Midpoint Line Tool allows you to draw an individual line by first placing its midpoint, then dragging to set the length.

3 Drag to set the lines length and angle, then click

Drawing Multiple Lines


The Multi Line Tool allows you to draw multiple line segments, where one segments endpoint is the next segments start point. You can also create an arc out of a line segment by holding down the Option key.

To draw a line from its midpoint


1
Choose the Midpoint Line button in the Line toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. of its X and Y coordinates. to place the line.

2 Click to set the lines midpoint, and the position 3 Drag to set the lines length and angle and click

To draw a multiple lines


1
Choose the Multi Line button in the Line toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. of its X and Y coordinates. to place the line.

2 Click to set the lines start point, and the position 3 Drag to set the lines length and angle and click 4 Continue dragging and clicking to set points to
define the shape.

Drawing Parallel Lines


The Parallel Line Tool allows you to create a line parallel to an existing line. The offset distance determines the lines distance from the existing line, to which it is parallel.

5 Ctrl-click to finish.

To draw a line parallel to an existing line


1
Choose the Parallel Line button in the Line toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. new lines offset. Release to place.

To create an arc off a line segment


1
Choose the Multi Line button in the Line toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. of its X and Y coordinates. to place the line.

2 Click along an existing line and drag to set the 3 (optional) Enter the offset distance you want in
the Offset field and press the Enter key. The line moves the specified distance.

2 Click to set the lines start point, and the position 3 Drag to set the lines length and angle and click 4 Before placing the segment you want to arc, hold
down the Option key, as youre dragging, to set the radius.

Drawing Double Lines


The Double Line Tool allows you to draw two lines at the same time, running parallel to each other. You can set the offset value to determine how far, or close, the two lines are drawn.

5 Click to set the point and the arc. 6 Ctrl-click to finish.


radius.

N O T E : Once placed, you cannot change the arcs

To draw a double line


1
Choose the Double Line button in the Line toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 30 1

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities


2 (optional) Enter a value in the Offset field and
press the Enter key. The higher the offset, the further the lines are offset from each other. of its X and Y coordinates.

Drawing 2D Arcs
There are five Arc tools available on the Main Tool Palette. Drag through the toolset to tear off the floating palette.

3 Click to set the lines start point, and the position 4 Continue to drag to set the lines length and angle
and click points to define the shape.

5 Double-click to place the line.

Once placed, you can customize arcs in the Prompt Window or the Inspector.

Drawing Construction Lines


Construction lines are useful for creating temporary lines used in the design process. Construction lines are created on the Construction layer and display with a dashed red font. There are two construction line tools available in a sub-toolset from the Prompt Window. Drag to the tool you want, or drag through the toolset to tear off the palette from the Prompt Window.

Drawing an Arc by Defining Two Points


The Two Point Arc Tool creates an arc from two points. The order of the points is the start point, the endpoint, then the centerpoint. The Two Point Arc Tool is unique in that the two endpoints are static even as the radius of the arc changes.

To draw an arc using the Two Point Arc Tool


1
Choose the 2-Point Arc button in the Arc toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

To draw a construction line


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Construction Line button from the Line toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. lines angle.

2 Choose the Construction Line button in

2 Click to set one of the arcs endpoints. 3 Click to set the other arc endpoint. 4 Drag to set the arcs radius and click to specify
its centerpoint.

3 Click to set the start point and drag to set the 4 Click to place.

Drawing an Arc by Defining Points on the Arc


The Start, End, On Arc Tool allows you to create an arc using three points on the arc. The first point is the start point, the second is the endpoint, and the third lies on the arc and determines the radius.

To draw a parallel construction line


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Construction Line button from the Line toolset. A sub-set of tools appears. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Construction Parallel button in 3 (optional) Enter a value in the Offset field and 4 Click along an existing line and drag to set the
new lines offset. Release to place.

To draw an arc using Start, End, On Arc Tool


1
Choose the Start, End, On Arc button in the Arc toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

press the Enter key. The higher the offset, the further the lines are offset from each other.

2 Click to set the arcs start and end points. 3 Drag to set the radius and click to place the arc.
The center of the arc is the position of the X and Y coordinates.

3 02 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing an Arc by Defining its Center

Drawing an Arc by Defining its Center


The Center Point Arc Tool allows you to create an arc by first setting the arcs center, then setting the start and end points.

4 Drag and click to set the arcs end point.

Drawing 2D Circles
There are six tools available for drawing circles. Drag through the tools on the Main Tool Palette to tear off the floating palette.

To draw an arc using the Center Point Arc Tool


1
Choose the Center Point Arc button in the Arc toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Click to set the arcs center point. 3 Drag and click to set the arcs start point. 4 Drag to set the arcs endpoint and click to place
the arc.

Once placed, you can customize circles in the Prompt Window or the Inspector.

Drawing a Circle by Defining One Point Drawing an Arc by Defining Three Points
The Three Points Arc Tool allows you to create an arc by setting the arcs start point, then the point on the arc, then the end point. This creates a circle from one point, the centerpoint. The diameter is defined on the data entry Window.

To draw a circle using the One Point Circle Tool


1
Choose the One Point Circle button in the Circle toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Window. Press the Enter key to accept the new values.

To draw an arc using the Three Points Arc Tool


1
Choose the Three Points Arc button in the Arc toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Enter the diameter you want on the data entry 3 Click to set the circles centerpoint.

2 Click to set the arcs start point. 3 Drag and click to set the arcs second point. 4 Drag to set the arcs radius and click to set the
third point and place the arc.

Drawing a Circle by Defining its Center Drawing an Arc with a Tangent Line
The Tangent Points Arc Tool allows you to create an arc by setting the arcs start point, then the second point, which defines the tangent off the first point, then the endpoint. The Center Point Circle Tool allows you to create a circle by setting the center point, then setting the second point to define the circumference.

To draw a circle using the Center Point Circle Tool


1
Choose the Center Point Circle button in the Circle toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. the diameter.

To draw an arc by specifying the tangent line


1
Choose the Tangent Points Arc button in the Arc toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Click to set the circles center and drag to set 3 Click to place the circle.

2 Click to set the arcs start point. 3 Drag and click to set the end point of the
tangent line.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 03

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities

Drawing Circle by Defining Opposite Points


The Opposite Point Circle Tool allows you to create a circle by setting the two opposing points of the circle.

Drawing a Circle Tangent to Three Existing Curves


Three Tangent Circle Tool allows you to create a circle tangent to three existing curves.

To draw a circle using the Opposite Point Circle Tool


1
Choose the Opposite Point Circle button in the Circle toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

To draw a circle using the Three Tangent Circle Tool


1
Choose the Three Tangent Circle button in the Circle toolset. point.

2 Click to set the circles first point. 3 Drag to set the diameter and click to place the
circle.

2 Click to set the first tangent reference 3 Click to set the second tangent reference. 4 Click to set the third tangent reference. The

Drawing a Circle by Defining Points on the Circumference


The Three Point Circle Tool allows you to create a circle by setting three points on the circumference. You can set the three points along existing curves to make the circle tangent to the referenced curves by holding down the Control key.

circle appears within the tangent points youve selected.

Drawing a Circle Tangent to Two Existing Curves


The Tangent Point Circle Tool allows you to create a circle tangent to two curves.

To draw a circle using the Three Point Circle Tool


1
Choose the Three Point Circle button in the Circle toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

To draw a circle using the Tangent Point Circle Tool


1
Choose the Tangent Point Circle button in the Circle toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Click to set the circles first point. 3 Drag and click to set the second point. 4 Drag to set the diameter and click to set the
third point and place the circle.

2 Click to set the first tangent reference point. 3 Click to set the second tangent reference point.
The circle appears along the tangent points youve selected.

To make a circle tangent using the Three Point Circle Tool


1
Choose the Three Point Circle button in the Circle toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing 2D Conics
There are three tools available for drawing conics, or curves. Drag through the toolset to tear off the floating palette from the Main Tool Palette.

2 Hold down the Option key. 3 Click points along three curves to set them as
reference points. The circle appears. Once placed, you can customize conics in the Prompt Window or the Inspector.

3 04 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Conic by Defining Two Points

Drawing a Conic by Defining Two Points


The Two Point Conic Tool allows you to create a conic by specifying the start and end points. The shape of the conic is defined by the Rho value, which is the ratio of the distance from the conic center point to the shoulder point, over the distance from the center point to the slope control point. You can specify the Rho value before or after youve drawn the shape, in the Prompt Window or in the Inspector.

To draw a four point conic


1
Choose the Four Point Conic button in the Conic toolset. The Rho data entry field appears in the Prompt Window.

2 Click to set the start and end points. 3 Drag and click to set the slope control position. 4 Drag to define the shoulder point control

position and click to set the point and finish the shape. The conic appears.

To draw a two point conic


1
Choose the Two Point Conic button in the Conic toolset. The Rho data entry field appears in the Prompt Window. the shape. appears.

Drawing 2D Ellipses
There are five tools available for drawing ellipses. Drag through the tools to tear off the floating palette.

2 Click to set the start point and drag to define 3 Click to set the end point and finish. The conic

Once placed, you can customize arcs in the Prompt Window or the Inspector.

Drawing a Conic by Defining Three Points


The Three Point Conic Tool allows you to create a conic by specifying the start point, the end point, then dragging to set the slope control and Rho value.

Drawing an Ellipse by Defining its Center


The Center Point Ellipse Tool allows you to create a 360-degree ellipse by specifying the center point and a corner point.

To draw a three point conic


1
Choose the Three Point Conic button in the Conic toolset. The Rho data entry field appears in the Prompt Window.

To draw a center point ellipse


1
Choose the Center Point Ellipse button in the Ellipse toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Click to set the start point. 3 Drag and click to set the end point. 4 Drag to define the slope control position and

click to set the point and finish the shape. The conic appears.

2 Click to set the center point. 3 Drag and click to set the corner point and finish
the shape. The ellipse appears.

Drawing a Conic by Defining Four Points


The Four Point Conic Tool allows you to create a conic by specifying the start point, end point, slope control point, and the shoulder points.

Drawing an Ellipse by Defining its Corner Points


The Diagonal Ellipse Tool allows you to create an ellipse by specifying the first corner, then the second diagonal corner of the shape.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 0 5

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities To draw a diagonal ellipse


1
Choose the Diagonal Ellipse button in the Ellipse toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing an Ellipse by Defining the Major and Minor Axis


The Major Axis Ellipse Tool allows you to create an ellipse by specifying the start and end points of the major axis, then the minor axis end point.

2 Click to set the first corner point. 3 Drag and click to set the diagonal corner of the
shape. The ellipse appears.

To draw a major axis ellipse


1
Choose the Major Axis Ellipse button in the Ellipse toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing an Ellipse by Defining its Major Axis and Height


The Opposite Point Ellipse Tool allows you to create an ellipse by specifying two opposing end points defining the major axis, then setting the height along the minor axis.

2 Click to set the start point of the major axis. 3 Drag and click to set the end point of the major
axis.

4 Drag and click to set the end point of the minor


axis and finish the shape. The ellipse appears.

To draw an opposite point ellipse


1
Choose the Opposite Point Ellipse button in the Ellipse toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing Polygons
There are seven polygon tools available. Using these tools, you can draw rectangular polygons, polygons that lie inside or outside a circle, an n-sided polygon, or create a polygon from existing curves.

2 Click to set the start point of the major axis. 3 Drag and click to set the opposing end point of
the major axis.

4 Drag and click to set the height of the ellipse


along the minor axis. The ellipse appears. There are two styles of polygons: Single Line and Smart Polygons. Once drawn, each Single Line polygon segment is an individual line. Resizing a Single Line polygon consists of resizing each individual line segment. Smart Polygons are drawn as one object so they can be resized as one object.

Drawing an Ellipse by Defining Three Points


The Three Point Ellipse Tool allows you to create an ellipse by first setting the center point, then the major axis point, and finally the minor axis point.

To draw a three point ellipse


1
Choose the Three Point Ellipse button in the Ellipse toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing a Rectangle Polygon


There are four methods for drawing rectangular polygons. You can access the toolset by selecting the Rectangle Polygon Tool, in the Main Tool Palette, then dragging through the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window to display the floating palette.

2 Click to set the center point. 3 Drag and click to set the major axis point. 4 Drag and click to set the minor axis and finish
the shape. The ellipse appears.

To draw a center point rectangle


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Rectangle Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A sub-

3 06 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Rounded Polygon


set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Major Axis Polygon button in

2 Choose the Center Point Polygon button in


the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the first corner. 5 Drag and click to set the next corner. 6 Drag and click to set the height and finish the
shape. The polygon appears.

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the center point. 5 Drag and click to set the corner point and finish
the shape. The polygon appears.

To draw a diagonal rectangle


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Rectangle Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

Drawing a Rounded Polygon


The round polygon is defined by the length, width, and a radius. The radius is used to define a 90 degree arc at each corner of the polygon. There are four methods for drawing a rounded polygon. To access each tool, click the Rounded Polygon button in the Polygon tool palette and drag through the subtools in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Diagonal Polygon button in the 3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the first corner. 5 Drag and click to set the diagonal corner and
finish. The polygon appears.

To draw a center point rounded polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Round Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

To draw a three point rectangle


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Rectangle Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Center Point Round button in

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the center point. 5 Drag and click to set the corner point and finish
the shape. The polygon appears.

2 Choose the Three Point Polygon button in

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the center point. 5 Drag and click to set a point for the edge. 6 Drag and click to set the corner point, and to
finish the shape. The polygon appears.

To draw a diagonal rounded polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Round Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Diagonal Round button in the 3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the first corner.

To draw a major axis rectangle


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Rectangle Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 0 7

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities


5 Drag and click to set the diagonal corner and
finish. The polygon appears.

To draw a center point slot polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Slot Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

To draw a three point rounded polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Round Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Center Point Slot button in

2 Choose the Three Point Round button in

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the center point. 5 Drag and click to set the corner point and finish
the shape. The polygon appears.

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the center point. 5 Drag and click to set a point for the edge. 6 Drag and click to set the corner point, and to
finish the shape. The polygon appears.

To draw a diagonal slot polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Slot Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

To draw a major axis rounded polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Round Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A subset of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Diagonal Slot button in the

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the first corner. 5 Drag and click to set the diagonal corner and
finish. The polygon appears.

2 Choose the Major Axis Round button in

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the first corner. 5 Drag and click to set the next corner. 6 Drag and click to set the height and finish the
shape. The polygon appears.

To draw a three point slot polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Slot Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

2 Choose the Three Point Slot button in the 3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the center point. 5 Drag and click to set a point for the edge. 6 Drag and click to set the corner point, and to
finish the shape. The polygon appears.

Drawing a Slot Rectangle


The slot polygon is defined by the length and width. The width controls the diameter of a 180-degree arc. There are four methods for drawing a slot polygon. To access each tool, click the Slot Polygon button in the Polygon tool palette and drag through the sub-tools in the Prompt Window.

To draw a major axis slot polygon


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Slot Polygon button from the Polygon toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

3 08 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing an Inscribed Polygon


2 Choose the Major Axis Slot button in the
sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

Drawing an N-Sided Polygon


The N-Sided Polygon Tool allows you to draw a polygon by clicking points to define its shape. You decide how many sides the polygon has. The shape is automatically closed when you double-click at your last point.

3 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 4 Click to set the first corner. 5 Drag and click to set the next corner. 6 Drag and click to set the height and finish the
shape. The polygon appears.

To draw an n-sided polygon


1
Choose the N-Sided Polygon button in the Polygon toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

Drawing an Inscribed Polygon


The Inscribed Polygon Tool allows you to draw a polygon by defining its center point then its diameter. This type of polygon lies inside a circle.

2 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 3 Click to set the first point of the polygon. 4 Drag and click to set the next point. Continue to
drag and click points to define the shape of the polygon.

To draw an inscribed polygon


1
Choose the Inscribed Polygon button in the Polygon toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

5 Double-click to finish. The polygon appears.

2 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 3 Click to set the center of the polygon. 4 Drag and click to set the diameter, and to finish
the shape. The polygon appears.

Creating Polygons from Curves


The From Curves Polygon allows you to create a polygon from a single curve or a collection of curves. You can add to your selection set by holding down the Shift key as you click.

Drawing a Circumscribed Polygon


The Circumscribed Polygon Tool allows you to draw a polygon by defining its center point then its diameter. This type of polygon lies outside a circle.

To create a polygon from a curve


1
Choose the From Curves Polygon button in the Polygon toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

2 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 3 Click to set the curve you want to change to a
polygon. The shape is automatically closed to a polygon.

To draw an inscribed polygon


1
Choose the Circumscribed Polygon button in the Polygon toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Polygon Type pop-up menu.

N O T E : Hold down the Shift key as you click, to add


multiple curves to your selection set.

2 Choose the type of polygon you want to draw 3 Click to set the center of the polygon. 4 Drag and click to set the diameter, and to finish
the shape. The polygon appears.

Drawing 2D Splines
Splines are curves defined by points you click. There are four spline tools available in the Main Tool Palette. Drag through the Spline toolset to tear off the floating palette.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 0 9

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities

Drawing a Bezier Spline


Once placed, you can customize splines in the Prompt Window or the Inspector. The Bezier Spline Tool allows you to draw a spline by clicking points that lie on the curve. You can modify the slope at each control point.

To draw a bezier spline

Drawing an Interpolate Spline


The Interpolate Spline Tool allows you to draw a spline supported only by the points on the curve. The slopes are calculated automatically.

Choose the Bezier Spline button in the Spline toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Click to set the first point. 3 Drag and click to set the next point. Continue to
drag and click to define the shape of the spline.

To draw an interpolate spline


1
Choose the Interpolate Spline button in the Spline toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

4 Double-click to finish. The spline appears. N O T E : The first segment of the spline appears straight until youve placed the third point. Then, each segment appears curved.

2 Click to set the first point. 3 Drag and click to set the next point. Continue to
drag and click to define the shape of the spline.

4 Double-click to finish. The spline appears.


straight until youve placed the third point. Then, each segment appears curved.

Drawing a Sketch Spline


The Sketch Spline Tool allows you to draw a spline by dragging the pointer to place sample points, which create a smooth spline.

N O T E : The first segment of the spline appears

To draw a sketch spline

Drawing a Control Point Spline


The Control Point Spline Tool allows you to draw a spline by placing the start point then clicking to place the control points, which do not lie on the actual spline, and finally setting the end point.

Choose the Sketch Spline button in the Spline toolset. spline. Notice the points follow your pointer as you drag.

2 Drag to place sample points for your 3 Release to place the spline.

To draw a control point spline


1
Choose the Control Point Spline button in the Spline toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Selecting Objects
There are two selection tools available. You can use the Selection Tool or the Deep Select Tool to select objects.

2 Click to set the first point. 3 Drag and click to set the next point. Continue to
drag and click to define the shape of the spline. Notice, as you click, you are placing control points which control the curve, youre not actually placing a point on the curve.

4 Double-click to finish. The spline appears.

When you click to select an object or point, and it is near, or on top of another possible selection, a popup menu appears with a list of the possible selections. This is called the Ambiguity pop-up menu.

3 1 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Rearranging 2D Objects
As you move the pointer over the possible selections, they are highlighted on the WorkPlane. Select the object you want and it is selected on the WorkPlane.

Rearranging 2D Objects
You can move selections by dragging from one point to another, specifying coordinates or, for even more options, use one of the Transform Tools. To specify coordinates, you can enter values in the Prompt Window or the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284. Transform tools are unique in that you do not move objects by dragging them directly to where you want them. Rather, you click reference points to specify the distance and direction your selection moves. Basic Transform tools:

To select an object or point


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Click to select the object.

To select multiple objects or points


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Hold down the Shift key. 3 Click to select objects. Each object is added to
the selection set. Advanced Transform tools:

To select all objects


Double-click the Selection button. All objects are selected.

To select and display control points


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. appear.

To drag objects to a new location


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. move.

2 Click to select the object. The points

2 Click to select the object you want to 3 Drag the object to a new location. N O T E : The snap tools must be enabled to use this function. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

To drag a selection box


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. and select it.

2 Drag, from left to right, to surround an object OR


Drag, from right to left, around part of the object to select it.

To move by specifying coordinates


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

2 Click to select the object you want to move. Data 3 Enter new X and Y values in the fields. Press the OR 1 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 2 Enter new X and Y values in the fields and click
Apply.

To remove an object or point from a selection set


Hold down the Shift key and click to deselect an object or point.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 1 1

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities


N O T E : A positive value moves the object up, a negative value moves it down. OR
Select the Translate button and enter coordinates in the dX, dY, and dZ fields in the Prompt Window. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Nudging Objects
You can select objects and nudge them using your arrow keys. By default, the nudge distance is set to 0.0, so when you press an arrow key, it moves the WorkPlane.

Rotating 2D Objects
There are two tools available for rotating a selection: around one point, or around three points. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

To set the nudge distance


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the General category. 3 Enter a value in the Arrow Key Nudge Distance
field.

To rotate around one point


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate One Point button in
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Rotation Axis pop-up menu.

4 Click OK.

To nudge an object
1 Click to select the object you want to nudge. 2 Press an arrow key to nudge the object in that
direction.

4 Choose the axis around which you want to rotate 5 Enter a rotation angle in the Angle field. 6 Click the point you want the object to rotate

Moving an Object Using the Translate Tool


The Translate Tool allows you to move an object or point by clicking to set a start reference point, then clicking another point on the WorkPlane to set the move distance and direction. These reference points do not need to be on the actual object, you can click anywhere on the WorkPlane.

around. The object rotates in a counterclockwise direction.

OR
Select the Rotate One Point button and enter values in the X and Y fields to set the origin of rotation, and an angle in the Angle field. Press Enter to accept the values and rotate.

To move using the Translate Tool


1
Select the object or individual point you want to move. Transform toolset.

To rotate using three points


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate Three Point button in
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. The Angle field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key to accept the value.

2 Choose the Translate button in the Basic 3 Click to set the first reference point. 4 Drag to set the distance and direction you want
the selection moved. selection is moved.

5 Click to set the end reference point. The

4 Enter the rotation angle in the Angle field and 5 Click to set the center point for rotation.

3 1 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Scaling 2D Objects
6 Click to set the start reference point. This is the
rotate from point.

Mirroring 2D Objects
You can mirror an object by setting a reference line, which acts like the spine of a book. Once the line is set, the object is mirrored on the opposite side. When a mirrored copy is created, the resulting geometry acts independently of the original shape, which means changes to the original shape do not affect the copy. The Linked Mirror Tool allows you to create an associative link between the original shape and the resulting geometry, so changes to the original shape are reflected in the mirror copy. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

Click to set the end reference point. This is the rotate to point. The object is rotated.

Scaling 2D Objects
The Scale Tool allows you to enlarge or shrink an object based using two types of scaling, Uniform and Differential. Uniform Scale uses input from mouse clicks, or values entered in the data entry fields. The entire object is scaled as one unit. Differential Scale uses input to scale components along the X or Y axis. Each axis is scaled individually.

To mirror objects
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

To perform uniform scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. menu.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

3 Choose Uniform from the Scale Method pop-up 4 Click to set the anchor point, or scale origin. 5 Click to set two points to define the scale
magnitude.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

5 Click the point (or points) to define the mirror


origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

OR
In the Prompt Window, enter a value in the Scale field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To mirror a copy
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

To perform differential scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. up menu.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

3 Choose Differential from the Scale Method pop4 Enter values in the X-Scale and Y-Scale fields
and press the Enter key.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

5 Hold down the Option key and click the point (or

5 Click to set the anchor point, or scale origin.

points) to define the mirror origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 313

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities

Duplicating Objects in Linear Formation


The Linear Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying rows, columns, and spacing. Columns are a vertical series, while rows are a horizontal series. The spacing values can be measured by Total or Step. Total offset and Total spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the last duplicate. This results in a more compact offset and spacing. Step offset and Step spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the next duplicate, then from that duplicate to the next, and so on. This results in a more spread out offset and spacing.

Select the Step offset button to apply the X, Y values to the individual column offsets.

6 In the Number of rows field, enter the number


of rows you want.

In the Spacing field, enter the varietal space you want between each row. spacing to the combined row height.

8 Select the Total spacing button to apply the OR


Select the Step spacing button to apply the spacing to each individual row spacing.

Click OK. Your selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

To create linear duplicates of an object


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Linear Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Linear Duplicate dialog appears.

Duplicating Objects in Circular Formation


The Polar Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying the number, center point, and rotation angle. All of these factors create a circular pattern of duplicates. By default, each duplicate is rotated around the specified center point. You have the option to translate each duplicate, so they appear just as the original object. To translate each duplicate, select the Translate duplicates checkbox and enter your reference point coordinates.

To create circular duplicates of an object


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Polar Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Polar Duplicate dialog appears.

3 In the Number per row field, enter the number


of objects you want in each row, including the selection. associated with each axis.

4 In the Offset fields, enter the distances N O T E : The asterisk indicates that these fields can be accessed using the snap tool by referencing data in the drawing. 5 Select the Total offset button to apply the X, Y
values to the combined columns.

OR 3 1 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Aligning Copies in Linear Array


3 In the Number field, enter the number of
objects you want, including the selection.

Duplicating Objects Along a Path


The Path Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object along a specific path, such as a curve, line, spline, arc, circle or ellipse. You can set the number of duplicates in the Prompt Window before or after you place the objects.

4 In the Center fields, enter the X and Y

coordinates where you want to position the center point of the polar display.

OR
Select the Translate duplicates checkbox to specify the polar position of each duplicate, then enter X and Y values.

To duplicate an object along a path


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Path Duplicate button in the
Advanced Transform tools. The Qty field appears in the Prompt Window. want in the Qty field and press the Enter key. duplicate.

5 In the Angle field, enter the polar angle you


want.

6 Click the Total angle button to specify that the


angle is the total polar angle.

3 (optional) Enter the number of duplicates you

OR
Click the Step angle button to specify that the angle is the individual angle between duplicates.

4 Click to select the path along which you want to 5 Click on the object you are duplicating to set the
origin point. This point lies along the selected path. to set an alignment axis. The axis created by these two points aligns with the shape of the selected path.

Click OK. You selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

6 Click two points on the object you are duplicating

Aligning Copies in Linear Array


The Linear Array Tool creates and distributes copies based on the starting reference point and pointer location. As you move the pointer, the angle and number of copies increases or decreases. The spacing value describes the absolute distance between each consecutive object.

Aligning Objects
The Align Tool allows you to select an object, or objects, then click a point to align your selection based on the alignment option you choose. You can align objects by their sides, centers, tops, and bottoms.

To align objects in an array


1
Select the object with which you want to create an array. Basic Transform toolset. The Spacing field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key.

2 Choose the Linear Array button in the 3 (optional) Enter a value in the Spacing field and 4 Click to select the starting point for the array. 5 Drag your cursor in the direction you want the

To align objects
1 Select the object, or objects, you want aligned. 2 Choose the Align button in the Advanced
Transform toolset. The Align Options popup menu appears in the Prompt Window.

linear array. As you drag, the array increases or decreases in size, depending on which way youre dragging.

6 Click to set the end of the array.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 1 5

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities


3 Choose the alignment you want from the Align
options pop-up menu. you set.

To mate object faces


1
Choose the Combine Faces button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

4 Click to align the object based on the align option

2 Choose the Mate Faces button in the sub-

Combining Object Faces


The Combine Face tools provide options for positioning and aligning object faces relative to other faces. There are four methods of combining object faces: Connect points moves a part to another part, connecting two points between the parts. Mate faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly opposite the referenced face. Align faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly the same as the referenced face. Align will also allow selection of cylinder faces, in which case the axes will be aligned to each other. Insert faces moves and aligns cylindrical faces. Typically this is used to insert a bolttype shape into a hole-type shape. Each method results in an associate connection between the original shape and the resulting geometry; meaning edits to the original shape are reflected in the resulting geometry, thus maintaining the connection or alignment.

3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the planar face to be aligned. 5 Select the planar face to align to.

To align object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose the Align Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

5 Select the face to align to (same face type as

To insert object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

To connect object points


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset.

2 Choose the Insert Face button in the

2 Choose the Connection button in the sub3 Select the face to move. 4 Select the connection point on the face to move
from.

3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

5 Select the face to move to (parent part). 6 Select the connection point on the face to move
to. The objects are connected at the selected point.

5 Select the face to align with (same face type as 6 Select the face to mate. 7 Select the face to mate with.
If the first face you select is cylindrical, the second alignment face must also be cylindrical. In

3 1 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Stretching Objects
the case of cylindrical faces, the axes of the cylinders are aligned.

To bring an object forward


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Bring Forward.

Stretching Objects
The Stretch Tool is used to stretch curves, surfaces, and solids. Stretching is a non-uniform scaling operation along a stretch axis. The stretch axis is defined by two points specified by the user. The material to be stretched is bounded by planes perpendicular to the stretch axis at the two supplied points. The third point defines how much the body is stretched. The distance from the third point to the second point defines the distance stretched.

To bring an object in front of all objects


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Bring To Front.

To send an object backward


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Send Backward.

To send an object behind all objects


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Send To Back.

To stretch an entire object


1
Choose the Stretch button in the Advanced Transform toolset. The Dist1 field appears in the Prompt Window. and press the Enter key. stretching.

2 (optional) Enter a stretch distance in the field 3 Click to specify the start and end regions for 4 Drag and click to specify the stretch to point.
The object is stretched from the second point to the stretch point.

Resizing 2D Objects
You can resize objects manually, using the Deep Select Tool, or by entering new values in the Prompt Window or on the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

To resize an object manually


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. Control points appear. place the point.

To stretch a portion of an object


1
Choose the Stretch button in the Advanced Transform toolset. The Dist1 field appears in the Prompt Window. and press the Enter key.

2 Select the object you want to resize. 3 Drag a point to resize the object. Release to

2 (optional) Enter a stretch distance in the field 3 Select the object you want to stretch. 4 Click two points, to set the start and end point of
the portion you want to stretch. Be sure at least one point lies on the object. to stretch. The object is stretched from the second point placed to this point. the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize an object using data entry fields


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

5 Drag and click to set the point to which you want 6 (optional) Enter a value in the Dist1 field. Press

2 Select the object you want to resize.

3 Enter new values in the fields and press the

To resize using the Inspector


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 1 7

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities


1 2 3 4 5
Choose Window > Inspector (or press CommandI). Select the object you want to resize. In the Inspector, click the Data tab. Enter new values to resize the object. Click Apply.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the area


you want to zoom out from, then click.

OR
Choose View > Zoom Out, or press CommandMinus (-). The view zooms out from the center of the WorkPlane.

OR

Controlling the View


When working in 2D, you are looking at your drawing from a top view. To navigate around, zoom and pan tools are available.

Press the [ key.

To return to the previous zoom scale


Choose View > Zoom Previous. Your view returns to the previous zoom scale.

Zoom Options
3D Custom Workshop Pro provides a variety of zoom options to help view your drawing precisely. In addition to zooming in and out, you can return to a previous zoom scale, zoom to fit your entire drawing in the view, and many others.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Previous in the shortcut menu.

To zoom to view your entire drawing


Choose View > Zoom All (or press CommandF). Your entire drawing is fit to the window.

To zoom using the Dynamic Zoom Tool


1
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose Dynamic Zoom from the shortcut menu. and out of the drawing.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom All in the shortcut menu.

2 On the WorkPlane, drag up and down to zoom in

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom In button in the Main Tool Palette. area where you want to zoom in, then click.

To select a zoom window


1
Choose View > Zoom Window (or press Command4).

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Window in the shortcut menu.

Choose View > Zoom In, or press CommandPlus (+). The view zooms in, using the center of your view as the center point.

2 Drag a selection box around the area where you


want to zoom in.

OR
Press the ] key.

To reset zoom view to default view


Choose View > Zoom Home (or press Command-6).

To zoom out
1
Choose the Zoom Out button in the Main Tool Palette.

To zoom in on a selection
1 Select the object to which you want to zoom. 2 Choose View > Zoom Select.

3 1 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Zoom Options


OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Select in the shortcut menu.

Controlling Colors
By default, objects appear in Punch! Blue. You can change a single objects color, multiple objects, or the color in which you draw. When changing the drawing color, be sure nothing is selected.

Controlling Zoom Options


The zoom ratio controls the amount you zoom up or down. The zoom scale sets the view to a specified amount between the window and drawing space.

To change an objects color


Ctrl-click the object you want to change and choose Color from the shortcut menu, then choose the color you want from the submenu. To pick a custom color, click More from the submenu and choose your color from the Colors dialog.

To set the zoom ratio


1
Choose View > Zoom Ratio. The Input String dialog appears.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

OR

To set a zoom scale


1
Choose View > Zoom Scale. The Input String dialog appears.

1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog
appears.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

3 Choose a color and close the dialog.

Panning Across the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Pan Tool allows you to quickly move across your drawing. In addition to the Pan Tool, you can access the pan feature by pressing the Space bar at any time, while any tool is active.

To change drawing color


1
Click on an empty space in the design window to be sure nothing is selected. appears.

2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog 3 Choose the color you want. Each object will be
drawn in this color.

To pan
Hold down the Space bar then drag to pan across the drawing. Release the Space bar to deactivate the pan function.

4 Close the dialog.

OR 1
Choose the Dynamic Pan button in the Main Tool Palette. to set the view.

Changing an Objects Layer


You can move an object from its current layer to another, or create a new layer. For more information, see Working with Layers, which begins on page 406.

2 Drag to pan around the drawing. Release OR 1


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Dynamic Pan in the shortcut menu.

To change an objects layer


1 Select the object you want to move. 2 Choose Edit > Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

2 Drag the pan around the drawing.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 1 9

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities


accept them. For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 293.

To display the grid


3 Choose the layer where you want the object to
be displayed from the pop-up menu. Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G). This turns the grid on or off.

4 Click OK. OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose the layer you want from the submenu.

To change grid spacing


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the Spacing dX and dY fields
to change the spacing between major grid lines.

To create a new layer


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit> Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

4 Enter new values in the Sub-spacing X Divs and Y


Divs fields to change the spacing between minor grid lines. preferences).

5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

3 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in


sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

4 Click OK. OR 1
Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose More from the submenu. The Change Layer dialog appears. sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

To change the grid style


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in 3 Click OK.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Grid Dots or Grid Lines button. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

To change the grid size


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

Using the Grid


The grid appears on the WorkPlane. You can control the grids size, appearance, and snap options. The grid is defined by the major grid lines (spacing), and minor grid lines (sub-spacing). The minor grid lines can be displayed as lines or dots. Using grid lines while drawing can help with aligning and precise placement. Using the Snap to Grid feature, objects can be snapped to align with the grid lines. By default, the Snap to Grid feature is turned off. Enable this feature in the Snaps menu. To change the Grid Preferences, choose Preferences from the File menu and choose Grid. The Preferences dialog allows you to click the Apply button to see your changes before clicking OK to

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the X Size and Y Size fields
to change the number of cells in the grid. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To turn on Snap to Grid at startup


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Snap to Grid at Startup checkbox. N O T E : For more information, see Using Snaps,
which begins on page 321.

3 20 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using Snaps

To change grid color


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

N O T E : For more information, see Using the Grid,


which begins on page 320.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Under Grid Color, click the New button. The
Color dialog appears.

To snap tangent to a curve


1 Choose the Single Line button. 2 Click an existing arc or circle and drag, at about a
45-degree angle, until you see the tangent appear.

4 Choose the color you want and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

3 Click to set the lines endpoint.

Using Snaps
3D Custom Workshop Pro features an intelligence which allows you to automatically snap to specific geometric points along the WorkPlane, and along other shapes. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

To snap perpendicular to a curve


1 Select the Single Line button. 2 Click on an existing arc or circle and drag, at
about a 90-degree angle, until you see the perpendicular snap point.

To snap to a specific point


1
Select the tool you want to snap to an existing point. the snap point you want. Notice, snap tools tell you when you are on an object, as well as when the pointer locks onto a specific object point, such as the center, endpoint, midpoint, intersection, quadrant, vertex, at 45-degree angles (creation angles), or along the X or Y axis. click to set the point.

2 In the design window, move your pointer to find

3 Click to set the lines endpoint.

3 When youve locked onto the snap point you want,

To snap along the X or Y axis


Hold down the X or Y key as you click, to automatically snap to the specified axis.

To disable all snap functions


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. tools are disabled.

2 Deselect the Enable checkbox. All of the snap

To snap to the grid


1
Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G) to turn on the grid. appears.

To turn snaps on or off


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. Enabled snap features appear with a checkmark.

2 Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog 3 Select the To Grid checkbox to activate the
snap tool.

4 In the WorkPlane, click to snap to the grid.

2 Deselect the tool(s) you want to turn off. 3 Select the tool(s) you want to turn on.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 32 1

Chapter 32 Drawing 2D Entities

Creating Construction Lines


You can place temporary construction lines on the WorkPlane in three orientations: horizontal, vertical, and 45-degrees. You can use these lines in conjunction with the snap tools to increase accuracy while drawing. Construction lines can be easily deleted once placed.

To draw a construction line


Ctrl-click the design window where you want the line and choose Construction Lines from the shortcut menu, then choose the orientation of the construction line you want from the submenu. The line appears.

To delete construction lines


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Construction Lines from the shortcut menu, then choose Delete Constructions from the submenu. All construction lines are deleted.

3 22 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 33

Drawing 3D Entities
There are many types of 3D features you can create using 3D Custom Workshop Pro. Sometimes, the original object is a blank canvas, and editing and transforming the shape creates the real object. Use these drawing methods and concepts to get started at creating any object you can imagine.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 2 3

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities

Accessing 3D Tools
3D Custom Workshop Pro offers two types of tool palettes: 2D and 3D. In the Main Tool Palette, click Go to 3D to switch to 3D drawing mode. The 3D drawing, editing, and navigation tools appear. Each of the tools In the Main Tool Palette have an arrow in the bottom right corner. This signifies that there are more tools available in a floating palette. To access tools on the palette, hold down your mouse button on the tool and the toolset appears. You can tear off the toolset from the Main Tool Palette and access tools from a floating palette by dragging through the tools and tearing the palette away from the Main Tool Palette.

set the spheres diameter after selecting the tool, or after the sphere is placed.

To draw a sphere by defining its center


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Sphere button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. set the objects diameter. Press the Enter key to accept new values. sphere appears.

2 Choose the Sphere One Point button in

3 (optional) Enter a value in the Diameter field to 4 Click to set the spheres center point. The 3D

Drawing 3D Objects
3D objects are created using the Primitive tools. There are seven primitives available: sphere, block, cylinder, cone, prism, pyramid, and slab. To view these tools, drag through the Primitive palette.

Defining a Spheres Center Point and Radius


The Sphere Two Point Tool allows you to draw a sphere by defining its center point, then setting a second point to define the radius. The data entry fields allow you to enter values to set or edit points. You can adjust the spheres shape and size by changing the X, Y, Z, and dX, dY, dZ values in the Prompt Window.

Each of these primitives offers a variety of draw methods, available in the form of sub-toolsets (excluding Slab). These sub-toolsets are accessed by clicking the tool button in the Prompt Window.

To draw a sphere by defining two points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Sphere button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Sphere Two Point button in

Drawing 3D Spheres
There are three sphere draw methods available, accessed by clicking the tool button and dragging to the tool button you want. Each tool creates a sphere by defining a center point and a radius.

3 Click to set the center of the sphere. 4 Drag and click to set the radius. The 3D sphere
appears.

Drawing a Sphere by Defining its Center Point


The Sphere One Point Tool allows you to draw a sphere by clicking to set its center point. You can

Drawing a Sphere by Defining Diagonal Points


The Sphere Diagonals Tool allows you to set two diagonal points, between which, the sphere is spaced evenly.

3 24 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing Spheres Using Data Entry Fields


The data entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the spheres shape and size by changing the X, Y, Z, and dX, dY, dZ values in the Prompt Window.

Drawing 3D Blocks
There are three block draw methods available, accessed by clicking and dragging through the tool button. Each block is created by specifying a width, height, and depth.

To draw a sphere by defining diagonal points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Sphere button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Sphere Diagonals button in

Drawing a Block by Defining its Center Point


The Block One Point Tool allows you to draw a block by clicking once to set its center point. You can specify the blocks height, width, and depth in the Prompt Window, before or after youve placed the object.

3 Click to set the first point. 4 Drag and click to set a point diagonal to the first.
The 3D sphere appears in the center of the two points.

To draw a block by defining its center

Drawing Spheres Using Data Entry Fields


You can draw a sphere by entering its XYZ position, then defining its diameter in the Prompt Window. This method can be used in combination with all three Sphere tools.

In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Block button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Height fields.

2 Choose the Block One Point button in the 3 (optional) Enter values in the Length, Width, and 4 Click to set the blocks center point. The 3D
block appears.

To draw a sphere using data entry fields


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Sphere button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. fields appear.

2 Choose the Sphere button you want. Data entry 3 Enter values in the X, Y, and Z fields to specify
the spheres position in the WorkPlane.

Drawing a Block by Defining its Height


The Block Two Points Tool allows you to click a point, then drag and click a second point, defining the blocks height and Z-axis. The data entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the length and width by entering values in the Length and Width fields in the Prompt Window. These values can be set before or after you draw.

OR
For a one point sphere, enter a value in the Diameter field.

OR
For a two point or diagonal sphere, enter values in the dX, dY, and dZ fields to set the diameter.

4 Press the Enter key to accept the values and


place the sphere.

N O T E : You are defining the height along the Zaxis, so the length and width are relative to that.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 2 5

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities To draw a block by defining its height


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Block button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing Blocks Using Data Entry Fields


You can draw a block by entering its XYZ position, then defining its length, width, and height in the Prompt Window. This method can be used in combination with all three Block tools.

2 Choose the Block Two Points button in the 3 (optional) Enter values in the Length and Width 4 Click to set the first point. 5 Drag and click to set the blocks height, and
define the Z-axis. The 3D block appears.

To draw a block using data entry fields


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Block button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. fields appear.

fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Choose the Sphere button you want. Data entry 3 Enter values in the X, Y, and Z fields to specify
the blocks position on the WorkPlane. fields.

Drawing a Block by Defining Three Diagonal Points


The Block Diagonals Tool allows you to draw a block by first defining the start point, then dragging to set the length and width, then dragging to set the height. The Data Entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the length, width, and height by entering values in the corresponding fields in the Prompt Window. These values can be set before or after you draw.

4 Enter values in the Length, Width, and Height 5 Press the Enter key to accept values and place
the block.

Drawing 3D Cylinders
There are three draw methods available for creating cylinders. Cylinders are defined by a diameter and a height. If you adjust the diameter and height values before placing the cylinder, then press the Enter key, the cylinder appears automatically, at the coordinates specified in the X, Y, and Z fields.

To draw a block by defining diagonal points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Block button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Block Diagonals button in the 3 Click to set the blocks start point. 4 Drag and click to set the length and width. 5 Drag and click to set the blocks height. The 3D
block appears.

Drawing a Cylinder by Defining its Center Point


The Cylinder One Point Tool allows you to draw a cylinder by clicking once to set its center point. The cylinder appears, based on dimensions you specify. You can specify the cylinders diameter and height by entering values in the Prompt Window, before or after youve placed the object.

6 (optional) Enter values in corresponding fields to


adjust the shapes length, width, and height. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To draw a cylinder by defining its center


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Cylinder button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

3 26 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Cylinder by Defining Two Points


2 Choose the Cylinder One Point button in
the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Height fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values. cylinder appears.

To draw a cylinder by defining diagonal points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Cylinder button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

3 (optional) Enter values in the Diameter and

2 Choose the Cylinder Diagonals button in

4 Click to set the cylinders center point. The 3D

Drawing a Cylinder by Defining Two Points


The Cylinder Two Point Tool allows you to create a cylinder by clicking two points to define its base and height. The data entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the length, width, and height by entering values in the corresponding fields in the Prompt Window. These values can be set before or after you draw.

3 Click to set the cylinders start point. 4 Drag and click to set the diameter. 5 Drag and click to set the cylinders height. The
3D cylinder appears.

6 (optional) Enter values in corresponding fields to


adjust the shapes diameter and height. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Drawing 3D Cones
There are three draw methods available for creating cones. Cones are defined by two points, the base and the top point. The Data Entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the diameter and height by typing values in the corresponding fields in the Prompt Window.

To draw a cylinder by defining two points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Cylinder button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Height fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Choose the Cylinder Two Point button in

3 (optional) Enter values in the Diameter and

Drawing a Cone by Defining the Diameter Center Point


The Cone One Point Tool allows you to create a cone by clicking a point to set the cones diameter. The cone appears based on the diameter and height values you specify.

4 Click to set the first point of the cylinder. 5 Drag and click to set the next point. The 3D
cylinder appears.

To draw a cone by defining its center point

Drawing a Cylinder by Defining Diagonal Points


The Cylinder Diagonals Tool allows you to draw a cylinder by first defining the start point, then dragging to set the length and width, then dragging to set the height.

In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Cone button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. appears.

2 Choose the Cone One Point button in the 3 Click to set the cones center point. The 3D Cone 4 (optional) Enter values in the Diameter and
Height fields. Press the Enter key to accept the new values.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 2 7

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities

Drawing a Cone by Defining Two Points


The Cone Two Points Tool allows you to click two points to define the base and height.

A Prism is defined by three characteristics: the diameter, height, and number of sides. You can define each of these characteristics. The sides of a prism are at a 90-degree angle to the base. The data entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the diameter, height, and number of sides by entering values in the corresponding fields in the Prompt Window. These values can be set before or after you draw.

To draw a cone by defining two points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Cone button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Cone Two Points button in the 3 Click to set the first point. 4 Drag and click to set the second point, defining
the height. The 3D cone appears.

Drawing a Prism by Defining its Center Point


The Prism One Point allows you to create a prism by clicking a point to define its center point. The prism appears, based on the dimensions you specify.

5 (optional) Enter new values in the corresponding

fields to adjust the shapes diameter and height. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To draw a prism by defining its center


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Prism button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. prism appears.

Drawing a Cone by Defining Diagonal Points


The Cone Diagonals Tool allows you to draw a cone by first defining the start point, then dragging to set the diameter, then dragging to set the height.

2 Choose the Prism One Point button in the 3 Click to set the prisms center point. The 3D 4 (optional) Enter values in the Diameter, Height,
and # Sides fields. Press the Enter key to accept the new values.

To draw a cone by defining diagonal points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Cone button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Cone Diagonals button in the 3 Click to set the cones start point. 4 Drag and click to set the diameter. 5 Drag and click to set the cones height. The 3D
cone appears.

Drawing a Prism by Defining Two Points


The Prism Two Points tool allows you to click two points to define the prisms base and height. You can adjust the shapes diameter, height, and number of sides in the Prompt Window.

6 (optional) Enter values in corresponding fields to


adjust the shapes diameter and height. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To draw a prism by defining two points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Prism button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing 3D Prisms
There are three draw methods available for creating prisms.

2 Choose the Prism Two Points button in 3 Click to set the first point.

3 28 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Prism by Defining Diagonal Points


4 Drag and click to set the second point, defining
the height. The 3D prism appears.

5 (optional) Enter values in the corresponding

Drawing a Pyramid by Defining the Diameter Center Point


The Pyramid One Point Tool allows you to create a pyramid by clicking once to set the center of the pyramids base. The pyramid appears, based on the diameter, height, and number of sides youve specified.

fields to adjust the shapes diameter, height, and number of sides. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Drawing a Prism by Defining Diagonal Points


The Prism Diagonals Tool allows you to draw a prism by first defining the start point, then dragging to set the diameter, then dragging to set the height.

To draw a pyramid by defining its center


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Pyramid button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. appears.

2 Choose the Pyramid One Point button in

To draw a prism by defining diagonal points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Prism button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

3 Click to place the pyramid. The 3D pyramid 4 (optional) Enter values in the Diameter, Height,
and # Sides fields. Press the Enter key to accept the new values.

2 Choose the Prism Diagonals button in the 3 Click to set the prisms start point. 4 Drag and click to set the diameter. 5 Drag and click to set the prisms height. The 3D
prism appears.

Drawing a Pyramid by Defining Two Points


The Pyramid Two Points Tool allows you to click two points to define the pyramids base and height. You can adjust the shapes diameter, height, and number of sides in the Prompt Window.

6 (optional) Enter values in corresponding fields to


adjust the shapes diameter, height, and number of sides. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To draw a pyramid by defining two points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Pyramid button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing 3D Pyramids
There are three draw methods available for creating pyramids. A pyramid is defined by three characteristics: diameter, height, and number of sides. The sides all meet at one point. The data entry fields allow you to set or edit points. You can adjust the diameter, height, and number of sides by typing values in the corresponding fields in the Prompt Window. These values can be set before or after you draw

2 Choose the Pyramid Two Points button in

3 Click to set the first point. 4 Drag and click to set the second point, defining
the height. The 3D pyramid appears.

5 (optional) Enter values in the corresponding

fields to adjust the shapes diameter, height, and number of sides. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 2 9

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities

Drawing a Pyramid by Defining Diagonal Points


The Pyramid Diagonals Tool allows you to draw a pyramid by first defining the start point, then dragging to set the diameter, then dragging to set the height.

To taper slab edges


1
Select the slab you want to edit. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. the Enter key. The higher the value, the larger the angles appears to create the edge.

2 Enter a value in the Draft Angle field and press

To draw a pyramid by defining diagonal points


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Pyramid button from the Primitives toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing Holes in 3D Objects


There are three types of holes you can draw in 3D objects. Using each tool, you can specify the depth and direction. In the Prompt Window, click the Thru Type pop-up menu to choose your holes depth. To Depth click points to define the holes distance Through the hole goes through the selected object First Blind the hole stops at the first outward face it intersects To Face the hole stops at a face you select In the Prompt Window, click the Hole Direction popup menu to choose your holes orientation. Normal the hole is perpendicular to the selected face X-Axis the hole is aligned with the global X-axis Y-Axis the hole is aligned with the global Yaxis Z-Axis the hole is aligned with the global Zaxis 2-Pts click points to define the holes direction

2 Choose the Pyramid Diagonals button in

3 Click to set the pyramids start point. 4 Drag and click to set the diameter. 5 Drag and click to set the pyramids height. The
3D pyramid appears.

6 (optional) Enter values in corresponding fields to


adjust the shapes diameter, height, and number of sides. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Drawing 3D Slabs
The Slab Primitive Tool allows you to draw a flat, closed surface. You can set the height and direction the slab extrudes using the data entry fields in the Prompt Window. A negative height value changes the direction of the slab. By default, the Slab Primitive Tool creates a flat edge between the top and bottom of the slab. The Draft Angle field, in the Prompt Window, allows you to enter an angle to taper the edge between the top and bottom of the slab.

To draw a slab
1
Choose the Slab Primitive button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Drawing a Simple Hole


The Simple Hole Tool allows you to create a hole defined by its center point, diameter, and depth. The diameter stays the same for the entire depth. You can specify the depth, diameter, and draft angle in the Prompt Window, before or after you draw the hole.

2 Click points to define the shape of the slab. 3 Double-click to finish. The 3D slab appears. 4 (optional) Enter a value in the Height field to

change the height. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

3 30 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Drawing a Counter Bore Hole

To draw a simple hole


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Hole toolset button. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. Pop-up menus and data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. menu. This draws the hole through the object.

2 Choose the Counter Bore Hole button in

the sub-toolset. Pop-up menus and data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. menu. This draws the hole through the object.

3 Choose Through from the Thru Type pop-up OR

2 Choose the Simple Hole button in the

3 Choose Through from the Thru Type pop-up OR

Choose another depth from the pop-up menu.

4 From the Hole Direction pop-up menu, choose

Normal. This draws the hole perpendicular to the face you select.

Choose another depth from the pop-up menu.

OR
Choose another direction from the pop-up menu.

4 From the Hole Direction pop-up menu, choose

Normal. This draws the hole perpendicular to the face you select.

OR
Choose another direction from the pop-up menu.

5 Select the face where you want the hole. 6 Click to set the center point for the hole. The
hole appears.

5 Select the face where you want the hole. 6 Click to set the center point for the hole. The
hole appears.

(optional) Enter values in the Depth, Diameter, Draft Angle, Bore Depth or Bore fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

(optional) Enter values in the Depth, Diameter or Draft Angle fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

Drawing a Counter Sink Hole


The Counter Sink Tool allows you to draw a hole with a counter sink. A counter sink hole is defined by the holes diameter and depth, and the sinks diameter and angle. An counter sinks sides are angled, unlike a counter bore, which has straight sides. You can specify the depth, diameter, sink angle, and draft angle, in the Prompt Window, before or after you draw the hole.

Drawing a Counter Bore Hole


The Counter Bore Hole Tool allows you to draw a hole with a counter bore. A counter bore hole is defined by the holes diameter and depth, and the bores diameter and depth. The bore should have a diameter larger than the hole, and a depth less than the hole. A counter bores sides are straight, unlike a counter sink, which has angled sides. You can specify the depth, diameter, and draft angle, in the Prompt Window, before or after you draw the hole.

To draw a counter sink hole


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Hole toolset button. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Pop-up menus and data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Counter Sink Hole button in

To draw a counter bore hole


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Hole toolset button. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

3 Choose Through from the Thru Type pop-up OR

menu. This draws the hole through the object.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 33 1

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities


Choose another depth from the pop-up menu.

4 From the Hole Direction pop-up menu, choose

To select all objects


Double-click the Selection button. All objects are selected.

Normal. This draws the hole perpendicular to the face youll select.

OR
Choose another direction from the pop-up menu.

To select and display control points


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. appear.

5 Select the face where you want the hole. 6 Click to set the center point for the hole. The
hole appears.

2 Click to select the object. The points

(optional) Enter values in the Depth, Diameter, Draft Angle, Sink Diameter, or Sink Angle fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To drag a selection box


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. and select it.

Selecting Objects
There are two selection tools available. You can use the Selection Tool or the Deep Select Tool to select objects.

2 Drag, from left to right, to surround an object OR


Drag, from right to left, around part of the object to select it.

When you click to select an object or point, and it is near, or on top of another possible selection, a popup menu appears with a list of the possible selections. This is called the Ambiguity pop-up menu. As you move the pointer over the possible selections, they are highlighted on the WorkPlane. Select the object you want and it is selected on the WorkPlane.

To remove an object or point from a selection set


Hold down the Shift key and click to deselect an object or point.

Rearranging 3D Objects
You can move selections by dragging from one point to another, specifying coordinates or, for even more options, use one of the Transform Tools. To specify coordinates, you can enter values in the Prompt Window or the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284. Transform tools are unique in that you do not move objects by dragging them directly to where you want them. Rather, you click reference points to specify the distance and direction your selection moves. Basic Transform tools:

To select an object or point


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Click to select the object.

To select multiple objects or points


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Hold down the Shift key. 3 Click to select objects. Each object is added to
the selection set.

3 32 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Nudging Objects
Advanced Transform tools:

3 Enter a value in the Arrow Key Nudge Distance


field.

4 Click OK.

To nudge an object To drag objects to a new location


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. move.

1 Click to select the object you want to nudge. 2 Press an arrow key to nudge the object in that
direction.

2 Click to select the object you want to 3 Drag the object to a new location.
function. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

Moving an Object Using the Translate Tool


The Translate Tool allows you to move an object or point by clicking to set a start reference point, then clicking another point on the WorkPlane to set the move distance and direction. These reference points do not need to be on the actual object, you can click anywhere on the WorkPlane.

N O T E : The snap tools must be enabled to use this

To move by specifying coordinates


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

2 Click to select the object you want to move. Data 3 Enter new X and Y values in the fields. Press the OR 1 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 2 Enter new X and Y values in the fields and click
Apply.

To move using the Translate Tool


1
Select the object or individual point you want to move. Transform toolset.

2 Choose the Translate button in the Basic 3 Click to set the first reference point. 4 Drag to set the distance and direction you want
the selection moved. selection is moved.

5 Click to set the end reference point. The OR


Select the Translate button and enter coordinates in the dX, dY, and dZ fields in the Prompt Window. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

N O T E : A positive value moves the object up, while a


negative value moves it down.

Nudging Objects
You can select objects and nudge them using your arrow keys. By default, the nudge distance is set to 0.0, so when you press an arrow key, it moves the WorkPlane.

Rotating 2D Objects
There are two tools available for rotating a selection: around one point, or around three points. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

To set the nudge distance


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the General category.

To rotate around one point


1
Select the object you want to rotate.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 33

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities


2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate One Point button in
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Rotation Axis pop-up menu.

To perform uniform scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. menu.

4 Choose the axis around which you want to rotate 5 Enter a rotation angle in the Angle field. 6 Click the point you want the object to rotate

3 Choose Uniform from the Scale Method pop-up 4 Click to set the anchor point, or scale origin. 5 Click to set two points to define the scale
magnitude.

around. The object rotates in a counterclockwise direction.

OR
Select the Rotate One Point button and enter values in the X and Y fields to set the origin of rotation, and an angle in the Angle field. Press Enter to accept the values and rotate.

OR
In the Prompt Window, enter a value in the Scale field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To perform differential scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. up menu.

To rotate using three points


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate Three Point button in
the sub-toolset. The Angle field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key to accept the value. toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

3 Choose Differential from the Scale Method pop4 Enter values in the X-Scale and Y-Scale fields
and press the Enter key.

4 Enter the rotation angle in the Angle field and 5 Click to set the center point for rotation. 6 Click to set the start reference point. This is the
rotate from point.

5 Click to set the anchor point, or scale origin.

Mirroring 2D Objects
You can mirror an object by setting a reference line, which acts like the spine of a book. Once the line is set, the object is mirrored on the opposite side. When a mirrored copy is created, the resulting geometry acts independently of the original shape, which means changes to the original shape do not affect the copy. The Linked Mirror Tool allows you to create an associative link between the original shape and the resulting geometry, so changes to the original shape are reflected in the mirror copy. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

Click to set the end reference point. This is the rotate to point. The object is rotated.

Scaling 2D Objects
The Scale Tool allows you to enlarge or shrink an object based using two types of scaling, Uniform and Differential. Uniform Scale uses input from mouse clicks, or values entered in the data entry fields. The entire object is scaled as one unit. Differential Scale uses input to scale components along the X, or Y axis. Each axis is scaled individually.

3 34 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Duplicating Objects in Linear Formation

To mirror objects
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

duplicate to the next, and so on. This results in a more spread out offset and spacing.

To create linear duplicates of an object


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Linear Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Linear Duplicate dialog appears.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

5 Click the point (or points) to define the mirror


origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

To mirror a copy
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

3 In the Number per row field, enter the number


of objects you want in each row, including the selection. associated with each axis.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

4 In the Offset fields, enter the distances N O T E : The asterisk indicates that these fields can 5 Select the Total offset button to apply the X, Y
values to the combined columns. be accessed using the Snap Tool by referencing data in the drawing.

5 Hold down the Option key and click the point (or

points) to define the mirror origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

Duplicating Objects in Linear Formation


The Linear Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying rows, columns, and spacing. Columns are a vertical series, while rows are a horizontal series. The spacing values can be measured by Total or Step. Total offset and Total spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the last duplicate. This results in a more compact offset and spacing. Step offset and Step spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the next duplicate, then from that

OR
Select the Step offset button to apply the X, Y values to the individual column offsets.

6 In the Number of rows field, enter the number


of rows you want.

In the Spacing field, enter the varietal space you want between each row. spacing to the combined row height.

8 Select the Total spacing button to apply the OR


Select the Step spacing button to apply the spacing to each individual row spacing.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 3 5

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities


9
Click OK. Your selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

6 Click the Total angle button to specify that the


angle is the total polar angle.

OR

Duplicating Objects in Circular Formation


The Polar Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying the number, center point, and rotation angle. All of these factors create a circular pattern of duplicates. By default, each duplicate is rotated around the specified center point. You have the option to translate each duplicate, so they appear just as the original object. To translate each duplicate, select the Translate duplicates checkbox and enter your reference point coordinates.

Click the Step angle button to specify that the angle is the individual angle between duplicates.

Click OK. You selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

Aligning Copies in Linear Array


The Linear Array Tool creates and distributes copies based on the starting reference point and pointer location. As you move the pointer, the angle and number of copies increases or decreases. The spacing value describes the absolute distance between each consecutive object.

To create circular duplicates of an object


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Polar Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Polar Duplicate dialog appears.

To align objects in an array


1
Select the object with which you want to create an array. Basic Transform toolset. The Spacing field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key.

2 Choose the Linear Array button in the 3 (optional) Enter a value in the Spacing field and 4 Click to select the starting point for the array. 5 Drag your cursor in the direction you want the

linear array. As you drag the array increases or decreases in size, depending on which way youre dragging.

6 Click to set the end of the array. 3 In the Number field, enter the number of
objects you want, including the selection.

4 In the Center fields, enter the X and Y

coordinates where you want to position the center point of the polar display.

Duplicating Objects Along a Path


The Path Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object along a specific path, such as a curve, line, spline, arc, circle, or ellipse. You can set the number of duplicates in the Prompt Window before or after you place the objects.

OR
Select the Translate duplicates checkbox to specify the polar position of each duplicate, then enter X and Y values.

5 In the Angle field, enter the polar angle you


want.

To duplicate an object along a path


1
Select the object you want to duplicate.

3 36 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Aligning Objects
2 Choose the Path Duplicate button in the
Advanced Transform tools. The Qty field appears in the Prompt Window. want in the Qty field and press the Enter key. duplicate. other faces. There are four methods of combining object faces: Connect points moves a part to another part, connecting two points between the parts. Mate faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly opposite the referenced face. Align faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly the same as the referenced face. Align will also allow selection of cylinder faces, in which case the axes will be aligned to each other. Insert faces moves and aligns cylindrical faces. Typically this is used to insert a bolttype shape into a hole-type shape. Each method results in an associate connection between the original shape and the resulting geometry; meaning edits to the original shape are reflected in the resulting geometry, thus maintaining the connection or alignment.

3 (optional) Enter the number of duplicates you

4 Click to select the path along which you want to 5 Click on the object you are duplicating to set the
origin point. This point lies along the selected path. to set an alignment axis. The axis created by these two points aligns with the shape of the selected path.

6 Click two points on the object you are duplicating

Aligning Objects
The Align Tool allows you to select an object, or objects, then click a point to align your selection based on the alignment option you choose. You can align objects by their sides, centers, tops, and bottoms.

To connect object points


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset.

To align objects
1 Select the object or objects, you want aligned. 2 Choose the Align button in the Advanced
Transform toolset. The Align Options popup menu appears in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Connection button in the sub3 Select the face to move. 4 Select the connection point on the face to move
from.

5 Select the face to move to (parent part). 6 Select the connection point on the face to move
to. The objects are connected at the selected point.

3 Choose the alignment you want from the Align


options pop-up menu. you set.

To mate object faces


1
Choose the Combine Faces button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

4 Click to align the object based on the align option

2 Choose the Mate Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the planar face to be aligned. 5 Select the planar face to align to.

Combining Object Faces


The Combine Face tools provide options for positioning and aligning object faces relative to

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 3 7

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities To align object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key. the third point to the second point defines the distance stretched.

To stretch an object
1
Choose the Stretch button in the Advanced Transform toolset. The Dist1 field appears in the Prompt Window. and press the Enter key. stretching.

2 Choose the Align Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

2 (optional) Enter a stretch distance in the field 3 Click to specify the start and end regions for 4 Drag and click to specify the stretch to point. N O T E : To stretch the entire body, specify two points that lie outside the body. N O T E : The Stretch Tool can also be used to stretch regions within a body. To perform a local stretch, specify one or both points within the body. Local stretching introduces new faces and edges at the stretch start or end region. Continuity at the new edges is positional only.
The object is stretched from the second point to the stretch point.

5 Select the face to align to (same face type as

To insert object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose the Insert Face button in the

3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

To bring an object forward


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Bring Forward.

5 Select the face to align with (same face type as 6 Select the face to mate. 7 Select the face to mate with.
If the first face you select is cylindrical, the second alignment face must also be cylindrical. In the case of cylindrical faces, the axes of the cylinders are aligned.

To bring an object in front of all objects


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Bring To Front.

To send an object backward


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Send Backward.

Stretching Objects
The Stretch Tool is used to stretch curves, surfaces, and solids. Stretching is a non-uniform scaling operation along a stretch axis. The stretch axis is defined by two points specified by the user. The material to be stretched is bounded by planes perpendicular to the stretch axis at the two supplied points. The third point defines how much the body is stretched. The distance from

To send an object behind all objects


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Send To Back.

3 38 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Resizing Objects

Resizing Objects
You can resize objects manually, using the Deep Select Tool, or by entering new values in the Prompt Window or Inspector. The Inspector displays the current selections data, including size and position information. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

To render in WireFrame
Choose the WireFrame button in the Main Tool Palette.

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. menu.

2 Choose Wireframe from the Static Shade pop-up 3 Click OK.

To resize an object manually


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. Control points appear. place the point.

To render in hidden line


Choose the Hidden Line button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Select the object you want to resize. 3 Drag a point to resize the object. Release to 1

OR
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. menu.

To resize an object using data entry fields


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose Hidden from the Static Shade pop-up 3 Click OK.

2 Select the object you want to resize.

3 Enter new values in the fields and press the

To render hidden lines as shaded


Choose the Hidden Lines as Shaded button in the Main Tool Palette.

To resize using the Inspector


1 1 2 3 4 5
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Choose Window > Inspector (or press CommandI). Select the object you want to resize. In the Inspector, click the Data tab. Enter new values to resize the object. Click Apply.

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. Shade pop-up menu.

2 Choose Hidden with Dimmed from the Static 3 Click OK.

To render in full 3D shaded


Choose the Shaded button in the Main Tool Palette.

Shade Render Options


There are five shade options for 3D rendering. You can switch shade views in the Main Tool Palette.

OR
Choose View > Shade Now (press Command-T).

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 3 9

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities


2 Choose Gouraud or Phong from the Static Shade
pop-up menu.

3 Click OK. N O T E : This mode is also known as OpenGL.

To turn on/off perspective


Choose the Perspective button in the Main Tool Palette to turn it on and off.

To access the view properties


Choose the View Properties button in the Main Tool Palette. The View Properties dialog appears. When Flip Normals is selected, normal surfaces that are pointing away from users are lighter. Deselecting this option displays surfaces with only ambient light. When Z-Buffer Curves is selected, curves are hidden behind solids. Deselecting this option allows curves to be visible. When Show Facet Edges is selected, facet edges appear. Deselecting this option hides the facet edges. When Use Clip Planes is selected, planes that are specified as clip planes clip the view. Deselecting this option disables clip planes. When Anti-Alias is selected, anti aliasing of edges is enabled. Deselecting this option disables the feature. When Clip At Eye Point is selected, clipping is based on the eye point. Deselecting this option clips objects based on extents of the given model. When Use Transparency is selected, objects selected for transparency appear with the transparency value set using the Transparency slider. The lower the value, the more transparent objects appear. Deselecting this option disable the transparency feature. When Backface Culling is selected, all facets from solids facing away from the viewing direction are ignored. If you have open-faced solids, deselect this option so all faces are visible. When Update Silhouettes is selected, calculations will be made of the silhouette edges when the view orientation is changed. When User Vertex Arrays is selected, the faster path to OpenGL is used by sending vertex arrays to the graphics board. Note:

To render flat surfaces


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears.

2 Choose Flat from the Static Shade pop-up menu. 3 Click OK.

Customizing Shade Options


You can customize the settings associated with the full 3D shade, or OpenGL, option. You can also change your current shade view, just as you can in the Main Tool Palette. You can control how objects appear when you use one of the Dynamic tools; Dynamic Pan, Dynamic Zoom, and Dynamic Rotate. So as you pan, zoom or rotate, objects appear in one of the shade options. By default, the Shade Now command reverts objects back to the Gouraud shade option. You can customize this Shade Now option on the Shade Options dialog.

To customize shaded render option


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears.

2 Select, or deselect, the options you want.

3 40 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Ambient Light


this option is off, by default, since it uses more RAM, than when disabled.

To change the intensity of ambient light


1
Choose View > Ambient Light Settings. The Ambient Light Settings dialog appears. the intensity value.

3 Click OK.

To customize dynamic shade rendering


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. pop-up menu.

2 Drag the Intensity slider to increase or decrease 3 Click OK.

2 Choose a shade option from the Dynamic Shade 3 Click OK.

Grouping Objects
You have the ability to group a selection of objects together so they can all be moved and resized together.

To customize the shade now feature


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. up menu.

To group objects
1 Select the objects you want grouped. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Group. The objects are
grouped together.

2 Choose a shade option from the Shade Now pop3 Click OK.

Controlling Ambient Light


You can control the color and intensity of the ambient light that affects all objects. You can choose a color from the Color pop-up menu, or drag the Red, Green, and Blue sliders to define the color.

To ungroup objects
1 Select the group. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Ungroup. The objects are
ungrouped.

To change the color of ambient light


1
Choose View > Ambient Light Settings. The Ambient Light Settings dialog appears.

Locking Objects
You can protect an objects settings by locking the object so changes cannot be made.

To lock an object
1 Select the object you want to lock. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Lock. The object is locked
so changes cannot be made.

To unlock an object
2 Choose the color you want from the pop-up menu. OR
Enter the Red, Green, and Blue values in the corresponding fields to define the color you want.

1 Select the object you want to unlock. 2 Choose Edit > Group > UnLock. The object is
unlocked.

3 (optional) Define the intensity you want. 4 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 34 1

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities

Changing Object Direction


You can change the direction, or orientation, of a curve or surface. You may need to change direction when creating surfaces.

Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose the layer you want from the submenu.

To create a new layer


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit> Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

To show object direction


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Verify > Show Direction. Arrows appear
to show the directions.

3 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in


sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

To change direction
1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Direction. OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Change Direction from the shortcut menu. The objects direction is changed.

4 Click OK. OR 1
Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose More from the submenu. The Change Layer dialog appears. sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

2 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in 3 Click OK.

Changing an Objects Layer


You can move an object from its current layer to another, or create a new layer. For more information, see Working with Layers, which begins on page 406. You can move an object from its current layer to another, or create a new layer. For more information, see Working with Layers, which begins on page 406.

Changing Object Type


You can change the geometry of an object, then reshape or resize the object to customize its appearance. Changing a solid 3D object into surfaces literally breaks the object into separate surfaces, each of which you can control by dragging.

To change an objects layer


1 Select the object you want to move. 2 Choose Edit > Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

Changing Solid Objects


You can change a solid object into curves or surfaces.

To change a solid
1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type. OR
Ctrl--click on the object and choose Change Object Type from the shortcut menu. The Change Type dialog appears.

3 Choose the layer where you want the object to


be displayed from the pop-up menu.

4 Click OK. OR 3 42 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

3 Select the button corresponding to the type you


want.

Changing Objects into Surfaces


4 Click OK.

To simplify objects
1 Select the object you want to simplify. 2 Choose Edit > Simplify Object. The Simplify
Results dialog appears with the results.

Changing Objects into Surfaces


3D objects are drawn as one individual surface. By changing a solid object into surfaces, you can remove edges from a block or warp a circle to almost any shape.

3 Click OK.

Displaying Points
You can control the visibility of an objects editable points.

To change a solid object to separate surfaces


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type OR
Ctrl-click on the object and choose Change Object Type from the shortcut menu. The Change Type dialog appears.

To show points
1 Select the object with points you want to show. 2 Choose Edit > Show Points (or press Command-D). OR
Ctrl-click to object and choose Show Points from the shortcut menu,

To hide points
1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Show Points (or press Command-D)
to remove the checkmark.

3 Select the Surfaces button. 4 (optional) Deselect the Delete Originals 5 (optional) Deselect the Use Work Layer
checkbox to specify a different layer.

OR
Ctrl-click to object and choose Show Points from the shortcut menu.

checkbox to keep the original surfaces in place.

To resolve links
1 Select an object. 2 Choose Edit > Resolve Links.

6 Click OK.

Simplifying Objects
You can attempt to simplify objects to help increase performance and speed. Where possible, the following simplifications will be made: Zero length curves to points Circular splines to arcs or circles Straight splines to lines NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational BSpline) surfaces or solids to analytics

To remove links
1 Select an object. 2 Choose Edit > Remove Links. All associativity
related to the object is removed.

Combining and Subtracting Objects


You can create a union between objects, or remove a portion of an object, based on another objects

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 43

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities


shape. Combing solids causes one solid to take on the parent solids material, color, and characteristics.

Using Snaps
3D Custom Workshop Pro features an intelligence which allows you to automatically snap to specific geometric points along the WorkPlane, and along other shapes. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

Combining Objects
The Add Solid Tool allows you to create a union between two or more objects. The first object you select is the base, the object to which you are adding. Objects that are added take on the color or material of the base object.

To snap to a specific point


1
Select the tool you want to snap to an existing point. the snap point you want. Notice snap tools tell you when you are on an object, as well as when the pointer locks onto a specific object point, such as the center, endpoint, midpoint, intersection, quadrant, vertex, at 45-degree angles (creation angles), or along the X, Y or Z axis. click to set the point.

2 In the design window, move your pointer to find

To combine objects
1
Choose the Add Solid button in the Main Tool Palette. object to which you want objects added. the base.

2 Click to select the base object, the

3 Select the object to add. The object is added to


Shift key as you select objects to add.

3 When youve locked onto the snap point you want,

N O T E : To add more than one object, hold down the

To snap along the X, Y or Z axis


Hold down the X, Y or Z key as you click, to automatically snap to the specified axis.

Subtracting Objects
The Subtract Solid Tool allows you to remove an object from the WorkPlane, leaving a void space where the object used to be positioned. Objects do not need to be combined for you to subtract an object.

To snap to the grid


1
Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G) to turn on the grid. appears.

2 Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog 3 Select the To Grid checkbox to activate the
snap tool.

To subtract an object
1
Choose the Subtract Solid button in the Main Tool Palette. want to subtract.

4 In the WorkPlane, click to snap to the grid. N O T E : For more information, see Using the Grid,
which begins on page 347.

2 Click to select the object from which you 3 Select the object you want to subtract. The
object is subtracted and its shape remains. down the Shift key as you select objects to subtract.

To disable all snap functions


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. tools are disabled.

N O T E : To subtract more than one object, hold

2 Deselect the Enable checkbox. All of the snap

3 44 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Creating Construction Lines

To turn snaps on or off


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. Enabled snap features appear with a checkmark.

To zoom using the Dynamic Zoom Tool


1
Choose the Dynamic Zoom button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Deselect the tool(s) you want to turn off. 3 Select the tool(s) you want to turn on.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose Dynamic Zoom from the shortcut menu.

2 Drag up and down to zoom in and out of the

Creating Construction Lines


You can place temporary construction lines on the WorkPlane in three orientations: horizontal, vertical, and 45-degrees. You can use these lines in conjunctions with the snap tools to increase accuracy while drawing. Construction lines can be easily deleted once placed.

drawing.

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom In button in the Main Tool Palette. area where you want to zoom in, then click.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

To draw a construction line


Ctrl-click the design window where you want the line and choose Construction Lines from the shortcut menu, then choose the orientation of the construction line you want from the submenu. The line appears.

Choose View > Zoom In, or press CommandPlus (+). The view zooms in, using the center of your view as the center point.

OR
Press the ] key.

To delete construction lines


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Construction Lines from the shortcut menu, then choose Delete Constructions from the submenu. All construction lines are deleted.

To zoom out
1
Choose the Zoom Out button in the Main Tool Palette. area you want to zoom out from, then click.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

Controlling the View


When working in 3D, you are viewing your drawing from a top view. To navigate around the WorkPlane, zoom and pan tools are available.

Choose View > Zoom Out, or press CommandMinus (-). The views zooms out from the center of the WorkPlane.

OR
Press the [ key.

Zoom Options
Custom Workshop Pro provides a variety of zoom options to help view your drawing precisely. In addition to zooming in and out, you can return to a previous zoom scale, zoom to fit your entire drawing in the view, and many others.

To return to the previous zoom scale


Choose View > Zoom Previous. Your view returns to the previous zoom scale.

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 4 5

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Previous in the shortcut menu.

To set a zoom scale


1
Choose View > Zoom Scale. The Input String dialog appears.

To zoom to view your entire drawing


Choose View > Zoom All (or press CommandF). Your entire drawing is fit to the window.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom All in the shortcut menu.

Panning Across the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Pan Tool allows you to quickly move across your drawing. In addition to the Pan Tool, you can access the pan feature by pressing the Space bar at any time, while any tool is active.

To select a zoom window


1
Choose View > Zoom Window (or press Command4).

To pan
Hold down the Space bar, then drag to pan across the drawing. Release the Space bar to deactivate the pan function.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Window in the shortcut menu.

OR 1
Choose the Dynamic Pan button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette. the view.

2 Drag a selection box around the area where you


want to zoom in.

To reset zoom view to default view


Choose View > Zoom Home (or press Command-6).

2 Drag to pan around the drawing. Release to set OR 1


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Dynamic Pan in the shortcut menu.

To zoom in on a selection
1 Select the object to which you want to zoom. 2 Choose View > Zoom Select. OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Select in the shortcut menu.

2 Drag the pan around the drawing.

Rotating Around the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Rotate Tool allows you view your design by rotating around. In addition to dragging to rotate around, the Dynamic Rotate Tool can auto-rotate around the Z-axis.

Controlling Zoom Options


The zoom ratio controls the amount you zoom up or down. The zoom scale sets the view to a specified amount between the window and drawing space.

To rotate around the WorkPlane manually


1
Choose the Dynamic Rotate button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

To set the zoom ratio


1
Choose View > Zoom Ratio. The Input String dialog appears.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane. OR

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK. 3 46 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Grid


1
Ctrl-click on the design window and choose Dynamic Rotate from the shortcut menu.

3 Enter new values in the Spacing dX and dY fields


to change the spacing between major grid lines.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane.

4 Enter new values in the Sub-spacing X Divs and Y


Divs fields to change the spacing between minor grid lines. preferences).

To rotate around the WorkPlane automatically


1
Drag through the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette to tear off the toolset. The Dynamic Navigation tools appear.

5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To change the grid style


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Double-click the Dynamic Rotate button to begin


the automatic rotation. rotate.

3 Click anywhere on the WorkPlane to stop auto-

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Grid Dots or Grid Lines button. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

To change the grid size

Using the Grid


The grid appears on the WorkPlane. You can control the grids size, appearance, and snap options. The grid is defined by the major grid lines (spacing), and minor grid lines (sub-spacing). The minor grid lines can be displayed as lines or dots. Using grid lines while drawing can help with aligning and precise placement. Using the Snap to Grid feature, objects can be snapped to align with the grid lines. By default, the Snap to Grid feature is turned off. Enable this feature in the Snaps menu. To change the Grid Preferences, choose Preferences from the File menu and choose Grid. The Preferences dialog allows you to click the Apply button to see your changes before clicking OK to accept them. For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 293.

Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the X Size and Y Size fields
to change the number of cells in the grid. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To turn on Snap to Grid at startup


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Snap to Grid at Startup checkbox. N O T E : For more information, see Using Snaps,
which begins on page 344.

To display the grid


Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G). This turns the grid on or off.

To change grid color


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To change grid spacing


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Under Grid Color, click the New button. The
Color dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category.

4 Choose the color you want and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 4 7

Chapter 33 Drawing 3D Entities

Controlling Colors
By default, objects appear in Punch! Blue. You can change a single objects color, multiple objects or the color in which you draw. When changing the drawing color, be sure nothing is selected.

To change an objects color


Ctrl-click the object you want to change and choose Color from the shortcut menu, then choose the color you want from the submenu. To pick a custom color, click More from the submenu and choose your color from the Colors dialog.

OR 1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog
appears.

3 Choose a color and close the dialog.

To change drawing color


1
Click on an empty space in the design window to be sure nothing is selected. appears.

2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog 3 Choose the color you want. Each object will be
drawn in this color.

4 Close the dialog.

3 48 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 34

Convert 2D Objects to 3D
You can create 2D profiles, then use conversion tools to create surfaces or extrude them to solids. Once 2D profiles are converted to a surface or solid, you can edit the object just like any other 3D object.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 34 9

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D

Creating a Surface From Curves


There are four Surface Tools available in the Main Tool Palette. You can drag through the toolset to move a floating palette to the design window.

N O T E : To select more than two curves, hold down the Shift key as you select.

Creating a Revolving Surface


The Revolve Surface Tool allows you set two points to create an axis for the curve to revolve around. You can specify the rotation angle by typing values in the Prompt Window.

Surfaces are based on Non Uniform Rational BSplines (NURBS). NURBS provide a highly precise mathematical definition for creating even the most complex free form shapes.

Creating a revolving surface


1
Choose the Revolve Surface button from the Surface toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Angle field appears in the Prompt Window.

Creating a Skin Surface


The Skin Surface Tool allows you to create a surface between a collection of curves. The curves can be closed or open-ended, and include lines, arcs, circles, ellipses, conics, and splines. It is import that all curves have the same direction and do not share an end point. For more information, see Changing Object Direction, which begins on page 375.

2 Select the curve you want to revolve. 3 Click two points to set the axis around which the
object revolves.

4 (optional) Enter a value in the Angle field. Press


the Enter key to accept new values.

To create a skin surface


1
Choose the Skin Surface button from the Surface toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

Extruding a Surface
The Extrude Surface Tool allows you to create a surface by extruding a curve to a specified distance. You can extrude a line, spline, arc, circle, ellipse or polylines. You can specify the distance by entering values in the Prompt Window.

2 Select curves to skin. N O T E : To select more than two curves, hold down the Shift key as you select.

Creating a Cover Surface


The Cover Surface Tool allows you to create a surface from curves that are connected and completely enclosed. You can create a cover surface using a combination of arcs, circles, lines, splines, ellipses, and conics.

To extrude a surface
1
Choose the Extrude Surface button from the Surface toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Distance field appears in the Prompt Window.

2 Select the curve you want to extrude. 3 Click two points to define the direction and
distance for the surface.

To create a cover surface


1
Choose the Cover Surface button from the Surface toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

4 (optional) Enter a value in the Distance field.


Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Select the curves to create a cover surface.

3 5 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Creating Solids from Profiles

Creating Solids from Profiles


A profile is a closed 2D shape made up of curves, lines or polygons. There are four tools available to create a 3D solid from a 2D profile. On the Main Tool Palette, drag through the Solid from Profile toolset to tear off the palette.

There are five extrusion methods, or termination types, available in the Prompt Window: Distance extrudes the profile to a userdefined distance. Vector extrudes to a user-defined distance and direction. To Object extrudes in a user-defined direction to another object. MidPlane extrudes profile on both sides. Thin Extrude extrudes a profile based on a user-defined thickness and direction. Most of the termination types offer the option of entering a draft angle value in the Prompt Window. By default, the draft angle is set to 0, which results in the sides appearing parallel with the base. Setting a positive draft angle will slant the side inward, while a negative draft angle will slant the side outward.

Creating a solid from a profile creates a parent/ child relationship between the profile and the solid. Changes made to the profile, the parent, affect the solid, the child.

Creating a Lathe Solid


The Lathe Solid Tool allows you to rotate a closed profile, closed polyline, circle, ellipse, closed spline or polygon. You can also lathe groups of closed curves. The lathe axis is created by selecting a line on the WorkPlane. The line cannot intersect with the lathe. The position of the line determines the lathe axis; this line can be repositioned once the solid is drawn. You can change the degree of the lathe angle by entering a new value in the Prompt Window.

To extrude a profile to a specified distance


1
Choose the Extrude Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Degrees field appears in the Prompt Window. Data Entry fields and the Termination Type pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. up menu.

2 Choose Distance from the Termination Type pop3 Select the profile you want to extrude. 4 In the Prompt Window, enter a value in the

To create a lathe solid


1
Choose the Lathe Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Degrees field appears in the Prompt Window.

Distance field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To extrude along a vector


1
Choose the Extrude Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Degrees field appears in the Prompt Window. Data Entry fields and the Termination Type pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. menu.

2 Select the object you want to lathe. 3 Select a line as the lathe axis. The object
rotates around the axis as a solid.

4 (optional) Enter a value in the Degrees field.


Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Choose Vector from the Termination Type pop-up 3 Select the profile you want to extrude. 4 Click two points to define the extrusion direction
and length.

Extruding a Solid from a Profile


The Extrude Solid Tool allows you to extrude a 2D profile to a specified distance. You can extrude polylines, circles, ellipses, closed splines, and polygons.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 5 1

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D To extrude to another object


1
Choose the Extrude Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Degrees field appears in the Prompt Window. Data Entry fields and the Termination Type pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. pop-up menu.

Sweeping a Solid from a Profile


The One Rail Sweep Solid Tool allows you to select a path for the profile to sweep along into a solid. The sweep path can be a line, circle, arc, ellipse, conic or spline. When the tool is selected two pop-up menus appear in the Prompt Window. The pop-up menu on the left determines the profile orientation as it is swept along the path. Sweep In Place preserves the starting orientation of the profile, with respect to the path. Sweep Perp realigns the profiles starting orientation with respect to the path. Sweep Rigid preserves the starting orientation of the profile throughout the entire sweep. The pop-up menu on the right determines how the profile is terminated. Curve Extents sweeps the profile across the entire extent of a curve. To Object sweeps the profile to another solid or surface. Between Points sweeps the profile to userdefined points.

2 Choose To Object from the Termination Type 3 Select the profile you want to extrude. 4 Click two points to define the extrusion direction
and length.

5 Select the object to which you want to extrude.

To extrude both sides of a profile


1
Choose the Extrude Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Degrees field appears in the Prompt Window. Data Entry fields and the Termination Type pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. up menu.

2 Choose MidPlane from the Termination Type pop3 Select the profile you want to extrude. 4 (optional) Enter a value in the Distance field.
Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To extrude a profile based on thickness


1
Choose the Extrude Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Degrees field appears in the Prompt Window. Data Entry fields and the Termination Type pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. pop-up menu.

To sweep a solid from a profile


1
Choose the One Rail Sweep button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Termination Type pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window. menu on the left.

2 Choose Thin Extrude from the Termination Type 3 Select the profile you want to extrude. 4 Click two points to define the extrusion direction
and length.

2 Choose the profile orientation from the pop-up 3 Choose the termination type from the pop-up
menu on the right.

5 Enter a value in the Offset field to define the


thickness. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

4 Select the closed profile to sweep. 5 Select a line, or lines, for the sweep path. The
profile sweeps along the path, based on your settings.

N O T E : Typing negative or positive values affects the direction of the offset.

Cutting a Solid from a Profile


The CutOut Solid Tool is a quick way to subtract material from a solid.

3 5 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Editing Surfaces

To cutout material from a solid


1
Choose the CutOut Solid button from the Solids From Profiles toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The CutOut pop-up menu and data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. method.

1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter a new value in the Lathe Angle field and
click Apply.

2 Select closed curves or polygon as the cutout 3 Click two points to specify the extrusion
direction and length.

To enclose a surface
1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Select the Close object checkbox and click
Apply.

4 (optional) Enter values in the Distance and Draft


Angle fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To cap a polyline surface


1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Select the Cap ends checkbox and click Apply.

Editing Surfaces
Once created, you can edit the angle of revolving surfaces and the distance of extruded surfaces. You can enter new values in the Prompt Window or using the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

Editing Solids from Profiles


You can resize and reshape solids by entering values in the Prompt Window, or the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

To change an extrude distance


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. The Distance field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

2 Select the surface you want to change.

To change a lathe angle


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter a new value in the
Degrees field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

3 Enter a new value in the Distance field. Press the OR 1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter a new value in the Distance field and click
Apply.

OR 1 2 3 4
Select the object. In the Inspector, click the Data tab. Enter a new value in the Lathe Angle field. Click Apply.

To change a revolving surface angle


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. The Angle field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

To change an extrude distance


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

2 Select the revolving surface you want to change. 3 Enter a new value in the Distance field. Press the OR

2 Select the surface you want to change. Data 3 Enter a new value in the Distance field. Press the

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 5 3

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D


OR 1 2 3 4
Select the object. In the Inspector, click the Data tab. Enter a new value in the Distance field. Click Apply.

2 Click to select the object. The points appear.

To drag a selection box


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. and select it.

2 Drag, from left to right, to surround an object OR


Drag, from right to left, around part of the object to select it.

Selecting Objects
There are two selection tools available. You can use the Selection Tool or the Deep Select Tool to select objects.

To remove an object or point from a selection set


When you click to select an object or point, and it is near, or on top of another possible selection, a popup menu appears with a list of the possible selections. This is called the Ambiguity pop-up menu. As you move the pointer over the possible selections, they are highlighted on the WorkPlane. Select the object you want and it is selected on the WorkPlane. Hold down the Shift key and click to deselect an object or point.

Rearranging 3D Objects
You can move selections by dragging from one point to another, specifying coordinates, or, for even more options, use one of the Transform tools. Transform tools are unique in that you do not move objects by dragging them directly to where you want them. Rather, you click reference points to specify the distance and direction your selection moves. Basic Transform tools:

To select an object or point


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Click to select the object.

To select multiple objects or points


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Advanced Transform tools:

2 Hold down the Shift key. 3 Click to select objects. Each object is added to
the selection set.

To select all objects


Double-click the Selection button. All objects are selected.

To drag objects to a new location


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. move.

2 Click to select the object you want to 3 Drag the object to a new location.

To select and display control points


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette.

3 5 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Nudging Objects
N O T E : The snap tools must be enabled to use this function. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.
clicking another point on the WorkPlane to set the move distance and direction. These reference points do not need to be on the actual object, you can click anywhere on the WorkPlane.

To move by specifying coordinates


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

To move using the Translate Tool


1
Select the object or individual point you want to move. Transform toolset.

2 Click to select the object you want to move. Data 3 Enter new X and Y values in the fields. Press the OR 1 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 2 Enter new X and Y values in the fields and click
Apply.

2 Choose the Translate button in the Basic 3 Click to set the first reference point. 4 Drag to set the distance and direction you want
the selection moved. selection is moved.

5 Click to set the end reference point. The OR


Select the Translate button and enter coordinates in the dX, dY, and dZ fields in the Prompt Window. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

N O T E : A positive value moves the object up, while a


negative value moves it down.

Nudging Objects
You can select objects and nudge them using your arrow keys. By default, the nudge distance is set to 0.0, so when you press an arrow key, it moves the WorkPlane.

Rotating 3D Objects
There are two tools available for rotating a selection: around one point or around three points. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

To set the nudge distance


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

To rotate around one point


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate One Point button in
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Rotation Axis pop-up menu.

2 Choose the General category. 3 Enter a value in the Arrow Key Nudge Distance
field.

4 Click OK.

To nudge an object
1 Click to select the object you want to nudge. 2 Press an arrow key to nudge the object in that
direction.

4 Choose the axis around which you want to rotate 5 Enter a rotation angle in the Angle field. 6 Click the point you want the object to rotate

Moving an Object Using the Translate Tool


The Translate Tool allows you to move an object or point by clicking to set a start reference point, then

around. The object rotates in a counterclockwise direction.

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 5 5

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D


Select the Rotate One Point button and enter values in the X and Y fields to set the origin of rotation, and an angle in the Angle field. Press Enter to accept the values and rotate.

OR
In the Prompt Window, enter a value in the Scale field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To rotate using three points


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate Three Point button in
the sub-toolset. The Angle field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key to accept the value. toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window.

To perform differential scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. up menu.

3 Choose Differential from the Scale Method pop4 Enter values in the X-Scale and Y-Scale fields
and press the Enter key.

4 Enter the rotation angle in the Angle field and 5 Click to set the center point for rotation. 6 Click to set the start reference point. This is the
rotate from point.

5 Click to set the anchor point, or scale origin.

Click to set the end reference point. This is the rotate to point. The object is rotated.

Mirroring 3D Objects
You can mirror an object by setting a reference line, which acts like the spine of a book. Once the line is set, the object is mirrored on the opposite side. When a mirrored copy is created, the resulting geometry acts independently of the original shape, which means changes to the original shape do not affect the copy. The Linked Mirror Tool allows you to create an associative link between the original shape and the resulting geometry, so changes to the original shape are reflected in the mirror copy. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

Scaling 3D Objects
The Scale Tool allows you to enlarge or shrink an object based using two types of scaling, Uniform and Differential. Uniform Scale uses input from mouse clicks, or values entered in the data entry fields. The entire object is scaled as one unit. Differential Scale uses input to scale components along the X or Y axis. Each axis is scaled individually.

To mirror objects
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

To perform uniform scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. menu.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

3 Choose Uniform from the Scale Method pop-up 4 Click to set the anchor point, or scale origin. 5 Click to set two points to define the scale
magnitude.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

3 5 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Duplicating Objects in Linear Formation


5 Click the point (or points) to define the mirror
origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

To mirror a copy
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror 3 In the Number per row field, enter the number
of objects you want in each row, including the selection. associated with each axis.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

5 Hold down the Option key and click the point (or

4 In the Offset fields, enter the distances N O T E : The asterisk indicates that these fields can
be accessed using the snap tool by referencing data in the drawing. values to the combined columns.

points) to define the mirror origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

Duplicating Objects in Linear Formation


The Linear Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying rows, columns, and spacing. Columns are a vertical series, rows are a horizontal series. The spacing values can be measured by Total or Step. Total offset and Total spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the last duplicate. This results in a more compact offset and spacing. Step offset and Step spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the next duplicate, then from that duplicate to the next, and so on. This results in a more spread out offset and spacing.

5 Select the Total offset button to apply the X, Y OR


Select the Step offset button to apply the X, Y values to the individual column offsets.

6 In the Number of rows field, enter the number


of rows you want.

In the Spacing field, enter the varietal space you want between each row. spacing to the combined row height.

8 Select the Total spacing button to apply the OR


Select the Step spacing button to apply the spacing to each individual row spacing.

To create linear duplicates of an object


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Linear Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Linear Duplicate dialog appears.

Click OK. Your selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

Duplicating Objects in Circular Formation


The Polar Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying the number, center point, and rotation angle. All of these factors create a circular pattern of duplicates.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 5 7

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D


By default, each duplicate is rotated around the specified center point. You have the option to translate each duplicate, so it appears just as the original object. To translate each duplicate, select the Translate duplicates checkbox and enter your reference point coordinates.

Aligning Copies in Linear Array


The Linear Array Tool creates and distributes copies based on the starting reference point and pointer location. As you move the pointer, the angle and number of copies increases or decreases. The spacing value describes the absolute distance between each consecutive object.

To create circular duplicates of an object


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Polar Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Polar Duplicate dialog appears.

To align objects in an array


1
Select the object with which you want to create an array. Basic Transform toolset. The Spacing field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key.

2 Choose the Linear Array button in the 3 (optional) Enter a value in the Spacing field and 4 Click to select the starting point for the array. 5 Drag your cursor in the direction you want the

linear array. As you drag the array increases or decreases in size, depending on which way youre dragging.

6 Click to set the end of the array. 3 In the Number field, enter the number of
objects you want, including the selection.

4 In the Center fields, enter the X and Y

Duplicating Objects Along a Path


The Path Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object along a specific path, such as a curve, line, spline, arc, circle or ellipse. You can set the number of duplicates in the Prompt Window before or after you place the objects.

coordinates where you want to position the center point of the polar display.

OR
Select the Translate duplicates checkbox to specify the polar position of each duplicate, then enter X and Y values.

5 In the Angle field, enter the polar angle you


want.

To duplicate an object along a path


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Path Duplicate button in the
Advanced Transform tools. The Qty field appears in the Prompt Window. want in the Qty field, and press the Enter key. duplicate.

6 Click the Total angle button to specify that the


angle is the total polar angle.

OR
Click the Step angle button to specify that the angle is the individual angle between duplicates.

3 (optional) Enter the number of duplicates you

4 Click to select the path along which you want to 5 Click on the object you are duplicating to set the
origin point. This point lies along the selected path.

Click OK. You selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

3 5 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Aligning Objects
6 Click two points on the object you are duplicating
to set an alignment axis. The axis created by these two points aligns with the shape of the selected path. Insert faces moves and aligns cylindrical faces. Typically this is used to insert a bolttype shape into a hole-type shape. Each method results in an associate connection between the original shape and the resulting geometry; meaning edits to the original shape are reflected in the resulting geometry, thus maintaining the connection or alignment.

Aligning Objects
The Align Tool allows you to select an object, or objects, then click a point to align your selection based on the alignment option you choose. You can align objects by their sides, centers, tops, and bottoms.

To connect object points


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset.

To align objects
1 Select the object, or objects, you want aligned. 2 Choose the Align button in the Advanced
Transform toolset. The Align Options popup menu appears in the Prompt Window.

2 Choose the Connection button in the sub3 Select the face to move. 4 Select the connection point on the face to move
from.

5 Select the face to move to (parent part). 6 Select the connection point on the face to move
to. The objects are connected at the selected point.

To mate object faces


3 Choose the alignment you want from the Align
options pop-up menu. you set.

4 Click to align the object based on the align option

Choose the Combine Faces button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose the Mate Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the planar face to be aligned. 5 Select the planar face to align to.

Combining Object Faces


The Combine Face tools provide options for positioning and aligning object faces relative to other faces. There are four methods of combining object faces: Connect points moves a part to another part, connecting two points between the parts. Mate faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly opposite the referenced face. Align faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly the same as the referenced face. Align will also allow selection of cylinder faces, in which case the axes will be aligned to each other.

To align object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose the Align Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 5 9

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D


4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

3 Click to specify the start and end regions for


stretching.

5 Select the face to align to (same face type as

4 Drag and click to specify the stretch to point.

The object is stretched from the second point to the stretch point.

To insert object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window sub-toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

To stretch a portion of an object


1
Choose the Stretch button in the Advanced Transform toolset. The Dist1 field appears in the Prompt Window. and press the Enter key.

2 Choose the Insert Face button in the

2 (optional) Enter a stretch distance in the field 3 Select the object you want to stretch. 4 Click two points, to set the start and end point of
the portion you want to stretch. Be sure at least one point lies on the object. to stretch. The object is stretched from the second point placed to this point. the Enter key to accept new values.

3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

5 Select the face to align with (same face type as 6 Select the face to mate. 7 Select the face to mate with.
If the first face you select is cylindrical, the second alignment face must also be cylindrical. In the case of cylindrical faces, the axes of the cylinders are aligned.

5 Drag and click to set the point to which you want 6 (optional) Enter a value in the Dist1 field. Press

To bring an object forward


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Bring Forward.

Stretching Objects
The Stretch Tool is used to stretch curves, surfaces, and solids. Stretching is a non-uniform scaling operation along a stretch axis. The stretch axis is defined by two points specified by the user. The material to be stretched is bounded by planes perpendicular to the stretch axis at the two supplied points. The third point defines how much the body is stretched. The distance from the third point to the second point defines the distance stretched.

To bring an object in front of all objects


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Bring To Front.

To send an object backward


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Send Backward.

To send an object behind all objects


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Arrange > Send To Back.

To stretch an object
1
Choose the Stretch button in the Advanced Transform toolset. The Dist1 field appears in the Prompt Window. and press the Enter key.

2 (optional) Enter a stretch distance in the field

Resizing Objects
You can resize objects manually, using the Deep Select Tool, or by entering new values in the Prompt Window or Inspector.

3 6 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Shade Render Options


The Inspector displays the current selections data, including size and position information. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. menu.

2 Choose Wireframe from the Static Shade pop-up 3 Click OK.

To resize an object manually


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. Control points appear. place the point.

2 Select the object you want to resize. 3 Drag a point to resize the object. Release to

To render in hidden line


Choose the Hidden Line button in the Main Tool Palette.

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. menu.

To resize an object using data entry fields


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose Hidden from the Static Shade pop-up 3 Click OK.

2 Select the object you want to resize.

3 Enter new values in the fields and press the

To render hidden lines as shaded


Choose the Hidden Lines as Shaded button in the Main Tool Palette.

To resize using the Inspector


1 1 2 3 4 5
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Choose Window > Inspector (or press CommandI). Select the object you want to resize. In the Inspector, click the Data tab. Enter new values to resize the object. Click Apply.

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. Shade pop-up menu.

2 Choose Hidden with Dimmed from the Static 3 Click OK.

To render in full 3D shaded


Choose the Shaded button in the Main Tool Palette.

Shade Render Options


There are five shade options for 3D rendering. You can switch shade views in the Main Tool Palette.

OR
Choose View > Shade Now (press Command-T).

OR 1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. pop-up menu.

To render in Wireframe
Choose the Wireframe button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Choose Gouraud or Phong from the Static Shade 3 Click OK. N O T E : This mode is also known as OpenGL.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 6 1

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D To turn on/off perspective


Choose the Perspective button in the Main Tool Palette to turn it on and off.

To access the view properties


Choose the View Properties button in the Main Tool Palette. The View Properties dialog appears.

To render flat surfaces


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears.

2 Choose Flat from the Static Shade pop-up menu. 3 Click OK.

Customizing Shade Options


You can customize the settings associated with the full 3D shade, or OpenGL, option. You can also change your current shade view, just as you can on the Main Tool Palette. You can control how objects appear when you use one of the Dynamic tools; Dynamic Pan, Dynamic Zoom, and Dynamic Rotate. So as you pan, zoom or rotate, objects appear in one of the shade options. By default, the Shade Now command reverts objects back to the Gouraud shade option. You can customize this Shade Now option on the Shade Options dialog.

To customize shaded render option


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears.

2 Select, or deselect, the options you want.

When Flip Normals is selected, normal surfaces that are pointing away from users are lighter. Deselecting this option displays surfaces with only ambient light. When Z-Buffer Curves is selected, curves are hidden behind solids. Deselecting this option allows curves to be visible. When Show Facet Edges is selected, facet edges appear. Deselecting this option hides the facet edges. When Use Clip Planes is selected, planes that are specified as clip planes clip the view. Deselecting this option disables clip planes. When Anti-Alias is selected, anti-aliasing of edges is enabled. Deselecting this option disables the feature. When Clip At Eye Point is selected, clipping is based on the eye point. Deselecting this option clips objects based on extents of the given model. When Use Transparency is selected, objects selected for transparency appear with the transparency value set using the Transparency slider. The lower the value, the more transparent objects appear. Deselecting this option disables the transparency feature. When Backface Culling is selected, all facets from solids facing away from the viewing direction are ignored. If you have open-faced solids, deselect this option so all faces are visible. When Update Silhouettes is selected, calculations will be made of the silhouette edges when the view orientation is changed. When User Vertex Arrays is selected, the faster path to OpenGL is used by sending vertex arrays to the graphics board. Note:

3 6 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Ambient Light


this option is off, by default, since it uses more RAM than when disabled.

To change the intensity of ambient light


1
Choose View > Ambient Light Settings. The Ambient Light Settings dialog appears. the intensity value.

3 Click OK.

To customize dynamic shade rendering


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. pop-up menu.

2 Drag the Intensity slider to increase or decrease 3 Click OK.

2 Choose a shade option from the Dynamic Shade 3 Click OK.

Grouping Objects
You have the ability to group a selection of objects together so they can all be moved and resized together.

To customize the shade now feature


1
Choose View > Shade Options. The Shade Options dialog appears. up menu.

To group objects
1 Select the objects you want grouped. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Group. The objects are
grouped together.

2 Choose a shade option from the Shade Now pop3 Click OK.

Controlling Ambient Light


You can control the color and intensity of the ambient light that affects all objects. You can choose a color from the Color pop-up menu, or drag the Red, Green, and Blue sliders to define the color.

To ungroup objects
1 Select the group. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Ungroup. The objects are
ungrouped.

To change the color of ambient light


1
Choose View > Ambient Light Settings. The Ambient Light Settings dialog appears.

Locking Objects
You can protect an objects settings by locking the object so changes cannot be made.

To lock an object
1 Select the object you want to lock. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Lock. The object is locked
so changes cannot be made.

To unlock an object
2 Choose the color you want from the pop-up menu. OR
Enter the Red, Green, and Blue values in the corresponding fields to define the color you want.

1 Select the object you want to unlock. 2 Choose Edit > Group > UnLock. The object is
unlocked.

3 (optional) Define the intensity you want. 4 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 6 3

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D

Changing Object Direction


You can change the direction, or orientation, of a curve or surface. You may need to change direction when creating surfaces.

Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose the layer you want from the submenu.

To create a new layer


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit> Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

To show object direction


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Verify > Show Direction. Arrows appear
to show the directions.

3 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in


sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

To change direction
1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Direction. OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Change Direction from the shortcut menu. The objects direction is changed.

4 Click OK. OR 1
Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose More from the submenu. The Change Layer dialog appears. sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

2 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in 3 Click OK.

Changing an Objects Layer


You can move an object from its current layer to another, or create a new layer. For more information, see Working with Layers, which begins on page 406. You can move an object from its current layer to another, or create a new layer. For more information, see Working with Layers, which begins on page 406.

Changing Object Type


You can change the geometry of an object, then reshape or resize the object to customize its appearance. Changing a solid 3D object into surfaces literally breaks the object into separate surfaces, each of which you can control by dragging.

To change an objects layer


1 Select the object you want to move. 2 Choose Edit > Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

Changing Solid Objects


You can change a solid object into curves or surfaces.

To change a solid
1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type. OR
Ctrl-click on the object and choose Change Object Type from the shortcut menu. The Change Type dialog appears.

3 Choose the layer where you want the object to


be displayed from the pop-up menu.

4 Click OK. OR 3 6 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

3 Select the button corresponding to the type you


want.

Changing Objects into Surfaces


4 Click OK.

To simplify objects
1 Select the object you want to simplify. 2 Choose Edit > Simplify Object. The Simplify
Results dialog appears with the results.

Changing Objects into Surfaces


3D objects are drawn as one individual surface. By changing a solid object into surfaces, you can remove edges from a block, or warp a circle to almost any shape.

3 Click OK.

Displaying Points
You can control the visibility of an objects editable points.

To change a solid object to separate surfaces


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type. OR
Ctrl-click on the object and choose Change Object Type from the shortcut menu. The Change Type dialog appears.

To show points
1 Select the object with points you want to show. 2 Choose Edit > Show Points (or press Command-D). OR
Ctrl-click on the object and choose Show Points from the shortcut menu,

To hide points
1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Show Points (or press Command-D)
to remove the checkmark.

3 Select the Surfaces button. 4 (optional) Deselect the Delete Originals 5 (optional) Deselect the Use Work Layer
checkbox to specify a different layer.

OR
Ctrl-click on the object and choose Show Points from the shortcut menu.

checkbox to keep the original surfaces in place.

To resolve links
1 Select an object. 2 Choose Edit > Resolve Links.

6 Click OK.

Simplifying Objects
You can attempt to simplify objects to help increase performance and speed. Where possible, the following simplifications will be made: Zero length curves to points Circular splines to arcs or circles Straight splines to lines NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational BSpline) surfaces or solids to analytics

To remove links
1 Select an object. 2 Choose Edit > Remove Links. All associativity
related to the object is removed.

Combining and Subtracting Objects


You can create a union between objects, or remove a portion of an object, based on another objects

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 6 5

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D


shape. Combing solids causes one solid to take on the parent solids material, color, and characteristics.

Using Snaps
3D Custom Workshop Pro features an intelligence which allows you to automatically snap to specific geometric points along the WorkPlane, and along other shapes. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

Combining Objects
The Add Solid Tool allows you to create a union between two or more objects. The first object you select is the base, the object to which you are adding. Objects that are added take on the color or material of the base object.

To snap to a specific point


1
Select the tool you want to snap to an existing point. the snap point you want. Notice, snap tools tell you when you are on an object, as well as when the pointer locks onto a specific object point, such as the center, endpoint, midpoint, intersection, quadrant, vertex, at 45-degree angles (creation angles), or along the X, Y, or Z axis. click to set the point.

2 In the design window, move your pointer to find

To combine objects
1
Choose the Add Solid button in the Main Tool Palette. object to which you want objects added. the base.

2 Click to select the base object, the

3 Select the object to add. The object is added to


Shift key as you select objects to add.

3 When youve locked onto the snap point you want,

N O T E : To add more than one object, hold down the

To snap along the X, Y, or Z axis


Hold down the X, Y, or Z key as you click to automatically snap to the specified axis.

Subtracting Objects
The Subtract Solid Tool allows you to remove an object from the WorkPlane, leaving a void space where the object used to be positioned. Objects do not need to be combined for you to subtract an object.

To snap to the grid


1
Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G) to turn on the grid. appears.

2 Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog 3 Select the To Grid checkbox to activate the
snap tool.

To subtract and object


1
Choose the Subtract Solid button in the Main Tool Palette. want to subtract.

4 In the WorkPlane, click to snap to the grid. N O T E : For more information, see Using Snaps,
which begins on page 366.

2 Click to select the object from which you 3 Select the object you want to subtract. The
object is subtracted and its shape remains. To subtract more than one object, hold down the Shift key as you select objects to subtract.

To disable all snap functions


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. tools are disabled.

2 Deselect the Enable checkbox. All of the snap

3 6 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Creating Construction Lines

To turn snaps on or off


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. Enabled snap features appear with a checkmark.

To zoom using the Dynamic Zoom Tool


1
Choose the Dynamic Zoom button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Deselect the tool(s) you want to turn off. 3 Select the tool(s) you want to turn on.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose Dynamic Zoom from the shortcut menu.

2 Drag up and down to zoom in and out of the

Creating Construction Lines


You can place temporary construction lines on the WorkPlane in three orientations: horizontal, vertical, and 45-degrees. You can use these lines in conjunction with the snap tools to increase accuracy while drawing. Construction lines can be easily deleted once placed.

drawing.

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom In button in the Main Tool Palette. area where you want to zoom in, then click.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

To draw a construction line


Ctrl-click the design window where you want the line and choose Construction Lines from the shortcut menu, then choose the orientation of the construction line you want from the submenu. The line appears.

Choose View > Zoom In, or press CommandPlus (+). The view zooms in, using the center of your view as the center point.

OR
Press the ] key.

To delete construction lines


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Construction Lines from the shortcut menu, then choose Delete Constructions from the submenu. All construction lines are deleted.

To zoom out
1
Choose the Zoom Out button in the Main Tool Palette. area you want to zoom out from, then click.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

Controlling the View


When working in 3D, you are viewing your drawing from a top view. To navigate around the WorkPlane, zoom and pan tools are available.

Choose View > Zoom Out, or press CommandMinus (-). The views zooms out from the center of the WorkPlane.

OR
Press the [ key.

Zoom Options
Custom Workshop Pro provides a variety of zoom options to help view your drawing precisely. In addition to zooming in and out, you can return to a previous zoom scale, zoom to fit your entire drawing in the view, and many others.

To return to the previous zoom scale


Choose View > Zoom Previous. Your view returns to the previous zoom scale.

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 6 7

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Previous in the shortcut menu.

To set a zoom scale


1
Choose View > Zoom Scale. The Input String dialog appears.

To zoom to view your entire drawing


Choose View > Zoom All (or press CommandF). Your entire drawing is fit to the window.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom All in the shortcut menu.

Panning Across the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Pan Tool allows you to quickly move across your drawing. In addition to the Pan Tool, you can access the pan feature by pressing the Space bar at any time, while any tool is active.

To select a zoom window


1
Choose View > Zoom Window (or press Command4).

To pan
Hold down the Space bar, then drag to pan across the drawing. Release the Space bar to deactivate the pan function.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Window in the shortcut menu.

OR 1
Choose the Dynamic Pan button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette. the view.

2 Drag a selection box around the area where you


want to zoom in.

To reset zoom view to default view


Choose View > Zoom Home (or press Command-6).

2 Drag to pan around the drawing. Release to set OR 1


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Dynamic Pan in the shortcut menu.

To zoom in on a selection
1 Select the object to which you want to zoom. 2 Choose View > Zoom Select. OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Select in the shortcut menu.

2 Drag to pan around the drawing.

Rotating Around the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Rotate Tool allows you to view your design by rotating around. In addition to dragging to rotate around, the Dynamic Rotate Tool can autorotate around the Z-axis.

Controlling Zoom Options


The zoom ratio controls the amount you zoom up or down. The zoom scale sets the view to a specified amount between the window and drawing space.

To rotate around the WorkPlane manually


1
Choose the Dynamic Rotate button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

To set the zoom ratio


1
Choose View > Zoom Ratio. The Input String dialog appears.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane. OR

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK. 3 6 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using the Grid


1
Ctrl-click on the design window and choose Dynamic Rotate from the shortcut menu.

3 Enter new values in the Spacing dX and dY fields


to change the spacing between major grid lines.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane.

4 Enter new values in the Sub-spacing X Divs and Y


Divs fields to change the spacing between minor grid lines. preferences).

To rotate around the WorkPlane automatically


1
Drag through the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette to tear off the toolset. The Dynamic Navigation tools appear.

5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To change the grid style


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Double-click the Dynamic Rotate button to begin


the automatic rotation. rotate.

3 Click anywhere on the WorkPlane to stop auto-

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Grid Dots or Grid Lines button. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

Using the Grid


The grid appears on the WorkPlane. You can control the grids size, appearance, and snap options. The grid is defined by the major grid lines (spacing), and minor grid lines (sub-spacing). The minor grid lines can be displayed as lines or dots. Using grid lines while drawing can help with aligning and precise placement. Using the Snap to Grid feature, objects can be snapped to align with the grid lines. By default, the Snap to Grid feature is turned off. Enable this feature in the Snaps menu. To change the Grid Preferences, choose Preferences from the File menu and choose Grid. The Preferences dialog allows you to click the Apply button to see your changes before clicking OK to accept them. For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 293.

To change the grid size


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the X Size and Y Size fields
to change the number of cells in the grid. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

To turn on Snap to Grid at startup


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Snap to Grid at Startup checkbox. N O T E : For more information, see Using Snaps,
which begins on page 366.

To display the grid


Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G). This turns the grid on or off.

To change grid color


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To change grid spacing


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Under Grid Color, click the New button. The
Color dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category.

4 Choose the color you want and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 6 9

Chapter 34 Convert 2D Objects to 3D

Controlling Colors
By default, objects appear in Punch! Blue. You can change a single objects color, multiple objects, or the color in which you draw. When changing the drawing color, be sure nothing is selected.

To change an objects color


Ctrl-click the object you want to change and choose Color from the shortcut menu, then choose the color you want from the submenu. To pick a custom color, click More from the submenu and choose your color from the Colors dialog.

OR 1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog
appears.

3 Choose a color and close the dialog.

To change drawing color


1
Click on an empty space in the design window to be sure nothing is selected. appears.

2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog 3 Choose the color you want. Each object will be
drawn in this color.

4 Close the dialog.

3 7 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 35

Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


There are so many ways to edit a shape, including actually changing the type of object you are working with. 3D Custom Workshop Pro gives you to power to transform, warp, and customize you own objects as well as objects from the 3D libraries.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 7 1

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes

Editing Your Design


Once youve drawn your 2D and 3D objects, the editing possibilities are nearly endless. Many of the tools can be used on both 2D and 3D objects. Features specific to either 2D or 3D are clearly noted.

2 Click to select the object. The points appear.

To drag a selection box


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. and select it.

2 Drag, from left to right, to surround an object OR


Drag, from right to left, around part of the object to select it.

Selecting Objects
There are two selection tools available. You can use the Selection Tool or the Deep Select Tool to select objects.

To remove an object or point from a selection set


When you click to select an object or point, and it is near, or on top of another possible selection, a popup menu appears with a list of the possible selections. This is called the Ambiguity pop-up menu. As you move your pointer over the possible selections, they are highlighted on the WorkPlane. Select the object you want and it is selected on the WorkPlane. Hold down the Shift key and click to deselect an object or point.

Creating a Copy of an Object


You can create a copy of any object by holding down the Option key and dragging a copy off of the original object.

To select an object or point


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

To copy an object
1 Select the object you want to copy. 2 Hold down the Option key and drag, from a snap
point, to create a copy of the object.

2 Click to select the object.

To select multiple objects or points


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

Resizing 3D Objects
You can resize objects manually, using the Deep Select Tool, or by entering new values in the Prompt Window or Inspector. The Inspector displays the current selections data, including size and position information. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

2 Hold down the Shift key. 3 Click to select objects. Each object is added to
the selection set.

To select all objects


Double-click the Selection button. All objects are selected.

To resize an object manually


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette.

To select and display control points


1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Select the object you want to adjust.

3 7 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Resizing 3D Objects
3 Drag a vertex to the size and shape you want.
Release to place.

2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the

Diameter and Height fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize a sphere using data entry fields


1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the dX,
dY, and dZ fields to adjust the diameter. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

N O T E : To resize a cone created using the Cone Diagonals Tool, enter new values in the dX and dY fields to adjust the diameter and press the Enter key. OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter values in the Height, and Bottom fields and
click Apply.

N O T E : To resize a One Point Sphere, enter a new value in the Diameter field and press the Enter key. OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter a value in the Diameter field and click
Apply.

To resize a prism using data entry fields


1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the
Diameter, Height, and # Sides fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize a block using data entry fields


1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the
Length, Width, and Height fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter values in the Height, Diameter, and Sides
fields and click Apply.

OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter a values in the Length, Width, and Height
fields and click Apply.

To resize a pyramid using data entry fields


1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the
Diameter, Height, and # Sides fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize a cylinder using data entry fields


1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the
Diameter and Height fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter values in the Height, Bottom, and Sides
fields and click Apply.

OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter values in the Height and Diameter fields
and click Apply.

To resize a slab using data entry fields


1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Prompt Window, enter a new value in the
Height field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To resize a cone using data entry fields


1
Select the object you want to resize.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 7 3

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


OR 1 Select the object you want to resize. 2 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 3 Enter a new value in the Height field and click
Apply.

3 Choose the weight you want from the Weight


pop-up menu and click Apply.

Reshaping 2D Objects
You can reshape an object by dragging an endpoint and its attached segments, or by dragging a segment.

Resizing 2D Objects
You can resize objects manually, using the Deep Select Tool, or by entering new values in the Prompt Window or on the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

To reshape an object
1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette. you want to reshape.

2 Drag a selection box around the point, or points, 3 Drag the segment or point to the shape you want.

To resize an object manually


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. Control points appear. place the point.

2 Select the object you want to resize. 3 Drag a point to resize the object. Release to

To change a 2D objects pattern


1 Select the 2D object you want change. 2 In the Inspector, click the Attributes tab. 3 Choose the pattern you want from the Pattern
pop-up menu and click Apply.

To resize an object using Data entry fields


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

To specify endpoint style


1 Select the 2D object you want to change. 2 In the Inspector, click the Attributes tab. 3 Choose styles from the Arrow Start and Arrow
End pop-up menus and click Apply.

2 Select the object you want to resize. Data entry 3 Enter a new value in the field and press the

To resize using the Inspector


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. I) to open the Inspector.

Reshaping 3D Objects
To reshape 3D objects, first be sure the object is a surface. You may need to change the object type. For more information, see Changing Object Type, which begins on page 377.

2 Choose Window > Inspector (or press Command3 4 5 6


Select the object you want to resize. In the Inspector, click the Data tab. Enter new values to resize the object. Click Apply.

To reshape a 3D object
1
Choose the Deep Select button in the Main Tool Palette.

To change an objects weight


1 Select the 2D object you want to change. 2 In the Inspector, click the Attributes tab. 3 7 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

2 Select the object you want to reshape. 3 Drag points to reshape the object.

Grouping Objects

Grouping Objects
Grouping objects allows you to move, resize, and rotate multiple objects together. When selected, grouped objects have their own axis, which you can rotate around by dragging. You can ungroup objects and they become individual objects again.

To change an objects direction


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Direction. The objects
direction is changed.

Changing an Objects Name


Each object has its own name to help differentiate while drawing. You can further customize objects by giving them a unique name. You can change an objects name in the shortcut menu, or in the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284.

To group objects
1 Select the objects you want to group together. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Group. The objects are
grouped together.

To ungroup objects
1 Select the group. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Ungroup. The objects are
ungrouped.

To change an objects name


1 Ctrl-click the object you want to name. 2 Choose the objects current name in the shortcut
menu. The Input String dialog appears.

3 Enter a new name in the field and click OK.

Locking Objects
You can protect an objects settings by locking the object so changes cannot be made.

OR 1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Attributes tab. 3 Enter a new name in the Name field and click
Apply.

To lock an object
1 Select the object you want to lock. 2 Choose Edit > Group > Lock. The object is locked
so changes cannot be made.

Changing Object Resolution


You can control an objects resolution, which affects its appearance. By default, objects are drawn with a very fine resolution. You can change the resolution to one of five options: Super Fine, Very Fine, Fine, Medium or Coarse. Unlike 2D objects, 3D objects can display Iso Lines, which represent the number of isometric lines that are calculated across the surface. If you specify 5x5 Iso Lines for a curve, a 5x5 grid appears on the object, dividing the object into 5x5 curves. The Force U-V option keeps the U and V values the same. By default, the Show Silhouettes checkbox is selected, so dependant edges are affected by these settings. You can deselect this option to help with rendering speed.

To unlock an object
1 Choose Edit > Group > UnLock. 2 Select the object you want to unlock.

Changing Object Direction


You can change the direction, or orientation, of a curve or surface. An objects direction is important when youre creating surfaces.

To show object direction


1 Select the object. 2 Choose Verify > Show Direction. Arrows appear
to show the directions.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 7 5

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


Selecting the Precise Facets checkbox creates many more facets for optimum precision, but takes much longer, and affects rendering speeds.

2 In the Inspector, click the Display tab. 3 Choose the setting you want from the Silhouette
pop-up menu and click Apply.

To change object resolution


Ctrl-click an object and choose Resolution from the shortcut menu, then choose the resolution you want from the submenu.

Changing an Objects Layer


You can move an object from its current layer to another, or create a new layer. For more information, see Working with Layers, which begins on page 406.

OR 1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Resolution. The Object
Resolution dialog appears.

To change an objects layer


1 Select the object you want to move. 2 Choose Edit > Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

3 Select the button corresponding to the


resolution you want.

3 Choose the layer where you want the object to


be displayed from the pop-up menu.

4 (optional) Enter the number of isometric lines


you want in the U and V fields.

4 Click OK. OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose the layer you want from the submenu.

5 Click OK.

To display a 3D object as transparent


1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Display tab. 3 Select the Transparency checkbox and click
Apply.

To create a new layer


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit> Change Layer. The Change Layer
dialog appears.

N O T E : For more information, see Shade Render


Options, which begins on page 339.

3 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in


sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

To display iso lines


1 Select the object. 2 In the Inspector, click the Display tab. 3 Enter values in the U and V Iso Lines fields to

4 Click OK. OR 1
Ctrl-click the object and choose Layer from the shortcut menu, then choose More from the submenu. The Change Layer dialog appears. sequence appears in the pop-up menu.

specify the number of iso lines and click Apply.

To change the silhouette setting


1
Select the object.

2 Click the New Layer button. The next layer in 3 Click OK.

3 7 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Changing Object Type

Changing Object Type


You can change the geometry of an object, then reshape or resize the object to customize its appearance. Changing a solid 3D object into surfaces literally breaks the object into separate surfaces, each of which you can control by dragging.

OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Change Object Type. The Change Type dialog appears.

3 Select the button corresponding to the type you


want.

4 Click OK.

To change a 2D object
1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type. OR
Ctrl-click on the object you want to change and choose Change Object Type from the shortcut menu. The Change Type dialog appears.

Changing Objects into Surfaces


3D objects are drawn as one individual surface. By changing a solid object into surfaces, you can remove edges from a block, or warp a circle to almost any shape.

To change a solid object to separate surfaces


1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type. OR
Ctrl-click on the object and choose Change Object Type. The Change Type dialog appears.

3 Select the button of the object you want to


change.

4 (optional) Deselect the Delete Originals 5 (optional) Deselect the Use Work Layer 6 Click OK.

checkbox to keep the original object in place. checkbox to disable the object from using the work layer as its default layer.

3 Select the Surfaces button. 4 (optional) Deselect the Delete Originals 5 (optional) Deselect the Use Work Layer
checkbox to specify a different layer.

checkbox to keep the original surfaces in place.

Changing Solids
You can change a solid object into other types of objects.

6 Click OK.

To change a solid
1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Edit > Change Object Type.

Simplifying Objects
You can attempt to simplify objects to help increase performance and speed. Where possible, the following simplifications will be made:

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 7 7

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


Zero length curves to points Circular splines to arcs or circles Straight splines to lines NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational BSpline) surfaces or solids to analytics

Filleting and Chamfering 2D Objects


The Fillet and Chamfer tools allow you to reshape edges and corner formed by nonparallel lines or curves. Edges are automatically trimmed, but you can opt to keep the edges by press the Option key as you work. There are three fillet tools available that allow you to round edges, and two chamfer tools to create a chamfer, or flat edge.

To simplify objects
1 Select the object you want to simplify. 2 Choose Edit > Simplify Object. The Simplify
Results dialog appears with the results.

3 Click OK.

Displaying Points
You can control the visibility of an objects editable points.

Filleting Two Lines


The Fillet Two Lines Tool allows you fillet a corner by selecting two perpendicular lines.

To show points
1 Select the object with points you want to show. 2 Choose Edit > Show Points (or press Command-D). OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Show Points from the shortcut menu.

To fillet two lines


1
Choose the Fillet Two Lines button from the Fillet/Chamfer toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Radius field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key. fillet.

2 (optional) Enter a value in the Radius field and 3 Click on the first segment where you want the 4 Click the next segment, on the opposing side of OR
Hold down the Shift key, then click inside the corner you want to fillet. where you want the fillet. The corner is filleted.

To hide points
1 Select the object. 2 Choose Edit > Show Points (or press Command-D)
to remove the checkmark.

OR
Ctrl-click the object and choose Show Points from the shortcut menu.

N O T E : To fillet a corner without trimming away the


corner, hold down the Option key.

To resolve links
1 Select an object. 2 Choose Edit > Resolve Links.

Filleting Three Lines


The Fillet Three Lines Tool allows you to fillet tangent to three objects.

To remove links
1 Select an object. 2 Choose Edit > Remove Links. All associativity
related to the object is removed.

3 7 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Filling an Empty Area With Curve

To fillet three lines


1
Choose the Fillet Three Lines button from the Fillet/Chamfer toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

Hold down the Shift key, then click inside the corner you want to chamfer.

N O T E : To chamfer a corner without trimming away the corner, hold down the Option key.

2 Click the first segment where you want the fillet. 3 Click the next segment, where you want the
tangent.

4 Click the third segment of the fillet. N O T E : To add a fillet without trimming away the corner, hold down the Option key.

Chamfering by Entering Distance and Angle


The Chamfer Angle Tool allows you to create a chamfer at a specified angle and distance from the corner.

Filling an Empty Area With Curve


The Smooth Fill Curve Tool allows you to create a smooth, blended curve between two individual objects.

To chamfer by entering the angle and distance from corner


1
Choose the Chamfer Angle button from the Fillet/Chamfer toolset in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Length and Angle fields and press the Enter key. chamfer.

To fill an area with curve


1
Choose the Smooth Fill Curve button from the Fillet/Chamfer toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

2 In the Prompt Window, enter values in the

3 Click the first segment where you want the 4 Click the next segment, on the opposing side of
the corner you want to chamfer. The corner is chamfered according to your specifications.

2 Click the first segment or curve. 3 Click the next segment or curve. The curve
appears between the two selections.

Chamfering Two Lines


The Chamfer Two Lines Tool allows you to chamfer a corner between two intersecting lines.

Trim 2D Objects
There are eight trim tools available for trimming, extending, connecting, and offsetting curves.

To chamfer two lines


1
Choose the Chamfer Two Lines button from the Fillet/Chamfer toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Length field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key. chamfer.

Trimming to a specific boundary


The Trim Tool allows you to select a boundary, then select a segment to trim from that boundary.

2 (optional) Enter a value in the Length field and 3 Click the first segment where you want the 4 Click the next segment, on the opposing side of
the corner you want to chamfer. The corner is chamfered.

To trim to a specific boundary


1
Choose the Trim button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. want to trim.

OR

2 Click to select the boundary to which you

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 7 9

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


3 Select the segment you want to trim. The
selection is trimmed from the boundary.

To extend to an existing curve


1
Choose the Extend button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The popup menus appear in the Prompt Window. menu.

OR
Hold down the Option key, then click keep the selection and trim the remaining segment.

2 Choose Extend to Curve from the Method pop-up 3 (optional) Choose the extension style you want
from the pop-up menu. extend.

Trimming Objects into a Corner


The Corner Trim Tool allows you to trim two objects into a corner by selecting the lines you want to keep.

4 Select the existing curve to which you want to 5 Click the end you want to extend.

To trim two objects into a corner


1
Choose the Corner Trim button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

To extend to a specified distance


1
Choose the Extend button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The pop-up menus appear in the Prompt Window. pop-up menu. The Distance field appears in the Prompt Window. from the pop-up menu.

2 Click to select the first object to keep. 3 Click to select the second object you want to
keep. The two objects form a corner.

2 Choose Extend by Distance from the Method

OR
Hold down the Shift key then click inside the corner you want to create.

3 (optional) Choose the extension style you want 4 Enter the distance you want to extend. Press the
Enter key to accept the value.

Extending a Curve
The Extend Tool extends the boundaries of an existing curve a designated distance. There are three methods by which a curve can be extended and three styles to choose from. These settings are available on the Prompt Window. Extension Methods Extend to Curve select a boundary to which you want to extend and then select the point you want extended. Extend by Distance enter the distance by which you want an end extended, then select the end you want to extend. Extend Dynamically select the end you want to extend, then drag to the desired length. Extension Styles There are three styles available, depending on the resulting geometry you want.

5 Click the end you want to extend.

To extend dynamically
1
Choose the Extend button from the Fillet/ Chamfer toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The pop-up menus appear in the Prompt Window. pop-up menu.

2 Choose Extend Dynamically from the Method 3 (optional) Choose the extension style you want
from the pop-up menu.

4 Click the end you want to extend. 5 Drag to the point where you want and click.

Trimming Segment at Intersections


The Segment to Curve Tool allows you to divide a line or curve at intersections with other lines or curves. The first object you select is the boundary object, and is not segmented. The second point you select is segmented at each intersection with the boundary object.

3 8 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Connecting Curves or Lines to Form One Object

To segment objects at intersections with other objects


1
Select the boundary object. This is the object that limits the segmentation. from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. object is segmented at each intersection with the boundary object.

3 Drag a selection box around the objects you want


to connect.

2 Choose the Segment To Curve button

Joining Curves or Lines to Form One Object


The Join Curve Tool allows you to select two objects and create a line to join the selections together to create one object. The tolerance value dictates how close objects are moved to the original selection. The lower the tolerance value, the closer objects move to the original selection.

3 Select the object you want to segment. The

segmented until you click to select a section.

N O T E : The segmented object is not displayed as

Connecting Curves or Lines to Form One Object


The Connect Curve Tool allows you to create one object from two individual objects. The second object selected moves to connect to the end point of the first object selected. You can also use the Connect Curve Tool to connect multiple objects to form a single object. The tolerance value dictates how close objects are moved to the original selection. The lower the tolerance value, the closer objects move to the original selection.

To join curves and lines


1
Choose the Join Curve button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Tolerance field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key.

2 (optional) enter a value in the Tolerance field and 3 Click to select the first object you want to join. 4 Select the second object you want you join. A
line appears joining the two objects.

N O T E : If the selections are not tangent, the join line may not join the two objects precisely.

To connect curves and lines


1
Choose the Connect Curve button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Tolerance field appears in the Prompt Window.

Create a Curve Offset from an Existing Curve


There are two methods for creating offset curves. The Offset to Value Tool allows you to select an existing curve, then create a new curve that is offset by a specified distance and direction. The Offset by Point tool creates a curve that is offset from an existing curve by specifying the point where you want the curve to appear. Both tools are available in a sub-toolset in the Prompt Window. You can set the offset distance, in the Prompt Window, after activating the tool, or after the offset curve appears.

2 Click to set the first object in the connection. 3 Click near the end point where you want the
second object to connect.

4 Click to select the object you want moved to

connect. Click near the end point you want moved.

To connect multiple lines and curves


1
Choose the Connect Curve button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The Tolerance field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key.

2 (optional) Enter a value in the Tolerance field and

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 8 1

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes To offset a curve a specified distance from an existing curve
1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Offset button from the Trim toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. the Offset field appears in the Prompt Window.

Blending and Chamfering 3D Objects


The Blend and Chamfer tools allow you to modify solid edges.

2 Choose the Offset to Value button in the 3 (optional) Enter a distance in the Offset field to
specify the offset distance. Press the Enter key to accept the new value. another curve offset.

Blending Edges
The Blend Tool allows you to fillet a single edge, or all the edges of a face. You can specify the radius of the fillet in the Prompt Window. The higher the radius, the larger the fillet. You can also enter a setback value. The Blend Tool also has advanced blend options associated with it, accessed by activating the tool and clicking the Options button in the Prompt Window.

4 Click to select the curve from which you want 5 Position your pointer to set the direction you
want the curve offset and click. The curve appears, at the distance and direction you specified.

To blend an edge
1
Choose the Blend Edge button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Shift key as you click, to select more than one edge.

To offset a curve a specified point


1
In the Main Tool Palette, choose the Offset button from the Trim toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. the Offset field appears in the Prompt Window.

2 Select the edge you want to fillet. Hold down the 3 (optional) Enter values in the Radius and Setback
fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

2 Choose the Offset by Point button in the 3 Select the curve to offset. 4 Position your cursor where you want the curve to
appear and click.

To fillet all edges of a face


1
Choose the Blend Edge button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window.

Trimming an Enclosed Region


The Trim Region Tool allows you to trim a shape with more than one enclosed region, down to one enclosed region.

2 Select the face with the edges you want to fillet. 3 (optional) Enter values in the Radius and Setback
fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To trim a region
1
Choose the Region Trim button from the Trim toolset in the Main Tool Palette. The other regions are trimmed.

To change fillet options


Once youve activated the Blend Tool, you can access the Advanced Blend Options dialog to change your fillet options.

2 Click inside the region you want to keep.

3 8 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Chamfering Edges

To retain features
1 Select the Blend Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Blend
Options dialog appears.

By default, the Automatic Chain-select of Shared Edges checkbox is selected, so when you select an edge, all edges that are tangent are selected as well. Selecting Feature Interaction blends all additional features on a blend surface, such as protrusions and cutouts. The Retain Features option allows you to preserve cutouts or protrusions. The cross section connects two blended edges. By default, the cross section appears perpendicular to the edge being blended. You can specify the orientation of the cross section by selecting a curve to act as the spine of the cross section.

3 Select the Retain Features checkbox. 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge or face to fillet.
option.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

To specify cross section orientation


1 Select the Blend Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Blend
Options dialog appears. checkbox.

3 Select the Specify Cross Section Orientation 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge to fillet. 6 Select the curve to define the cross section
orientation. option.

To chain-select edges
1 Select the Blend Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Blend
Options dialog appears. Edges checkbox.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

3 Select the Automatic Chain-select of Shared 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge(s) to fillet.
option.

Chamfering Edges
The Chamfer Edge Tool allows you to add a flat section to an edge. You can specify the length of the chamfer in the Prompt Window by enter a value in the L1 field. The higher the length, the larger the chamfer. You can also enter a setback value. The Chamfer Edge Tool has advanced chamfer options associated with it, accessed by clicking the Options button in the Prompt Window while the tool is active.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

To blend all features on a blend surface


1 Select the Blend Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Blend
Options dialog appears.

3 Select the Feature Interaction checkbox. 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge to fillet.
option.

To chamfer an edge
1
Choose the Chamfer Edge button in the Main Tool Palette. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. the Shift key as you click, to select more than one edge.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

2 Select the edge you want to chamfer. Hold down

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 8 3

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


3 (optional) Enter values in the L1 and Setback
fields. Press the Enter key to accept new values. option.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

To change chamfer options


Once youve activated the Chamfer Edge Tool, you can access the Advanced Chamfer Options dialog to change your chamfer options.

To retain features
1 Select the Chamfer Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Blend
Options dialog appears.

3 Select the Retain Features checkbox. 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge or face to chamfer.
option.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

By default, the Automatic Chain-select of Shared Edges checkbox is selected, so when you select an edge, all edges that are tangent are selected as well. Selecting Feature Interaction chamfers all additional features on a chamfer surface, such as protrusions and cutouts. The Retain Features option allows you to preserve cutouts or protrusions.

Combining and Subtracting Solids


You can create a union between objects, or remove a portion of an object, based on another objects shape. Combing solids causes one solid to take on the parent solids material, color, and characteristics.

Combining Objects
The Add Solid Tool allows you to create a union between two or more objects. The first object you select is the base, the object to which you are adding. Objects that are added take on the color or material of the base object.

To chain-select edges
1 Select the Chamfer Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Chamfer
Options dialog appears. Edges checkbox.

3 Select the Automatic Chain-select of Shared 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge(s) to chamfer.
option.

To combine objects
1
Choose the Add Solid button in the Main Tool Palette. object to which you want objects added. the base.

N O T E : Deselect the checkbox to disable this

2 Click to select the base object, the

3 Select the object to add. The object is added to

To chamfer all features on a chamfer surface


1 Select the Chamfer Edge button. 2 Click the Options button. The Advanced Chamfer
Options dialog appears.

N O T E : To add more than one object, hold down the


Shift key as you select objects to add.

3 Select the Feature Interaction checkbox. 4 Click OK. 5 Select the edge to chamfer. 3 8 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Subtracting Solids

Subtracting Solids
The Subtract Solid Tool allows you to remove an object from the WorkPlane, leaving a void space where the object used to be positioned. Objects do not need to be combined for you to subtract an object.

2 Click to select the object you want to move. 3 Drag the object to a new location. N O T E : The snap tools must be enabled to use this function. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

To move by specifying coordinates


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette. entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. Enter key to accept new values.

To subtract an object
1
Choose the Subtract Solid button in the Main Tool Palette. want to subtract.

2 Click to select the object you want to move. Data 3 Enter new X and Y values in the fields. Press the OR 1 In the Inspector, click the Data tab. 2 Enter new X and Y values in the fields and click
Apply.

2 Click to select the object from which you 3 Select the object you want to subtract. The
object is subtracted and its shape remains. down the Shift key as you select objects to subtract.

N O T E : To subtract more than one object, hold

N O T E : A positive value moves the object up, while a

Rearranging Objects
You can move selections by dragging from one point to another, specifying coordinates or, for even more options, use one of the Transform Tools. To specify coordinates, you can enter values in the Prompt Window or the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284. Transform tools are unique in that you do not move objects by dragging them directly to where you want them. Rather, you click reference points to specify the distance and direction your selection moves. Basic Transform tools:

negative value moves it down.

Nudging Objects
You can select objects and nudge them using your arrow keys. By default, the nudge distance is set to 0.0, so when you press an arrow key, it moves the WorkPlane.

To set the nudge distance


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the General category. 3 Enter a value in the Arrow Key Nudge Distance
field.

Advanced Transform tools:

4 Click OK.

To nudge an object
1 Click to select the object you want to nudge. 2 Press an arrow key to nudge the object in that
direction.

To drag objects to a new location


1
Choose the Selection button in the Main Tool Palette.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 8 5

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes

Moving an Object Using the Translate Tool


The Translate Tool allows you to move an object or point by clicking to set a start reference point, then clicking another point on the WorkPlane to set the move distance and direction. These reference points do not need to be on the actual object, you can click anywhere on the WorkPlane.

6 Click the point you want the object to rotate

around. The object rotates in a counterclockwise direction.

OR
Select the Rotate One Point button and enter values in the X and Y fields to set the origin of rotation, and an angle in the Angle field. Press Enter to accept the values and rotate.

To move using the Translate Tool


1
Select the object or individual point you want to move. Transform toolset.

To rotate using three points


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate Three Point button in
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. The Angle field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key to accept the value.

2 Choose the Translate button in the Basic 3 Click to set the first reference point. 4 Drag to set the distance and direction you want
the selection moved. selection is moved.

5 Click to set the end reference point. The OR


Select the Translate button and enter coordinates in the dX, dY, and dZ fields in the Prompt Window. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

4 Enter the rotation angle in the Angle field and 5 Click to set the center point for rotation. 6 Click to set the start reference point. This is the
rotate from point.

Click to set the end reference point. This is the rotate to point. The object is rotated.

Rotating 2D Objects
There are two tools available for rotating a selection: around one point, or around three points. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

Scaling 2D Objects
The Scale Tool allows you to enlarge or shrink an object based using two types of scaling, Uniform and Differential. Uniform Scale uses input from mouse clicks, or values entered in the data entry fields. The entire object is scaled as one unit. Differential Scale uses input to scale components along the X or Y axis. Each axis is scaled individually.

To rotate around one point


1 Select the object you want to rotate. 2 Choose the Rotate button in the Transform 3 Choose the Rotate One Point button in
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. the sub-toolset. Data entry fields appear in the Prompt Window. from the Rotation Axis pop-up menu.

To perform uniform scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window.

4 Choose the axis around which you want to rotate 5 Enter a rotation angle in the Angle field.

3 8 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Mirroring 2D Objects
3 Choose Uniform from the Scale Method pop-up
menu. Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

4 Click to set the anchor point or scale origin. 5 Click to set two points to define the scale
magnitude.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

5 Click the point (or points) to define the mirror


origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

OR
In the Prompt Window, enter a value in the Scale field. Press the Enter key to accept new values.

To mirror a copy
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The Mirror Plan pop-up menu appears in the Prompt Window.

To perform differential scale


1 Select the object you want to scale. 2 Choose the Scale button in the Basic
Transform toolset. Data entry fields and the Scale Method pop-up menu appear in the Prompt Window. up menu.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

3 Choose Differential from the Scale Method pop4 Enter values in the X-Scale and Y-Scale fields
and press the Enter key.

4 Choose the plane by which you want to mirror


from the Mirror Plane pop-up menu.

5 Hold down the Option key and click the point (or

5 Click to set the anchor point or scale origin.

points) to define the mirror origin. The object is mirrored on the opposite side of the reference line.

Mirroring 2D Objects
You can mirror an object by setting a reference line, which acts like the spine of a book. Once the line is set, the object is mirrored on the opposite side. When a mirrored copy is created, the resulting geometry acts independently of the original shape, which means changes to the original shape do not affect the copy. The Linked Mirror Tool allows you to create an associative link between the original shape and the resulting geometry, so changes to the original shape are reflected in the mirror copy. Both tools are available from the sub-toolset in the Prompt Window.

Duplicating Objects in Linear Formation


The Linear Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying rows, columns, and spacing. Columns are a vertical series, while rows are a horizontal series. The spacing values can be measured by Total or Step. Total offset and Total spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the last duplicate. This results in a more compact offset and spacing. Step offset and Step spacing measure from the beginning edge of your original object to the beginning edge of the next duplicate, then from that duplicate to the next, and so on. This results in a more spread out offset and spacing.

To mirror objects
1 Select the object you want to mirror. 2 Choose the Mirror button in the Basic Transform
toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. button in the sub-toolset. The

To create linear duplicates of an object


1
Select the object you want to duplicate.

3 Choose the Mirror or Linked Mirror

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 8 7

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


2 Choose the Linear Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Linear Duplicate dialog appears.

Duplicating Objects in Circular Formation


The Polar Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object by specifying the number, center point, and rotation angle. All of these factors create a circular pattern of duplicates. By default, each duplicate is rotated around the specified center point. You have the option to translate each duplicate, so they appear just as the original object. To translate each duplicate, select the Translate duplicates checkbox and enter your reference point coordinates.

To create circular duplicates of an object


3 In the Number per row field, enter the number
of objects you want in each row, including the selection. associated with each axis.

1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Polar Duplicate button in the
Basic Transform toolset. The Polar Duplicate dialog appears.

4 In the Offset fields, enter the distances N O T E : The asterisk indicates that these fields can be accessed using the snap tool by referencing data in the drawing. 5 Select the Total offset button to apply the X
and Y values to the combined columns.

OR
Select the Step offset button to apply the X and Y values to the individual column offsets.

6 In the Number of rows field, enter the number


of rows you want.

3 In the Number field, enter the number of


objects you want, including the selection.

In the Spacing field, enter the varietal space you want between each row. spacing to the combined row height.

4 In the Center fields, enter the X and Y

coordinates where you want to position the center point of the polar display.

8 Select the Total spacing button to apply the OR


Select the Step spacing button to apply the spacing to each individual row spacing.

OR
Select the Translate duplicates checkbox to specify the polar position of each duplicate, then enter X and Y values.

Click OK. Your selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

5 In the Angle field, enter the polar angle you


want.

6 Click the Total angle button to specify that the


angle is the total polar angle.

OR

3 8 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Aligning Copies in Linear Array


Click the Step angle button to specify that the angle is the individual angle between duplicates.

4 Click to select the path along which you want to


duplicate.

Click OK. You selection is duplicated according to your specifications.

5 Click on the object you are duplicating to set the


origin point. This point lies along the selected path. to set an alignment axis. The axis created by these two points aligns with the shape of the selected path.

6 Click two points on the object you are duplicating

Aligning Copies in Linear Array


The Linear Array Tool creates and distributes copies based on the starting reference point and pointer location. As you move the pointer, the angle and number of copies increases or decreases. The spacing value describes the absolute distance between each consecutive object.

Aligning Objects
The Align Tool allows you to select an object, or objects, then click a point to align your selection based on the alignment option you choose. You can align objects by their sides, centers, tops, and bottoms.

To align objects in an array


1
Select the object with which you want to create an array. Basic Transform toolset. The Spacing field appears in the Prompt Window. press the Enter key.

2 Choose the Linear Array button in the 3 (optional) Enter a value in the Spacing field and 4 Click to select the starting point for the array. 5 Drag your cursor in the direction you want the

To align objects
1 Select the object, or objects, you want aligned. 2 Choose the Align button in the Advanced
Transform toolset. The Align Options popup menu appears in the Prompt Window.

linear array. As you drag the array increases or decreases in size, depending on which way youre dragging.

6 Click to set the end of the array.

Duplicating Objects Along a Path


The Path Duplicate Tool allows you to create copies of an object along a specific path, such as a curve, line, spline, arc, circle or ellipse. You can set the number of duplicates in the Prompt Window before or after you place the objects.

3 Choose the alignment you want from the Align


options pop-up menu. you set.

4 Click to align the object based on the align option

Combining Object Faces


The Combine Face tools provide options for positioning and aligning object faces relative to other faces. There are four methods of combining object faces: Connect points moves a part to another part, connecting two points between the parts.

To duplicate an object along a path


1 Select the object you want to duplicate. 2 Choose the Path Duplicate button in the
Advanced Transform tools. The Qty field appears in the Prompt Window. want in the Qty field and press the Enter key.

3 (optional) Enter the number of duplicates you

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 8 9

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


Mate faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly opposite the referenced face. Align faces rotates a selected planar face so it is positioned exactly the same as the referenced face. Align will also allow selection of cylinder faces, in which case the axis will be aligned to each other. Insert faces moves and aligns cylindrical faces. Typically this is used to insert a bolttype shape into a hole-type shape. Each method results in an associate connection between the original shape and the resulting geometry; meaning edits to the original shape are reflected in the resulting geometry, thus maintaining the connection or alignment.

To align object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose the Align Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

5 Select the face to align to (same face type as

To insert object faces


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. sub-toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

To connect object points


1
Choose the Combine Face button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset.

2 Choose the Insert Face button in the

2 Choose the Connection button in the sub3 Select the face to move. 4 Select the connection point on the face to move
from.

3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the face to be aligned (planar or
cylindrical). above).

5 Select the face to move to (parent part). 6 Select the connection point on the face to move
to. The objects are connected at the selected point.

5 Select the face to align with (same face type as 6 Select the face to mate. 7 Select the face to mate with.
If the first face you select is cylindrical, the second alignment face must also be cylindrical. In the case of cylindrical faces, the axes of the cylinders are aligned.

To mate object faces


1
Choose the Combine Faces button in the Advanced Transform toolset. A sub-set of tools becomes available in the Prompt Window. toolset. The Offset field appears in the Prompt Window. Enter key.

2 Choose the Mate Faces button in the sub3 (optional) Enter an Offset value and press the 4 Select the planar face to be aligned. 5 Select the planar face to align to.

Stretching Objects
The Stretch Tool is used to stretch curves, surfaces, and solids. Stretching is a non-uniform scaling operation along a stretch axis. The stretch axis is defined by two points specified by the user. The material to be stretched is bounded by planes perpendicular to the stretch axis at the two supplied points. The third point defines how much the body is stretched. The distance from

3 9 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Using Snaps
the third point to the second point defines the distance stretched.

To snap along the X, Y or Z axis


Hold down the X, Y or Z key as you click, to automatically snap to the specified axis.

To stretch an object
1
Choose the Stretch button in the Advanced Transform toolset. The Dist1 field appears in the Prompt Window. and press the Enter key. stretching.

To snap to the grid


1
Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G) to turn on the grid. appears.

2 (optional) Enter a stretch distance in the field 3 Click to specify the start and end regions for 4 Drag and click to specify the stretch to point. N O T E : To stretch the entire body, specify two
The object is stretched from the second point to the stretch point.

2 Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog 3 Select the To Grid checkbox to activate the
snap tool.

4 In the WorkPlane, click to snap to the grid. N O T E : For more information, see Using the Grid,
which begins on page 320.

points that lie outside the body.

N O T E : The Stretch Tool can also be used to stretch regions within a body. To perform a local stretch, specify one or both points within the body. Local stretching introduces new faces and edges at the stretch start or end region. Continuity at the new edges is positional only.

To disable all snap functions


1
Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. tools are disabled.

2 Deselect the Enable checkbox. All of the snap

To turn snaps on or off

Using Snaps
3D Custom Workshop Pro features an intelligence which allows you to automatically snap to specific geometric points along the WorkPlane, and along other shapes. For more information, see Using Snaps, which begins on page 291.

Choose Window > Snaps. The Snaps dialog appears. Enabled snap features appear with a checkmark.

2 Deselect the tool(s) you want to turn off. 3 Select the tool(s) you want to turn on.

To snap to a specific point


1
Select the tool you want to snap to an existing point. the snap point you want. Notice snap tools tell you when you are on an object, as well as when the pointer locks onto a specific object point, such as the center, endpoint, midpoint, intersection, quadrant, vertex, at 45-degree angles (creation angles) or along the X, Y or Z axis. click to set the point.

Controlling the View


When working in 3D, you are viewing your drawing from a top view. To navigate around the WorkPlane, zoom and pan tools are available.

2 In the design window, move your pointer to find

Zoom Options
Custom Workshop Pro provides a variety of zoom options to help view your drawing precisely. In addition to zooming in and out, you can return to a previous zoom scale, zoom to fit your entire drawing in the view, and many others.

3 When youve locked onto the snap point you want,

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 9 1

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes To zoom using the Dynamic Zoom Tool
1
Choose the Dynamic Zoom button in the Main Tool Palette. Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Previous in the shortcut menu.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose Dynamic Zoom from the shortcut menu.

To zoom to view your entire drawing


Choose View > Zoom All (or press CommandF). Your entire drawing is fit to the window.

2 Drag up and down to zoom in and out of the


drawing.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom All in the shortcut menu.

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom In button in the Main Tool Palette. area where you want to zoom in, then click.

To select a zoom window


1
Choose View > Zoom Window (or press Command4).

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Window in the shortcut menu.

Choose View > Zoom In, or press CommandPlus (+). The view zooms in, using the center of your view as the center point.

2 Drag a selection box around the area where you


want to zoom in.

OR
Press the ] key.

To reset zoom view to default view


Choose View > Zoom Home (or press Command-6).

To zoom out
1
Choose the Zoom Out button in the Main Tool Palette. area you want to zoom out from, then click.

To zoom in on a selection
1 Select the object to which you want to zoom. 2 Choose View > Zoom Select. OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Select in the shortcut menu.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

Choose View > Zoom Out, or press CommandMinus (-). The views zooms out from the center of the WorkPlane.

OR
Press the [ key.

Controlling Zoom Options


The zoom ratio controls the amount you zoom up or down. The zoom scale sets the view to a specified amount between the window and drawing space.

To return to the previous zoom scale


Choose View > Zoom Previous. Your view returns to the previous zoom scale.

To set the zoom ratio


1
Choose View > Zoom Ratio. The Input String dialog appears.

OR

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK. 3 9 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Panning Across the WorkPlane

To set a zoom scale


1
Choose View > Zoom Scale. The Input String dialog appears.

Ctrl-click on the design window and choose Dynamic Rotate from the shortcut menu.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

To rotate around the WorkPlane automatically


1
Drag through the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette to tear off the toolset. The Dynamic Navigation tools appear.

Panning Across the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Pan Tool allows you to quickly move across your drawing. In addition to the Pan Tool, you can access the pan feature by pressing the Space bar at any time, while any tool is active.

To pan
Hold down the Space bar, then drag to pan across the drawing. Release the Space bar to deactivate the pan function.

2 Double-click the Dynamic Rotate button to begin


the automatic rotation. rotate.

3 Click anywhere on the WorkPlane to stop auto-

OR 1
Choose the Dynamic Pan button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette. the view.

Controlling Drawing Colors


By default, objects appear in Punch! Blue. You can change a single objects color, multiple objects, or the color in which you draw. You can change an individual objects color on the Inspector. For more information, see Inspector, which begins on page 284. When changing the drawing color, be sure nothing is selected.

2 Drag to pan around the drawing. Release to set OR 1


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Dynamic Pan in the shortcut menu.

2 Drag to pan around the drawing.

To change an objects color


Ctrl-click the object you want to change and choose Color from the shortcut menu, then choose the color you want from the submenu. To pick a custom color, click More from the submenu and choose your color from the Colors dialog.

Rotating Around the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Rotate Tool allows you view your design by rotating around. In addition to dragging to rotate around, the Dynamic Rotate Tool can auto-rotate around the Z-axis.

OR 1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog
appears.

To rotate around the WorkPlane manually


1
Choose the Dynamic Rotate button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane. OR

3 Choose a color and close the dialog.

To change drawing color


1
Click on an empty space in the design window to be sure nothing is selected.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 9 3

Chapter 35 Editing 2D and 3D Shapes


2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog
appears. thumbnail, its name appears at the top of the Render Library.

3 Choose the color you want. Each object will be


drawn in this color.

3 (optional) Choose a category from the lower popup menu. The contents appear on the Preview window.

4 Close the dialog.

4 Drag a selection onto an object. The entire

Applying Materials and Colors


The Render Library contains colors, materials, and paint you can apply to solids and surfaces. To show the Render Library, choose Render Library in the Window menu. There are three methods for applying materials: Apply normal applies materials to a single face Apply body applies materials to an entire object Apply similar applies materials to objects with the same color or material as the object to which you are applying

object appears with the material, color or paint you selected.

To apply colors or materials to all similar surfaces


1
Choose the Apply Similar button at the top of the Render Library. want from the Library pop-up menu. All of the librarys contents appear on the Preview window. Notice, as you move your pointer over each thumbnail, its name appears at the top of the Render Library. up menu. The contents appear on the Preview window.

2 Choose the material, color or paint library you

3 (optional) Choose a category from the lower pop4 Drag a selection onto an object. All objects with
similar surfaces appear with the material, color or paint you selected.

To apply colors or materials to an individual face


1
Choose the Apply Normal button at the top of the Render Library. want from the Library pop-up menu, All of the librarys contents appear in the Preview window. Notice, as you move your pointer over each thumbnail, its name appears at the top of the Render Library. up menu. The contents appear on the Preview window. color or paint appears on the surface.

2 Choose the material, color or paint library you

3 (optional) Choose a category from the lower pop4 Drag a selection onto a surface. The material,

To apply colors or materials to an entire object


1
Choose the Apply Body button at the top of the Render Library. want from the Library pop-up menu,. All of the librarys contents appear in the Preview window. Notice, as you move your pointer over each

2 Choose the material, color or paint library you

3 9 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

CHAPTER 36

Controlling Views
3D Custom Workshop Pro is such a detail-oriented tool, understanding and utilizing views as you design, will greatly improve your efforts. Not only will you be changing your view to take a look at your design, youll be turning over objects and detailing small sections like youve never imagined before.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 9 5

Chapter 36 Controlling Views

3D Viewing Options
3D Custom Workshop Pro offers a variety of view points for designing. There are two 3D views and six flat views. You can turn the axis, grid, and WorkPlane on and off to assist in viewing as well. If you find a view that is not one of the eight presaved views, you can save it to create a new view. You can access this view at any time.

Viewing from the Top


The Top view shows your drawing along the X, Y plane, looking down the Z-axis.

To view from the top


Choose View > Top (or press Command-3).

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Top from the submenu.

Viewing from the Right Side


The Right Side view shows your drawing along the Y, Z plane, looking down the X-axis.

To view from the right side


Choose View > Right Side (or press Command1).

Viewing from the Left Side


The Left Side view shows your drawing along the Y, Z plane, looking down the X-axis.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Right Side from the submenu.

To view from the left side


Choose View > Left Side.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Left from the submenu.

Viewing from the Front


The Front view shows your drawing along the X, Z plane, looking down the Y-axis.

Viewing from the Back


The Back view shows your drawing along the X, Z plane, looking down the Y-axis.

To view from the front


Choose View > Front (or press Command-2).

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Front from the submenu.

To view from the back


Choose View > Back.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Back from the submenu.

3 9 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Viewing from the Bottom

Viewing from the Bottom


The Bottom view shows your drawing along the X, Y plane, looking down the Z-axis.

Viewing the Current Plane


The option to View The Plane allows you to change your view to match the current WorkPlane.

To view from the bottom


Choose View > Bottom.

To view the plane


Choose View > View The Plane. Your view changes to match your current WorkPlane.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Bottom from the submenu.

N O T E : You can change your Workplane in the WorkPlane menu.

Flipping Your View


Flipping your view allows you to flip your view to the other side of the current plane. If viewing from the top plane, flipping your view would change your view to the bottom plane.

Viewing from Isometric


The Isometric view shows your drawing along the X, Y plane, looking down the Z-axis.

To flip your view


Choose View > Flip View.

To view from isometric


Choose View > Isometric.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Isometric from the submenu.

Rotating Your View


You change your view by rotating 180-degrees.

To rotate your view


Choose View > Rotate View.

Viewing from Trimetric


The Trimetric view shows your drawing along the X, Y plane, looking down the Z-axis.

Creating New Views


You can save and create a new view at any time. You can create a view based on a current view by saving the coordinates, or by entering the coordinates manually. You can specify a view based on: Eye point, Reference point or Up vector values Azimuth or Elevation values Rotation relative to current view The Focal Length field allows you to specify the distance between the eye point and the reference point. This is only used when the Perspective checkbox is selected.

To view from trimetric


Choose View > Trimetric.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose Trimetric from the submenu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 9 7

Chapter 36 Controlling Views


The Field of View represents the angular value associated with the eye point, reference point, and viewable area. A lower Field of View means you are further away from the object. The Field of View is based on the Focal Length. To save a view, set the view you want to save, or know the values of the viewpoint you want.

To save your current view


1
Choose View > New View. The New View dialog appears.

4 Enter values in the Azim and Elev fields, and click


Apply to change the view.

2 Enter a name in the View Name field. 3 Click OK. The view is saved on the User View
submenu.

5 (optional) Select the Perspective checkbox, and


enter a value in the Focal Length field. submenu.

6 Click OK. The view is saved in the User View

To create a view from X, Y, Z coordinates


1
Choose View > New View. The New View dialog appears.

To create a view by rotating your current view


1
From the View menu, choose New View. The New View dialog appears.

2 Enter a name in the View Name field. 3 From the Create By pop-up menu, choose Rotate
Current View. The fields appear.

2 Enter a name in the View Name field. 3 From the Create By pop-up menu, choose Eye Pt /
Reference Pt. Fields appear.

4 Enter values in the Eye, Ref, or UpD fields and


click Apply to change the view.

4 Enter values in the RotX, RotY, and RotZ fields,


and click Apply to change the view.

5 (optional) Select the Perspective checkbox and


enter a value in the Focal Length field. submenu.

5 (optional) Select the Perspective checkbox,


then enter a value in the Focal Length field. submenu.

6 Click OK. The view is saved in the User View

6 Click OK. The view is saved in the User View

To create a view from azimuth or elevation


1
Choose View > New View. The New View dialog appears.

To view a user-created view


Choose View > User View, then choose the view you want to see from the submenu.

2 Enter a name in the View Name field. 3 From the Create By pop-up menu, choose
Azimuth / Elevation. The fields appear.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose the view from the submenu.

3 9 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling the WorkPlane

To delete a view
Choose View > Delete View, then choose the view you want to delete from the submenu.

Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Global from the submenu.

N O T E : You cannot delete your current view.

To edit a view
1
Choose View > User View, then choose the view you want to edit from the submenu.

Using Front WorkPlane


This changes to the front plane, which is parallel with the XZ axis.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose View from the shortcut menu, then choose the view from the submenu.

To use front WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > Front.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Front from the submenu.

2 Choose View > View Properties. The View


Properties dialog appears. save the changes.

3 Change your views properties and click OK to

Using Side WorkPlane Controlling the WorkPlane


The WorkPlane is an invisible flat surface used to define planar geometry. In 3D drawing mode, there are a variety of WorkPlane orientation options. There are nine preset WorkPlane options available. You can also create a new WorkPlane by entering specific coordinates. A user-defined WorkPlane can be accessed, modified or deleted easily. This changes to the side plane, which is parallel to the YZ axis.

To use side WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > Side.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Side from the submenu.

To display the WorkPlane symbol


Choose WorkPlane > Show Work Plane. The WorkPlane symbol appears.

Using Top WorkPlane


This changes to the top plane, which is parallel with the XY axis.

Using Global WorkPlane


The Global WorkPlane is a fixed, uneditable coordinate system that allows a uniform system between different files/models.

To use top WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > Top.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane, then choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Top from the submenu.

To use global WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > Global.

OR

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 3 9 9

Chapter 36 Controlling Views

Using the Use View WorkPlane


This changes the WorkPlane to align with the Z-axis.

Using Set Origin WorkPlane


This moves the WorkPlane to a specified location. You can set the origin anywhere on the current WorkPlane.

To use view WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > Use View.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Use View from the submenu.

To use set origin WorkPlane


1
Choose WorkPlane > Set Origin.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Set Origin from the submenu.

Using 3 Pts WorkPlane


This sets the WorkPlane based on three, userdefined points.

2 Click to set the WorkPlane origin.

Using Offset WorkPlane


This sets the WorkPlane parallel to the XY axis, based on an offset value you specify.

To use 3 Pts WorkPlane


1
Choose WorkPlane > 3 Pts.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane, then choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose 3 Pts from the submenu.

To use the offset WorkPlane


1
Choose WorkPlane > Offset.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane, choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Offset from the submenu.

2 Click to define the origin of the WorkPlane. 3 Click to define the direction of the X-axis. 4 Click to define the direction of the Y-axis.

2 The dialog appears.

Using Select Objects WorkPlane


This sets the WorkPlane based on selecting existing objects.

To use select objects WorkPlane


1
Choose WorkPlane > Select Objects.

3 Enter an offset value in the field and click OK.

The WorkPlane is offset, parallel to the XY axis, based on the value youve specified.

OR
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose WorkPlane from the shortcut menu, then choose Select Objects from the submenu.

Creating a New WorkPlane


You can create a custom WorkPlane by defining the origin, X-axis, and Y-axis. In the Define Work Plane dialog, the X-axis is represented by the Right fields. The Y-axis is represented by the Up fields.

2 Select the object to set as the WorkPlane.

4 00 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Dimming Objects Offset from WorkPlane

To create a new WorkPlane


1
Choose WorkPlane > New Work Plane. The Define Work Plane dialog appears.

To dim objects offset from WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > Show Dimming. A checkmark appears to show the option is activated.

To turn off dimming


Choose WorkPlane > Show Dimming to deselect and remove the checkmark.

2 Enter a name in the Name field. 3 Enter coordinates in the Origin fields to specify
the origin along the X, Y, and Z axes.

Using the Grid


The grid appears on the WorkPlane. You can control the grids size, appearance, and snap options. The grid is defined by the major grid lines (spacing), and minor grid lines (sub-spacing). The minor grid lines can be displayed as lines or dots. Using grid lines while drawing can help with aligning and precise placement. Using the Snap to Grid feature, objects can be snapped to align with the grid lines. By default, the Snap to Grid feature is turned off. Enable this feature in the Snaps menu. To change the Grid Preferences, choose Preferences from the File menu and choose Grid. The Preferences dialog allows you to click the Apply button to see your changes before clicking OK to accept them. For more information, see Using the Grid, which begins on page 293.

4 Enter coordinates in the Right fields to specify


the X-axis along the X, Y, and Z axes. Y-axis along the X, Y, and Z axes.

5 Enter coordinates in the Up fields to specify the 6 Click OK. N O T E : The Origin, Right, and Up values along the X-axis are marked with an asterisk, which means you can reference them using snap tools.

To set a user-created WorkPlane


Choose WorkPlane > User Work Plane and then choose the WorkPlane you want.

To modify a WorkPlane
1
Choose WorkPlane > Modify Work Plane, then choose the WorkPlane you want to modify from the submenu. The Modify Work Plane dialog appears.

To display the grid


Choose WorkPlane > Show Grid (or press Command-G). This turns the grid on or off.

2 Enter values to modify the WorkPlane. 3 Click OK.

To change grid spacing


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To delete a WorkPlane
Choose WorkPlane > Delete Work Plane then choose the WorkPlane you want to delete from the submenu.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the Spacing dX and dY fields
to change the spacing between major grid lines.

4 Enter new values in the Sub-spacing X Divs and Y


Divs fields to change the spacing between minor grid lines. preferences).

Dimming Objects Offset from WorkPlane


When using the Wireframe shade option, you can dim objects that do not lie on the WorkPlane.

5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 40 1

Chapter 36 Controlling Views To change the grid style


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

To zoom using the Dynamic Zoom Tool


1
Ctrl-click the WorkPlane and choose Dynamic Zoom from the shortcut menu. zoom in and out of the drawing.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Grid Dots or Grid Lines button. 4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

2 On the WorkPlane, drag up and down to

To zoom in
1
Choose the Zoom In button in the Main Tool Palette. area where you want to zoom in, then click.

To change the grid size


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Enter new values in the X Size and Y Size fields
to change the number of cells in the grid. preferences).

4 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting

Choose View > Zoom In, or press CommandPlus (+). The view zooms in, using the center of your view as the center point.

OR
Press the ] key.

To turn on Snap to Grid at startup


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Select the Snap to Grid at Startup checkbox. N O T E : For more information, see Using Snaps,
which begins on page 321.

To zoom out
1
Choose the Zoom Out button in the Main Tool Palette. area you want to zoom out from, then click.

2 Position your pointer at the center of the OR

To change grid color


1
Choose File > Preferences, or press CommandComma (,) The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose the Grid category. 3 Under Grid Color, click the New button. The
Color dialog appears.

Choose View > Zoom Out, or press CommandMinus (-). The views zooms out from the center of the WorkPlane.

OR
Press the [ key.

4 Choose the color you want and click OK. 5 Click OK (or click Apply to continue setting
preferences).

To return to the previous zoom scale


Choose View > Zoom Previous. Your view returns to the previous zoom scale.

Zoom Options
Custom Workshop Pro provides a variety of zoom options to help view your drawing precisely. In addition to zooming in and out, you can return to a previous zoom scale, zoom to fit your entire drawing in the view, and many others.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Previous in the shortcut menu.

4 02 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Zoom Options

To zoom to view your entire drawing


Choose View > Zoom All (or press CommandF). Your entire drawing is fit to the window.

To set a zoom scale


1
Choose View > Zoom Scale. The Input String dialog appears.

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom All in the shortcut menu.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

Panning Across the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Pan Tool allows you to quickly move across your drawing. In addition to the Pan Tool, you can access the pan feature by pressing the Space bar at any time, while any tool is active.

To select a zoom window


1
Choose View > Zoom Window (or press Command4).

OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Window in the shortcut menu.

To pan
Hold down the Space bar, then drag to pan across the drawing. Release the Space bar to deactivate the pan function.

2 Drag a selection box around the area where you


want to zoom in.

OR 1
Choose the Dynamic Pan button in the Main Tool Palette. to set the view.

To reset zoom view to default view


Choose View > Zoom Home (or press Command-6).

2 Drag to pan around the drawing. Release OR 1


Ctrl-click the design window and choose Dynamic Pan in the shortcut menu.

To zoom in on a selection
1 Select the object to which you want to zoom. 2 Choose View > Zoom Select. OR
Ctrl-click the design window and choose Zoom Select in the shortcut menu.

2 Drag to pan around the drawing.

Rotating Around the WorkPlane


The Dynamic Rotate Tool allows you view your design by rotating around. In addition to dragging to rotate around, the Dynamic Rotate Tool can auto-rotate around the Z-axis.

Controlling Zoom Options


The zoom ratio controls the amount you zoom up or down. The zoom scale sets the view to a specified amount between the window and drawing space.

To rotate around the WorkPlane manually


1
Choose the Dynamic Rotate button from the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette.

To set the zoom ratio


1
Choose View > Zoom Ratio. The Input String dialog appears.

2 Enter a new value in the field and click OK.

2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane. OR 1


Ctrl-click on the design window and choose Dynamic Rotate from the shortcut menu.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 03

Chapter 36 Controlling Views


2 Drag to rotate around the WorkPlane.

To show/hide the Pen Color dialog


Choose Window > Pen Color.

To rotate around the WorkPlane automatically


1
Drag through the Navigation toolset in the Main Tool Palette to tear off the toolset. The Dynamic Navigation tools appear.

To show/hide the Show-Hide palette


Choose Window > Show-Hide.

To show/hide the Snap Tools dialog


Choose Window > Snaps.

2 Double-click the Dynamic Rotate button to begin


the automatic rotation. rotate.

To show/hide the Render Library


Choose Window > Render Library.

3 Click anywhere on the WorkPlane to stop auto-

To show/hide the Concept Explorer

Controlling Axis Visibility


You can control the axis visibility while youre working.

Choose Window > Concept Explorer.

To show/hide the Inspector


Choose Window > Inspector (or press Command-I).

To show the axis


Choose View > Show Axis. A checkmark appears.

To hide all open dialogs


Choose Window > Hide All Tools. All open dialogs are hidden.

To hide the axis


Choose View > Show Axis. The checkmark disappears.

Controlling Drawing Colors


You can change drawing color as well as the drawing spaces background and foreground colors.

Showing and Hiding Windows


There are a variety of windows that aid in the design process. Each contains specific tools and options that are not always necessary. So, you can show or hide these toolsets and dialogs as needed. For more information, see Controlling Windows, Palettes, and Dialogs, which begins on page 283. You can switch between displaying or hiding in the Window menu. Active dialogs appear with a checkmark next to them.

To change an objects color


Ctrl-click the object you want to change and choose Color from the shortcut menu, then choose the color you want from the submenu. To pick a custom color, click More from the submenu and choose your color from the Colors dialog.

OR 1 Select the object you want to change. 2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog
appears.

To show/hide the Tools palette


Choose Window > Tools.

3 Choose a color and close the dialog. 4 04 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Changing Object Resolution

To change drawing color


1
Click on an empty space in the design window to be sure nothing is selected. appears.

To change curve resolution settings


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

2 Choose Window > Pen Color. The Pen Color dialog 3 Choose the color you want. Each object will be
drawn in this color.

2 Choose the Display Category. 3 From the Object Type pop-up menu, choose
curve.

4 Close the dialog.

4 From the Resolution pop-up menu, choose the


resolution you want.

To change the design window colors


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

5 (optional) Click Apply to see your changes. 6 Click OK.

2 Choose the Colors Category. 3 Under Background, click the thumbnail. The
Colors dialog appears.

To change surface or solid resolution


1
Choose 3D Custom Workshop Pro > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences dialog appears.

4 Select the color you want and click OK. 5 Under Foreground, click the thumbnail. The
Colors dialog appears.

2 Choose the Display Category. 3 From the Object Type pop-up menu, choose
Surface or Solid. Display options appear. resolution you want.

6 Select the color you want and click OK. 7 (optional) Click Apply to see your changes. 8 Click OK.

4 From the Resolution pop-up menu, choose the 5 (optional) Enter the number of isometric lines
you want in the U and V fields.

6 (optional) From the Silhouette pop-up menu,

Changing Object Resolution


You can control an objects resolution, which affects its appearance. By default, objects are drawn with a very fine resolution. You can change the resolution to one of five options: Super Fine, Very Fine, Fine, Medium or Coarse. Iso Lines represent the number of isometric lines that are calculated across the surface. If you specify 5x5 Iso Lines for a curve, a 5x5 grid appears on the object, dividing the object into 5x5 curves. The Force U-V option keeps the U and V values the same. By default, the Show Silhouettes checkbox is selected, so dependant edges are affected by these settings. You can deselect this option to help with rendering speed. You can set the edge color to match the foreground, background, object color, or define a custom color.

choose Off, On or Smart. Smart displays edges if they can be rendered within a certain amount of time. From the Edge Color pop-up menu, choose the method you want to determine the edge color.

8 (optional) Click Apply to see your changes. 9 Click OK.

Show/Hide Objects
You can control your view by choosing to show or hide objects at any time. You can access the ShowHide Tools in the Show-Hide menu. You can also access a limited selection by right-clicking an object. To show objects, they must first be hidden. Once youve shown or hidden objects, you can invert the display to switch hidden and showing objects. You can also turn on and off parents of objects. You can access the Show-Hide palette in the Window menu (Window > Show-Hide).

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 0 5

Chapter 36 Controlling Views To hide object parents


Choose the Hide Parents button in the Show-Hide toolset. Parent objects associated with your selection are hidden.

To show a hidden object


1
Choose the Show button in the Show-Hide toolset. Hidden objects appear on the WorkPlane.

To show object parents


Choose the Show Parents button in the Show-Hide toolset. Parent objects appear.

2 Select the object you want to show.

To show all hidden objects


Choose the Show All Hidden button in the Show-Hide menu. All hidden objects appear.

Working with Layers


You can organize your drawing into different layers to help with organization. You can access the layers on the Concept Explorer; choose Window > Concept Explorer.

To select object to show


Ctrl-click the object you want to show and choose Show Only in the shortcut menu.

OR 1
Choose the Show Only button in the Show-Hide toolset. other objects are hidden.

2 Select the object you want to show. All N O T E : To select multiple objects, hold down the Shift key as you select.

To select an object to hide


Ctrl-click the object you want to hide and choose Hide in the shortcut menu.

OR 1
Choose the Hide button in the Show-Hide toolset. object is hidden.

2 Select the object you want to hide. The N O T E : To select multiple objects, hold down the Shift key as you select.

By default, there are three drawing layers: Construction, Dimension, and Layer1. All objects are drawn on Layer1, but can be moved to another layer easily. An object can only be displayed on one layer, but you can view more than one layer at a time.

To invert show-hide settings


Choose the Invert button in the ShowHide toolset. All hidden objects appear, all showing objects are hidden.

Setting the Work Layer


The first column on the left indicates which layer is the Work Layer.

4 06 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Controlling Layer Visibility

To set the work layer


1
Choose Window > Concept Explorer. The Concept Explorer appears.

Organizing Layers
You can create new top layers and sub-layers for your drawing. Changes made to top layers affect their sub-layers. So if you lock a top layer, its sublayers are also locked. If you delete a top layer, its sub-layers are also deleted, and so on. Top layer that have sub-layers appear with an arrow to their left. You can expand and collapse the list by clicking the arrow. You can place sub-layers within sub-layers, creating a subtree.

2 Click the Layers tab. The Layers appear. 3 Select the an empty cell to set the work layer. OR
Double-click the name of the layer you want to set as the work layer.

Controlling Layer Visibility


The second column from the left indicates which layers are visible and which are hidden. If the layer is visible, an icon appears in the cell. A layers visibility affects all of its sub-layers. You can also isolate a layer so it is the only layer visible, which causes the layer to become the work layer. All other layers are hidden.

To change a layers position


Ctrl-click the layer name you want to move and choose Move Up or Move Down from the shortcut menu.

N O T E : Sometimes options are grayed out because they cannot move in that direction.

To create a new top layer


Click the Create a New Top Level Layer button. A new layer appears.

To hide/show a layer
Select a cell to turn the layer on or off.

OR
Ctrl-click a layer name and select New Layer from the shortcut menu. A new layer appears.

OR
Ctrl-click a cell and choose Show or Hide from the shortcut menu.

N O T E : You cannot hide a work layer.

To create a new sub-layer


1
Select the layer under which you want to create a sub-layer. new sub-layer appears.

To show all layers


Ctrl-click a cell in the second column and choose Show all from the shortcut menu.

2 Click the Create a new sub-layer button. A OR


Ctrl-click the layer under which you want to create a sub-layer and choose New Sublayer from the shortcut menu. A new sub-layer appears.

To hide all layers


Ctrl-click a cell in the second column and choose Hide all from the shortcut menu.

N O T E : You cannon hide a work layer.

To isolate a layer
Ctrl-click the cell of the layer you want to isolate and, from the shortcut menu, choose Isolate Layer. All other layers are hidden.

To delete a layer
1 Select the layer you want to delete. 2 Click the Delete Selected Layer button. N O T E : Deleting top layers deletes all sublayers, as well.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 0 7

Chapter 36 Controlling Views To rename a layer


1
Ctrl-click the layer you want to rename and choose Rename from the shortcut menu. The layer appears in a field. key.

To lock all layers


Ctrl-click on a cell and choose Lock all from the shortcut menu.

2 Enter the name you want and press the Enter

To unlock all layers


Ctrl-click a cell and choose Unlock all from the shortcut menu.

To expand sub-layers
Click the arrow next to the layer name to expand or collapse the sub-layer.

Changing Layer Colors


You can change the color of all objects on each layer using the cells on the far right side of the layer name. You can click through the preset colors, or choose a custom color.

OR
Ctrl-click the layer name and choose Expand Item from the shortcut menu.

To expand a layers entire subtree


Ctrl-click the layer name and choose Expand Branch from the shortcut menu.

To change a layers color


Click the middle column, from the cells on the right, to move through the colors.

To collapse a layers entire subtree


Ctrl-click the layer name and choose Collapse Branch from the shortcut menu.

OR
Ctrl-click the cell and choose a color from the shortcut menu.

To expand/collapse all layers subtrees


Ctrl-click a layer name and choose Expand All, or Collapse All.

To choose a custom color


1
Ctrl-click the cell and choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The Colors dialog appears.

2 Choose the color you want and click OK.

Locking Layers
You can lock layers so no further changes can be made to objects that appear on that layer. The column to the right of the layer name controls the lock feature.

To remove a layers color


Ctrl-click a cell and choose Remove from the shortcut menu.

To remove all layers color


Ctrl-click a cell and choose Remove all from the shortcut menu.

To lock/unlock a layer
Select a cell to turn the lock on or off.

OR
Ctrl-click a cell and choose Lock or Unlock from the shortcut menu.

4 08 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Glossary
Numerics _____________
3D cutaway slider
A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to peel away layers of your design. Using the icon above the slider, you can control the direction from which the cutaway originates. Also called Dollhouse View. A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to move around and view your entire design from above. You can establish views from any angle and save views for future use. See also 3D walk through, controlled walkthrough view, controlled fly-around view. 3D View is a tool that allows you to move around and view your design in photo-realistic 3D. There are three window size options for viewing in 3D View: 3D Quarter View, Split Plan, and 3D Full View. Using 3D View you can add colors and materials to the objects and entities in your design, including walls, furniture, roofs, walkways, and much, much more. See also 3D fly around, 3D walk through, accessory, controlled fly around, controlled walk through, material. A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to move around and view your design as if you were walking through it. You can establish views from any angle and save views for future use. See also 3D fly around view, controlled walkthrough view, controlled fly-around view.

A ________________
accessory
Decorative items such as drapes, shutters, or wall art that you can place in Punch! 3D View. Accessories are designed to track the walls, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls. A drawing component that gives information about the drawing. Examples of annotations include dimensions, text, and leaders. An entity consisting of two points connected by a gradually curved segment. Arcs can be used to create interior and exterior walls, staircases, railings, property and boundary lines, pathways and driveways as well as retaining walls. See also circular arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve. A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to quickly add selected objects, plants, trim, colors, and materials to your design with one click.

3D fly around view

annotation

arc

3D View

AutoClick Placement

3D walk through

B ________________
baluster beam
One of a series of vertical supports between beams for a handrail. A structural element that helps support a building or heavy load and take the weight off the walls or roof above. Punch! allows you to create beams made of steel, wood or a custom material.

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 0 9

Glossary
building pad
An area of firm, level ground upon which a buildings foundation is made. when stored. When the file or program is open or recalled, the formula activates or decompresses the information so it appears as it was originally.

C ________________
cased opening centerpoint
A door-shaped opening in a wall, which is framed like a doorway. A centerpoint is a point within a circle, from which the radius and equidistance can be determined. See also circle, curve. A geometric entity defined by a centerpoint and a radius. Punch! allows you to convert circles to walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. A circle differs from a curve in that a circles points are equidistant from the centerpoint. See also curve, arc, circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon. An entity consisting of a segment between two points on a circle. Circular arcs can be converted into interior and exterior walls, staircases, railings, property and boundary lines, pathways, and driveways, as well as retaining walls and many more objects. See also arc, detail tab, circle, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon, curve. A feature of Punch! 3D View that allows you to display your project in a semi-transparent mode. ClearView allows you to see nearby surfaces, even while items or surfaces behind them are also visible. A temporary storage area for data you have cut or copied. A clipboard can only hold one item at a time. See also paste, edit menu. An acronym for Compression/Decompression, is a program that analyzes large files and programs for repetition and redundancies. When found, they are replaced with a formula to reduce or compress the number of bytes the file or program consumes

color ramp

A color selection method in which you choose a color from a spectrum organized by shade and hue, then use the color library to find the correct shade. Colors appear from light to dark. A feature that allows you to orient your design to north. You can establish the true north setting for your design, which will affect the position of the sun and the shadows, as well as determine the best location for a deck, pool or large windows. See also true north. Realistic 3D features such as drapes, wainscoting, furniture, paint, and other real-world items that can be viewed in your 3D View window. A geometric entity consisting of a smoothly sloping segment. Punch! allows you to create curves and convert them to walls, floors, decks, and topographical objects such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also circle, arc, circular arc, oval, polygon, polylines, rectangle, square, multigon. The amount of slope in a curved segment. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50, with 1 equaling only a slightly curved segment, and 50 equaling a greatly-exaggerated curve.

compass

circle

content

curve

circular arc

curve tension

ClearView

D _________________
Decorator Palette diameter
A 3D View feature that allows you to organize and store colors and materials for your 3D design. A geometric measurement that describes the distance, through the center, between points on a circle. See also circle. An annotation that describes the length, width or height of an object or entity. See 3D cutaway slider.

clipboard

codec

dimension

dollhouse view

4 1 0 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

door header dormer

See header. A small window set vertically in a gable, that projects from an angled roof. See also gable roof, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

allows you to control the elevation of everything, from your foundation to a window or light switch. See also elevation slider.

elevation field

A dynamic interface feature that allows you to change the working elevation or a selected objects elevation by simply entering the values you want and pressing the Enter key. This on-the-fly feature does not require you to click in the field or perform any other action to enter the desired elevation values.

drag

ellipse entity

Drag is a manual action performed using your mouse, to move an object or entity from one location to another. You select the object or entity, hold down your left mouse button, then drag your mouse to the desired location and release the mouse button to drop the object. The ratio between the size of your drawing screen and the real-world object you are drawing. Higher values on the screen units side make it easier to draw small details. Higher values on the world units side make it easier to draw large details. Also called plan scale.

See oval. 2D items such as lines, arcs, and circles that have not been assigned properties and do not display in 3D. See also object. To convert a two-dimensional object into a threedimensional object by giving the object depth. Extrude is available in 3D Custom Workshop Pro.

drawing scale

extrude

F _________________
fill
Punch! defines the term fill in two separate contexts. When drawing geometric entities, fill refers to a solid color or hatch pattern that appears inside of a closed entity, such as a rectangle or circle. When drawing topography objects, fill is a man-made deposit of natural soils or rock products and waste materials used to raise an area of land or to provide a bed for plants or a pool. An editing feature that allows you to select an object and reverse it horizontally or vertically. An opening in the floor used to allow stair access or to create a loft. See 3D fly around.

DWG DXF

The binary file format used by AutoCAD. An ASCII- or binary-based file format developed by Autodesk, Inc. and widely supported by CAD programs.

flip

E _________________
elevation
A measurement that describes an object or entitys distance above or below the working level. Topographic elevation refers to an object or entitys distance above or below sea level. Punch!

floor cutout fly around

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 1 1

Glossary
foundation
An architectural structure that transmits loads from a building to the underlying ground. It supports the weight of the building and provides stability. See beam.

H _________________
header
A structural element above a door or window that transfers stress to the load-bearing studs on either side of the opening. A roof defined by four evenly sloped planes meeting at a ridge peak. A hip roof is supported by hip rafters at each of the four corners. See also dormer, gable roof, gambrel roof, roof pitch. An acronym for heating, ventilation, and airconditioning. A construction term that refers to objects associated with temperature control and air flow throughout a building, such as air ducts, air conditioners, furnaces, and so on.

framing beam free rotate

hip roof

An editing feature that allows you to rotate an object or entity, by clicking and dragging.

G ________________
gable roof
A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of equal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are supported by two equally-sized triangular wall extensions, known as gables. See also dormer, gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch. A roof defined by four pitches; two on each side. The bottom slopes of each side are more steep than the top slopes. Gambrel roofs are common on barns. See also dormer, gable roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

hvac

J _________________
join
An editing procedure in which two arcs, lines, or polylines, whose endpoints are nearby, are converted into a single entity. See join sensitivity. A setting that determines the acceptable distance between the endpoints of two entities, before they can be joined. A structural element that runs horizontally from wall to wall in support of ceiling or floor. A joist is typically supported by a beam. See beam, rafter.

gambrel roof

join sensitivity

joist

L _________________
line grid
A geometric entity consisting of two points, connected by a straight segment. Punch! lets you use lines to define property boundaries, and so on. Walls and other objects may be comprised of lines, with additional properties such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, ovals, polygons, polylines, rectangles, squares.

A visual drawing aid consisting of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical lines. In 2D plan view, grids are always oriented on the ground. 3D grids allow you to draw on the front or sides (lateral) of an object. See also Snap to Grid.

4 1 2 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

M _________________
material
A material is a textured or decorated object that affects another object or entitys appearance. Brick, stone, carpet, fabric, wood, and grass are all examples of materials Punch! offers to enhance and customize your design. See also color tab, paint tab. An editing feature that allows you to select an object and place a horizontally or vertically reversed copy of it. A geometric entity consisting of multiple points, connected by straight line segments. Punch! allows you to convert multigons to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. Also called a polygon. See also arc, circle, oval, polylines, rectangle, square, curve, detail tab.

object selection mode

An editing feature that allows you to control the size and location of an entire object. Using object selection mode, you can modify the size and location, without affecting the proportion. See also point selection mode. An annotation consisting of a length dimension that appears at a specific distance from the object or entity it is measuring. A measure of an objects transparency. The more opaque an object is, the less transparent it is. See also translucent, transparent. A file management feature that allows you to create custom categories to sort and store objects, templates, and trim. This is useful when placing many different types of objects or trim throughout your design and while working with an assortment of templates. A geometric entity consisting of a closed curve that resembles a flattened circle. Punch! lets you use ovals to define property boundaries, animation paths, and so on. Walls and other objects may be comprised of lines with additional properties, such as width and height. See also arcs, circles, multigons, polylines, rectangles, squares.

offset dimension

mirror

opacity

multigon

organizer

oval

N _________________
notation
An annotation in the form of text, that can be used as a label, reminder, or description; any type of information you want to include for yourself or anyone viewing your design. An editing feature that allows you to use the arrow keys to move a selection one grid unit to the left, right, top, or bottom. When Snap to Grid is turned off, Nudge moves the object or feature one pixel at a time, instead of one grid unit. See also grid, Snap to Grid.

nudge

P _________________
palette
A collection of colors and materials you choose and organize, based on your design needs. Creating a palette is very helpful when working with and applying a variety of colors and materials throughout your design, because you can organize the contents into groups and name each group, based on where it belongs in your design. See also 3D View. A viewing tool that lets you scroll, horizontally or vertically, over your design. See also zoom tool. A 2D representation of a design in which the drawing is viewed from above.

O _________________
object
A representation of a real-world item such as a door, window, furniture or plant. An object may be comprised of entities, such as lines, circles, and polylines in 2D, but in 3D View, the object will be displayed as a realistic item. See also entity.

pan tool

plan view

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 413

Glossary
plan scale
See drawing scale. A sorting feature that allows you to display only plants that meet your criteria. For instance, you can use the PlantFinder to narrow the offerings to only those plants that require only minimal sunlight. See multigon. An add-on application that allows you to enhance your Punch! project.

room template

PlantFinder

A predrawn design, for a kitchen, bath, or other room, that you can place in your drawing, then customize to fit your own design.

S _________________
saltbox roof
A roof defined by two evenly sloped planes of unequal lengths meeting at a ridge peak. The sloped sides are supported by two irregularly-sized triangular wall extensions. See also dormer, gable roof gambrel roof, hip roof, roof pitch.

polygon

PowerTool

proxy settings

A virtual buffer between your computer and the information you are accessing on the Internet. Proxy settings can be customized to restrict your computer from certain information.

R ________________
rafter
A structural element that extends from the top of a wall to the ridge peak and supports a roof. A geometric entity consisting of four points, connected by four straight line segments. Punch! allows you to convert rectangles to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc, circle, oval, multigon, polyline, multigon, square, curve, detail tab. To reverse the effects of an undo command. See also undo. See grid.

rectangle

scale

See drawing scale. An editing feature that allows you to place items at regular points in your drawing. When Snap to Grid is turned on, items that are placed in the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. A rectangle in which all four sides are of equal length. Punch! allows you to convert squares to walls, floors, decks, stairs, railings, and topographical objects, such as retaining walls and ground fill areas. See also arc, circle, curve, detail tab, oval, multigon, polyline, rectangle. A structural element that runs vertically in support of the walls. Most building codes require studs to be placed every 16", to provide adequate support. See also framing beam, joists.

Snap to Grid

redo

square

reference grid rim joist

A structural element that ties the ends of floor trusses together. See also framing beam, beam. The angle of a roof commonly expressed as a ratio of vertical rise to horizontal run. A pitch of 8:12 means that the roof rises 8 for 12 of horizontal run.

roof pitch

stud

4 1 4 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

symbol

2D representations of 3D objects such as furniture, doors, or electrical outlets.

unit of measurement

T _________________
template texture
See room template. A material surface, such as wood or brick, applied to a 3D wall or object. See also material. A characteristic of a material or object that describes lights ability to pass through it. Translucency differs from transparency in that a transparent object, such as clear glass, can be seen through, while a translucent object, such as frosted glass, only allows light to pass through. See also transparent, opacity. A characteristic of a material or object that describes your ability to see through it. See also translucent, opacity. A navigational term referring to the direction of the North Pole relative to the navigators position. See also compass. A structural element that helps support a roof, top floor or beam. A truss is designed in a triangular shape and is stronger than a beam. See also, beam, joist.

The notation system used to enter and display distances, angles, and areas. Punch! allows you to select either English, to display measurements using feet and inches, or Metric, to display measurements using meters. An acronym for Uniform Resource Locator, which specifies a websites unique address. Typically, URLs are prefaced by http://www. A method for determining hardiness zones. Hardiness zones are determined based on average temperature and amount of sunlight.

URL

translucent

USDA zone maps

transparent

true north

truss

V _________________
virtual ruler
A visual drawing aid that allows you to determine lengths, in feet and inches. The virtual ruler can be positioned in any way and extended to reach from one end of a design to the other. Virtual Reality Modeling Language, a standard file format for representing 3D objects on the World Wide Web.

U _________________
undo
To reverse the effects of the most recent draw or edit operation. Punch! allows you to undo up to 50 operations. See also undo parameters. A setting that allows you to determine the number of operations you can undo. Punch! allows you to undo up to 50 operations, however, higher values may impact performance.

VRML

undo parameters

W _________________
wainscotting
A decorative interior wall surface, typically made of wood, that contrasts with the wall surface above it. See 3D walkthrough.

walkthrough

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 1 5

Glossary
window grill
The vertical and horizontal strips of wood in a window that separate the panes of glass. Punch! allows you to customize your window grill style, so your window has one large piece of glass, or multiple panes. See header.

window header window molding

The wood casing around the outside of a window opening. See elevation.

working elevation working floor

A working floor is a term that describes which level of your design you are currently working on.

Z ________________
zone map
See USDA zone map. A setting that allows you to control how much magnification is applied each time you click the zoom tool. A viewing tool that allows you to magnify your drawing.

zoom factor

zoom tool

4 1 6 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

Index
Numerics
2D arranging windows 90 objects 34 panning the view 24 reset view 24, 256 symbols 34 view 24 viewing in 3D 30 zooming 24 2D tool palette (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 300 3D adding shadows 96 arranging windows 90 floating view 90 lighting intensity 95 objects 34 viewing speed 92 viewpoint 92 walkthrough 90 3D cutaway slider 29 3D fly around view in Door Designer 257 in Fireplace Assistant 263 in Window Designer 257 3D lighting intensity in Fireplace Assistant 265 3D objects nudge (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 333 resize 44 resize (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 339 3D selection tool 31 3D tool palette (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 324 3D view customizing 101 decorator palette 99 opening a window 90 printing 61 saving 101 3D viewing speed in Door Designer 257 3D walk through in Fireplace Assistant 263 3-point freehand roof 176 4-point freehand roof 176

A
accessories 135 organizer 45 add cabinet hardware 143, 205 add door hardware 132 add point 66, 222 adding shadows 95 shadows (Fireplace Assistant) 265 adding points (Site Planner) 201 aerial view, altitude 91 age, customizing plant 37 air conditioning unit adding 186 rotating 186 air ducts, placing 184 align faces (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 390 align object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 389 align text 76 alignment angles (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 293 alignment options 85 alter roof slope 177 altitude, aerial 91 ambient light (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 341 angle verification 294 angled text 77 annotations 76 apply color 40 in 3D Custom Workshop Pro 394 apply material 43 in 3D Custom Workshop Pro 394 in Fireplace Assistant 264 arc center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 303 circular arc door components (Door Designer) 233 circular window casings (Window Designer) 248 drawing 218 on tangent (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 303 open arc door components (Door Designer) 233 open arc window casings (Window Designer) 247

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 1 7

Index
start, end, on (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 302 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 303 two points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 302 area verification 294 Auto Reset Tools in Door Designer 232 in Window Designer 246 AutoClick Placement 44 auto-floor 127 automatic dimensions, turn off 87, 128 automatic roof generate 174 generation options 122 automatic roofs (QuickStart) 117 auto-rotate (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 404 autosnap options 84 axis visibility 404 Azimuth (Site Planner) 200 camera (PhotoView) 269 camera angle 92 cased opening 48 ceiling changing height 127 placing automatic ceiling 129 ceiling and floor outlets, placing 148 ceiling fan 151 ceiling heights, setting 72 ceiling speaker 154 center text 76 center, snap to in Door Designer 241 in Window Designer 255 chain link fence 208 chamfer 66 in Door Designer 236 in Window Designer 250 chamfer 2D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 378 chamfer 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 382 change 3D Custom Workshop Pro layer 376 object name 375 object resolution 375 object type 377 solid 377 to surface 377 direction (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 375 exterior wall length 126 font of annotations 76 roof pitch 177 roof slope 177 style of line 221 thickness of line 220 width, pathway 206 change object resolution 405 check objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 294 chimney dimensions (Fireplace Assistant) 262 circle center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 303 one point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 303 opposite points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 304 tangent to three existing curve (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 304 tangent to two existing curves (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 304 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 304 circle door casings, drawing (Door Designer) 232 circle window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 246 circles, drawing 216 circular arc, drawing 218 circular duplicate (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 388 circumscribed polygon (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 clear 64 ClearView 92 clipboard 64 closet (QuickStart) 116 closing files 54

B
backup generator 159 backup generator panel 159 baluster spacing 194 base trim 39 baseboard heaters 187 basic terminology 12 bathroom (QuickStart) 116 bathtubs, placing 168 battery power supply, uninterruptible power supply 160 bay wall 130 beam (foundation) dimensioning 122 length 122 stiffener 122 beam (framing) size 225 specifying type 225 bearing (Site Planner) 200 bedroom (QuickStart) 116 blend 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 382 blinds 135 block (3D Custom Workshop Pro) center point 325 diagonal points 326 two points 325 type XYZ values 326 break a wall 130 bring to front 221 building green 28

C
cabinet hardware, add or remove 143, 205 cable jack 152 calculating construction costs 277 calculating square footage 75

4 1 8 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

color 404 3D Custom Workshop Pro background 290 foreground 290 object 290, 393 pen 290 apply 40 apply custom 42 background 26 ClearView 27 find applied 42 grid line 27 inactive floor 26 interior fill 26 plan layer 25 preferences 17 reset all 28 topography line 27 wireframe background 27 color ramp 41 color, printing plan in 59 colors organizer 45 colors, preferences 16 column material (framing) 226 size (framing) 226 combine objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 344, 384 concept explorer (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 284 cone (3D Custom Workshop Pro) center point 327 diagonal points 328 two points 328 conic four points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 305 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 305 two points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 305 connect object points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 390 connector switches 149 construction costs, calculating (Estimator) 277 construction materials (RealModel) 102 content folder (PhotoView) 271 content library, preferences 16 content tab 9 contents, package 4 coordinate verification 294 copy 64 copy objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 372 copying objects between floors 69 corner, snap to in Door Designer 241 in Window Designer 255 count objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 294 counter bore hole (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 331 counter sink hole (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 331 cover surface (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 crown molding 39 cues, graphic 12 curtains 135 curve a pathway 206

curve door components, drawing (Door Designer) 234 curve tension 220 curve window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 248 curved edging 208 property line 200 railing 140 railing (deck) 197 staircase 138 staircases (deck) 195 wall 130 curves, drawing 219 custom color 42 custom color palette 41 custom doors (Door Designer) 234 custom room (QuickStart) 116 custom windows (Window Designer) 248 customize 3D view 101 customizing colors (Estimator) 276 customizing railing 141 cut 64 cut solid from profile (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 352 cutaway slider 29 cylinder (3D Custom Workshop Pro) center point 326 diagonal points 327 two points 327

D
deck cut-out 197 deck height, change 193 deck plan tab 191 deck properties 227 decks drawing 192 handrails 194 decorator palette 99 deep select tool (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 310, 332, 354, 372 default ceiling height 72 default views (Fireplace Assistant) 265 defining drawing method (Site Planner) 200 delete point 222 deleting a point (Site Planner) 201 design window 6 detail plan tab 215 diameter dimension 86 digital picture, importing in PhotoView 269 dim offset objects 401 dimensions adding between walls 86 change endpoint 87 changing location 128 hiding 87, 121, 128 dimensions, defining (Fireplace Assistant) 261 dimming lights 150 dining room (QuickStart) 116

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 1 9

Index
direction 3D Custom Workshop Pro change 375 show 375 display grid 293 display preferences (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 282 display settings 19 distance verification 294 dollhouse view 29 dome camera 155 door 48 door categories creating (Door Designer) 243 deleting (Door Designer) 243 renaming (Door Designer) 243 Door Designer 231 door dimensions, hiding 87, 128 door hardware, add or remove 132 door properties 131 doors 130 creating (Door Designer) 243 deleting (Door Designer) 243 door style 131 importing (Door Designer) 243 moving (Door Designer) 243 resizing 131 show features in 3D 101 swing angle 132 dormer 178 double doors 133 drag-and-drop, objects 34 drains, floor 166 drapes 135 drawing 3D blocks (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 325 3D cones (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 327 3D cylinders (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 326 3D prisms (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 328 3D pyramids (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 329 3D slabs (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 330 3D spheres (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 324 arc window casings (Window Designer) 248 arcs 218 arcs (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 302 circle door casings (Door Designer) 232 circle window casings (Window Designer) 246 circles 216 circles (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 303 circular arc door components (Door Designer) 233 circular arcs 218 conics (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 304 curve door components (Door Designer) 234 curve window casings (Window Designer) 248 curves 219 ellipses (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 305 holes (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 330 line door components (Door Designer) 234 line window casings (Window Designer) 248 lines 217 lines (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 300 multigon door components (Door Designer) 233 multigon window casings (Window Designer) 247 multigons 219 open arc door components (Door Designer) 233 open arc window casings (Window Designer) 247 oval door casings (Door Designer) 232 oval window casings (Window Designer) 246 ovals 216 polygon door casings (Door Designer) 233 polygon window casings (Window Designer) 247 polygons 217 polygons (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 rectangle door casings (Door Designer) 232 rectangle window casings (Window Designer) 246 rectangles 216 splines (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 squares 216 drawing scale, setting 21, 72 driveway 206 ducts, placing 184 duplicate, along path (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 389 duplicate, circular (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 388 duplicate, linear (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 387 dynamic rotate 403

E
edging 207 edit patio 204 edit property line 200 edit text 77 editing a drawing 63 editing a point (Site Planner) 201 editing objects 44 electrical outlet 148 electrical plan tab 147 elevate to an existing surface 68 elevating objects 67 elevating, PhotoView image 271 Elevation Editor 47 elevation slider 7 elevation, adjusting 90 in Fireplace Assistant 263 ellipse center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 305 diagonal points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 305 major axis (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 opposite points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 ellipses, see drawing circles and ovals 216 email plans 58 endpoint, snap to in Door Designer 240 in Window Designer 255 Estimator 275 excavate topography 213 existing files, opening 54

4 20 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

exiting 55 export a pricelist (Estimator) 277 fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop (Fireplace Assistant) 265 export file (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 285 extrude solid from profile (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 351 extruding surface (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 eyeglasses 93

F
face dimensions (Fireplace Assistant) 261 family room (QuickStart) 116 fan, ceiling 151 features, moving between plans 69 fences drawing 208 file format (PhotoView) 270 file, export (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 285 file, import (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 285 files closing 54 new 54 opening 54 printing 59 saving 55 fill 207 region 202 reshaping 202 fillet 66 in Door Designer 236 in Window Designer 250 fillet 2D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 378 fills 220 find applied 42 firebox dimensions (Fireplace Assistant) 261 flat roof 177 flat screen television 153 flip in Door Designer 237 in Window Designer 252 PhotoView image 272 flip view 397 flip, entire plan 67 float above topography 69 floating 3D view 29 flood lights, adding 151 floor cutout, drawing 141 floor drains 166 floor plan tab 125 floor speaker 154 flooring automatic 129 drawing manually 141 joists 224 reshaping 141 floors, adding 137 flowers 36

flush right text 76 fly around adjusting altitude (Fireplace Assistant) 264 adjusting speed 92 center of reference 91 in Door Designer 257 in Window Designer 257 speed (Door Designer) 257 follow topography 69 font 77 forum 13 foundation piers 123 foundation properties 120 foundation slab 120 foundation slope, changing 123 foundation width 120 foundation, concrete slab 120 foundation, reshaping 121 foundation, show/hide dimensions 121 four-point freehand roof 176 framing beam 224 framing material 224 framing, render in 92 free rotate 66 in Door Designer 235 in Window Designer 249 freeze detector 160 French doors 133

G
gable roof 174 gambrel roof 180 garage (QuickStart) 116 gas bib 166 gate adding 210 resizing 210 gates 208 glass break detector ceiling mounted 156 wall mounted 156 glow (lighting) 150 going green 28 green tips 28 grid 83 display 293 display (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 401 size 401 spacing 293 style 293 style (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 401 grid settings in Door Designer 239 in Window Designer 254 grid spacing 84 grid style 84 grid, displaying 84 grill settings, window 135

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 42 1

Index
ground fill region 202 group objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 341, 375 growing, plants 38 guide, about this 12 installation 4 insulation, specifying 224 intensity, lighting 95 in Fireplace Assistant 265 intercom 160 interrupt rendering 94 intersection, snap to in Door Designer 241 in Window Designer 255 inverse fillet 66 in Door Designer 236 in Window Designer 250 irregular walls 130

H
hallway (QuickStart) 116 handrails (deck) height 194 handrails (deck) remove 194 hardiness zone maps 37 hearth dimensions (Fireplace Assistant) 262 hearth, include (Fireplace Assistant) 262 heat detector 157 heat pump 186 heat/vent lights, dimming 150 heating units, adding 186 hide axis 404 hide features in 3D 101 hide Floor Plan Trace image 79 hide objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 284 hide plan layers 25, 82 hide points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 343, 378 hide tools (Estimator) 276 hide windows 404 hip roof 174 history list 10, 64 hole (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 330 hole, counter bore (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 331 hole, counter sink (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 331 home automation touch-panel 158 home plans, sample 54 home security, adding 154 home theater, adding 153 hose bib, placing 166 hot water heater 171 how to estimate materials needed 277 How-To Center 7 hvac tab 183

J
jacks, phone and cable 152 join sensitivity (Door Designer) 238, 252 joist spacing 121 joists angle, specifying 225 material, specifying 225 size, specifying 225 spacing, specifying 225

K
kitchen (QuickStart) 116

L
landing, staircases 138 landscape plan tab 199 landscape, designing 199 laser alignment 85 lathe solid (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 351 launch 3D Custom Workshop Pro 282 Elevation Editor 48 Estimator 276 Floor Plan Trace 78 launch PowerTool 79 laundry room (QuickStart) 116 layer change (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 376 print (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 288 layer, viewing plan 25, 83 layers color 408 delete 407 lock/unlock 408 new 407 organizing 407 rename 407 visibility 407 work layer 406 layers, concept explorer 406

I
identify color material in 3D 31 import file (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 285 importing 55 importing (Floor Plan Trace) 78 importing DXF 215 importing image (PhotoView) 270 importing objects 34 inscribed polygon (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 insert faces (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 390 insert PhotoView image 270 inserting a point (Site Planner) 201 Inspector 9 history 10, 64 in 3D Custom Workshop Pro 285 properties 9 tips & tricks 10

4 22 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

layers, viewing 24, 83 leader dimension 86 length dimension 86 length verification 294 library paneling 39 light switch 148 lighting adding (Fireplace Assistant) 265 adding interior 149 adding outdoor 95 adjusting ambient light (outdoor) 96 adjusting intensity (Fireplace Assistant) 265 adjusting intensity (outdoor) 95 adjusting suns shadow (outdoor) 96 daytime (outdoor) 96 dimming 150 line construction (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 302 double (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 301 midpoint (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 301 multiple (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 301 parallel (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 301 single (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 300 line door components, drawing (Door Designer) 234 line style 221 line window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 248 line with an arc (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 301 linear array object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 389 linear duplicate (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 387 lines, drawing 217 living room (QuickStart) 116 load bearing walls, specifying 224 locating PhotoView image 271 lock objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 341, 375 log home components 35 lot properties 74

menu bar 6 minimum distance verification 294 mirror in Door Designer 237 in Window Designer 252 mirror object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 387 modifying deck staircases 196 modifying staircases 139 motion detector 155 move to back (QuickStart) 116 move to front (QuickStart) 116 move, entire plan 70 moving along the grid 84 ceiling fan 152 features between plans 69 objects 65 objects between floors 69 Photoview image 270 plants 37 sinks 168 multigon door components, drawing (Door Designer) 233 multigon window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 247 multigon, drawing 219

N
network router 158 new view 397 new workplane view 400 notations 76 n-sided polygon (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 nudge 64 nudge 3D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 333 nudge object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 312, 385

M
main tool palette (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 283 mantel dimensions (Fireplace Assistant) 262 mantel, include (Fireplace Assistant) 262 mass properties verification (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 294 master bedroom (QuickStart) 116 master pricelist, creating in Estimator 277 matching scale (Floor Plan Trace) 78 mate faces (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 390 material estimations (Estimator) 277 material importer 55 material, apply 43 material, applying (Fireplace Assistant) 264 material, attaching (RealModel) 105 material, find applied 42 material, printing template (RealModel) 104 materials organizer 45 measurement tools 8 measurements, preferences 16 measurements, using the Virtual Ruler 87

O
object color 404 color (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 393 nudge (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 312 object count (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 294 object libraries 34 object organizer 45 object resolution, change 405 object selection mode in Door Designer 238 in Window Designer 252 object-level editing 222 objects 55 combine (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 344 copying 69 copying between floors 69 editing 44 elevating 67 in Custom Workshop Pro align 389 align faces 390

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 23

Index
change name 375 change resolution 375 change type 377 circular duplicate 388 combine 384 connect points 390 copy 372 insert faces 390 linear array 389 linear duplicate 387 mate faces 390 mirror 387 nudge 385 path duplicate 389 reshape 2D 374 reshape 3D 374 resize 2D 317, 374 resize 3D 372 rotate 386 scale 386 simplify 377 stretch 390 subtract 385

moving 65 moving by coordinates 65 renaming 45 rotating 65 selecting (Door Designer) 238 selecting (Window Designer) 252 subtract 344 objects, moving between floors 69 office (QuickStart) 116 offset dimension 86 opacity, in ClearView 93 open staircases 139 opening 48 Organizers 45 outdoor hose bib 166 outlets, placing 148 oval door casings (Door Designer) 232 oval door casings, drawing (Door Designer) 232 oval window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 246 ovals, drawing 216

P
paint 40 palette, decorator 99 pan tool 24 paste 64 path duplicate (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 389 pathway 206 change width 206 straight or curved 206 patio 203 pen color palette (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 283 perimeter, foundation 120 perpendicular, snap to in Door Designer 241 in Window Designer 255 phone jack 152

photo beam 156 photo cell 158 photograph (PhotoView) 269 PhotoView 269 file format 270 tips for using 269 picture of my home (PhotoView) 272 piers, foundation 123 pitch, roof 177 placing bathtubs 168 ceiling and floor outlets 148 gas bib 166 hose bib 166 hot water heater 171 showers 169 sinks 167 sprinkler heads 211 toilets 166 plan tab, selecting 9 plan tabs 8 plan, views 24 planar properties verification 294 plans, customizing visible 25, 82 plant categories 36 plant database 38 plant growth meter 38 PlantFinder 38 plants adding 36 customizing age 37 find by name 38 grow 38 identify 37 moving 37 sorting 38 plants organizer 45 plants, growing 38 plotter 59 plumbing tab 165 point tools 300 point-level editing 222 points along curve (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 300 points, show/hide (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 343, 378 polygon circumscribed (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 door casings, drawing (Door Designer) 233 from curves (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 inscribed (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 n-sided (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 309 window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 247 polygons, drawing 217 pond, adding 207 post tension strand 123 PowerTools 79 preferences 16 preferences, reset (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 294 preview window 8 print 103

4 24 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

print templates (RealModel) 103 printer setup (RealModel) 103 printing 3D view 61 printing drawing in color 59 printing floor plans 59 print to fit page 60 print to scale 61 print, page layout (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 287 printing a pricelist (Estimator) 278 priority (QuickStart) 116 prism (3D Custom Workshop Pro) center point 328 diagonal points 329 two points 328 properties Inspector 9 property line 200 pumps (heat), adding 186 Punch! Home Design installing 4 registering 4 uses for 3 Punch! Online Community 13 punchsoftware.com 13 pyramid (3D Custom Workshop Pro) center point 329 diagonal points 330 two points 329

Q
QuickStart 59 second video 118

R
rafter material, specifying 226 size, specifying 226 spacing, specifying 226 rafter properties 226 railings adding 140 modifying 140 railings (deck) adding 197 RealModel 89, 102 attaching template textures & colors 105 scale 102 rearrange 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 332 rearranging 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 311 rearranging objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 385 recently opened files 54 recessed lights, dimming 150 rectangle center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 diagonal (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 door casings, drawing (Door Designer) 232 major axis (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306

three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 306 window casings, drawing (Window Designer) 246 rectangles, drawing 216 redo 10, 64 reference grid 83 regenerate roofs in 2D (QuickStart) 117 region, fill 202 registering the program 4 registration 4 relative (Site Planner) 200 remove cabinet hardware 143, 205 remove door hardware 132 remove point 66 remove skirt trim 194 remove trim 39 remove wall trim 40 render shade (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 339 rendering options 94 rendering styles ClearView 92 framing 92 wireframe 92 rendering, adjusting quality 94 rendering, stopping process 94 replacing PhotoView image 271 requirements, system 4 reset 3D view 29 reset preferences (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 294 resetting 2D view 24, 82, 117, 256 reshape add point 66 add points (Door Designer) 236 add points (Window Designer) 250 decks 192 flooring 141 remove point 66 remove points (Door Designer) 236 reshape 2D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 374 reshape 3D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 374 reshaping, fill 202 resize 3D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 339 object 44 resize 2D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 317, 374 resize 3D object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 372 resize exterior wall 126 resizing bathtubs 169 doors 131 gates 210 PhotoView image 272 railing (deck) 197 roofing 177 staircases 196 tubs 169 retaining walls 210 changing height 211

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 2 5

Index
reverse staircases 139 revolving surface (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 right align text 76 rim joists, specifying 226 roof flat 177 four-point 176 gable 174 gambrel 178, 180 hip 174 saltbox 181 three-point 176 roof cutout 178 roof options, automatic roof 122 roof pitch, change 177 roof slope, change 177 roof trusses 226 roof, resizing 177 roofing tab 173 roofs adding 174 automatically generate 174 constructing templates (RealModel) 104 room templates 145 rotate 65 dynamic rotate 403 hvac units 186 one point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 386 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 386 view 397 walls 128 rotate automatically (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 404 rotate entire plan 70 rotate, specified amount 66 in Door Designer 235 in Window Designer 249 rotated text 77 round polygon center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 307 diagonal points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 307 major axis (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 307 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 307 router, network 158 rules 220 scale, setting 21, 72 scanned image, importing (PhotoView) 269 scroll mouse zoom 24, 82, 242, 256 second floor, adding 137 security access keypad pedestal mount 158 wall mount 157 security camera 154 security contact 155 security control panel 157 security keypad 156 segment center, snap to in Door Designer 240 in Window Designer 255 segment offset, snap to in Door Designer 241 in Window Designer 256 segment, snap to in Door Designer 241 in Window Designer 256 select mask dialog, display (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 285 select material/paint tool 31 select objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 288 selecting in 3D 31 selection mode, object in Door Designer 238 in Window Designer 252 selection preferences (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 288 selection tool (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 310, 332, 354, 372 selection, rotating 65 send to back 221 serial number 111 settings, display 19 shade custom options (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 340 render options (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 339 shadows, adding 96 shadows, adding (Fireplace Assistant) 265 short cut key assign (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 286 create (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 286 delete (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 286 revert to factory settings (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 286 show axis 404 show Floor Plan Trace image 79 show objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 284 show points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 343, 378 show QuickStart at startup 118 show tools (Estimator) 276 Show Topography Lines 87 show windows 404 show/hide tools 405 show-hide palette (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 284 shrubs 36 sidewalk 206 simple hole (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 330 simplify object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 377

S
saltbox roof 181 sample plans 54 satellite dish 153 satellite receiver 153 save 3D view 101 save as 55 save to object library (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 286 saving files 55 scale differential (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 386 uniform (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 386 scale, defining (RealModel) 102

4 26 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

single point 300 sinks 168 Site Planner 200 skin surface (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 skirt trim (deck), editing 194 skylight 179 slab foundation 120, 123 slab height 120 slot polygon center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 308 diagonal points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 308 major axis (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 308 three points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 308 smoke detector 152 snap filter (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 284 snap filters (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 284 snap options 84 snap points alignment angles (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 293 creation angles (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 293 on/off (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 292, 321 percentage point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 293 radius (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 293 snap points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 291, 321, 344, 366, 391 snap to center (Door Designer) 241 center (Window Designer) 255 corner (Door Designer) 241 corner (Window Designer) 255 endpoint (Door Designer) 240 endpoint (Window Designer) 255 intersection (Door Designer) 241 intersection (Window Designer) 255 perpendicular (Door Designer) 241 perpendicular (Window Designer) 255 segment (Door Designer) 241 segment (Window Designer) 256 segment center (Door Designer) 240 segment center (Window Designer) 255 segment offset (Door Designer) 241 segment offset (Window Designer) 256 snap to grid, settings 83 snap to grid, turning off 84 snaps alignment 85 intersections 85 object center 85 on segment 85 on/off (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 321 segment center 85 snaps on/off (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 344, 366, 391 solid change extruded distance (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 353 change lathe angle (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 353 cut from profile (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 352 extrude from profile (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 351 sweep from profile (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 352

solids from profiles tools (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 351 spacing, baluster 194 speed tips 16 speed, fly-around 92 in Window Designer 257 speed, walk through 92 sphere center point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 324 diagonal points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 324 two points (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 324 type XYZ values (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 325 spline bezier (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 310 control point (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 310 interpolate (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 310 sketch (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 310 split view 29, 90 square footage, calculating 75 squares, drawing 216 staircases curved 138 landing 138 modify 139 open 139 resizing 196 reversing the direction 139 straight 138 staircases (deck) modifying 196 placing curved 195 placing straight 195 status bar 8 steps (deck) adding 195 changing the height 195 stiffener beams 122 changing length 122 dimensioning 122 stop rendering 94 straight edging 207 straight railing 140 straight railing (deck) 197 straight staircase 138 straight staircases (deck) 195 straighten a curved pathway 206 straighten curve in Door Designer 238 in Window Designer 253 straighten curved edging 208 stretch object (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 390 stud spacing 128 subtract objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 344, 385 sun position (real-world), customize 96 sun, time and date 96 support column material 226 support columns (framing) 224 support, technical 13 surface cap (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 353

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 2 7

Index
change angle (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 353 change extruded distance (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 353 cover (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 enclose (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 353 extruding (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 revolving (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 skin (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 surface from curves tools (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 350 survey plan 200 sweep solid from profile (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 352 switches, connector 149 symbols, 2D 34 system requirements 4 system settings 16 Training Center 12, 110 transparent fill 221 trees 36 trim 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 379 trim, remove 39, 40 troubleshooting scroll mouse 24, 82, 242, 256 trusses 226 tubs, placing 168 tutorial videos 110 Tutorial, Step-by-Step 12 tutorial, written 12 two colors on one wall 130

U
undo 10, 64 unit of measure preferences (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 289 unit of measurement 20, 72 upper floor, adding 137 USDA zone maps 37 user interface preferences (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 282

T
tabs deck plan 191 detail plan 215 electrical plan 147 floor plan 125 foundation 119 hvac 183 landscape plan 199 plumbing 165 roofing 173 technical support 13 template organizer 45 template, printing textures 104 template, RealModel wall 103 templates 145 text adding 76 alignment 76 at an angle 77 edit 77 formatting 77 texture, attaching (RealModel) 105 thermostat 152 three-point freehand roof 176 tips & tricks 10 toilets, placing 166 toolbars 8 tools, measurement 8 toolset pop-up menus 6 topography lines, show 87 touch panel screen 158 tracing (Floor Plan Trace) 79 tracing, floor plan 79 tracking, constraining (Door Designer) 238, 252 trackpad change plan tab 9 pan 25 viewing floors 24 zoom 24 zoom (Door Designer) 242 zoom (Window Designer) 256

V
vents, placing 185 verify angle 294 area 294 coordinates 294 distance 294 length 294 mass properties 294 minimum distance 294 planar properties 294 volume 294 version number 111 video projector 153 videos, tutorial 12 view 2D plan 24 3D floating 90 3D fly-around 91 in Door Designer 242 adding shadows 96 adjusting lighting 95 aerial 91 all floors 24, 82 birds eye 91 camera angle 92 controlling 89 create new 397 dynamic rotate 403 flip 397 full plan 90 layer combinations 24 navigation speed 92 pan (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 403 plan layer combinations 25, 83

4 28 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

rotate 397 save 3D 101 working floor 24, 82 workplane 397 zoom (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 402 zoom options (3D Custom Workshop Pro) 403 view (3D Custom Workshop Pro) back 396 bottom 396 front 396 isometric 396 left 396 right 396 top 396 trimetric 396 View icons 6 view, adjusting lighting in Fireplace Assistant 265 view, floating 3D 29 view, reset 3D 29 view, split 29 viewing elevations in ClearView 92 viewing, working floor 75 viewpoint angle 30 viewpoint reference 91 viewpoint, set 3D 92 views, fly-around (Fireplace Assistant) 263 views, fly-around (Window Designer) 257 virtual ruler 7 hiding 87 visibility (QuickStart) 116 volume verification 294 VRML, exporting to 59

W
wainscotting 39 walkthrough adjusting elevation 90 adjusting elevation (Fireplace Assistant) 263 speed 92 view 90 view (Fireplace Assistant) 263 wall break tool 130 wall dimensions measure from center to center 128 measure from surface to surface 128 wall height (QuickStart) 117 wall options 127 wall properties (framing) 224 wall speaker 154 wall trace deck 192 wall width 127 walls 126 defining height 127 exact length exterior 126 irregular 130 retaining 210 retaining height 211

rotating 128 walls, constructing templates (RealModel) 104 wall-spacing dimensions 86 wheel mouse zoom control 24, 82, 242, 256 width, foundation 120 window categories creating (Window Designer) 257 deleting (Window Designer) 257 renaming (Window Designer) 257 Window Designer 245 window dimensions, hiding 87, 121, 128 window display 404 window molding 39 window, 3D view 90 window, grill settings 135 windows 133 arranging 90 creating (Window Designer) 257 importing (Window Designer) 257 moving (Window Designer) 257 wireframe, render 92 working elevation, setting 68 working floor button 7 working floor, viewing 24, 75, 82 workplane symbol, display 399 workplane view 3 points 399 create new 400 dim offset objects 401 front 399 global 399 offset 399 select objects 399 set origin 399 side 399 top 399 use view 399 workspace boundary (Door Designer) 238, 252

Z
zero-offset dimension 86 zoom in 2D 24 in 3D (Custom Workshop Pro) 402 zoom factor 117, 256 zoom factor, setting 24, 82 zoom tool 24, 82 zoom, setting the factor 82, 117, 256 zoom, troubleshooting wheel mouse 24, 82, 242, 256 zooming in 2D 82

Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide 4 2 9

Index

4 30 Punch! Home Design Studio Pro Users Guide

You might also like